3BSE034679-510 C en System 800xa 5.1 Automated Installation

System 800xA Information Management
Configuration
System Version 5.1
Power and productivity

TM
for a better world
System 800xA Information Management
Configuration
System Version 5.1

NOTICE
This document contains information about one or more ABB products and may include a
description of or a reference to one or more standards that may be generally relevant to
the ABB products. The presence of any such description of a standard or reference to a
standard is not a representation that all of the ABB products referenced in this document
support all of the features of the described or referenced standard. In order to determine
the specific features supported by a particular ABB product, the reader should consult the
product specifications for the particular ABB product.
ABB may have one or more patents or pending patent applications protecting the intel-
lectual property in the ABB products described in this document.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that
may appear in this document.
In no event shall ABB be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential
damages of any nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB be
liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of any software or hard-
ware described in this document.
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written per-
mission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor used
for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license. This
product meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive 2004/108/EEC and in Low
Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC.
TRADEMARKS
All rights to copyrights, registered trademarks, and trademarks reside with their respec-
tive owners.
Copyright © 2003-2010 by ABB.

All rights reserved.
Release: June 2010

Document number: 3BUF001092-510
TABLE OF CONTENTS
About This Book

Getting Started.................................................................................................................25
Document Conventions ...................................................................................................26
Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons................................................................26
Terminology.....................................................................................................................27
Related Documentation ...................................................................................................27
Section 1 - Configuration Overview

Introduction .....................................................................................................................29
Configuration Requirements............................................................................................30
Section 2 - Verifying Services

Information Management Service Providers...................................................................33
Open Plant Explorer ........................................................................................................34
Checking Service Group/Service Provider Objects.........................................................34
Creating Service Group/Service Provider Objects ..........................................................35
History Server..................................................................................................................36
Section 3 - Configuring Softpoints

Using Softpoints ..............................................................................................................39
Softpoint Set-up Requirements........................................................................................40
Configuring Softpoints ....................................................................................................40
Adding a New Softpoint Object Type ..................................................................41
Configuring a Softpoint Object Type ...................................................................42
Adding Signal Types ............................................................................................43
How to Delete a Signal Type................................................................................45
3BUF001092-510 5
Table of Contents
Deleting a Softpoint Object Type ........................................................................ 45

Configuring Signal Properties ......................................................................................... 45
Signal Properties .................................................................................................. 46
Configuring the Overall Range ............................................................................ 46
How to Use Special Characters in the Engineering Units Tag ............................ 47
Making a Signal Controllable .............................................................................. 48
Making a Binary Signal Controllable ................................................. 48
Making Real and Integer Signals Controllable................................... 49
Configuring Authentication for Signal Types..................................... 49
Configuring Alarms and Events for Signal Types........................................................... 50
Configuring Limiters for Real and Integer Signals.............................................. 51
Configuring Alarm and Event Handling.............................................................. 53
Events ...................................................................................... 54
Alarms ...................................................................................... 55
Instantiating a Softpoint Object in the Control Structure................................................ 57
Creating One Object at a Time ............................................................................ 57
Bulk Instantiation of Softpoint Objects in the Control Structure ........................ 58
Deleting Instantiated Objects............................................................................... 60
Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties .................................................................................. 61
Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties for Binary Signals......................................... 61
Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties for Limiters................................................... 63
Adjusting Properties for Signals ..................................................................................... 64
Defining Alarm Text Groups........................................................................................... 65
Creating A New Alarm Text Group ..................................................................... 66
Deleting An Alarm Text Group ........................................................................... 68
Deploying a Softpoint Configuration .............................................................................. 68
Enabling/Disabling Warning for Changes to Object Types ............................................ 70
Name Rules ..................................................................................................................... 71
Working with Softpoints Online ..................................................................................... 71
Section 4 - Configuring Calculations

Using Calculations ...................................................................................................... 75
Calculation Aspects ............................................................................................. 77
6 3BUF001092-510
Table of Contents
User Interface .......................................................................................................77

Set-up and Administration...............................................................................................77
Configuring Global Calculations Parameters ..................................................................78
Configuring Calculations.................................................................................................80
Adding a Calculation Aspect to an Object ...........................................................80
Enabling the Calculation to be Copied to Instantiated Objects...........80
Relative Object Referencing ...............................................................80
Adding a Calculation Aspect ..............................................................81
Using the Calculation Aspect...............................................................................82
Editing the Calculation.........................................................................................82
Mapping Calculation Variables ............................................................................83
Writing VBScript .............................................................................................87
Settings.UpdateStatus...........................................................................................88
Variable Scope and Usage ....................................................................................89
Online Variables ..................................................................................89
Offline Variables .................................................................................89
Calculation Result ................................................................................................90
Variable Properties and Methods .........................................................................91
Variable Data Types and Conversion for Offline Variables .................................93
Language Extensions ...........................................................................................94
Language Restrictions ..........................................................................................94
Writing to Quality of a Data Point from a Calculation ........................................95
Writing Timestamps to Softpoint Objects and Logs ............................................96
SetLocale Function for Native Language Support ...........................................97
Tracing the Calculation Execution .......................................................................98
Tracing Calculation Variables .............................................................98
Clearing the Trace Window.................................................................98
Tool Bar .............................................................................................................99
Scheduling the Calculation ..................................................................................99
Cyclic Schedule.................................................................................100
Time-based Schedule ........................................................................101
Running the Calculation Manually ....................................................................102
3BUF001092-510 7
Table of Contents
Offline Execution.............................................................................. 102

Online Execution .............................................................................. 102
Scheduling Calculations via the Application Scheduler.................................... 102
Adding a Job and Specifying the Schedule ...................................... 103
Adding and Configuring the Calculation Action .............................. 104
Instantiating Calculation Aspects On Object Types...................................................... 105
OPC Access to Calculation Properties .......................................................................... 106
Making Bulk Changes to Instantiated Calculations ...................................................... 107
Object Referencing Guidelines ..................................................................................... 111
Absolute Referencing Guidelines ...................................................................... 111
Direct .................................................................................... 112
Structure Category ............................................................................ 113
Name .................................................................................... 114
Examples .................................................................................... 115
Relative Object Referencing Guidelines............................................................ 115
Performance Considerations for Object Referencing ........................................ 118
Using the [Direct] Keyword.............................................................. 118
Using the Structure Name................................................................. 118
Creating a Calculation as an Object Type......................................... 119
Managing Calculations.................................................................................................. 119
Reading Calculation Status Information............................................................ 120
Enabling/Disabling Calculations ....................................................................... 121
Distributing Calculations on Different Servers.................................................. 122
Performance Tracking ................................................................................................... 123
Collecting Performance Data for a Calculation Service .................................... 123
Creating the PerformanceMonitor Softpoint Object Type................ 124
Instantiating the PerformanceMonitor in the Control Structure ....... 125
Accessing the Performance Data ....................................................................... 128
Improving Performance ..................................................................................... 129
Calculations Service Recommendations and Guidelines .............................................. 131
Use Case 1 - Settings.UpdateStatus ................................................................... 131
Use Case 2 – Assignment of Output Variables .................................................. 131
8 3BUF001092-510
Table of Contents
Use Case 3 - SoftPoint Signals Show Bad Data Quality when Calculations are not
Updating Data Quality ......................................................................131
Use Case 4 – Usage of External Libraries and COM/DCOM from a Calculation
Aspect................................................................................................132
Use Case 5 – Usage of Calculations in a Redundant Configuration..................132
Use Case 6 - Calculations Service Diagnostic Messages...................................132
Section 5 - Configuring History Database

Introduction ...................................................................................................................133
Changing the Default History Database Instance..........................................................133
Dropping the Default Database Instance............................................................133
Duplicating an Existing Configuration ..............................................................135
Maintaining the Oracle Instance....................................................................................135
Tablespace Maintenance Considerations ...........................................................136
Extending Oracle Tablespace Via Instance Maintenance Wizard ......................136
Flat File Maintenance via the Instance Maintenance Wizard ............................137
Disk Usage Summary via the Instance Maintenance Wizard ............................137
Change the Default Oracle User Passwords.......................................................138
Section 6 - Configuring Log Sets

Introduction ...................................................................................................................139
Adding a Log Set...........................................................................................................140
Log Set Aspect .............................................................................................................141
Specify Log Set Operating Parameters ..............................................................142
Activate/Deactivate Logs in a Log Set ...............................................................143
Delete a Log Set .................................................................................................143
Section 7 - Alarm/Event Message Logging

Using Message Logs......................................................................................................145
Message Log Overview .................................................................................................146
Configuring Oracle Access for Message Logs...................................................147
Accessing Message Log Data ............................................................................147
Using an Alarm and Event List to Read Messages ............................................147
3BUF001092-510 9
Table of Contents
Message Log Consolidation............................................................................... 148

Offline Storage................................................................................................... 148
Checking the Connection to 800xA System Message Services ........................ 148
Configuring Message Logs ........................................................................................... 148
Adding a Message Log ...................................................................................... 149
Message Log Aspect ......................................................................................... 150
Specify Message Log Operating Parameters ..................................................... 151
Message Logging for 800xA System Alarm and Event Server ......................... 152
Message Logging for Batch Management ......................................................... 153
Message Log Attributes ..................................................................................... 154
Delete a Message Log........................................................................................ 157
Accessing a Message Log with an Alarm and Event List............................................. 158
Creating an Inform IT Event Filter ............................................................................... 166
Section 8 - Historizing Reports

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 169
Report Log Configuration Guidelines........................................................................... 169
Adding a Report Log..................................................................................................... 170
Report Log Aspect ........................................................................................................ 171
Configure Report Log Operating Parameters .................................................... 172
Delete a Report Log ........................................................................................... 173
View a Report Log ............................................................................................. 173
Section 9 - Historical Process Data Collection

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 175
Property Log Overview ................................................................................................. 176
Dual Logs .......................................................................................................... 177
Blocking and Alignment .................................................................................... 179
Calculations ....................................................................................................... 179
Data Compaction ............................................................................................... 179
Event Driven Data Collection ............................................................................ 179
Offline Storage................................................................................................... 180
Considerations for Oracle or File-based Storage ............................................... 180
10 3BUF001092-510
Table of Contents
Seamless Retrieval .............................................................................................180

Consolidation .....................................................................................................180
Configuring History Source Aspects..................................................................181
Configuring Node Assignments for Property Logs.......................................................181
Using One History Source .................................................................................182
Using Multiple History Sources.........................................................................183
Pointing History Source to History Service Group............................................184
Adding A History Source Aspect.......................................................................184
History Configuration Guidelines .................................................................................186
Data Collection and Storage Features for Optimizing Usage ............................186
Allocating Disk Space for File-based Logs .......................................................186
Configuring History Objects - Procedural Overview.........................................187
Post-configuration Requirements.......................................................................188
Building a Simple Property Log....................................................................................188
Creating a Log Template ....................................................................................189
Adding a Log Template Object in the Library Structure ..................189
Opening the Log Template Configuration View ...............................190
Adding a Trend Log ..........................................................................191
Configuring a Trend Log...................................................................191
Adding a History Log........................................................................193
Configuring a History Log ................................................................193
Configuring a Log Configuration Aspect...........................................................197
Adding a Log Configuration Aspect to an Object.............................197
Opening the Log Configuration Aspect ............................................198
Adding a Property Log for an Object Property .................................199
Reviewing the Log Configuration .....................................................201
Post-configuration Requirements......................................................202
What to Do Next ...............................................................................202
Property Log Applications ............................................................................................203
Dual Logs ...........................................................................................................203
Lab Data Logs for Asynchronous User Input ....................................................203
Event-driven Data Collection .............................................................................204
3BUF001092-510 11
Table of Contents
Create a Job .................................................................................... 205

Adding and Configuring the Data Collection Action ....................... 207
History Logs with Calculations ......................................................................... 211
Property Log Attributes................................................................................................. 212
New Log Template Attributes............................................................................ 213
Log Definition Attributes................................................................................... 214
IM Definition Attributes .................................................................................... 215
IM Data Source ................................................................................. 216
Log Set .................................................................................... 216
Archive Group................................................................................... 217
Start State .................................................................................... 217
Collection Mode ............................................................................... 217
Collection Type................................................................................. 218
IM Historian Log State ..................................................................... 218
Dual Log .................................................................................... 218
Show Log List................................................................................... 218
Data Collection Attributes ................................................................................ 219
Collection Attributes for Trend Logs................................................................. 219
Aggregate .................................................................................... 219
Storage Interval ................................................................................. 222
Storage Size .................................................................................... 222
Min and Max Capacity ..................................................................... 223
Collection Attributes for History Logs .............................................................. 223
Log Period .................................................................................... 225
Sample Interval ................................................................................. 225
Storage Interval ................................................................................. 226
Sample Blocking Rate ...................................................................... 227
Storage Type .................................................................................... 228
Entry Type .................................................................................... 228
Log Capacity .................................................................................... 228
Calculation Algorithm ...................................................................... 229
STORE AS IS Calculation................................................................ 230
12 3BUF001092-510
Table of Contents
Other Calculation Algorithms ...........................................................232

Start Time ....................................................................................233
Bad Data Quality Limit.....................................................................234
Deadband Attributes...........................................................................................234
Deadband Compaction %..................................................................237
Deadband Storage Interval ................................................................238
Estimated Period ...............................................................................238
Compaction Ratio..............................................................................238
Expected Ratio ..................................................................................238
IM Imported Tab ................................................................................................239
Data Collection Examples..................................................................................239
Example 1 - Storing Instantaneous Values, No Compaction ............240
Example 2 - Storing Instantaneous Values Using Compaction.........240
Example 3 - Storing Calculated Values.............................................242
Example 4 - Storing Calculated Values in Logs................................244
Example 5- Storing Calculated Values with Compaction .................245
File Storage vs. Oracle Tables............................................................................247
Comparison of File-based Logs ........................................................247
Time Stamp ....................................................................................248
Data Value ....................................................................................249
Status ....................................................................................249
Object Status ....................................................................................249
Disk Requirements for Oracle-based Logs .......................................249
OPC Message Log.............................................................................250
Disk Requirements for File-based Property Logs.............................250
Disk Requirements for Profile Logs..................................................251
Presentation and Status Functions .................................................................................253
Presentation ........................................................................................................253
Status ...........................................................................................................254
Data Retrieval Settings......................................................................255
Display Options.................................................................................256
Property Log Tab................................................................................................257
3BUF001092-510 13
Table of Contents
Status Light ........................................................................................................ 257

Property Log Configuration Reference ......................................................................... 258
Modifying Log Configurations .......................................................................... 258
Adding a Direct Log .......................................................................................... 258
Adding a Hierarchical Log ................................................................................ 259
Deleting an Individual Log from the Log Template .......................................... 259
Assigning a Log to a Log Set............................................................................. 259
Removing a Log from a Log Set........................................................................ 259
Assigning Logs to an Archive Group ................................................................ 260
Removing a Log from an Archive Group .......................................................... 260
Activating/Deactivating a Property Log ............................................................ 260
Bulk Configuration of Property Logs............................................................................ 262
Work Flow.......................................................................................................... 263
Dropping the Existing Database ........................................................................ 264
Initializing a New Workbook ............................................................................. 264
Creating a List of Object Properties .................................................................. 266
Assigning Log Templates .................................................................................. 274
Configuring Other Log Attributes...................................................................... 277
Generating a Load Report.................................................................................. 277
Creating the Property Logs ................................................................................ 279
Handling Error Conditions................................................................................. 280
Verifying the Update .......................................................................................... 280
Handling Not Verified Rows.............................................................................. 284
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 285
Installing Add-ins in Microsoft Excel ............................................................... 286
What To Look For When Logs Do Not Collect Data.................................................... 288
Section 10 - Profile Data Collection

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 289
Profile Historian Overview............................................................................................ 289
Profile Historian Configuration Overview .................................................................... 290
Configuring a Log Set for Profile Logs......................................................................... 291
Configuring Profile Logs............................................................................................... 291
14 3BUF001092-510
Table of Contents
Profile Log Attributes.........................................................................................293

Data Source ....................................................................................294
Log Set ....................................................................................296
Array Size ....................................................................................296
Log Period ....................................................................................297
Storage Interval .................................................................................298
Machine Position...............................................................................298
Profile Log Attributes Summary .......................................................299
Configuring Reports...........................................................................................301
Launching the Reel Report Configuration Tool ................................302
Adding a Machine to the Hierarchy ..................................................303
Saving Changes while Working ........................................................305
Specifying Signals for Reel Turn-up.................................................305
Specifying Signals for Grade Change ...............................................307
Configuring the DAYSHIFT .............................................................308
Configuring ROLLSetup ...................................................................308
Deleting Objects from the Reel Report Configuration Tool .............310
Exporting/Importing a Reel Report Configuration File .....................................311
Archiving Profile Log and Reel Report Data.....................................................311
Activating Profile Logs ......................................................................................312
Section 11 - Configuring the Archive Function

Archive Function Capabilities .......................................................................................313
Archive Media Supported..............................................................................................313
Archive Configuration ...................................................................................................314
Accessing Archived Data ..............................................................................................315
Planning for Reliable Archive Results ..........................................................................315
Archive Topics...............................................................................................................316
Archive Configuration Guidelines.................................................................................316
Example History Database .................................................................................316
Estimating How Often to Change the Archive Media........................................317
Deadband Considerations...................................................................................318
Calculation Reliability Considerations ..............................................................318
3BUF001092-510 15
Table of Contents
Media Full Indication......................................................................................... 318

Determining the Quantity and Size of Archive Groups..................................... 318
Summary of Results for Other Log Configurations........................................... 320
Configure Archiving .......................................................................................... 320
Configuring Archive Devices........................................................................................ 321
Adding an Archive Device................................................................................. 322
Archive Device Aspect ..................................................................................... 324
Guidelines .................................................................................... 325
Device Type .................................................................................... 325
Archive Path .................................................................................... 326
Device Behavior and Overwrite Timeout ......................................... 326
Configuring Volumes ........................................................................ 327
Configuring Archive Backup ............................................................ 329
Disk Utilization Alarms .................................................................... 330
Activate/Deactivate an Archive Device ............................................................. 331
Configuring Archive Groups......................................................................................... 331
Adding an Archive Group.................................................................................. 331
Archive Group Aspect ...................................................................................... 333
Adding and Configuring an Archive Group ..................................... 334
Adding Entries to Archive Groups.................................................... 335
Adding Entries for Platform Objects ................................................ 338
Adjusting Archive Group Configurations......................................... 341
Setting Up the Archive Schedule for an Archive Group.................................... 342
Adding a Job and Specifying the Schedule ...................................... 343
Adding and Configuring the Archive Action.................................... 344
Aligning Staggered Time Stamps ..................................................... 347
Delete/Create Archive Logs using Maintenance Button.................................... 348
Adding a Read-Only Volume for a Mapped Network Drive......................................... 349
PDL Archive Configuration .......................................................................................... 350
Archive and Delete Modes................................................................................. 351
Archive Delay .................................................................................................... 353
Delete Delay ...................................................................................................... 353
Archive Device................................................................................................... 353
16 3BUF001092-510
Table of Contents
Section 12 - Consolidating Historical Data

Introduction ...................................................................................................................355
Consolidating Batch PDL Data with History Associations...........................................355
Consolidating Historical Process Data ..........................................................................356
Importing Remote Log Configurations ..............................................................357
Launching the History Access Importer Tool ...................................357
Reading the Remote Log Configurations..........................................357
Assigning Objects to the Imported Tags ...........................................359
Making Adjustments for Tags ...........................................................362
Creating the Object/Tag Associations ...............................................366
Specifying the Service Group and Other Miscellaneous
Parameters ..................................................................368
Collecting Historical Data from Remote History Servers..................................373
Determining the Storage Rate ...........................................................373
Creating a New Log Template...........................................................374
Using the Bulk Import Tool to Instantiate the Property Logs ...........376
Additional ItemID Changes for Dual Logs .......................................378
Selecting the Log Template Configuration .......................................380
Collecting from TTD Logs.................................................................................382
Creating a New Log Template...........................................................383
Using the Bulk Import Tool to Instantiate the Property Logs ...........385
Consolidating Message Logs and PDLs ....................................................................389
Setting Up the Schedule .....................................................................................390
Adding a Job and Specifying the Schedule.......................................390
Adding and Configuring the Archive Action ....................................392
Using the Plug-in for IM Consolidation.............................................................392
Section 13 - History Database Maintenance

Overview........................................................................................................................395
Accessing History Applications ....................................................................................396
Integrating History into the 800xA System Platform....................................................396
Backup and Restore .......................................................................................................396
Considerations....................................................................................................397
3BUF001092-510 17
Table of Contents
Backup and Restore Utility................................................................................ 397

Backing Up the History Database...................................................................... 398
How Backup Works .......................................................................... 398
Node Types .................................................................................... 399
ABB Process Administration Service (PAS) .................................... 400
Cleaning the History Database ......................................................... 400
Information Management History Backup and Restore Utility........ 400
Saving Other Information Management Related Files ..................... 404
Restoring the History Database from Backup Files........................................... 405
How Restore Works .......................................................................... 405
Restoring a History Database ........................................................... 406
Synchronizing the Aspect Directory with the History Database ....................... 412
Adjusting Service Group Mapping .................................................................... 417
Specifying Additional hsBAR Options.............................................................. 419
Running hsBAR ................................................................................................. 420
hsBAR Explanations and Examples .................................................................. 421
Operation Mode ................................................................................ 421
Storage .................................................................................... 421
Compression Level / Ratio................................................................ 421
Log File .................................................................................... 422
Mount Point .................................................................................... 422
Moving hsBAR Files to a Different Data Drive Configuration ........ 423
Excluding Flat Files on Backup........................................................ 424
Viewing the Contents of the Zipped Archive.................................... 424
Getting Help with hsBAR ................................................................. 424
Starting and Stopping History ....................................................................................... 424
Schedule History Backups ............................................................................................ 425
Starting and Stopping Data Collection.......................................................................... 426
Activating/Deactivating a Property Log ............................................................ 426
Activating Logs with Log Sets........................................................................... 428
Viewing Log Runtime Status and Configuration .......................................................... 429
Filtering the Log List and Visible Columns....................................................... 431
18 3BUF001092-510
Table of Contents
Showing/Hiding Columns .................................................................432

Filtering the Log List ........................................................................432
Filter Example...................................................................................432
Activating/Deactivating Logs.............................................................................433
Presentation and Status Functions .................................................................................434
Presentation ........................................................................................................434
Status ...........................................................................................................436
Data Retrieval Settings......................................................................436
Display Options.................................................................................437
Property Log Tab................................................................................................438
Status Light ........................................................................................................439
History Control Aspect..................................................................................................440
PAS Control........................................................................................................440
Synchronization..................................................................................................440
User Tag Management Status.............................................................................441
OMF Network Status .........................................................................................441
Database Maintenance Functions ..................................................................................442
Using the hsDBMaint Menu ..............................................................................443
Online Database Maintenance Functions..........................................443
Offline Database Maintenance Functions .........................................445
Database Free Space Report...............................................................................446
Entry Tables Report............................................................................................448
Running Entry Tables Report from the Command Prompt...............448
Running Entry Tables Report from the hsDBMaint Menu ...............449
Update Deadband Ratio Online .........................................................................450
Extend Tablespace for Oracle-based History Files ............................................451
Extending Tablespace via the hsDBMaint Menu ..............................452
Extending Temporary Tablespace ......................................................................453
Managing Rollback Segments (Oracle UNDO Rollback) .................................454
Directory Maintenance for File-based Logs ......................................................454
Directory Maintenance Overview .....................................................455
Using the Directory Maintenance Functions from the Menu............456
3BUF001092-510 19
Table of Contents
Add a Directory ................................................................................ 456

Update Directory List ....................................................................... 456
Delete From Directory List............................................................... 457
List the Directory .............................................................................. 457
Reset Object Status States.................................................................................. 457
Cascade Attributes for Composite Logs ............................................................ 458
Stagger Collection and Storage.......................................................................... 459
Stagger .................................................................................... 459
Phasing .................................................................................... 460
How to Use the Stagger Collection Function ................................... 460
Using the Default Values .................................................................. 462
Other Considerations ........................................................................ 462
Changing the Default Values ............................................................ 463
PDL Maintenance Functions ............................................................................. 465
Create/Drop User Indexes.................................................................................. 465
Dropping an Index ............................................................................ 466
Creating an Index.............................................................................. 466
Create or Drop Oracle Instance ......................................................................... 467
Create or Drop a Product Database.................................................................... 468
Clean History Database ..................................................................................... 469
Restore or Initialize History Logs...................................................................... 469
Purge History Data............................................................................................. 470
History Resource Considerations .................................................................................. 471
Resource Requirements Related to History Configuration................................ 472
CPU .................................................................................... 472
Disk Space .................................................................................... 472
Random Access Memory (RAM) ..................................................... 472
Resource Requirements for User Applications.................................................. 473
Expanding dB Block Buffer Space .................................................................... 473
Determining Resource Usage for Your Application .......................................... 475
Temporary File Disk Space for History ............................................................. 478
Environment Variables .................................................................................................. 478
20 3BUF001092-510
Table of Contents
Linking Information Management History with the 800xA System Trend Function ...480
Integrating System Message and History Servers .........................................................482
Section 14 - Open Data Access

Overview........................................................................................................................485
ODA Architecture..........................................................................................................487
Default Set-up ....................................................................................................488
What to Do ....................................................................................................................488
Configuring Real-time Data Access Via the ODA Server.............................................489
Creating ODA Table Definitions........................................................................493
ODA Table Definition View..............................................................494
Table Name ....................................................................................495
Filtering the Property List .................................................................495
Selecting Properties...........................................................................499
Configuring Selected Properties........................................................500
Navigation and Configuration Tips ...................................................502
Using the Description Property .........................................................502
Creating a Database Object ................................................................................504
Database Definition View .................................................................505
Fixing Databases with Duplicate Table Names.................................507
Setting Up the ODA Database.......................................................................................508
Remote Client Set-up ........................................................................511
Logging Status Information for Numericlog Queries ...................................................515
Section 15 - Configuring Data Providers

Data Provider Applications ...........................................................................................517
Overview of Data Provider Functionality......................................................................520
How the Service Provider - Data Provider Architecture Works.........................521
Uniquely Identifying and Referencing Data Providers ......................................522
Data Service Supervision Configuration Dialog................................................524
Enabling Write Access ..................................................................................................527
Configuring User Preferences for Write Access ................................................527
General Procedures........................................................................................................529
3BUF001092-510 21
Table of Contents
Adding a Data Provider ..................................................................................... 529

Copying an Existing Data Provider ................................................................... 529
Adding a Remote Data Provider ........................................................................ 531
Example 1 - Remote Computer Has Display Services ..................... 532
Example 2 - Remote Computer DOES NOT Have
Display Services......................................................... 533
Adding a New Data Provider from Scratch ....................................................... 533
Editing Data Provider Configuration Files ........................................................ 536
ReturnAllErrors Argument ............................................................... 543
ADO Data Provider for Oracle Access.............................................................. 548
Starting and Stopping Providers ........................................................................ 549
Deleting a Data Provider.................................................................................... 549
Adding Arguments to a Data Provider............................................................... 550
Checking Display Server Status .................................................................................... 550
Section 16 - Authentication
Usage within Information Management........................................................................ 553
Configuring Authentication........................................................................................... 554
Configuring Authentication for Aspects Related to Softpoint Configuration............... 558
Section 17 - System Administration

Overview ....................................................................................................................... 561
Configuring OMF Shared Memory............................................................................... 562
Start-up and Shutdown .................................................................................................. 562
PAS Window ...................................................................................................... 563
Starting and Stopping All Processes .................................................................. 564
Advanced Functions........................................................................................... 565
Stopping Oracle ................................................................................................. 567
Managing Users ............................................................................................................ 569
Windows Users and Groups for Information Management ............................... 570
HistoryAdmin Group ........................................................................ 571
User for 800xA System Service Account ......................................... 571
ORA_DBA Group ............................................................................ 571
22 3BUF001092-510
Table of Contents
Oracle Users .......................................................................................................572

Securing the System ...........................................................................................572
Changing Passwords for Oracle Users ..............................................573
PAS OperatorList ...............................................................................................574
Managing Users for Display Services ...........................................................................575
Creating New Users ...........................................................................................576
Creating User Passwords....................................................................................578
Create User Password........................................................................578
Associate New Password with a Specific User .................................578
Configuring User Preferences ............................................................................579
Customizing Language Translations ..................................................................585
Checking Display Server Status ....................................................................................587
Software Version Information .......................................................................................589
Disk Maintenance - Defragmenting ..............................................................................589
Appendix A - Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP

Requirements .................................................................................................................591
Example Applications ...................................................................................................591
OMF TCP/IP Domain with Multicast Communication .....................................591
OMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point and Multicast..................................593
OMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point Exclusively.....................................597
Configuring TCP/IP Protocol ........................................................................................599
Configuring OMF for TCP/IP .......................................................................................599
Configuring OMF Socket Communication Parameters .....................................602
Example Changing the Socket Configuration ....................................................604
OMF Shared Memory Size............................................................................................607
Shutdown Delay ............................................................................................................608
Appendix B - General Log Property Limits

Introduction ...................................................................................................................609
3BUF001092-510 23
Table of Contents
Appendix C - Open Source Code Information

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 611
cygwin ........................................................................................................................... 611
mkisofs .......................................................................................................................... 611
INDEX
24 3BUF001092-510
About This Book
Getting Started
This book provides instructions for configuring Information Management
functionality for the 800xA System. This includes:
• Data access via data providers and Open Data Access.
• Softpoint Services.
• Calculations.
• History Services for:
– Logging numeric (process) data collected from object properties.
– Logging alarms/events.
– Storing completed reports executed via the application scheduler.
– Archival of the aforementioned historical data.
– Consolidation of message, PDL, and property logs.
All Information Management consolidation functionality is limited to 800xA 5.1
to 800xA 5.1Systems.
These Information Management functions comprise a repository of process, event
and production information, and provide a single interface for all data in the system.
This book is intended for application engineers who are responsible for configuring
and maintaining these applications. This book is not the sole source of instruction
for this functionality. It is recommended that you attend the applicable training
courses offered by ABB.
3BUF001092-510 25
Document Conventions About This Book
Document Conventions
Microsoft Windows conventions are normally used for the standard presentation of
material when entering text, key sequences, prompts, messages, menu items, screen
elements, etc.
Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons

This publication includes Warning, Caution, and Information where appropriate
to point out safety related or other important information. It also includes Tip to
point out useful hints to the reader. The corresponding symbols should be
interpreted as follows:
Electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
electrical shock.
Warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal
injury.
Caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept

discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which could
result in corruption of software or damage to equipment/property.
Information icon alerts the reader to pertinent facts and conditions.
Tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to
use a certain function
Although Warning hazards are related to personal injury, and Caution hazards are
associated with equipment or property damage, it should be understood that
operation of damaged equipment could, under certain operational conditions, result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore,
fully comply with all Warning and Caution notices.
26 3BUF001092-510
About This Book Terminology
Terminology
A complete and comprehensive list of terms is included in System 800xA System
Guide Functional Description (3BSE038018*). The listing included in Functional
Description includes terms and definitions as they that apply to the 800xA system
where the usage is different from commonly accepted industry standard definitions
and definitions given in standard dictionaries such as Webster’s Dictionary of
Computer Terms.
Related Documentation
A complete list of all documents applicable to the 800xA System is provided in
System 800xA Released User Documents (3BUA000263*). This document lists
applicable Release Notes and User Instructions. It is provided in PDF format and is
included on the Release Notes/Documentation media provided with your system.
Released User Documents are updated with each release and a new file is provided
that contains all user documents applicable for that release with their applicable
document number. Whenever a reference to a specific instruction is made, the
instruction number is included in the reference.
3BUF001092-510 27
Related Documentation About This Book
28 3BUF001092-510
Section 1 Configuration Overview
Introduction
Information Management applications comprise a repository of process, event and
production information. Information Management functionality includes:
• History Services for collection, online and offline storage, consolidation, and
retrieval for process/lab data, alarms/events, and reports.
to 800xA 5.1 Systems.
• Real-time Database Services for access to real-time process data from AC
800M controllers, and other ABB and third-party control systems when the
applicable connectivity components are installed. Real-time database services
also support the configuration of softpoints to hold application-generated data
not directly connected to any process. Softpoints are accessible by all other
functions in the system. Calculation Services is used to apply calculations to
other objects in the system, including both process and softpoint objects.
• Display and Client Services includes the following desktop client applications
for data access: DataDirect (for Excel Data Access refer to Installing Add-ins
in Microsoft Excel on page 286), Display Services, and Desktop Trends. These
desktop tools may run directly on the Information Management server, or on
remote computer clients. The Information Management server also supports
data access by third-party applications such as Crystal Reports when Open
Data Access is installed.
• Application Scheduler. This supports scheduling and execution of jobs
implemented as system plug-ins. This includes:
– Reports created with DataDirect, or a third-party report building package
such as Crystal Reports.
3BUF001092-510 29
Configuration Requirements Section 1 Configuration Overview
– Consolidation of Production Data and Message logs.

– Event-driven collection for process and lab data (property) logs.
– Calculations created via the Calculation Services.
Configuration Requirements
The following points briefly describe the configuration requirements and work flow
for the Information Management functions.
• Service Providers
The following Information Management functions are managed by service
providers in the 800xA system: History, Archive, Calculations, Softpoints,
Scheduling, and Open Data Access Services. Verify all service providers are
properly installed and enabled before using the Information Management
functions. This is described in Section 2, Verifying Services.
• Configuring Data Access
There are two methods by which client applications access data from the
800xA system. The Information Management Display and Client Services use
the data providers supplied with ABB Data Services. Third-party tools such as
Crystal Reports, and Microsoft Excel (without DataDirect plug-ins), use the
ODA server. To configure data providers, refer to Section 15, Configuring Data
Providers. To configure Open Data Access, refer to Section 14, Open Data
Access.
• Softpoint Configuration
SoftPoint Services is used to configure and use internal process variables not
connected to an external physical process signal. To configure softpoints, refer
to Section 3, Configuring Softpoints.
• Calculations Configuration
Calculations Services is used to configure and schedule calculations that are
applied to real-time database objects, including both softpoints and actual
process points. To configure calculations, refer to Section 4, Configuring
Calculations.
30 3BUF001092-510
Section 1 Configuration Overview Configuration Requirements
• History Configuration
History Services database configuration requires a History database instance.
The default instance is sized to meet the requirements of most History
applications. It may be necessary to drop the default instance and create a new
larger instance depending on performance requirements. Refer to Section 5,
Configuring History Database. Once the Oracle database instance is created,
use the following procedures to configure historical data collection, storage,
and archival for the system:
– Configuring Property Logs
Process data collection refers to the collection and storage of data from
aspect object properties. This includes live process data, softpoint data,
and lab data (programmatically generated, or manually entered). The
objects that perform process data collection and storage are called
property logs. Process data collection may be implemented on two levels
in the 800xA system. The standard system offering supports short-term
data storage with trend logs. When Information Management History
Server is installed, long-term storage and permanent offline storage
(archive) is supported with history logs. For instructions on how to
integrate and configure trend and history logs, refer to Section 9,
Historical Process Data Collection.
– Alarm/Event Message Logging
All alarm and event messages for the 800xA system, including Audit Trail
messages, are collected and stored by the 800xA System Message Server.
This provides a short-term storage facility with the capacity to store up to
50,000 messages. If the system has Information Management History
Server installed, the messages stored by 800xA System Message Server
may be forwarded to a message log for extended online storage. This
message log can store up to 12 million messages. Refer to Section 7,
Alarm/Event Message Logging.
– Archive Configuration
The archive function supports permanent offline storage for historical data
collected in property, message, and report logs, as well as the 800xA
System alarm/event message buffer. When a history log becomes full, the
oldest entries are replaced by new entries, or deleted. Archiving copies the
contents of selected logs to a designated archive media. For instructions on
3BUF001092-510 31
Configuration Requirements Section 1 Configuration Overview
configuring archiving refer to Section 11, Configuring the Archive

Function.
– Configuring Log Sets
Log sets allow one command to start or stop data collection for a number
of property, message, or report logs simultaneously. For instructions on
configuring log sets, refer to Section 6, Configuring Log Sets.
– Configuring Report Logs
Report logs hold the finished output from reports scheduled and executed
via the Application Scheduler and the Report action plug-in. Completed
reports may also be stored as completed report objects in the Scheduling
structure. In either case the Report action must be configured to send the
report to a report log, or a completed report object. This is described in the
section on creating reports in System 800xA Information Management
Data Access and Reports (3BUF001094*). For instructions on configuring
the report log to store finished reports, refer to Section 8, Historizing
Reports.
– Consolidating Historical Data
Historical process data, alarm/event data, and production data from remote
history servers can be consolidated on a dedicated consolidation node. For
instructions on consolidating historical data, refer to Section 12,
Consolidating Historical Data.
– History Database Management
The History Services database may require some configuration and
management, before, during, and after configuration of History Services.
For example, it may be necessary to drop and then re-create the history
database, allocate disk space for storage of historical data, or stagger data
collection for property logs to optimize performance. These and other
history administration procedures are described in Section 13, History
Database Maintenance.
32 3BUF001092-510
Section 2 Verifying Services
Information Management Service Providers

The following Information Management functions are managed by service
providers in the 800xA system:
• History.
• Archive.
• Calculations.
• Softpoints.
• Scheduling.
The Service Provider represents the service running on a specific node. For
example, if Calculation Services is running on more than one node, then a
Calculation Service Provider is required for each server where it will run.
Service Providers are located under their respective service categories in the Service
structure. Service Providers are contained within Services Groups. For some 800xA
services, the Service Group structure supports redundancy by hosting redundant
Service Providers. The only Information Management services that support
redundancy are Softpoints and Calculations.
The service group/service provider objects for History, Archive, Calculations
Application Scheduler, and Open Data Access are automatically created for their
respective Information Management servers when the Process Administration
Service (PAS) is initialized during the post installation set-up for the Information
Management server.
Calculations and Application Scheduler may also be installed and run on other types
of server nodes in the 800xA system (not Information Management servers). In this
case, the service group/service provider objects for those services must be created
manually for each of those non-Information Management servers. This procedure is
described in this section.
3BUF001092-510 33
Open Plant Explorer Section 2 Verifying Services
For Softpoint Server, the service group/service provider object are created when a
Softpoint Generic Control Network object is created in the Control structure. Other
softpoint server set-up is also required. This is described in Softpoint Set-up
Requirements on page 40.
All procedures related to service group/service provider objects are done via the
Plant Explorer. The remainder of this section describes how to open the Plant
Explorer workplace, how to verify that these objects exist, create the objects if
necessary, and enable/disable a service provider.
Open Plant Explorer

Most configuration procedures described in this book are done using the Plant
Explorer workplace. To start the Plant Explorer workplace:
1. From the Windows task bar, choose: Start>Programs>ABB Industrial IT
800xA>System>Workplace.
2. Select a System and then select the Plant Explorer Workplace from the list of
available workplaces.
Checking Service Group/Service Provider Objects

Service Group/Service Provider objects are located under their respective Service
containers in the Service structure. One Service Group/Service Provider set is
required for each node where that service will run, Figure 1. Additional
considerations for the History server are provided in History Server on page 36.
Figure 1. Example, Service Group/Service Provider Objects
34 3BUF001092-510
Section 2 Verifying Services Creating Service Group/Service Provider Objects
After restoring a system containing IM logs a check should be done that the
Service Group isn’t missing for the IM log in Log Configuration. If the Service
Group is missing a new group has to be configured.
Creating Service Group/Service Provider Objects

To create service group and service provider objects for a node:
1. Create the service group object under the applicable service container in the
Service structure for example, Calculation Server.
a. Select the service container (Calculation Server, Service) and choose New
Object from the context menu.
b. Assign a name to the new Service Group object. Typically, the name is
based on the node name, for example IM_ROC78. Click Create.
2. Create the service provider object under the new service group object.
a. Select the new Service Group object (for example, IM_ROC78, Service
Group) and choose New Object from the context menu.
b. Assign a name to the new Service Provider object. Typically, the name is
based on the node name, for example IM_ROC78. Click Create.
3. Configure the service provider object to point to the node where the service (in
this case Calculations) must run (reference Figure 2).
a. Select the Service Provider object in the object browser.
b. Select the Service Provider Definition aspect from the object’s aspect list.
c. Select the Configuration tab.
d. Use the Node pull-down list to select the node where the service will run.
e. Check the Enabled check box.
f. Click Apply.
3BUF001092-510 35
History Server Section 2 Verifying Services
Figure 2. Configuring a Calculation Service Provider
History Server
History is installed in two parts: the operator trend functionality which is installed as
standard and the Information Management History Server which is optional. Both
functions are implemented as services in the Service Structure. The service
categories are Basic History, Service, and Inform IT History, Service
respectively.
Both of these service categories require a Service Group/Service Provider set for
each node where the Information Management History Server runs. The Service
Provider represents the service running on a specific node. An example is shown in
Figure 3. The Service Group structure is intended to support redundancy for certain
services (for instance Connectivity Servers). Redundancy is not supported for
Information Management History Server, so there is always a one-to-one
correspondence between the History Service Group and its History Service
Provider.
36 3BUF001092-510
Section 2 Verifying Services History Server
Figure 3. Basic and Information Management History Service Category
A Service Group/Service Provider set is automatically created in the Service

Structure for the node when PAS is initialized during post installation.
If a service group/service provider object set needs to be created, use the prefix
Inform IT History followed by a unique name, for example, Inform IT
History_Basic_eng62, when specifying the name for the Information
Management History Service Provider.
Inform IT History Service Providers are also represented in the Node
Administration structure under their respective nodes. This is illustrated in Figure 4.
In the Node Administration structure, the History Service Provider marks the
location of the aspect objects related to History configuration. The
InformIT History Object under the History Service Provider is a container for
history object groups - one group for each kind of History object: Log Sets,
Message Logs, Report Logs, and so on. Archive objects are located under the
Archive Service. The History objects must be instantiated under the applicable
group. For example, message log objects are instantiated under the Message Logs
group.
3BUF001092-510 37
History Server Section 2 Verifying Services
Information Manager Node

in the Node Administration Structure
Location in Node Administration

Structure for History Objects
Figure 4. Adding a Message Log in the Node Administration Structure
38 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Using Softpoints
SoftPoint Services is used to configure and use internal process variables not
connected to an external physical process signal. Once configured, the softpoints
may be accessed by other 800xA system applications as if they were actual process
points. For example, softpoint values may be stored in property logs in History
Services. Reporting packages such as Crystal Reports may access softpoints for
presentation in reports. Desktop tools such as Desktop Trends and DataDirect can
read from and write to softpoints.
Softpoint alarms can be configured and are directly integrated with system alarms
and events. Engineering unit definitions for softpoints include minimum/maximum
limits and a unit descriptor.
SoftPoint Services can be configured as redundant on a non-redundant Information
Manager Server pair or on a redundant connectivity server. For greatest efficiency
between Calculations and Softpoints, put the primary Calculation Server on the
same machine as the primary Softpoint Server.
The Softpoint Services software may run on multiple servers. Each softpoint server
can have up to 2500 softpoint objects. Each softpoint object can have up to 100
signals; however, the total number of signals per server cannot exceed 25,000.
Data types supported are: Boolean, integer (32bit), single precision floating point
(32 bit) and string. Also, double precision floating point (64 bit) is supported as an
extended data type.
The softpoint object types specify the signal properties for the softpoint objects.
This includes signal ranges for real and integer signals, alarm limits, event triggers,
and whether or not the signals will be controllable. The process objects inherit the
properties of the object types from which they are instantiated.
3BUF001092-510 39
Softpoint Set-up Requirements Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Softpoint Set-up Requirements

Softpoints are instantiated in the Control Structure under a Softpoint Generic
Control Network object. This object establishes the connection with a specific
softpoint server. Configuration of the Softpoint Generic Control Network and
related objects is completed as a post installation procedure and should already be
done. This will automatically configure the following:
• softpoint service group object and service provider object(s).
• virtual control network by which other system applications (History, desktop
applications and so on) can access the softpoint data on that node.
• Source Definition aspect for each network. This is used to deploy the softpoints
on their respective nodes.
• integrates the softpoint alarm and event messages into the 800xA system
message service.
To support historical data collection for softpoints, create at least one History
Source object under the Softpoint Generic Control Network object in the Control
structure. Instructions for adding History Source objects are provided in
Configuring Node Assignments for Property Logs on page 181.
Configuring Softpoints
Configure softpoints via the Plant Explorer. Softpoint objects are instantiated as
actual process objects in the Control Structure. They are instantiated from the
softpoint object type templates configured in the Object Type Structure. Softpoint
objects must be created in the Control structure as sub-objects of the Softpoints
container for the applicable Softpoint Generic Control Network. Once created, these
objects can be inserted into other structures, for example the Functional structure.
• Creating a softpoint object adds a signal of each signal type in the softpoint
object type.
• Softpoint objects cannot be copied, cut, pasted, moved or renamed.
Deleting an object deletes all included signals.
• When dragging an input/output from a softpoint property (in a softpoint
object type) to a Calculation aspect, the selected information is not correct
and needs to be edited. This is not a problem when dragging an input/output
from an instantiated softpoint object. Use relative naming in this case.
40 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Adding a New Softpoint Object Type
Some softpoint properties are configured on an individual basis for instantiated

softpoint objects in the Control structure. For example the event text associated with
limiter trip points is configured for real and integer signal types.
Further, most of the default settings configured in the softpoint object types may be
adjusted on an individual basis for softpoint objects in the Control structure.
When creating new softpoint objects, or making changes to existing softpoint
objects, the new configuration will not go into effect until the changes are deployed.
When changes are applied to a softpoint object type, those changes are
propagated to all softpoint objects that have been instantiated from that object
type. A warning message is generated any time a change is applied to a softpoint
object type, even if there are no instantiated objects for that type. Disable this
warning message while configuring softpoint object types, and enable it only
after the softpoint configuration has been deployed. To enable/disable this
warning message, refer to Enabling/Disabling Warning for Changes to Object
Types on page 70.
The basic procedures covered in this section are:
• Adding a New Softpoint Object Type on page 41.
• Configuring a Softpoint Object Type on page 42.
• Adding Signal Types on page 43.
• Deleting a Softpoint Object Type on page 45.
• Configuring Signal Properties on page 45.
• Configuring Alarms and Events for Signal Types on page 50.
• Instantiating a Softpoint Object in the Control Structure on page 57.
• Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties on page 61.
• Adjusting Properties for Signals on page 64.
• Defining Alarm Text Groups on page 65.
• Deploying a Softpoint Configuration on page 68.
• Name Rules on page 71.
Adding a New Softpoint Object Type

Create softpoint object types in the Object Type structure. These object types will be
used as templates for instantiating actual softpoint objects in the Control structure.
To add a new softpoint object type:
1. In the Plant Explorer, open the Object Type Structure
3BUF001092-510 41
Configuring a Softpoint Object Type Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
2. Select the Softpoint Object Types group and choose New Object from the
context menu.
3. In the New Object dialog, assign a name to the new object, then click Create.
This adds the new object type to the Softpoint Object Type group, Figure 5.
Figure 5. New Object Type Added
Configuring a Softpoint Object Type

Softpoint object types are configured via the Process Object Configuration aspect.
This aspect is used to add signal types for the softpoint object type.
To display the configuration view for this aspect,
1. Select the new softpoint object type in the Object browser (left hand pane).
2. Then click on the Process Object Configuration aspect in the right hand pane,
Figure 6.
42 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Adding Signal Types
2) Process Object
1) New Object Type Selected 3) Configuration View
Configuration Aspect Selected
Figure 6. Configuring the New Object Type
Adding Signal Types

Softpoint signals are specified through signal types. For example, a pump may
require a binary signal to represent the pump’s state and a real signal to represent the
pump speed. A maximum of 128 signal types can be added to a softpoint object
type. The available signal types are listed in Table 1.
Table 1. Signal Types
Signal Type Object Type structure icon

Binary
Integer
3BUF001092-510 43
Adding Signal Types Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Table 1. Signal Types
Real
String
Signals must be added and deleted in the Object Type structure. Signals can not
be added or deleted directly on softpoint objects in the Control structure. Do not
copy, cut, paste, move or rename signal types. When a signal type is added to a
softpoint object type, a signal of this signal type is added to all softpoint objects
based on the softpoint object type. Deleting a signal type deletes all signals of
this type.
The Add Signal buttons are located in the upper left part of the Softpoint Process
Object Configuration aspect, Figure 7.
Binary
String
Integer Real
Figure 7. Add Signal Buttons
For example, to add a real signal type,

1. Click the Real Signal button. This displays the New Real Signal Type dialog.
2. Enter a logical name, for example RPM.
3. Click OK.
4. Repeat this procedure to add more signal types as required (up to 128 total).
Expand the object type’s branch to refer to the added signal types, Figure 8.
44 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints How to Delete a Signal Type
Figure 8. Signals Added
How to Delete a Signal Type

Deleting a signal type deletes all signals of this signal type from all softpoint objects
instantiated from the object type. To delete a signal type:
1. Select the signal type from the Object Type structure.
2. Press the Delete key on the keyboard or right-click the object type and select
Delete from the context menu.
Deleting a Softpoint Object Type

Softpoint object types cannot be deleted once they have created objects based on
that specific type. Deleting a softpoint object type deletes all included signal
types.
To delete a softpoint object type:
1. Select the Object Type from the Object Type structure.
2. Press the Delete key on the keyboard or right-click the object type and select
Delete from the context menu.
Configuring Signal Properties

Signal properties are configured via the Signal Configuration aspect, Figure 9.
3BUF001092-510 45
Signal Properties Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Signal Type Selected Signal Configuration Aspect Selected
Figure 9. Displaying the Signal Configuration Aspect
Signal Properties
The following signal properties may be configured:
• Real and integer signal types can have an overall range. Refer to Configuring
the Overall Range on page 46.
• Real, integer, and binary signal types can be made controllable. Refer to
Making a Signal Controllable on page 48.
• Authentication can be configured for all signal types. Refer to Configuring
Authentication for Signal Types on page 49.
Configuring the Overall Range

The overall range sets the absolute high and low limits for the signal. The default
range is 0 to 100. To change these values:
46 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints How to Use Special Characters in the Engineering Units Tag
1. Select the real or integer signal type from the Object Type structure.
2. Select the Signal Configuration aspect.
3. Select the Range tab, Figure 10.
Figure 10. Real Signal - Range Tab
4. Enter low and high limit values in their respective fields.

5. Enter the engineering unit label. This can be up to 12 ASCII characters. Use the
Character Map to include special characters. Refer to How to Use Special
Characters in the Engineering Units Tag.
6. Specify precision for the signal as Single (32-bit) or Double (64-bit).
7. Click Apply when done.
How to Use Special Characters in the Engineering Units Tag

To select special characters for the engineering unit.
1. Click Character map. This displays the Character map dialog, Figure 11.
3BUF001092-510 47
Making a Signal Controllable Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Figure 11. Character Map
2. Select a character.
3. Click OK. The Character map dialog box will be closed and the character
added to the engineering unit.
4. Repeat step 1-3 to select additional characters.
5. Click Apply.
Making a Signal Controllable

Signals are NOT controllable by default. Signals must be made controllable to allow
operators to manipulate the value, or to get external applications, including
Calculations, to manipulate the value. For real and integer signal types, a control
range can be specified. The control range sets boundaries within the overall range
within which the signal value may be adjusted.
Refer to the applicable procedure depending on the signal type:
• Making a Binary Signal Controllable on page 48.
• Making Real and Integer Signals Controllable on page 49.
Making a Binary Signal Controllable

To make the binary signal controllable:
1. Select the binary signal type in the Object Type structure.
2. Select the Signal Configuration aspect.
3. Select the Controllable tab.
48 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Making a Signal Controllable
4. Check the Is Controllable check box.

5. Specify whether or not to Log operator actions.
Log operator actions applies to changes caused by external applications such as
calculations as well as operator actions. Therefore, do not check this box unless
log changes caused by these applications are required.
Making Real and Integer Signals Controllable

A real or integer signal that is controllable can also have a control range. The control
range sets boundaries within the overall range within which the signal value may be
adjusted. To make a real or integer signal controllable:
1. Select the signal type in the Object Type structure.
2. Click the Controllable tab Signal Configuration aspect.
3. Click the Is Controllable check box. This enables the Advanced button.
4. Click Advanced to display the dialog for setting the operator’s control range.
Check the Control Limits check box and enter Low and High limits,
Figure 12. These limits must be within the overall signal range (refer to
Configuring the Overall Range on page 46).
Figure 12. Setting the Control Range
Configuring Authentication for Signal Types

Configure authentication for softpoint signal types to help meet FDA 21CFR part
11 requirements. Authentication defines how many users must be approved (by
entering their user name and password) before an operation can proceed, for
example changing a signal value. Authentication may be set to one of three levels:
3BUF001092-510 49
Configuring Alarms and Events for Signal Types Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
None (no users) Reauthentication (one user), and Double authentication (two
users). The default is not to require authentication.
Authentication for softpoint signal types is configured on an individual basis for
each signal property. Instantiated signals inherit authentication from their respective
softpoint object types. Authentication may be changed for instantiated signals in the
Control structure.
To configure authentication for a softpoint signal type, Figure 13:
1. Click the Property Permissions tab on the Signal Configuration aspect.
2. Select the Property from the property list.
3. Select the Authentication Level from the pull-down list and click Apply.
Selected property
Pull-down list for selecting

authentication level
Figure 13. Configuring Authentication for a Softpoint Signal
Configuring Alarms and Events for Signal Types

Real and integer signals can have up to four trip points (called limiters) within the
signal’s overall range. This is done via the real or integer signal type’s Alarm Event
50 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Configuring Limiters for Real and Integer Signals
Configuration aspect. The procedure is described in Configuring Limiters for Real

and Integer Signals on page 51.
Trip points must occur within the signal range and should be configured
BEFORE adding the limiters. Refer to Configuring the Overall Range on page
46.
Binary signals, and limiters for real and integer signals, can be configured to
generate an alarm and/or event when a state change occurs and how alarm
acknowledgement will occur. This is done via the signal type’s Alarm Event
Configuration aspect. This procedure is described in Configuring Alarm and Event
Handling on page 53.
Configuring Limiters for Real and Integer Signals

Real and integer signals can have up to four trip points within the signal’s overall
range that, when crossed, generate an alarm and/or event. These points are called
limiters. To configure limiters:
1. With the signal type selected in the object browser, select the Alarm Event
Configuration aspect from the object’s aspect list, Figure 14.
Figure 14. Alarm Event Configuration Aspect for Real and Integer Signal Types
Reference Figure 15 for steps 2-6.

2. On the Limiter tab, click Add. This adds a limiter to the limiter list and
activates the limiter configuration fields.
3BUF001092-510 51
Configuring Limiters for Real and Integer Signals Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Figure 15. Adding a Limiter
3. The name defaults to the signal name with a sequential numeric prefix, for
example: RPM1. Rename the limiter to make it more easily identifiable, for
example: RPM_HIHI.
4. Specify the Type to indicate whether the limiter will trigger an event when the
signal rises above a maximum value (Max), or drops below a minimum value
(Min).
5. Enter a Limit. This is the threshold that the signal must cross to trip an alarm
(drop below if type is Min, or exceed if type is Max).
6. Set the Hysteresis to filter spurious alarms caused by signals that fluctuate
around the limit. For a real signal type, the hysteresis range is 0.00 to 9.99
expressed as percent of signal range. For integer signal types, use a whole
number. The default is 0.
Events are triggered when the signal passes the limit value regardless of the
Hysteresis. In order for a triggered alarm to reset so that subsequent alarms
may be triggered, the signal must first re-cross the alarm limit in the opposite
direction (decreasing for Max limit, or increasing for Min limit), and continue
to decrease or increase until the point established by the Hysteresis is crossed.
This requires the Hysteresis to be set to a value greater than zero (0).
When the Hysteresis is set to zero, the alarm will reset as soon as the signal re-
crosses the alarm limit.
7. Click Apply.
52 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Configuring Alarm and Event Handling
8. Repeat steps 2-7 to configure up to four limiters. An example of a completed

limiter list is shown in Figure 16.
Figure 16. Example, Completed Limiter List
To remove a limiter, select the limiter and click Remove.

Alarm/event handling for limiters is configurable. Event generation is enabled for
all limiters by default. Refer to Configuring Alarm and Event Handling on page
53.
The event text for each limiter must be configured in the instantiated object’s
Alarm/Event Configuration aspect in the Control structure. This is covered in
Instantiating a Softpoint Object in the Control Structure on page 57.
Configuring Alarm and Event Handling

Configuration options for binary signal types, and limiters are:
• Whether to generate an event and/or alarm when a state change occurs.
• How alarms will be acknowledged.
• The alarm text group.
Alarms cannot be generated for a signal unless Event handling is enabled for the
signal. Configure Event handling and then configure alarm handling parameters.
3BUF001092-510 53
Configuring Alarm and Event Handling Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Events
To specify that an event be generated when a signal state changes (reference
Figure 17):
1. Select the signal type object.
2. Select the Alarm Event Configuration aspect.
Figure 17 demonstrates how to enable and configure events for a binary signal
type. When configuring events for a real or integer signal limiter, the Alarm
Event Configuration aspect will have a third tab for selecting the limiter whose
event is being configured (Figure 14).
Figure 17. Alarm Event Configuration Aspect Selected
3. Click the Is an event check box on the Event tab. The default is to have events
generated for both state changes On-to-Off, and Off-to-On). This is specified
by having both Log status changes check boxes unchecked.
To generate events for both state changes, both the Is an event and Is an alarm
check boxes must be checked, and both boxes for log status change unchecked.
54 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Configuring Alarm and Event Handling
4. As an option, use the check boxes to make the event occur exclusively for one
state change or the other:
– Checking Log status changes ‘On’ and NOT checking Log status
changes ‘Off’ will result in events only when the state changes from Off
to On (rising edge), Figure 18.
Figure 18. Event Generated Only When State Changes from Off to On
– Checking Log status changes ‘Off’ and NOT checking Log status
changes ‘On’ will result in events only when the state changes from On to
Off (falling edge), Figure 19.
Figure 19. Event Generated Only When State Changes from On to Off
5. As a further option, change the Alarm text group. Alarm text groups specify the
messages to be displayed for certain events. All events belonging to the same
group will be displayed and/or printed with the same text for a particular
change of state. Alarm text groups are configured as described in Defining
Alarm Text Groups on page 65. To change the alarm text group for a signal, use
the Alarm text group pull-down list. This list contains all Alarm text groups
that have been configured in the system.
If alarm handling for the signal is needed, refer to Alarms on page 55.
Alarms
To show a signal in the alarm list, alarm line and printouts when the alarm status is
activated, specify that the signal Is an alarm. This is done via the Alarm tab on the
Alarm Event Configuration aspect. Also, the signal must be defined as an event by
checking the Is an event check box under the Event tab of the Alarm Event
Configuration aspect (Events on page 54).
3BUF001092-510 55
Configuring Alarm and Event Handling Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
The Alarm tab is also used to specify how alarm acknowledgement will occur,
alarm priority, and a time delay to filter out spurious alarms.
To configure alarm handling for a signal:
1. Make sure the Is an event check box is selected on the Events tab.
2. Select the Alarm tab and check the Is an alarm check box, Figure 20.
Figure 20. Alarm Tab
3. Select an alarm acknowledge option as described in Table 2.

Table 2. Alarm Acknowledge Options
Option Description
Normal acknowledge Show alarm as long as it remains active or
unacknowledged.
No acknowledge Show alarm as long as it remains active.
Disappears with Show alarm as long as it remains unacknowledged.
acknowledge When the alarm is acknowledged, it is removed from the
alarm list regardless of the current alarm status. The
system will not detect when the alarm becomes inactive.
Thus printout is not available for when an alarm became
inactive, only when it was acknowledged.
Alarm list colors are set in the Alarm and Event List Configuration aspect.
56 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Instantiating a Softpoint Object in the Control Structure
4. Enter a priority as a number from 1 (lowest) to 1000 (highest). The priority is

used to sort the alarm list with the top priority alarm first. The default is 1.
5. Set a time delay. The time delay is the number of seconds the event has to
remain active before any event actions take place. This filters out very short
events. Entering zero (0) means there is no delay.
6. Click Apply.
Instantiating a Softpoint Object in the Control Structure

Softpoint objects are instantiated in the Control Structure. The softpoint objects
inherit most of their operating parameters from the object type from which they are
instantiated, and so require very little configuration. Typically all that is required is
to specify event texts for limiter signals. Also, most operating parameters that were
initially defined for the corresponding object type can be adjusted.
If a softpoint signal which has been instantiated is not required, it can be disabled
by clicking the Disable check box under the ID tab of the Signal Configuration
aspect.
There are two methods for creating softpoint objects. Either create the objects one-
object-at-a-time, or perform a bulk instantiation of a specified number of objects
based on a selected object type. Refer to the applicable instructions below.
• Creating One Object at a Time on page 57.
• Bulk Instantiation of Softpoint Objects in the Control Structure on page 58.
Creating One Object at a Time

To create a new softpoint object in the Control Structure:
1. In the Control Structure, select the Softpoints container for the applicable
Softpoint Generic Control Network.
2. Right click and choose New Object from the context menu.
3. In the New Object dialog, select the object type whose properties will be used
and enter a unique name for the object.
4. Click Create, Figure 21.
3BUF001092-510 57
Bulk Instantiation of Softpoint Objects in the Control Structure Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Figure 21. New Object Dialog
This adds a new softpoint object in the Control structure, Figure 22.
Instantiated
Softpoint Object
Figure 22. Softpoint Object Added in the Control Structure
Bulk Instantiation of Softpoint Objects in the Control Structure

When using this method to instantiate Softpoint objects, for best performance
limit the number of objects so as not to create more than 1000 signals at a time.
For example, to create 100 objects with 25 signals each (2500 signals total), then
instantiate 50 objects at a time.
To do this (reference Figure 23):
58 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Bulk Instantiation of Softpoint Objects in the Control Structure
1. In the Control structure, select the Softpoint Generic Control Network object
for the node where the softpoints will be instantiated.
2. Click the Generic Control Network Configuration aspect.
3. Click the Add Objects button in the top left corner of this aspect.
Add Objects Button
Remove Objects Button
Figure 23. Selecting the Node Where Softpoints Will Be Instantiated
This displays a dialog for selecting the object type on which to base the objects
being instantiated, and for specifying the number of objects to be instantiated.
An example is shown in Figure 24.
4. Use the browser on the left side to select the object type from which to
instantiate the new objects (for example, Area1_Pump is selected in Figure 24).
5. Specify the number of objects to create in the Number of new objects field. In
this example, nine (9) new objects will be created.
6. Enter the Name of the new object that will be used as the base name for all
new objects to be created. Each new object will be made unique by appending a
sequential numeric suffix to the same base name starting with the specified
Starting number (in this case: 2).
7. Click OK. The result is shown in Figure 25.
3BUF001092-510 59
Deleting Instantiated Objects Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Figure 24. Create New Object Dialog
Bulk instantiated
softpoint objects
Figure 25. Example, Bulk Instantiation Result
Deleting Instantiated Objects

To delete instantiated objects:
1. Click the Delete objects button, Figure 26. This displays a dialog for selecting
one or more objects to delete.
Delete Object Button
Figure 26. Delete Object Button
60 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties
2. Select objects to be deleted in the Delete Object dialog.

3. Click Delete.
Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties

Alarm and event properties for binary signals in the Control structure are accessible
via the Alarm Event Configuration aspect. Most of these properties are inherited
from the respective signal types. One property that must be configured for signals in
the Control structure is the Event Text. Other alarm/event settings can be adjusted as
required. Refer to Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties for Binary Signals on page 61
and Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties for Limiters on page 63.
Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties for Binary Signals

The event text for binary signals is specified via the Alarm Event Configuration
aspect. To do this (reference Figure 27):
1. Select the softpoint object in the Control structure, expand the object’s branch
to show the signals, and then select the signal.
2. Select the Alarm Event Configuration aspect.
3. The Event tab shows the default settings as configured for the corresponding
softpoint object type.
Optionally, to disable the default settings, uncheck Use default event
values and then specify new settings in the left hand section of the tab,
Figure 27. To restore the default settings, check Use default event values.
The default settings can not be changed on this tab.
3BUF001092-510 61
Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Figure 27. Binary Signal Alarm/Event Configuration
4. To enter the event text, click the Event2 tab and then enter the text in the First
Row of Event Text: field, Figure 28. If additional lines are requires, use the
Extended event text: edit window.
First line of text
Additional lines
if necessary
Figure 28. Entering the Event Text
62 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties for Limiters
5. The Alarm tab, Figure 29, is used to adjust the alarm handling parameters
originally configured as described in Configuring Alarm and Event Handling
on page 53.
Figure 29. Adjusting Alarm Parameters
6. The Alarm2 tab, Figure 30, is used to configure class. Classes are groups of
alarms without any ranking of the groups. The range is 1 to 9999.
Figure 30. Alarm2 Tab
Adjusting Alarm/Event Properties for Limiters

The procedure for adjusting alarm/event properties for limiters is essentially the
same as for binary signals, except that the Alarm Event Configuration aspect has an
extra tab for selecting the limiter whose parameters need configuring, Figure 31.
This tab also has a Disable check box to disable/enable the limiter.
3BUF001092-510 63
Adjusting Properties for Signals Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Figure 31. Adjusting Alarm/Event Parameters for Limiters
For details regarding all other tabs on this aspect, refer to Adjusting Alarm/Event
Properties for Binary Signals on page 61.
Adjusting Properties for Signals

Other properties for signals in the Control structure are accessible via Signal
Configuration aspect, Figure 32. The Disable check box on the ID tab disables a
signal.
64 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Defining Alarm Text Groups
Figure 32. Softpoint Signal Configuration Aspect
Most of the other signal properties are inherited from the respective signal types. As
an option, disable the default settings from the Range tab, Figure 33.
Figure 33. Unchecking the Use Defaults Check Box
Defining Alarm Text Groups

Alarm text groups can be used to specify messages to be displayed for certain
events. All events belonging to the same group will be displayed and/or printed with
the same text for a particular change of state. These texts can be a continuous string
of up to 40 characters. Alarm Text groups are configured via the Alarm Event
3BUF001092-510 65
Defining Alarm Text Groups Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Settings aspect of the Softpoint Object Type group in the Object Type structure,
Figure 34.
Figure 34. Alarm Text Group
Creating A New Alarm Text Group

To create a new alarm text group, or to edit an existing group:
1. Select the Alarm Event Settings aspect for the Softpoint Object Types group in
the Object Type structure.
2. Click the Alarm Text Groups tab.
3. To add a new group, click Add. This displays the New Alarm Text Group
dialog, Figure 35. Enter a name for the new group in this dialog. To change an
existing group, Delete the text group from the list and add a new text group.
66 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Defining Alarm Text Groups
Figure 35. Adding an Alarm Group
4. Enter the status texts in their respective boxes as described in Table 3. All texts
can be up to 16 characters maximum. Refer to Name Rules on page 71.
Properties with an asterisk (*) can only be change from the default group.
Table 3. Alarm Text Group Configuration
Property Enter Text to be Displayed When:

Control* a signal is under manual control.
Force* a signal is forced.
Unforce* a signal is unforced.
Disable control* manual signal control is disabled.
Enable control* manual signal control is enabled.
Disable the event is disabled.
Enable the event is enabled.
Autodisable the event is autodisabled.
Event on the event changes from off to on.
Event off the event changes from on to off.
Acknowledge the event is acknowledged.
5. Click Apply.
6. Restart the alarm and event server for the node where the softpoints are
deployed. To do this:
a. Go to the Service Structure.
3BUF001092-510 67
Deploying a Softpoint Configuration Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
b. Select the applicable Alarm and Event Service Provider under the Alarm
and Event Services category.
c. Click on the Service Provider Definition aspect.
d. Click on the Configuration tab.
e. Uncheck the Enabled check box and click Apply.
f. Check the Enabled check box and click Apply.
Deleting An Alarm Text Group

An alarm text group cannot be deleted when it is in use (when the alarm text
group is selected under the Event tab of the SoftPoint Alarm/Event Configuration
aspect for at least one signal or signal type). In this case, select another alarm text
group under the Event tab of the SoftPoint Alarm/Event Configuration aspect for
all signals and signal types that have selected the group
To delete an alarm text group:
1. From the Text Group, select the text group to be deleted.
2. Click Delete.
Deploying a Softpoint Configuration

When creating new softpoint objects, or making changes to existing softpoint
objects, the new configuration will not go into effect until the changes are deployed.
While softpoint configurations are being deployed, softpoint processing is
suspended, current values and new inputs are held. This process is generally
completed within five minutes, even for large configurations.
To do this (reference Figure 36):
1. In the Control structure, select the Softpoint Generic Control Network object
for the node where the softpoints will be deployed.
2. Click the Deploy aspect. This aspect provides a listing of configuration
changes that have occurred since the last deployment, and indicates whether a
full or incremental deployment is required.
68 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Deploying a Softpoint Configuration
Incremental deploys only those changes that have been made since the last
deployment. A prompt is provided when a Full deploy is required.
Figure 36. Deploying the Softpoint Configuration
3. Click Deploy to start the deploy process. During this time, softpoint processing
is suspended, current values and new inputs are held. This process is generally
completed within five minutes, even for large configurations. Completion of
the deploy process is indicated by the Deploy ended message, Figure 37.
Figure 37. Deploy Ended Indication
3BUF001092-510 69
Enabling/Disabling Warning for Changes to Object Types Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Enabling/Disabling Warning for Changes to Object Types

Changes to a softpoint object type are propagated to all softpoint objects that have
been instantiated from that object type. A warning message is generated any time a
change to a softpoint object type is made, even if there are no instantiated objects for
that type. Disable this warning message when configuring softpoint object types,
and enable it only after the softpoint configuration has been deployed. To
enable/disable this warning message (reference Figure 38):
1. Go to the Object Type structure.
2. Select the Softpoint Object Type.
3. Select the Generic Control Network aspect.
4. Select the Edit Parameters tab.
5. To enable the message check the Warn for time consuming operations check
box. Uncheck the check box to disable the message.
Figure 38. Enabling/Disabling the Warning Message
70 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Name Rules
Name Rules
Use any combination of characters in Table 4 for softpoint object and signal names.
Table 4. Valid Characters for Softpoint and Signal Names
Description Characters
Lower case a-z, å, ä, ö, æ, ø, ü
Upper case A-Z, Å, Ä, Ö, Æ, Ø, Ü
Underscore _
Numbers 0-9
Working with Softpoints Online

The Softpoint Object dialog is used to interact with softpoints online. This dialog is
an aspect of the softpoint object in the Control structure, Figure 39.
3BUF001092-510 71
Working with Softpoints Online Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Double-click a signal to display

the corresponding faceplate
Figure 39. Accessing the Softpoint Object Dialog
The Softpoint Object dialog shows the signals configured for this softpoint object.
Double-click on any signal to show the corresponding faceplate, Figure 40.
72 3BUF001092-510
Section 3 Configuring Softpoints Working with Softpoints Online
Figure 40. Example, Faceplate for Real Signal
Open the faceplate for another signal either by using the pull-down list, Figure 41,
or by clicking the up/down arrows.
Up/Down arrows for Pull-down list for other

moving forward and faceplates
backward in the signal list
Figure 41. Changing faceplates
3BUF001092-510 73
Working with Softpoints Online Section 3 Configuring Softpoints
Attempting to access a Softpoint object with a very long name, or performing a

group OPC write to more than 64 SoftPoint signals at a time may result in the
following error message:
The buffer size is insufficient
Error code : E_ADS_DS_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER (0x8ABB04215)
74 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations
When Calculations is installed on a node that is NOT an Information

Management server, the Service Group and Service Provider objects must be
manually created under the Calculations Service group in the Service structure.
Required objects are created during installation and post-installation when
enabling Calculations to run on an Information Management server. The
redundant Calculation Server option is set up during post installation.
Using Calculations
Refer to the Calculations Service Recommendations and Guidelines on page 131
for specific use cases related to improved stability and predictability of the
Calculation Service.
Calculations Services is used to configure and schedule calculations that are applied
to real-time database objects, including both softpoints and actual process points.
Calculations may also be applied to object types allowing the calculation to be re-
used each time a new object is instantiated from the object type. Calculations also
have the ability to update/insert a historically stored value into a numeric log.
Calculations can be triggered by changes to the inputs, or be scheduled to execute
cyclically or at a given date and time. A calculation aspect may be applied to any
aspect object such as a unit, vessel, pump, or softpoint. Inputs can be any aspect
object property, and outputs can be any writable point in the system. Input/output
definitions can be made relative to the object for which the calculation is defined.
Data quality and alarm generation are supported. Calculation logic is written in
VBScript. The ability to write a timestamp to a softpoint or a log is provided to align
calculations along with the inputs so they have the same timestamp for retrieval.
Administrative rights are required to add, configure, or modify calculations.
The following calculation example finds the average value for up to four input
variables, Figure 42. The variable mapping and VBScript are shown in Figure 43.
3BUF001092-510 75
Using Calculations Section 4 Configuring Calculations
NOTE: This shows a calculation with one

output. Other calculations may be configured
with multiple inputs and outputs.
Input No. 1
Input No. 2
Calculation Output No. 1
Input No. 4
Input No. 4
Figure 42. Example - Average
Figure 43. Example, Calculation for Average
76 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Set-up and Administration
Calculation Aspects
Calculations are created as aspects of objects or object types. An example is shown
in Figure 44.
Aspect Object in
Control Structure
Calculation Aspect
Figure 44. Calculation Aspect for Softpoint Object in the Control Structure
User Interface
The user interface for Calculations Services is comprised of aspect views that are
accessed via the Plant Explorer. The following aspect views are provided:
• Special Configuration for configuration of global parameters on the
Configuration Server level. Refer to Configuring Global Calculations
Parameters on page 78.
• Calculation Editor for configuring calculations. Refer to Editing the
Calculation on page 82.
• Calculation Scheduler for scheduling calculations either cyclically or
according to a schedule. Refer to Scheduling the Calculation on page 99.
• Calculation Status Viewer for monitoring and managing calculations. Refer
to Managing Calculations on page 119.
Set-up and Administration

To verify the calculations service is properly installed and running, check the
applicable Service Provider as described in Section 2, Verifying Services. To
3BUF001092-510 77
Configuring Global Calculations Parameters Section 4 Configuring Calculations
configure global calculation parameters, refer to Configuring Global Calculations

Configuring Global Calculations Parameters

The Special Configuration tab on the Service Provider Definition aspect,
Figure 45, supports configuration of OPC update rate, scan rate for cyclic schedules,
and cyclic offset to stagger the start of cyclically scheduled calculations. These are
server-level parameters. They have valid default settings and do not need to be
configured unless the defaults are not suitable for your specific application. These
parameters are described in Table 5.
Figure 45. Calculations Server - Special Configuration
78 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Configuring Global Calculations Parameters
The other three tabs are common to all services.

Deviating from the defaults may cause system overload and errors. These special
parameters should only be adjusted by qualified users.
Table 5. Calculations Server Special Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
OPC Base Rate at which input variables are updated by their respective OPC data sources.
Rate Range: 0 to 2,147,483,647 milliseconds
Default: 1000 ms (1 second)
Cycle Base Rate at which the Calculations Scheduler scans the list of cyclically scheduled
Rate calculations. Typically, the default rate is used and is adjusted only if the
Calculations Scheduler is consuming too much CPU time (as indicated by
Windows Task Manager).
Range: 100 to 3,600,000 milliseconds (3600000 = 1 hour)
Default: 500 ms (1/2 second)
Cycle Offset The first run for a cyclically scheduled calculation will occur when the specified
Percentage cycle interval has elapsed after the calculation has been submitted. The Cycle
Offset Percentage is used to stagger the execution of cyclic calculations to
minimize peaks (where several cyclic calculations attempt to run at the same
time).
The cyclic offset reduces the cycle interval to advance the first execution of each
cyclic calculation by a random amount between zero and the specified offset
percentage. Subsequent executions of the calculation will occur according to the
specified interval (without the offset).
For example, if the cycle interval is 10 minutes and the offset percentage is 25,
then the time when the calculation will FIRST be executed will be advanced by
0% to 25%. In other words, the time of first execution will be somewhere between
7.5 minutes and 10 minutes after the calculation is submitted for execution.
Subsequent executions will occur every 10 minutes.
Range: 0 to 100%
Default: 100%
No adjustment will be made to time-based calculations.
3BUF001092-510 79
Configuring Calculations Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Configuring Calculations
This section describes how to add a calculation aspect to an aspect object, and how
to use the aspect to create and schedule calculations.
Calculations are defined using VBScript. Any capabilities within VBScript or COM
technologies can be used to manipulate data. External functions and libraries may
also be used. Certain calculation properties are exposed for access by OPC client
applications. These properties are described in OPC Access to Calculation
Properties on page 106.
Once configured, calculations can be managed via the Calculations Status Viewer.
This is described in Managing Calculations on page 119.
Adding a Calculation Aspect to an Object

Calculation aspects are typically added to a process or softpoint object in the real-
time database (in the Control structure) or an object type in the Object Type
structure. There are some special considerations when adding a calculation aspect to
an object type. These are described in Enabling the Calculation to be Copied to
Instantiated Objects.
Enabling the Calculation to be Copied to Instantiated Objects

A calculation added to an object type can be reused each time an object is created
from the object type. To do this, specify that the calculation be copied when a new
object is created. To get this functionality, complete the procedures for adding and
configuring the calculation aspect and then refer to Instantiating Calculation
Aspects On Object Types on page 105.
Also, the calculation aspect on the instantiated object is disabled by default. Enable
it using either the Enable button on the calculation aspect’s Tool Bar, or via
Calculation Status Viewer. Refer to Managing Calculations on page 119.
Relative Object Referencing

Relative object referencing is used to run calculations independent of any specific
object instances. This is described in Object Referencing Guidelines on page 111.
80 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Adding a Calculation Aspect to an Object
Adding a Calculation Aspect

To add a calculation aspect to an object:
1. Select the object that is getting a calculation. Right-click on the object and
choose New Aspect from the context menu.
2. In the New Aspect Dialog, select the Calculation aspect and give the aspect a
unique name. Figure 46 shows the new calculation aspect added to the object’s
aspect list.
The Show All check box may need to be enabled to find this aspect.
New Calculation Aspect Named Wave
Figure 46. New Calculation Aspect Added
3. Click on the aspect to display its configuration view, Figure 47.
Figure 47. Displaying the Calculation Aspect View
3BUF001092-510 81
Using the Calculation Aspect Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Using the Calculation Aspect

Note the following BEFORE configuring calculations:
• Saving changes to a calculation replaces the existing version. One copy is
maintained by versioning. However, to preserve multiple versions, copy and
rename the calculation.
• More than one client can access a calculation for editing. The calculation
editor will show changes made by all clients that are currently working on the
calculation as the changes are saved.
• The Update status of the calculation is set to false by default. This is to
optimize performance. Certain properties, mostly related to debugging, will
not be updated when the calculation is run on line. The update status can be
set to true for debug purposes; however, it is generally recommended not to
run calculations in this mode.
The calculation aspect has two views - an editor and a scheduler. The editor is
displayed by default. This is where calculation variables are defined, VBScript
written and the trace feature enabled for debugging the calculation script offline.
Begin configuration by using the calculation editor to define variables and write the
script as described in Editing the Calculation on page 82. When the calculation is
ready, use the edit/schedule toggle button on the Tool Bar to switch to the scheduler
view. Refer to Scheduling the Calculation on page 99.
Other procedures that can be performed via the editor include:
• Tracing the execution of a calculation - Refer to Tracing the Calculation
Execution on page 98.
• Forcing the execution of a calculation - Refer to Running the Calculation
Manually on page 102. The calculation can run on line or offline for
simulations when run manually.
• Enabling/disabling the execution - Refer to Table 10.
Editing the Calculation

The calculation editor view is divided into three sections, Figure 48. The top part is
a variable grid. This is used to map calculation input and output variables to their
respective OPC tags. The middle part is an edit window for writing the VBScript.
The bottom part is a trace window. When tracing is enabled, trace statements in the
82 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Mapping Calculation Variables
VBScript are processed, and the results are displayed in the trace window. Enable or
disable tracing via the editor’s context menu, or programatically within the
VBScript. The trace window has a limit of about 20Kbytes which is equivalent to
about 10,000 characters.
Use the variable grid to map input and output variables to their respective OPC tags.
Refer to Mapping Calculation Variables on page 83. Then use the edit window to
write the VBScript. Refer to Writing VBScript on page 87.
Variable
Grid
Edit Window
for VBScript
Trace
Window
Figure 48. Editor View
Mapping Calculation Variables

The variable grid, Figure 49, is used to map calculation input and output variables to
their respective OPC tags. In addition to specifying the OPC data points for the
variables, use this map to specify:
3BUF001092-510 83
Mapping Calculation Variables Section 4 Configuring Calculations
• Whether to use the online data point value or a configured offline value.
• Whether to trigger the execution of the calculation when an input variable
changes. Do not use analog variables to trigger the execution of a calculation.
Figure 49. Variable Grid
Use the Insert Line and Delete Line buttons on the Tool Bar, Figure 50 to add and
delete variables in this map as required. Up to 50 variables can be specified. The
variables defined in this grid can be used without having to declare them in the
VBScript. The parameters needed to specify each variable are described in Table 6.
Insert Delete
Figure 50. Insert/Delete Line Icons
Further guidelines for using variables are provided in:

• Variable Scope and Usage on page 89.
• Variable Properties and Methods on page 91.
• Variable Data Types and Conversion for Offline Variables on page 93.
84 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Mapping Calculation Variables
When using relative object referencing to define calculations in the Object Type
structure, select the property for the reference before adding the name of the
specific structure to the path. After entering the structure into the path, the
property list will no longer be populated because the list is built from the object
reference which is no longer valid. For further information on relative object
referencing, refer to Object Referencing Guidelines on page 111.
Table 6. OPC Mapping Parameters
Variable This is the name of the variable as it is referenced in the VBScript. This does not
need to be declared anywhere else. It is available for use immediately.
Object This is an object reference. The object reference and the property parameter
make up the data point specification. Enter the object reference by typing, or
drag the corresponding object from the applicable structure. To drag the object,
the Object field must first be selected. General object referencing syntax is
described in Object Referencing Guidelines on page 111.
As an alternative to using an absolute object reference, specify a relative object
reference. This uses the same calculation for multiple object instances without
having to change object references. A relative reference starts with the object to
which the calculation is attached and must descend from that object. It is not
possible to select a relative item outside the sub-tree of the selected object.
Refer to Relative Object Referencing Guidelines on page 115.
Property This pick list is populated with properties based on the object specified. For input
variables, select the property to be read. For output variables, select the property
to be written.
Direction This specifies whether the variable is an input or output.
• Input - the value is read into the variable before the calculation is executed.
The OPC update rate is configurable. Refer to Configuring Global
Calculations Parameters on page 78.
• Output - the variable value is written to the property AFTER the calculation
has executed. The output variable value is available for use in the script as it
executes. NOTE: Object properties are NOT updated while the calculation
is executing. For instance, a repeating loop that increments a variable value
does not continually update the object. Instead, the value that occurs when
the calculation is finished is written.
3BUF001092-510 85
Mapping Calculation Variables Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Table 6. OPC Mapping Parameters (Continued)
On Line Value This is a read-only field that indicates the current value for the variable.
Offline Value This value is used in place of the actual (Online) value when the Online flag in
the State column is set to False. This is typically used for performing offline tests
or declaring constants.
State Online- Use the actual online value. For inputs, this is the online OPC property
value. For outputs, this is the calculated variable value.
Offline - Use the specified offline value
Event This is only applicable for input variables. It is used to specify whether or not to
execute the calculation in the event that the value for this input changes:
• True - Execute the calculation when the input value changes.
• False - Do not execute the calculation when the input value changes.
Note: Analog signals should not be used as event triggers.
Log The Log field is used to pick a log that will be used to store output data from the
calculation. When the calculation is run, the data written to the output parameter
will also be written to the numeric log, if present. If the timestamp already exists
in the log for this data, then that data can also be updated. Also, the quality for
the softpoint output object will be used as the data quality for the numeric log.
The Log field is enabled when an object and a property for a variable is specified.
This allows selection of a Lab Data log that has been created for that property. If
no Lab Data logs have been created for the Object/Property combination, the
pick list will be blank. The Lab Data log can be from either a trend log or a history
log. Once specified and the aspect has been saved, the Direction column will be
disabled with ‘Output Only’ displayed (Calculations can not read from a log). In
addition, the Online Value and Event columns display '----' since they do not
apply to an output only variable.
The calculation variable can be treated like any other output variable, specifying
the Value, Quality, and TimeStamp fields for the variable. When the calculation
runs, the Value and Quality for the specified TimeStamp will be written to the
specified 'Lab Data' log. If a value exists in the log for the specified timestamp,
that entry will be overwritten with the new value/quality. If no value exists in the
log for the specified timestamp, the value/quality will be inserted into the log with
the specified timestamp (required).
86 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Writing VBScript
Writing VBScript
When working with variables in VBScript, the assignment of any output variable
must be explicitly cast to the output variable type using expressions such as:
OutputVar = CInt(variabledata)
Calculation logic is written in VBScript. Use the edit window in the middle part of
the Calculation Editor to write the VBScript, Figure 51. Any capabilities within
VBScript or COM technologies can be used to manipulate data. External functions
and libraries may also be used.
Figure 51. Example Script
For scripting guidelines related to calculations refer to:

• Settings.UpdateStatus on page 88.
• Variable Scope and Usage on page 89.
• Calculation Result on page 90.
• Variable Properties and Methods on page 91.
• Variable Data Types and Conversion for Offline Variables on page 93.
• Language Extensions on page 94.
• Language Restrictions on page 94.
• Writing to Quality of a Data Point from a Calculation on page 95.
• Writing Timestamps to Softpoint Objects and Logs on page 96.
• SetLocale Function for Native Language Support on page 97.
• Tracing the Calculation Execution on page 98.
3BUF001092-510 87
Settings.UpdateStatus Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Settings.UpdateStatus
The Settings.UpdateStatus defaults to False. This is to optimize performance.
Certain properties, mostly related to debugging, will not be updated when the
calculation is run on line. These are described in Reading Calculation Status
Information on page 120. Set the update status to true for debug purposes if
necessary; however, it is generally recommended not to run calculations in this
mode.
If a relatively few calculations are running at a modest rate of execution, run the
calculations with Settings.UpdateStatus = True. This allows the Result property to
link calculations. Refer to Calculation Result on page 90.
The calculation can also periodically set the update status true every n number of
executions to periodically update status-related parameters. An example is provided
in Improving Performance on page 129.
Settings.UpdateStatus
To set the update status to true, either change the value of Settings.UpdateStatus
to True, or by comment out the line.
DO NOT delete the line. This would require re-entering the line to reset the
update status to False.
When True, versioning can not be used. This is because online values of the
Calculation aspect differ between environments.
88 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Variable Scope and Usage
Variable Scope and Usage

This section describes the scope and usage of the online and offline variables
declared in the variable grid. It also describes the Result variable which is a special
internally managed variable. This variable is not declared in the grid or script. Its
value may be persisted between executions and made available to other applications
via OPC by setting the Update Status to True.
Online Variables
Online input variables declared in the grid contain read-only values that correspond
to the value of the referenced object and property. The variable within the script can
be modified, but these changes are not persisted between executions and the value
after execution is not written to the actual process value.
Online output variables declared in the grid contain the actual process values of the
referenced objects and properties before script execution. Also any modification of
these variables from within the script will modify the actual process values after
execution completes.
Offline Variables
Offline values are used in place of the actual (Online) values when the Online flag in
the State column is set to False. These values are also used when executing the
calculation in offline mode. Offline variables are not supported in an engineering
environment.
Offline input variables are like constants. They contain the value as designated in
the Offline Value column during execution. The variable may be modified within
the script, but changes are not persisted between calculation executions. Further
Offline values are not updated when the Update Status is set to False (default).
Offline output variables function like internal softpoints. Before calculation
execution, the variable is set to the value contained in the Offline Value column.
During execution, the variable can be modified via the script. After execution, the
change (if any) is written back to the Offline Value. This offline value is not
accessible to any client other than the calculation itself. This is useful for creating
static variables (values are persisted between executions) where the values are only
used internally within the calculation. For example, an internal counter could record
the number of times the calculation has executed.
3BUF001092-510 89
Calculation Result Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Calculation Result
The calculation result is a special calculation property that is treated as a variable
within the VB script. It does not need to be declared in the grid or the script.
This property is only applicable when the Update Status is set to True.
Before execution, the previous result value is loaded into the variable and is
available for use by the script. The result value can be set within the calculation’s
VB script, for example result.value = 1. After execution, the value is written back
to the calculation's Result property. The result value is then accessible by OPC
clients, and may also be referenced within other calculations as an input variable in
the calculation’s variable grid.
The result quality may also be set within the calculation script, for example:
result.quality = 0. However, any change to this value is not saved once the
calculation has completed. The result quality always reverts back to quality = good
once the calculation has completed.
If history is to be collected for the result of a calculation, it is best not to collect
directly from the Result property. For best performance, write the result to a
softpoint from which the data may then be collected.
The calculation result can be used to link calculations without having to use an
external softpoint. When Update Status is set to True, the result variable of the
calculation aspect can be used to link one or more calculations. The result of one
calculation can be used as the input and trigger for another calculation. This is
illustrated in the following example.
Example:
M1 consists of two calculations: CalcA and CalcB. The result property of CalcA
will be used to trigger CalcB.
The script for CalcA sets its result property to the some input, in this case INPUT1,
Figure 53.
CalcB then subscribes to CalcA's result property as an input, Figure 54. In this case,
the event flag is also set to True so that each time the result of CalcA changes,
CalcB executes. CalcB could also be executed manually or scheduled instead.
90 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Variable Properties and Methods
Figure 53. CalcA Aspect
Figure 54. CalcB Aspect
Variable Properties and Methods

Variables added to the variable grid have properties and methods which can be
referenced in the VBScript. These are described in Table 7 and Table 8. All
properties are read/write. This is used to test error conditions by setting any of the
properties from inside the calculation. Calculations only view OPC quality as either
good or bad. The quality value for the calculation variable is read/write. For online
variables, the quality value is set to the actual quality of the referenced OPC item.
For offline variables, the quality is always set to OPC_QUALITY_GOOD,
however this value may be modified by the calculation. The syntax for referencing a
variable property or method is (refer to Figure 55 for an example):
variableName.propertyName or variableName.methodName
3BUF001092-510 91
Variable Properties and Methods Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Table 7. Properties
Name Data Type Description

Value Variant For online mode, this is the actual process value of the
(Default property) referenced OPCItem. For offline mode, this is the value
defined in the Offline value field.
Quality Long For online mode, this is the quality value of the referenced
OPCItem. For offline mode, the value is always
OPC_QUALITY_GOOD. Also refer to Writing to Quality of a
Data Point from a Calculation on page 95.
TimeStamp Variant For online mode, this is the Universal Time Coordinate (UTC)
time stamp of the referenced OPC item. For offline mode, the
time value is empty (although for testing purposes, the
variable's time stamp can be set manually from within the
script). For example:
out.timestamp = Var1.timestamp
out.timestamp = NOW()
out.timestamp = CDATE(04/13/2006 11:30:25)
Also refer to Writing Timestamps to Softpoint Objects and
Logs on page 96.
Table 8. Methods
Name Returns Description

IsQualityOk Boolean Returns True if the quality of the variable is equal to
OPC_QUALITY_GOOD. Otherwise, returns False.
IsQualityBad Boolean Returns True if the quality of the variable is equal to
OPC_QUALITY_BAD. Otherwise, returns False.
92 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Variable Data Types and Conversion for Offline Variables
Variable Data Types and Conversion for Offline Variables

Offline variables can contain any of the data types supported in VBScript.
However, to support this flexibility, the values are always stored in the aspect as a
string. In most cases, this is not a problem because the functions and most operators
in VBScript try to convert the variable to the appropriate data type before executing.
The addition (+) operator has a problem when it is used to concatenate text strings.
Other operators that cause problems for strings are greater than (>) and less than (<).
Therefore, when working with variables (and with VBScript in general), be sure to
explicitly convert the variables to the desired data type before performing any
operations. A conversion example is shown in Figure 56.
Figure 56. Conversion Example
3BUF001092-510 93
Language Extensions Section 4 Configuring Calculations
In addition, some OPC properties will not convert to the appropriate data type
before allowing the data to be committed. For example, attempting to write the
value 255 to the NAME:DESCRIPTION property of an object will not work.
However writing the value "255" or using the CSTR conversion function will work.
This is illustrated in Figure 57.
Figure 57. Example, CSTR Conversion
Language Extensions
Language extensions provide additional functionality as described in Table 9.
Table 9. Language Extensions
Keyword Data type Description

This ABBAspect Exposes aspect properties and methods for the object that owns
this calculation. Any property or method of type ABBAspect may be
referenced. For example: This.object.name references the name
aspect of the object that owns this calculation.
Debug User-defined Used to reference the Trace and Clear debug methods. Refer to
type Tracing the Calculation Execution on page 98.
Language Restrictions
Due to the nature of calculations, the following restrictions are placed on the
language:
• User Interface - The VBScript language supports functions that produce a
user-interface. For example, the MsgBox function displays a window that
94 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Writing to Quality of a Data Point from a Calculation
remains visible until the user manually closes it. All user-interface functions
are turned off for calculations.
• Timeout - To prevent the user from performing operations that could
potentially hang the calculation service, a configurable timeout period is
employed. If the calculation does not complete in the time specified, it is forced
to exit with an error status indicating a timeout has occurred. This prevents
endless loops and other coding errors from adversely affecting the system.
• Calculations variables can not be used as a control variable in a For loop.
Using a variable declared in the calculation grid as a control variable will cause
problems in a "For" loop. For example, INPUTA is a variable declared in the
Calculations grid. This code will result in an illegal assignment error for the
calculation. The problem area is shown in bold type.
For INPUTA = 1 To 10
Do Something
Next
The variable CAN be used as an upper limit for the loop.

Dim i
For i = 1 To INPUTA
Do Something
Next
Writing to Quality of a Data Point from a Calculation

Writing to the quality of a point using OPC is not permitted according to the current
OPC standard; however, calculations are permitted to write to the quality of a
softpoint. This requires the Calculation server and Softpoint server to be on the
same node.
To write to quality, assign the Quality property of the variable (declared in the grid)
to either good (192) or bad (0). Attempting to write to the quality of a non-softpoint
OR a softpoint on a remote server which is not properly connected via DCOM, the
write is ignored.
For example, INPUTA is a variable declared in the Calculations grid referencing a
softpoint signal.
3BUF001092-510 95
Writing Timestamps to Softpoint Objects and Logs Section 4 Configuring Calculations
• To write bad quality to INPUTA, enter: INPUTA.Quality = 0

• To write good quality to INPUTA, enter: INPUTA.Quality = 192
It may be useful to propagate the data quality from one softpoint signal to another,
typically from an input to output. Given a calculation with an input variable IN_1
and an output variable OUT_1, the following line of code will propagate quality
from the input to the output: OUT_1.Quality = IN_1.Quality
Writing Timestamps to Softpoint Objects and Logs

The script in a calculation object can write the value, quality and a specific
timestamp associated with the value/quality to a Softpoint object or a log. For
example, in the following script, the output variable will take on the value, quality,
and timestamp of the input with most recent timestamp:
if in1.TimeStamp >= in2.TimeStamp then

out3.Value = in1.Value
out3.TimeStamp = in1.TimeStamp
else
out3.Value = in2.Value
out3.TimeStamp = in2.TimeStamp
end if
When the calculation runs, the timestamp assigned to the out3 variable will get
written to the softpoint object or log, rather than the current time. If current time is
desired, then the out3.TimeStamp field should not be updated in the calculation. If
the TimeStamp field of any output variable is assigned in the calculation, that
timestamp will be written to the softpoint object or log. If the TimeStamp field is not
updated, the current time will be assigned in the softpoint server.
This feature applies to softpoint objects serviced by the softpoint server on the local
node and when writing the log parameter. OPC tags do not support this feature.
Timestamps that are read in from OPC servers and the Softpoint server come into
the script as UTC timestamps and are also written to those servers as UTC
timestamps. Most VBScript time functions (such as Now(), Second(), etc.) are
local timestamps and may need to be manipulated accordingly.
96 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations SetLocale Function for Native Language Support
SetLocale Function for Native Language Support

If the Windows Regional Settings are set to a locale other than English (United
States), and the decimal symbol in that locale is specified as a comma (,),
customize the regional options to use the dot (.) as the decimal symbol. Refer to
the table of Windows Installation Requirements in Section 2 of System
Installation (3BSE034678*) for more information.
Calculation Services supports Windows Regional settings for French, German, and
Swedish languages. If floating point values are to be used in calculations, be sure to
include the SetLocale function in the calculation script in order for the calculation to
process the floating point values correctly. An example is illustrated in Figure 58.
The syntax is:
SetLocale(“lang”)
where lang is the code for the native language:
– fr = French.
– de = German.
– sv = Swedish.
Figure 58. SetLocale Function for Floating Point Values in Native Language
3BUF001092-510 97
Tracing the Calculation Execution Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Tracing the Calculation Execution

Tracing may be enabled when the Update Status is set to True. When tracing is
enabled, trace statements in the VBScript are processed, and the results are
displayed in the trace window. Enable or disable tracing via the editor’s context
menu, or programatically within the VBScript.
Tracing Calculation Variables

The trace can be fine tuned by keying on one or more specific variables. The syntax
is: debug.trace <argument>. Use any argument that VBScript can convert to a
string, for example: debug.trace input1.quality. An error occurs when using an
argument which cannot be converted to a string.
The example script in Figure 59 shows how to enter a text string in the trace
window, and then append a variable property. The text string must be entered in
double quotation marks, and the variable.property specification must use the &
prefix to append it to the text string.
Clearing the Trace Window

To clear the trace window from the VB script enter: debug.clear.
98 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Tool Bar
Tool Bar
The tool bar, Figure 60, provides access to Calculation Editor functions. Table 10
provides additional notes.
Save Add Line Cut Paste Enable/Disable Run on client Help
(Offline)
Print Delete Line Copy Find Run on Server Toggle

(Online)
Figure 60. Tool Bar
The Calculation Editor View does not prompt the user when exiting and changes
are pending. Use Save button before leaving the display or pin the aspect.
Table 10. Tool Bar Notes
Icon Notes
Saving changes completely replaces the original calculation.
To preserve the original, make a second copy to edit.
Enable/Disable. Each Calculation must be assigned to a
specific Service Provider BEFORE enabling the calculation.
This procedure is described in Distributing Calculations on
Different Servers on page 122.
Run Calculation on the Server (Online). The calculation must
be saved and enabled before it is run.
Run Calculation on the client (offline). The calculation must be

saved before it is run.
Toggle between calculation editor and scheduler views.
Scheduling the Calculation

Assign each calculation to a specific service provider prior to enabling and
running the calculation. Refer to Managing Calculations on page 119.
3BUF001092-510 99
Scheduling the Calculation Section 4 Configuring Calculations
The following scheduling options are supported for Calculation aspects:

• Calculations may be triggered by changes to input variables. Configuring an
event trigger for the calculation is done via the Event column in the Variable
Grid. Refer to Mapping Calculation Variables on page 83.
• Calculations may be scheduled via the Scheduler view in the Calculation
Editor. This supports cyclical or periodic scheduling (date and time).
To display the calculation Scheduler view click the Calculation
Editor/Scheduler toggle button on the Tool Bar. Then refer to:
– Cyclic Schedule on page 100.
– Time-based Schedule on page 101.
• Calculations may be scheduled via the Application Scheduler. This supports:
– A specified weekday during the month (for example first Monday, third
Wednesday, last Sunday, or every Tuesday).
– A specific day of the month (for example 1st, 12th, 31st, or every day).
– A list of scheduled dates and times.
– The evaluation of an expression.
Refer to Scheduling Calculations via the Application Scheduler on page 102.
• Calculations may be run manually (one-time execution). To run a calculation
manually refer to Running the Calculation Manually on page 102.
The complexity and scheduling frequency of a calculation may put an excessive
load on the system. For example, the time required to open the Plant Explorer
may take longer. This type of performance problems can happen when the
UpdateStatus is enabled. For help, refer to Improving Performance on page 129.
Cyclic Schedule
To specify a cyclic schedule, make sure the Schedule check box is unchecked, and
then check the Cycle check box. In the corresponding fields specify the interval unit
(hours, minutes, seconds), and the number of intervals. The example in Figure 61
shows a one-second cycle.
100 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Scheduling the Calculation
Figure 61. Cyclic Schedule
Time-based Schedule
To specify a time-based schedule, make sure the Cycle check box is unchecked, and
then check the Schedule check box. In the corresponding fields specify the time
components (year, month, day, hour, minute, second). The * character is a wildcard
entry which means every. Figure 62 shows a time-based schedule that will execute
at 12:01:01 (one minute and one second after noon) on every day of every month,
for every year.
Figure 62. Example - Time-based Schedule
3BUF001092-510 101
Running the Calculation Manually Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Running the Calculation Manually

When a calculation is run manually, it can also be run offline (simulation) or online
(on the client).
Offline Execution
In the offline mode, the calculation uses the offline values specified on the variable
grid. This way the calculation execution does not affect actual process values. The
calculation must be saved before it can run.
To run a calculation offline, click the offline button .
Online Execution
In the online mode the calculation uses the online values specified on the variable
grid. Save and enable the calculation before running the calculation in this mode.
Assign each Calculation to a specific Service Provider BEFORE enabling the
calculation. This is described in Distributing Calculations on Different Servers
on page 122.
To run the calculation online, click the online button .
Scheduling Calculations via the Application Scheduler

Calculations may be scheduled via the Application Scheduler. This supports
scheduling based on:
• A specified weekday during the month (for example first Monday, third
Wednesday, last Sunday, or every Tuesday).
• A specific day of the month (for example 1st, 12th, 31st, or every day).
• A list of scheduled dates and times.
• The evaluation of an expression.
To do this, create a job with a Calculation action in the Scheduling structure. This
section demonstrates how to add a job and use the scheduling definition aspect to set
up a periodic schedule. It also describes how to add and use the Calculation Action
aspect. For further information on jobs and scheduling options, refer to the section
102 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Scheduling Calculations via the Application Scheduler
on scheduling in System 800xA Information Management Data Access and Reports

(3BUF001094*).
Adding a Job and Specifying the Schedule

Jobs are created in the Scheduling structure. To create a job:
1. In the Plant Explorer, select the Scheduling Structure.
2. Right-click on Job Descriptions and choose New Object from the context
menu.
3. Add a Job Description object (under Scheduling Options) and assign the
object a logical name (Calc1Sched for example).
4. Click Create. This creates the new job under the Job Descriptions branch, and
adds the Schedule Definition aspect to the object’s aspect list.
5. Click on the Scheduling Definition aspect to display the configuration view,
Figure 63. This figure shows the scheduling definition aspect configured as a
periodic schedule. The calculation will be executed once every hour, starting
July 2th at 17:00 (5:00 PM), and continuing until July 9th at 17:00.
3BUF001092-510 103
Scheduling Calculations via the Application Scheduler Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Figure 63. Scheduling Definition Configuration View
Adding and Configuring the Calculation Action

Actions are implemented as aspects on an object which is on or under Job
Descriptions in the Scheduling Structure. To add an action:
1. Right-click on the Job object (for example Calc1Sched, Job Description) and
2. In the New Aspect dialog, browse to the Scheduler category and select the
Action aspect (path is: Scheduler>Action Aspect>Action Aspect). Use the
default aspect name, or specify a new name.
3. Click Create to add the Action aspect to the job.
104 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Instantiating Calculation Aspects On Object Types
4. Click on the Action aspect to display the configuration view.

5. Select Inform IT Calculation Action from the Action pull-down list. This
displays the Calculation plug-in, Figure 64.
Figure 64. Plug-in for Calculations
6. Specify the calculation to be scheduled by entering the path to the object

containing the calculation in the Object field. Either type the full pathname to
the object in the field, or drag the object from the object browser in the Plant
Explorer.
7. Next select the calculation aspect using the Calculation Aspect combo box. As
an option, type the name of the calculation aspect.
8. Click Apply to save the action. The referenced calculation will execute
according to the schedule defined in the associated job description object.
Instantiating Calculation Aspects On Object Types

When adding a calculation to an object type, the calculation will not be copied into
the objects created from the object type unless it is specified that the calculation
aspect be copied. To do this:
1. Go to the Type Definition aspect for the object type. Figure 65 shows an
example of an object type named ProcessDataSim.
3BUF001092-510 105
OPC Access to Calculation Properties Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Figure 65. Type Definition Aspect
2. Click the Aspect Control tab.

3. Select the aspect, in this case: Calculation.
4. Check the box labeled Copy to all instances.
5. Click Apply.
Remember to enable the calculation aspect for the instantiated object. Use the
Enable button on the calculation aspect Tool Bar, or the Calculation Status
Viewer (Managing Calculations on page 119).
OPC Access to Calculation Properties

Table 11 describes calculation properties which are accessible by OPC clients.
Typically, Result and Timeout are the only properties that may need updating. The
other properties are generally intended for read-access only.
106 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Making Bulk Changes to Instantiated Calculations
Table 11. Calculation Properties
OPC Item Name Data type Description

Result Variant Use this to set the value of the calculation result from within the
(Result.Value) calculation’s VB script. This result may be accessed by OPC
clients, or by other calculations. Default Value: 0.
For further information refer to Calculation Result on page 90.
Timeout Long Maximum number of seconds the calculation should be
allowed to run. Default: 30
ExecutionTime Long The amount of time in milliseconds that the calculation took to
run. This time does not include OPC reads or writes.
LastExecution Time Time of the calculation’s last execution.
Status Long Status of the calculation. Contains the error code returned by
the calculation engine. Default: 0x00000000
StatusMessage String Text describing the status code.Default: ""
TriggerText String Text identifying the time or event that triggers the execution of a
calculation. Default: ""
DisableOnError Boolean Boolean value indicates whether the calculation should
become disabled when execution produces an error. Default:
TRUE
TracingEnabled Boolean Boolean value indicating if tracing is enabled for the
calculation. Default: FALSE
TraceMessage String String containing any debug messages from the last execution.
Default: ""
SourceCode String Executable code of calculation
CalculationLanguage String Programming language of executable code. Default: VBScript
Making Bulk Changes to Instantiated Calculations

After creating several instances of an object type containing a calculation, it may
become necessary at some point to modify all calculations belonging to the objects
3BUF001092-510 107
Making Bulk Changes to Instantiated Calculations Section 4 Configuring Calculations
of that type. For example, a defect may be found in the source code of the
calculation. Opening and editing each calculation by hand to make the same fix
could be time consuming and introduce additional defects. The Clone function of
the Calculation Status Viewer is used to make such changes quickly and
consistently.
To do this:
1. Using the Calculation Editor aspect, modify a single calculation with the
necessary change. This aspect will become the source for the clone. For
example, when disabling tracing for the calculation.
2. Open the Calculation Status Viewer. To do this, go to the Service structure,
select the Calculation Server, Service, and then select the Calculation Status
Viewer Aspect, Figure 73.
Figure 66. Displaying the Calculations Status Viewer
3. Using the Calculation Status Viewer, select the group of calculations to be

modified with the change. Be sure to include the source calculation in the
selected set. Then right click on the Calculation Status Viewer list and choose
Clone from the context menu, Figure 67.
This menu item will be available only if the following conditions are met:
108 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Making Bulk Changes to Instantiated Calculations
– The current user has aspect modification privileges.

– All calculations in the selected set are disabled.
– The set of selected calculations contains more than one element.
Figure 67. Calculation Status View
This displays the Clone dialog.

4. Choose the source for the clone by selecting from the list in the Clone dialog,
the aspect that was modified in step 1. For example, in Figure 68 C3 is selected
as the source.
All other calculations in the Clone list will acquire the selected property values
of the source calculation.
5. Next, select the properties to be cloned. Checking a box indicates that this
property should be cloned from the source calculation to all other calculations
in the Clone list. In this example, the TRACEENABLED property is selected,
Figure 68. Note that TRIGGERTEXT is for the Scheduler.
3BUF001092-510 109
Making Bulk Changes to Instantiated Calculations Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Clone
Source
Properties
to be
Cloned
Figure 68. Selecting the Clone Source and Properties to be Cloned
6. Click Clone. This displays a confirmation dialog.

7. Click Yes to update all calculations with the selected property values of the
source calculation.
Figure 69 shows the tracing turned off for all calculation aspects cloned from the
selected source (C3).
110 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Object Referencing Guidelines
Figure 69. Result, Tracing Off for All Calculations
Object Referencing Guidelines

Two methods for referencing an object are supported:
• Absolute Referencing Guidelines uses the absolute (literal) path to the object.
• Relative Object Referencing Guidelines uses a relative path rather than the
actual (absolute) path. Use this to create reusable applications that are
independent of any specific object instances.
For example, if the process has multiple units performing the same function
and having the same basic design (same valves, pumps, I/O signals, etc.), with
relative object referencing, one calculation is created to reference the same
signals in all units throughout the process.
Before using the object referencing, also refer to Performance Considerations for
Object Referencing on page 118. This describes how to improve performance
during the enable process, and reducing the chance for errors.
Absolute Referencing Guidelines

The following is an example of an absolute object reference:
plant2.section1.drive3.motor4
3BUF001092-510 111
Absolute Referencing Guidelines Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Each component (plant2, section1, and so on) references a specific object in the
structure hierarchy. Each component is delimited by a separator character. The dot
(.) and slash (/) are default separators. Specify different characters to use as
separators using the aspect [Service Structure]Services/Aspect Directory-> SNS
Separators. The Name Server must be restarted after any changes.
If a separator character is actually part of an object name, it must be delimited
with a “\” backslash in the object reference. For example, the string AI1.1 will
search for an object named 1 below an object named AI1. To search instead for
an object named AI1.1, reference the object as: AI1\.1.
Absolute object references can be refined using the following syntax rules:
• . (dot) - search for the following object (right of dot) below the previous object
left of dot). This includes direct children as well as their offspring.
• .. (double dot) - go one level up to the parent.
• [down] - (default) searches from parent to children.
• [up] - searches from child to parent.
• [direct] - Limits search to just direct children. Refer to Direct on page 112.
• [structure] - Limits search to a specified structure, for example Functional
Structure or Control Structure. Refer to Structure Category on page 113.
• [name] - Limits search to the main object name (of category name). Refer to
Name on page 114.
This syntax can be used for powerful queries. Also, restricting a search using these
keywords can significantly improve the search speed. For example, the following
query path will start from a Signal object, and will retrieve the board for the signal
and the rack where this board is located:
.[up][Control Structure]{Type Name}board[Location Structure]{Type Name}rack
Direct
By default, queries search for the referenced object at all levels below the parent
object, not just for direct children. To limit the search to direct children, use the
[Direct] keyword.
112 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Absolute Referencing Guidelines
For example, the query path plant2.motor3 will find motor3 in all of these
structures: heyden.plant2.section3.motor3, plant2.section3.drive4.motor3, and
plant2.motor3. The query [Direct]plant2.motor3 will find motor3 only at
plant2.motor3.
For further considerations regarding the Direct keyword, refer to Using the
[Direct] Keyword on page 118.
Structure Category
All structures are searched by default. Restrict the search to a specific structure by
specifying the structure name, Table 12. For example:
[Functional Structure]drive3.motor2 searches only in the Functional Structure.
The query [Functional Structure]drive3.motor2[]signal4 starts in the Functional
Structure until it finds an object named motor2 below an object named drive3, and
then searches all structures for an object named signal4 below motor2.
Use the [Direct] keyword in combination with a structure reference, for example:
[Direct][Functional Structure]plant2.section1. Do not specify several structures. For
example, the following syntax is not allowed: [Functional Structure][Control
Structure]motor2. If this functionality is needed, use the
IAfwTranslate::PushEnvironment method of the Name Server.
To negate a query path, add the not symbol. For example, [!Functional
Structure]motor2 searches for a motor2 not occurring in the Functional Structure.
Table 12. Structure Names
Structure Name Description

Location Structure Location orient view
Functional Structure Function oriented view
Control Structure Contains controllers, networks, IOs etc.
Product Structure Product oriented view
Object Type Structure Defines and structures Object Types
User Structure Contains users and user groups
Workplace Structure Contains workplaces
3BUF001092-510 113
Absolute Referencing Guidelines Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Table 12. Structure Names (Continued)
Structure Name Description

Aspect System Structure
…….
For further considerations regarding Structure, refer to Using the Structure Name
on page 118.
Name
An object can have a number of different names. Each name is assigned as an
aspect. The name categories are described in Table 13. The main name is the name
that associated with the object in the Plant Explorer. This is generally the name used
for absolute object references. By default a query will search for all names of a
given object. This may provide unexpected results when objects, other than the one
that was intended to be referenced, have names that fit the specified object
reference. For example the query A* may return objects whose main name does not
start with A, but whose OPC Source Name does start with A. This can be avoided by
using the [name] keyword. This restricts the search to main names (category name)
only. For example: {Name}A*.
Table 13. Name Categories
Name Category Description

Name Main name used to identify objects in the Plant Explorer.
Relative Name Name to be used for relative references
Xxx Designation (e.g. Used as relative reference designation. “Xxx Designation” is
Functional Designation) used for the “Xxx Structure”
Xxx Id (e.g. Product Id) Legacy names from AEW 2.0. Not to be used.
OPC Source Name Read-only name filled by the Uploader. Used to identify alarms.
Aspect Name The name of the aspect.
114 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Relative Object Referencing Guidelines
Examples
Table 14. Example Queries
Query Description
“{Functional Designation}M1.R2” Look only at name aspects of category ‘Functional
Designation’. First search an object M1 and from there
an object R2.
“[Control Structure]board11[Functional Search for board11 in the Control Structure, then
Structure]signal3” switch to the Functional Structure and search signal3.
“[Control Structure]board11[]signal3” Search “board11” in the Control Structure and from
there search all structures to find signal3.
“[Direct][Functional Structure]plant.a1” Start with the root object plant in the Functional
Structure and search for a direct child named a1.
Relative Object Referencing Guidelines

Relative object referencing creates reusable solutions. This functionality is
supported by attaching a Relative Name aspect, Table 13, to an object.
It is recommended that relative naming be done at the object type-level. This way
all instances of the object type will automatically have the proper relative name.
This is illustrated in the following example where a motor object type requires a
calculation that references two signals to start and stop the motor. The motor object
type is instantiated in two units - Unit 1 and Unit 2, Figure 70. The main names
(Name aspect) for the signals are instance-specific and thus change from one unit to
the next.
3BUF001092-510 115
Relative Object Referencing Guidelines Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Type: Motor
Calculation
Type: Binary Signal Type: Binary Signal

Name: B117 Name: B217
Relative Name: START Relative Name: START
Type: Binary Signal Type: Binary Signal

Name: B118 Name: B218
Relative Name: STOP Relative Name: STOP
Unit 1 Unit 2
Figure 70. Relative Referencing to Child Objects
Follow these guidelines to create a reusable solution (based on example in

Figure 70):
1. Create a motor object type with two binary signals.
2. Use the Relative Name aspect for each of the two binary signals to specify a
relative name: for example START and STOP, Figure 71.
116 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Relative Object Referencing Guidelines
Figure 71. Example, Relative Name Aspect
3. Add the Calculation aspect to the motor object type. When adding the variables
for the two binary signals, specify the object reference, Figure 72.
Figure 72. Example, Relative Object Referencing
3BUF001092-510 117
Performance Considerations for Object Referencing Section 4 Configuring Calculations
The dot (.) at the beginning of the object reference specifies that the reference
will start at the object that owns the calculation aspect, in this case the motor
object. Only motor objects in the Control Structure will be referenced.
4. Instantiate the motor object type in the Control Structure under the objects
representing Units 1 and 2 respectively. When the calculation runs for the
motor on Unit 1, the references for START and STOP will point to B117 and
B118 respectively. When the calculation runs for the motor on Unit 2, the
references for START and STOP will point to B217 and B218 respectively.
Performance Considerations for Object Referencing

When using relative or absolute object references for calculation inputs and outputs,
there are techniques that can be used to improve performance during the enable
process and reduce the chance for errors.
Using the [Direct] Keyword

When using relative or absolute references, the path to the object should include the
[Direct] keyword. By using this keyword, the platform's name server will resolve
the object reference more efficiently.
Examples:
[Direct][Control Structure]Area_51/Motor_1/On
[Direct][Functional Structure]Sector_7G/Pump_1/On
.[Direct][Control Structure]Signal5
Using the Structure Name

Second, when creating relative references to objects it is important to include the
name of the structure where the object will be found. This is absolutely necessary
when the referenced object appears in more than one structure.
Examples:
.[Direct][Control Structure]Signal5
.[Direct][Functional Structure]P1/A
118 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Managing Calculations
Creating a Calculation as an Object Type

When defining calculations in the Object Type structure, there is an additional
consideration. After entering the structure into the path, the property list will no
longer be populated as the list is built from the object reference, which in the context
of the Object Type Structure is no longer valid. Therefore it is best to select the
property for the reference before adding the name of the specific structure to the
path.
Managing Calculations
Calculations are managed via the Calculations Status Viewer. This viewer supports
the following functionality:
• Reading Calculation Status Information.
• Enabling/Disabling Calculations.
• Distributing Calculations on Multiple Servers.
In addition, the ability to collect and display performance statistics generated by the
Calculation server can be configured.
Some tasks performed in the Status Viewer may be lengthy, for example enabling
or disabling a large number of calculations. DO NOT close or change the Status
Viewer aspect while any Status Viewer task is in progress. The view MUST
remain open until the task is finished; otherwise, the client which is running the
task will be disconnected from the Calculation service.
Take the following measures to ensure that the view remains unchanged and the
client remains connected:
• If the Calculation Status Viewer aspect is hosted within the Plant Explorer
workplace, use the Pin / Unpin feature to ensure that no other aspect
replaces it during the task. Also, do not close the hosting workplace until the
operation is complete.
• If the Calculation Status Viewer aspect is being displayed in a child window,
do not close the window until the operation has completed. Also do not close
the workplace from which the child was launched, as this will close all child
windows.
3BUF001092-510 119
Reading Calculation Status Information Section 4 Configuring Calculations
To access this viewer, go to the Service structure, select the Calculation Server,
Service, and then select the Calculation Status Viewer Aspect, Figure 73.
Figure 73. Launching the Calculations Status Viewer
Then refer to the applicable procedure as described below:

• Reading Calculation Status Information on page 120.
• Enabling/Disabling Calculations on page 121.
• Distributing Calculations on Different Servers on page 122.
• Performance Tracking on page 123.
Reading Calculation Status Information

The status viewer has eight columns of information for each calculation, Figure 74.
These are described in Table 15.
Figure 74. Calculations Status Viewer
120 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Enabling/Disabling Calculations
Table 15. Calculation Status Parameters
Name Calculation Name specified when the aspect was created.
Object Name Name of the object for which the calculation aspect was created.
Object Type Type of object for which the calculation aspect was created.
Enabled Indicates whether a calculation is enabled (True) or disabled (False). Toggle
states via the right-click menu. Refer to Enabling/Disabling Calculations on page
121.
Status Status codes for errors generated by related applications including OPC,
Microsoft, and Softpoint Server. These codes are intended for ABB Technical
Support personnel.
Message Textual message related to status.
Last Execution Date and time that the calculation was last executed.
Service Calculation Server where the calculation runs. This assignment can be
changed. Refer to Distributing Calculations on Different Servers on page 122.
Execution Time Time it took for the last execution of the calculation.
Sorting of columns with numbers or dates is done alphabetically which can yield
unusual sort for dates and numbers.
The following properties will not be updated when the Settings.UpdateStatus line
T
in the script is set to False (default condition): Result, Execution Time, last
Execution, Status, Status Message.
Enabling/Disabling Calculations
To enable or disable one or more calculations, select the calculations in the viewer,
then right click and choose Enable (or Disable) from the context menu, Figure 75.
3BUF001092-510 121
Distributing Calculations on Different Servers Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Figure 75. Enabling Calculations

The Enable button in calculation window does not compile the VBScript before
actually enabling the calculation. Test script in offline mode.
Assign each Calculation to a specific Service Provider BEFORE enabling the

calculation. This procedure is described in Distributing Calculations on Different
Servers on page 122.
Distributing Calculations on Different Servers

Assign each calculation to a specific Calculation Service Provider BEFORE
enabling the calculation. If the system has multiple Calculations Servers, assign
calculations to different servers to distribute the processing load.
To do this, select the calculations to be assigned to a particular server, then right-
click and choose Services from the context menu. This displays the Calculation
Services dialog, Figure 76.
122 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Performance Tracking
Figure 76. Calculation Services Dialogs (Dual on left and Redundant on right)
This dialog lists all Calculation Service Groups and Service Providers that exist in
the current system. Assign the selected calculation to a Calculation Service Group.
In a non-redundant configuration, only one Calculation Service Provider exists in a
Calculation Service Group. In a redundant configuration, two service providers exist
in one group. Their can be multiple Calculation Service Groups.
Performance Tracking
The Calculation Server generates performance statistics that used to monitor and
adjust the load on the server. These statistics may be collected by a softpoint object
created in the Control structure. Employ a trend aspect to monitor the performance
over time, identify peaks during execution, and take corrective action if necessary.
Guidelines for implementing this functionality are provided in:
• Collecting Performance Data for a Calculation Service on page 123.
• Accessing the Performance Data on page 128.
• Improving Performance on page 129.
Collecting Performance Data for a Calculation Service

To collect the performance statistics for a Calculations Server:
1. Create a PerformanceMonitor object type under the Softpoint Objects category
in the Object Type structure. This is facilitated by the PerformanceMonitor.afw
import file provided with the Calculations Services software.
3BUF001092-510 123
Collecting Performance Data for a Calculation Service Section 4 Configuring Calculations
2. Instantiate the PerformanceMonitor object type in the Control structure. The

PerformanceMonitor object must have the same name as the Calculations
Service Provider whose performance data it is logging. This may require
renaming the Calculations Service Provider.
3. Deploy the softpoint configuration.
The Softpoint Server must be running on the same machine as the Calculation
Server for data to be collected.
Detailed instructions for configuring softpoint objects are provided in Section 3,
Configuring Softpoints. The following sections provide guidelines related to the
PerformanceMonitor object for collecting performance statistics.
Creating the PerformanceMonitor Softpoint Object Type

Use the PerformanceMonitor.afw file to create the new softpoint object type and
associated signal types. This file is located in the help/util directory where the
Calculations Services software is installed (Default C:\Program Files\ABB
Industrial IT\Inform IT\Calculations\help\util).
Use the Afw Import/Export tool to load PerformanceMonitor.afw. Browse to the file
in Windows Explorer, and then double-click the file, or open the file from the Afw
Import/Export tool.
With the file open in the Afw Import/Export tool, choose Action>import All. This
creates the PerformanceMonitor object type under the Softpoint Process Object
Type category in the Object Type Structure, Figure 77.
124 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Collecting Performance Data for a Calculation Service
PerformanceMonitor
Softpoint Object Type
Softpoint Signal Types for

Monitoring Performance
Figure 77. Performance Monitor Object Type
Instantiating the PerformanceMonitor in the Control Structure

To start collecting performance data for a particular service, create a new instance of
the PerformanceMonitor object type in the Control Structure. The name given to the
performance monitor object instance must match the name of the Calculation
Service Provider to be monitored.
The softpoint object name cannot contain spaces. If the Calculations Service
Provider name contains spaces (default name contains spaces), rename the
Service Provider before instantiating the PerformanceMonitor softpoint object.
To change the name of a Calculation Service Provider, go to the Services
structure and select the name aspect of the provider as shown in Figure 78.
3BUF001092-510 125
Collecting Performance Data for a Calculation Service Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Figure 78. Changing the Service Provider Name
126 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Collecting Performance Data for a Calculation Service
Create the PerformanceMonitor instance under the Softpoint Object category in the
Control Structure. Remember to use the name of the Calculation Service Provider
when naming the softpoint object, Figure 79.
Figure 79. Instantiating the PerformanceMonitor Object
The instantiated PerformanceMonitor object is illustrated in Figure 80.
Figure 80. Instantiated Performance Monitor
After creating the Performance Monitor object, use the softpoint configuration
aspect to deploy the new softpoint configuration. Refer to Deploying a Softpoint
Configuration on page 68Deploying a Softpoint Configuration for details.
3BUF001092-510 127
Accessing the Performance Data Section 4 Configuring Calculations
Accessing the Performance Data

The softpoint signals for monitoring performance are described in Table 16.
Monitor these signals via the Object dialog as shown in Figure 81.
Table 16. Softpoint Signals for Performance Monitoring
Signal Data Type Description

ExecPerMin Real The number of calculations per minute the calculation service is
currently executing. This value is updated every five seconds.
PendingExec Integer The number of calculations waiting to be executed by the
calculations service (Maximum: 10,000). This value is updated
every second.
If this number grows at a steady rate, the calculation service may
be overloaded or another process may be using all the available
processor time.
RunningEngines Integer The number of calculation engines that are currently executing in
parallel. Each engine executes one calculation. A maximum of
100 engines may be executing concurrently. This value is
updated every second.
TotalEngines Integer The total number of engines currently allocated to run in parallel
(Maximum: 100). This value is updated every second.
On Binary If the state of this signal is TRUE, the signals available for
monitoring will be updated. By default, this signal is turned off
(VALUE = FALSE).
It may be more useful to attach a trend aspect to the PerformanceMonitor object

to monitor trends in the performance statistics over time. For instructions on how
to do this, refer to the section on using operator trend displays in System 800xA
Operation (3BSE036904*).
128 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Improving Performance
Figure 81. Viewing Performance Data Via the Softpoint Object Dialog
Improving Performance
Refer to the Calculations Service Recommendations and Guidelines on page 131 for
specific use cases related to improved stability and predictability of the Calculation
Service.
Several factors affect the execution time for a calculation. These include:
• Number of inputs and outputs.
• Size and nature of the calculation source code.
• Persistence of the data in the aspect directory after calculation execution.
Data persistence can account for up to one-third of the total execution time of a
calculation. This is controlled on an individual calculation basis by the
Settings.UpdateStatus command in the calculation script. By default this
command is set to False. This means STATUS, STATUSMESSAGE,
EXECUTIONTIME, LASTEXECUTION, TRACEMESSAGE, RESULT
properties, and offline output values are NOT updated in the aspect directory upon
completion of the calculation execution. It is generally recommended that the
calculation update status be set to False.
Set the Update Status in the calculation script to true to have these properties
updated. For example, update the calculation properties every n number of
executions by using the Settings.UpdateStatus in a loop that sets the value to TRUE
after n iterations. An example is shown in Figure 82.
Execution times for calculations may be reduced up to 33%. For calculations that do
not execute often or for calculations with logic that require a significant amount of
3BUF001092-510 129
Improving Performance Section 4 Configuring Calculations
time to execute, this savings will be negligible. The savings will be most valuable
for smaller calculations that execute often.
Refer to the considerations below to better understand the consequences of using
the UpdateStatus feature to disable persistence of the calculation properties.
Figure 82. Example, Using UpdateStatus
Considerations when the UpdateStatus is set to False are:

• The STATUS and STATUSMESSAGE properties for the calculation are NOT
updated after execution. Any errors that may have occurred during execution
will not be visible via the Status Viewer aspect or the calculation editor.
• The LASTEXECUTION property for the calculation is NOT updated after
execution. The last execution time of the calculation will not be visible via the
Status Viewer aspect or the calculation editor making it more difficult to verify
the calculation is running. However, use the Now function within the source
code of the calculation to write the current time to an external softpoint.
• The EXECUTIONTIME property for the calculation is NOT updated after
execution. The amount of execution time for the calculation is not shown.
• The RESULT property for the calculation is NOT updated. Any changes to this
from within the source code of the calculation will not be persisted. Chaining
of calculations will require an external data point.
• The TRACEMESSAGE property for the calculation is NOT updated after
execution. Calculation tracing is not available.
• Offline output variables will NOT be updated. Any changes to them from
within the source code of the calculation will not be persisted. External data-
points must be created and used to accomplish the same goal.
130 3BUF001092-510
Section 4 Configuring Calculations Calculations Service Recommendations and Guidelines
Calculations Service Recommendations and Guidelines

The following recommendations for improved stability and predictability of the
Calculation Service have been identified.
Use Case 1 - Settings.UpdateStatus

The script command Settings.UpdateStatus is used to assist with the debugging of a
calculation. The value is set to FALSE by default if it is not present. This setting
should be set to TRUE only while debugging a calculation. If the value is left as
TRUE for long periods of time, there will be additional loading on the Aspect
Server and high levels of memory consumption, potentially leading to system
failure. The system loading is related to the frequency and quantity of calculations
executed.
It is recommended to review all calculations to insure that the
Settings.UpdateStatus variable is set to FALSE or that it is not part of the
calculation at all.
Use Case 2 – Assignment of Output Variables

The script command language is based on Visual BASIC scripting. It has been
observed that in some cases the Visual BASIC scripting language can not determine
the data type of the output variables and can produce unpredictable results.
It is recommended to CAST all output variables to the data type of the actual output
property.
Use Case 3 - SoftPoint Signals Show Bad Data Quality when Calculations are
not Updating Data Quality
The quality of calculations inputs are used as the output if the calculation body does
not expressly set the quality attribute of the output variable. A race condition can
occur where bad data quality can be sent to SoftPoints before the input received
indicating the true data quality from the input signal. This can occur when the
SoftPoint Server is restarted either manually or as part of the reboot of the
subsystem that executed the SoftPoint.
It is recommended when using a SoftPoint as an output destination that as part of the
calculation the data quality should always be set.
3BUF001092-510 131
Use Case 4 – Usage of External Libraries and COM/DCOM from a Calculation Aspect Section 4
Use Case 4 – Usage of External Libraries and COM/DCOM from a Calculation

Aspect
The Calculation Service is designed as an execution platform for performing
calculations. The Calculation Service is not a programming platform to integrate
any and all external functions. This is especially important when considering the use
of function libraries and functions which may use COM/DCOM or external
communication. It is not recommended to use functions that may produce
unpredictable results or may require external network based communication as part
of the processing.
Use Case 5 – Usage of Calculations in a Redundant Configuration

The Calculation Service is typically configured nonredundant by default. The
Calculation Service can be configured as a redundant configuration. The
configuration changes must be performed manually for a redundant Calculation
Service, The Service Group must be extended with a second Service Provider. Only
one Calculation Service Provider can be defined on a single node.
Calculations defined to execute on the Service Group where the Service Group is
define with a primary and secondary Service Provider will execute on the primary
Service Provider and if a failure occurs of the primary Service Group the
calculations will be moved to the secondary Service Provider as defined in the
Service Group. The execution on the secondary service is independent and no status
or state information is exchanged between the primary and secondary servers other
than what is available in the aspect directory. When the primary server has returned
to service, the calculations will be moved back to the primary Service Provider and
the secondary Service Provider will return to standby.
Use Case 6 - Calculations Service Diagnostic Messages

The Calculations Service may send out at least one diagnostic each time the
Calculation executes and can not write to one of the output variables.
After Calculations are deployed, review the Calculation Service event list for
diagnostics indicating that the outputs are failing. Correct any outputs that are
pointing to incorrect or nonexistent object properties.
132 3BUF001092-510
Section 5 Configuring History Database
Introduction
This section provides details on configuring History databases.
Changing the Default History Database Instance

History Services database configuration is not possible until a History database
instance is created. A History database instance is created as a post installation step.
If the database requirements were known, then the instance may already be properly
configured. If those requirements were not known, a default database instance was
probably created. The default database meets the requirements of many History
applications. When necessary, drop the default instance and create a new larger
instance depending on performance requirements. This should be done BEFORE
configuring the database and collecting historical data.
This procedure requires logging in as a HistoryAdmin user. Refer to Managing
Users on page 569.
Dropping the Default Database Instance

To drop the default database instance:
1. Launch the History Database Maintenance wizard, Figure 83.
– from the configuration assistant, select Create History Database then
click Run Selected Configuration Tool.
– from the Start menu, choose Start>Programs> ABB Industrial IT
800xA>Information Mgmt>History> Oracle Instance Wizard.
The Maintenance option is for viewing and adjusting table sizing. Do NOT use
this option unless the requirements for managing Oracle databases is known.
3BUF001092-510 133
Dropping the Default Database Instance Section 5 Configuring History Database
Figure 83. Instance Maintenance Wizard
2. Click Drop Database.

A warning message is displayed to confirm whether or not to drop the database
instance: “Are you sure you want to drop the Oracle Instance? All
configurations and data that have not been backed up will be lost.”.
The History database configuration and all Oracle-based Historical data will be
lost when the database instance is dropped.
3. Click Yes to continue dropping the database instance. The time to complete this
process may take up to several minutes. Progress is indicated by the History
Database Instance Delete message.
Once the default database instance has been dropped, create a new properly sized
instance. Refer to the Post Installation book Information Management section for
information on creating a new database instance.
134 3BUF001092-510
Section 5 Configuring History Database Duplicating an Existing Configuration
Duplicating an Existing Configuration

Once a properly sized instance is created, the configuration can be duplicated on
several machines. A configuration file exists in the following location:
C:\ProgramData\ABB\IM\History\instance_config.txt
Use this configuration file with the Existing Configuration option.
Maintaining the Oracle Instance

Use the instance wizard to maintain data files after the database instance is created.
The general procedure for modifying a data file is:
1. Choose Start>Programs> ABB Industrial IT 800xA>Information
Mgmt>History> Oracle Instance Wizard. The wizard, Figure 83, supports
the activities described in Table 17.
2. Click the appropriate Table Space Description on the History Database
Maintenance display.
3. Make the changes to the data file and then click OK to the Data Files changes.
4. On the History Database Maintenance display click Apply to update Oracle
and the configuration file. Clicking Cancel after changes are made displays a
message to verify the cancel.
Table 17. Utilities Supported by the Instance Maintenance Wizard
Tab Refer to When to Use

Tablespaces Extending Oracle Tablespace Via Greater storage capacity than provided by
Instance Maintenance Wizard on default set up is required.
page 136
Flat Files Flat File Maintenance via the Pick a drive and size limit.
Instance Maintenance Wizard on
page 137
3BUF001092-510 135
Tablespace Maintenance Considerations Section 5 Configuring History Database
Tablespace Maintenance Considerations

Oracle tablespaces will be sized correctly if the correct choices are made for each
log type in Oracle Instance wizard. Also putting Oracle and file-based data on
dedicated data drives rather than the system drive, allows tablespaces to autoextend
up to 32 Gigabytes, if available, on the drive where they reside. Additional data files
must be added manually. Not making the correct selections based on your storage
requirements can cause tablespace to run out.
Be sure to configure the Oracle History table space for Index and Runtime large
enough to support your storage requirements. If these are not properly sized (when
the Oracle database instance is created), messages will be lost when these tables
reach their maximum size.
Extending Oracle Tablespace Via Instance Maintenance Wizard

This report provides a summary of the currently used table space, the current
allocation and the maximum file size available in both a bar graph and table format.
When the indicated Used Space for a tablespace reaches its Total Space, the
corresponding Datafile may autoextend if it is configured to do so. This is specified
in the Autoextend column. If Auto Extend is checked, the Datafile capacity will be
extended by the amount indicated in the Extend By (MB) column. The Datafile
may be extended in this manner up to the specified Max Size (MB).
Add Datafiles for a Tablespace by clicking the Add New Data File button. This
adds a new row to the table. Modify any row as required directly in the table as
described below. Click OK to save the changes or Cancel to exit without saving.
Disk Drive Use the pull down to select a drive letter.

File Name Enter a name for the file. Include the file extension .DBF
File Size Specify the starting capacity for this file in megabytes.
This will be indicated in the Cur Size column.
Auto Extend Check to set Auto Extend. If left unchecked, the Datafile
will not autoextend.
136 3BUF001092-510
Section 5 Configuring History DatabaseFlat File Maintenance via the Instance Maintenance Wizard
Extend By Specify the size of additional increments to extend by

when the used space reaches the file size space. This is
ignored if Autoextend is disabled.
Max Size Enter the limit for auto extending the Datafile. This is
ignored if Autoextend is disabled.
Flat File Maintenance via the Instance Maintenance Wizard

Use the Instance Maintenance Wizard Flat File tab, Figure 84, to select a location
for flat file space from a list of drives available for History data storage. Select the
Flat File Quota (MB) column for a drive and enter the size of the desired flat file
space.
Figure 84. Flat Files Maintenance Tab
If there is 1 GB of Flat File space on a drive and this is reduced to 0 MB on that

drive, then the wizard automatically makes the Flat file space 1 GB. This keeps the
Flat File space and prevents it from growing beyond its current size.
Disk Usage Summary via the Instance Maintenance Wizard

Use the Instance Maintenance Wizard Disk Usage Summary tab, Figure 84, to
refer to disk space usage from a list of drives available for History data storage.
Select the a drive to refer to the usage.
3BUF001092-510 137
Change the Default Oracle User Passwords Section 5 Configuring History Database
Figure 85. Disk Usage Summary Tab
Change the Default Oracle User Passwords

The default Oracle users are described in Oracle Users on page 572. The current
Oracle user information resides in the Oracle table named dba_users. The passwords
for the following users need to be changed to make the system secure: SYS,
SYSTEM, OUTLN, DBSNMP, and OPS$OCSHIS. This can be done by using the
Change Password button.
In Oracle 11, passwords are case sensitive.
138 3BUF001092-510
Section 6 Configuring Log Sets
Introduction
Log sets is used to start or stop data collection for a number of property or message
logs simultaneously with one command. A log can be assigned to one or two log
sets. The only restriction is that all logs in the log set must reside in the same node.
For convenience, build log sets prior to building the logs so the log can be assigned
to a log set when it is configured. Logs can still be added to log sets later.
Log set should be avoided if possible. They exist primarily for migrations from
Enterprise Historian systems to 800xA. There are configurations where log sets
are required when profile logs are used. However, for non-profile applications
they should be avoided if possible.
Trend logs cannot be started and stopped with log sets. This functionality is only
applicable for history logs.
The operating parameters for a log set are specified in a Log Set aspect. A dedicated
aspect is required for each log set that needs to be configured. To create a Log Set
aspect, create a Log Set object under a specific server node in the Node
Administration structure refer to Adding a Log Set on page 140. The Log Set aspect
is automatically created for the object. To configure the Log Set aspect, refer to Log
Set Aspect on page 141.
Once the log sets are built, assign the logs to their respective log sets. This is done
via each log’s configuration aspect:
• For property logs this is done via the IM Definition tab of the Property Log
Configuration aspect and is described in Assigning a Log to a Log Set on page
259.
• For message logs, refer to Message Log Aspect on page 150.
3BUF001092-510 139
Adding a Log Set Section 6 Configuring Log Sets
Adding a Log Set

This procedure describes how to add a Log Set object to a specific Information
Management server node in the Node Administration Structure. To do this:
1. In the Plant Explorer, select the Node Administration Structure.
2. Navigate to and expand the object tree for the node where the log set is to be
added (for example, ROC90in Figure 86).
3. In the object tree for the selected node, navigate to InformIT
History_nodeName Service Provider > InformIT History Object.
Under the InformIT History Object find containers for each of the Inform IT
History object types. The History objects (in this case, a log set) must be
instantiated under the corresponding container.
4. From the Log Sets group and choose New Object from the context menu.
This displays the New Object dialog with the Inform IT Log Set object type
selected, Figure 87.
Node Where Log Set Object

is Being Added

Figure 86. Adding a Log Set in the Node Administration Structure
140 3BUF001092-510
Section 6 Configuring Log Sets Log Set Aspect
5. Enter a name for the object in the Name field, for example: LogSet1.
6. Click Create. This adds the object under the Log Sets group, and creates a
corresponding Log Set Aspect.
Figure 87. Selecting the Inform IT Log Set in the New Object Dialog
Log Set Aspect

Use the Log Set aspect, Figure 88, to:
• Specify Log Set Operating Parameters.
• Activate/Deactivate Logs in a Log Set.
• Delete a Log Set.
For Profile Historian applications, all Profile Logs associated with a specific
machine must be grouped in the same log set, and that log set must have the same
name as the machine.
3BUF001092-510 141
Specify Log Set Operating Parameters Section 6 Configuring Log Sets
Selected Log Set Aspect

Log Set Aspect View
Figure 88. Accessing the Configuration View for the Log Set Aspect
Specify Log Set Operating Parameters

Select the Log Set aspect, and then configure the log set operating parameters as
described in Table 18. Click Apply when finished.
Table 18. Log Set Attributes
Attribute Description
Service Group When adding the Log Set object in the Node Administration structure, the
Service Group defaults to the Basic History Service Group for the selected
node. This specification cannot be changed.
Location This is a read-only field which indicates the node where the log set will run
based on the selected Service Group.
142 3BUF001092-510
Section 6 Configuring Log Sets Activate/Deactivate Logs in a Log Set
Table 18. Log Set Attributes (Continued)
Set Name The log set name can be up to 32 characters. If the length limitation is
exceeded it will be truncated to size. This name will replace the object name
given when this object was created. DO NOT use spaces in the log set name
or the object name will be truncated at the space when the log set name
replaces the object name.
The log set name can not be changed in the Configuration View of the Log Set
aspect. Once it is entered in the Set Name field and Apply is clicked, DO NOT
change the name of the aspect. This will cause any new log configurations
pointing to the history template that references the renamed log set to fail
when created.
Description The description is optional. The length limitation is 40 characters.
Log Status This field indicates whether the logs in this log set are active or inactive. Refer
to Activate/Deactivate Logs in a Log Set on page 143.
Logs in Set This is a read-only field that lists the logs in this log set. No entries can be
made. To assign logs to a log set, refer to Assigning a Log to a Log Set on
page 259.
Number of Logs This field indicates the total number of logs in the log set.
Activate/Deactivate Logs in a Log Set

Activating or deactivating a log set affects all of the logs belonging to that log set.
To activate or deactivate a log set, go to Log Set Aspect, click Mode and choose
Activate or Deactivate from the context menu.
Delete a Log Set

Before a log set can be deleted, it must not contain any logs. To delete a log set:
2. Navigate to and expand the object tree for the node with the log set to be
deleted.
History_nodeName Service Provider > InformIT History Object>Log Sets.
4. Right-click on the Log Set object that to be deleted and choose Delete from the
context menu.
3BUF001092-510 143
Delete a Log Set Section 6 Configuring Log Sets
144 3BUF001092-510
Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging
Using Message Logs

This section describes how to integrate the 800xA System Message Server with
Information Management History Server, and how to configure message logs. All
alarm and event messages for the 800xA system, including Process, Operator, and
Audit Trail messages, are collected and stored by the 800xA System Message
Server. This provides a short-term storage facility with the capacity to store up to
50,000 messages. The messages can be organized into filtered lists for viewing.
Refer to System 800xA Operation (3BSE036904*).
If Information Management History Server is installed, the messages stored by
800xA System Message Server may be forwarded to a Information Management
message log for extended online storage. This message log can filter and store up to
12 million messages. In addition, an Information Management History Server
allows messages from multiple servers to be consolidated onto a dedicated
consolidation node, and the messages can be saved on an archive media for
permanent offline storage.
3BUF001092-510 145
Message Log Overview Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging
Process History Server

Alarms/Events OPC Message Log (IMMSGLOG)
800xA System Stores Up To 12 Million Messages

Alarm/Event Message Server Supports Message Consolidation
Operator
Alarms/Events Supports Message Archive
Stores Up To 50,000 Messages Supports Filtered Event Storage
Audit Trail
Alarms/Events
Figure 89. Alarm/Event Message Logging Overview
Begin with any one of the following topics to suite your depth of knowledge of
message logs:
• If unfamiliar with message logs, refer to Message Log Overview on page 146
for a quick introduction.
• To configure message logs refer to Configuring Message Logs on page 148.
Message Log Overview

Message logs store events and system messages that are generated by control and
operator applications. Three types of message logs are available, depending on
where the events occur and what functionality is needed:
• Alarms and events which are buffered in the 800xA System Message Service
may be forwarded to an OPC_MESSAGE log type. This type of storage is
modeled after the data definitions in the OPC/Alarm and Event specification.
This includes Audit Trail messages. The Audit Trail function tracks operator
changes such as activating/deactivating historical logs, changes to production
data, log configuration changes, and so on. The log stores the identification of
the person that made the change, time that the change was made, previous and
new value for the data being changed, as well as other information.
146 3BUF001092-510
Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging Message Log Overview
• The PDLMSGLOG log type is a special implementation of the

OPC_MESSAGE log type for storing batch events related to Batch
Management.
Configuring Oracle Access for Message Logs

Message log data is stored in an Oracle database. Client applications such as
Display Services and DataDirect access Oracle-based History data, including
message logs, via an ADO data provider named DBA. The data provider must be
configured and must reside on the same node where the message logs reside. The
ADO data provider configuration is performed as a post-installation procedure and
can be verified via the ADSS Config tool in the Windows Control Panel.
Accessing Message Log Data

Messages can be read via interactive dialogs in DataDirect and Desktop Trends.
DataDirect is also used to specify re-executable functions for implementing reports.
Data can also be accessed directly using SQL queries. Refer to System 800xA
Information Management Data Access and Reports (3BUF001094*).
Using an Alarm and Event List to Read Messages

Alarm and Event List aspects are used to view up to 50,000 messages stored in the
800xA system message service. This aspect can be configured to read messages
from the Information Management message log rather than the 800xA system
message service. The message log has the capacity to store up to 12 million
messages for browsing farther back in time. Use the message log to maximize the
scope of the Alarm and Event List aspect when it is used as the basis for a report.
Refer to Accessing a Message Log with an Alarm and Event List on page 158.
The Alarm and Event List aspect may also be configured to retrieve archived
messages on a specified archive volume, or archived messages which have been
published or restored.
3BUF001092-510 147
Configuring Message Logs Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging
Message Log Consolidation

Alarm/event messages from multiple servers may be consolidated onto a dedicated
consolidation node using the Application Scheduler and IM Consolidation action
plug-in as described in Section 12, Consolidating Historical Data.
Offline Storage
Events and messages stored in a message log can be copied to an offline storage
media. Refer to Section 11, Configuring the Archive Function.
Checking the Connection to 800xA System Message Services

If messages related to history are not being collected by the 800xA message
services, check for the presence of the history OPC alarm server. Refer to
Integrating System Message and History Servers on page 482.
The Event Log Collector collects all the events from 800xA system message
queues. When a Message queue gets full it will overwrite the oldest events as newer
events come in. If a burst of many events is expected for a particular Event Category,
then consider filtering those events or increasing the storage sizes in the 800xA
system message configuration. For example, a burst for a particular Event Category
of 100 events per second for a duration of 5 minutes means that the storage size
must be configured to handle 30,000 events. This can be filtered. The typical system
message configuration default storage is sized for 10,000 events.
Configuring Message Logs

The operating parameters for a message log are specified via a Message Log object.
A dedicated object is required for each message log. Typically, only one message
log is required for each message log type being used (OPC, PDL, or DCS). These
Message Log objects must be added under a specific node in the Node
Administration structure.
To proceed, first create the Message Log object in the Node Administration
structure, as described in Adding a Message Log on page 149. Then configure the
Message Log, as described in Message Log Aspect on page 150.
148 3BUF001092-510
Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging Adding a Message Log
Adding a Message Log

To add a Message Log object (reference Figure 90):
2. Navigate to and expand the object tree for the node where the message log is to
be added (for example ROC90 in Figure 90).
History object types. The History objects (in this case, a message log) must be
4. Right-click on the Message Logs group and choose New Object from the
context menu. This displays the New Object dialog with the Inform IT
Message Log object type selected.
5. Enter IMMSGLOG for the object in the Name field then click Create. This
adds the object under the Message Logs group. Using IMMSGLOG causes the
log name to default to IMMSGLOG and the IM server IP address will be
automatically appended (refer to Message Logging for 800xA System Alarm
and Event Server on page 152).
3BUF001092-510 149
Message Log Aspect Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging
Node Where Message Log

Object is Being Added

Figure 90. Adding a Message Log in the Node Administration Structure
Message Log Aspect

Use the Message Log aspect, Figure 91, to:
• Specify Message Log Operating Parameters.
• Delete a Message Log.
150 3BUF001092-510
Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging Specify Message Log Operating Parameters
Selected Message Log Object Message Log Aspect
Message Log Aspect View
Figure 91. Accessing the Configuration View for the Message Log Aspect
Specify Message Log Operating Parameters

To configure a message log:
1. Select Message Log aspect.
2. Select the log type, and then follow the guidelines for the message logging
application as listed below. Details regarding message log attributes are
provided in Table 19.
– Message Logging for 800xA System Alarm and Event Server on page
152.
– Message Logging for Batch Management on page 153.
3BUF001092-510 151
Message Logging for 800xA System Alarm and Event Server Section 7 Alarm/Event Message
3. When finished, click Apply.

• Access Names - Access names for message logs can not exceed 64
characters. The access name will replace the object name given when this
object was created. DO NOT use spaces in the log set name or the object
name will be truncated at the space when the log set name replaces the
object name.
• Activation - Activation is optional for OPC message logs. Data will be
stored in either state. If the log is active, none of the configuration
parameters can be modified.
• Capacity - Specify a log capacity for the message log. The log capacity for a
message log defines the number of messages it can hold. Details are
provided in Table 19.
Message Logging for 800xA System Alarm and Event Server

The 800xA System Alarm/Event Server requires a message log of the type
OPC_MESSAGE. The log name defaults to IMMSGLOG_IP_ipaddress where
ipaddress is the IP address of the node where the log resides, Figure 92. This log
will collect from the default system.
If an IMMSGLOG is being configured to consolidate messages from other OPC
message logs, and the IMMSGLOG is to be dedicated to consolidation and will not
be used to collect messages for the local node, use a prefix to avoid appending the
local node IP address, for example: CIMMSGLOGforEng444. For further
information on setting up message log consolidation, refer to Consolidating
Message Logs and PDLs on page 389.
152 3BUF001092-510
Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging Message Logging for Batch Management
Figure 92. OPC_MESSAGE Log for 800xA System Alarm/Event Server
Message Logging for Batch Management

Batch Management requires a message log of the type OPC_MESSAGE. This log
must be given the unique access name: PDLMSGLOG. When this access name is
entered, the IP address for the local History server is automatically appended to the
access name, Figure 93.
3BUF001092-510 153
Message Log Attributes Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging
Figure 93. Access Name for Batch Management Message Log
When configuring a PDL_MESSAGE log to consolidate messages from other

PDL_MESSAGE logs, configure ONE consolidation message log to collect from
ALL other PDL_MESSAGE logs. This log must be named using the conventions
previously described. DO NOT use a prefix when specifying the access name.
For further information on setting up message log consolidation, refer to
Consolidating Message Logs and PDLs on page 389.
Message Log Attributes

Message Log Attributes are described in Table 19.
Table 19. Message Log Attributes
Service Group When adding the Message Log object in the Node Administration structure, the
Service Group defaults to the Basic History Service Group for the selected
node. This specification cannot be changed.
Location This is a read-only field which indicates the node where the message log will
run based on the selected Service Group.
154 3BUF001092-510
Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging Message Log Attributes
Table 19. Message Log Attributes (Continued)
Message Log Select the message log type before configuring any other parameters.
Type • For 800xA System Alarm/Event messages select OPC_MESSAGE.
• Batch Management messages select OPC_MESSAGE.
• For Advant OCS messages (for consolidating message logs from earlier
Enterprise Historian systems) select DCS_MESSAGE.
Access Name Assign the access name according to the selected message log type. Refer to:
• Message Logging for 800xA System Alarm and Event Server on page 152.
• Message Logging for Batch Management on page 153.
The access name text string can be 64 characters maximum. If the length
limitation is exceeded it will be truncated to size.
NOTE: The access name will replace the object name given when this object
was created. DO NOT use spaces in the log set name or the object name will be
truncated at the space when the log set name replaces the object name.
Description This field may be used to enter an optional text string. It does not have to be
unique system wide. The length limitation is 40 characters. All characters are
allowed.
Description has a special application for DCS MESSAGE logs in systems with
Master software.
Log Name History assigns a default log name by adding a prefix $HS and a suffix -1-o to
the access name. The last character in the log name indicates whether the log
is original (from disk) or restored from tape: o = original, r = restored
The default log name can be edited but can not be more than 64 characters. It
must be unique system wide.
Capacity The log capacity for the message log must be configured. This is the number of
messages the log can hold. If a log is full, new entries replace the oldest entries.
Specify the capacity as the number of messages needed to maintain online.
The maximum capacity is 12 million (12000000) entries; however, the field will
accept numerical values up to 9999999. Note that configuring the log capacity
larger than required will needlessly consume more disk space.
3BUF001092-510 155
Message Log Attributes Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging
Archive Group This is the archive group to which this log is assigned. This assignment can also
be made via the Archive Group aspect as described in Configuring Archive
Groups on page 331.
Start State Log state upon starting or restarting the node.
Start Inactive
Start Active
Start Last State - restart in state log had when node shut down (default)
Start Time The earliest allowable system time that the log can become active. If the
specified start time has already past, the log will begin to store data at the next
storage interval.
If the start time is in the future, the log will go to PENDING state until the start
time arrives. The default is 01-01-1990 00:00:00.
156 3BUF001092-510
Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging Delete a Message Log
Log Set and Log set to which this log belongs. The log can be reassigned to a new log set.
Second Log Set Note: The user of log sets should be avoided.
Log State This is the current state of the log.

• Inactive - stores data, attributes can be modified.
• Active - stores data, attributes cannot be modified.
• Pending - log has been activated and is waiting for the Start Time in order
to change to active.
Individual logs can be activated or de-activated using the Mode button in the
Message Log aspect and choosing Activate or Deactivate. Multiple logs can
be activated and de-activated on a log set basis.
When activating a log set, the Log State attributes of all logs in the set go to
Active. The time when a log is scheduled to start collecting data is the log’s
alignment time.
Alignment time is the intersection of the log’s Start Time and its storage interval.
For instance if the start time is 06-30-1999 10:00:00, and the storage interval
is15s, the log will store data at 00, 15, 30, and 45 seconds of each minute
starting at 10:00:00 on June 30, 1999. This is the alignment time.
If the start time for a log has already passed, it will be aligned based on the
storage interval. For example, a log with a storage interval of 1m will store data
at the beginning of each minute. So its alignment time is the beginning of the
next minute.
The log stays in PENDING state until its alignment time. For the log whose
storage interval is 1 minute, it will be PENDING until the start of the next minute.
Delete a Message Log

A message log must be inactive to be deleted. To delete a message log:
2. Navigate to and expand the object tree for the node where the message log is to
be deleted.
3BUF001092-510 157
Accessing a Message Log with an Alarm and Event List Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging

History_nodeName Service Provider > InformIT History Object>Message
Logs.
4. Right-click on the Message Log object that to be deleted and choose Delete
from the context menu.
Accessing a Message Log with an Alarm and Event List

The configuration that supports this functionality is illustrated in Figure 94. To do
this, the following three types of aspects on an object must be created and
configured:
• Alarm and Event List.
• Alarm and Event List Configuration.
• A/E Linked Server Configuration.
Figure 94. Configuration for Reading Message Log from Alarm and Event List
These aspects may be added to any object in any structure. However, it is generally
recommended that a generic object be created and then all three aspects added to
that object. This allows use of the same Alarm and Event List view in multiple
locations in the plant (in more than one structure). To do this, create one object with
these three aspects and use the Insert Object function to represent it in multiple
locations. Otherwise, the three aspects would need to be added to multiple objects.
158 3BUF001092-510
Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging Accessing a Message Log with an Alarm and Event List
The A/E Linked Server Configuration aspect must be configured to specify the
Information Management server where the message log resides. It must also be
configured to specify one of four classes of alarm/event data to read:
• Messages currently stored in the message log.
• Published messages.
• Restored messages.
• Messages residing on a specified archive volume.
To read more than one class of message, configure a separate object with all three
aspects for each class.
The Alarm and Event Configuration aspect must be configured to direct the Alarm
Event List aspect to access messages from the Information Management message
log rather than the 800xA system message service. This is done via the Source field
on this aspect.
Finally, the Alarm and Event List aspect must be configured to use to the Alarm and
Event List Configuration aspect described above.
3BUF001092-510 159
To create this configuration:

1. Create a generic type object in the structure where the Alarm and Event list will
reside, for example, the Functional structure as shown in Figure 95. Give the
object a meaningful name. For example, use the Information Management
server node name in combination with the type of message log to be handled by
the Alarm and Event List aspect (current message log, restored, published, or
specified archive volume).
Figure 95. Creating a Generic Type Object
2. Add the three aforementioned aspects to the new Generic type object.
160 3BUF001092-510
a. The Alarm and Event List aspect is located under the Alarm and Events
category in the New Aspect dialog, Figure 96.
Figure 96. Adding the Alarm and Event List Aspect
b. The Alarm and Event List Configuration aspect is added differently.

– Open the Config View of the Alarm and Event List aspect.
– Use the Library Structure to select the Common System Event List
Configuration aspect and click Apply. Refer to Figure 97.
– Click Copy Template and then Apply. An Alarm and Event List
Configuration aspect is now added to the object. Refer to Figure 98.
3BUF001092-510 161
Figure 97. Common System Event List Configuration Aspect
Figure 98. Creating Alarm and Event List Configuration Aspect
162 3BUF001092-510
c. The A/E Linked Server Configuration aspect is located under the

Industrial IT Archive Group, Figure 99.
Figure 99. Creating the A/E Linked Server Configuration Aspect
3. Configure the A/E Linked Server Configuration aspect to specify the

Information Management server where the message log resides, and to select
the type of message to read. To do this:
a. Select the A/E Linked Server Configuration aspect.
b. Use the pull-down list to select the service group for Information
Management server, Figure 100.
3BUF001092-510 163
Figure 100. Selecting the Information Management Server
c. Select one of the four mutually exclusive radio buttons to select the type of
messages to read, Figure 101. The categories are described in Table 20.
To read more than one type of message, configure a separate object with all three
aspects for each type.
d. Click Apply when done.
Table 20. Retrieved Data Categories
Category Description
Retrieve Near-Online A/E Data by Retrieves messages currently stored in the message
Log Name log.
Retrieve Restored A/E Data Retrieves messages that have been restored from an
archive media.
Retrieve Published A/E Data by Retrieves messages from all published volumes.
Log name
Retrieve Archived A/E Data by Location Retrieves messages from a selected archive volume.
164 3BUF001092-510
Figure 101. Selecting the Class of Message to Retrieve
4. Configure the Source on the Filter tab of the Alarm and Event List
Configuration aspect to direct the Alarm and Event List aspect to read from the
Information Management message log. To do this (reference Figure 102):
a. Select the Alarm and Event List Configuration aspect.
b. Select the Filter tab.
c. Select IM Archive Events from the Source pull-down list.
d. Click Apply.
Figure 102. Configuring the Event Source
3BUF001092-510 165
Creating an Inform IT Event Filter Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging
e. Enable the Condition Events, Simple Events, and Tracking Events options
in the Categories area.
f. Click Apply.
Creating an Inform IT Event Filter

Events from the PPA Event Storage Service can be filtered from being collected by
the history event log collector. Tracking events (audit trail) and IM History events
will always be logged and can not be filtered. To create the Inform IT Event Filter
aspect, do the following.
1. Select the Inform IT History Object in the Node Admin / Inform IT History
structure.
2. Add an Alarm and Event List Configuration aspect.
3. The aspect must be named (case sensitive): Inform IT Event Filter
4. Configure the aspect. Only the Category Filters can be used. All other areas are
ignored for event filter storage use.
– If no Categories are is checked or if all Categories are checked, then no
filter is applied.
– Exclude a Category by selecting all and then uncheck the Category to be
filtered.
– Tracking Category and IM History Category are never filtered and any
setting is ignored.
Filtering produces an event message. While setting a filter permanently saves
storage space, the filter can also be used to better manage bursts of activity or other
special conditions.
Figure 103 shows an example of Soft Alarms being excluded from events.
166 3BUF001092-510
Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging Creating an Inform IT Event Filter
Figure 103. Inform IT Event Filter Aspect
3BUF001092-510 167
Creating an Inform IT Event Filter Section 7 Alarm/Event Message Logging
168 3BUF001092-510
Section 8 Historizing Reports
Introduction
This section describes how to configure report logs to store finished reports
scheduled and executed via the Application Scheduler and Report action plug-in.
Completed reports may also be stored by embedding them in a completed report
object in the Scheduling structure. This must be specified within the Report Action.
Reports stored either as objects, or in a report log can be archived on either a cyclic
or manual basis. This is described in Section 11, Configuring the Archive Function.
Access to archived reports logs is via the View Reports aspect as described in the
section on viewing archive data in System 800xA Information Management Data
Access and Reports (3BUF001094*). When reviewing a restored report log, it will
be presented in the tool appropriate for the type of file the report was saved as (i.e.
Internet Explorer will be launched if the report was saved in .html format).
Generally, one report log is dedicated to one report. For instance, a WKLY_SUM
report will have a log especially for it. Each week’s version of the WKLY_SUM
report is put into the report log. Different report logs are then used for other reports.
More than one type of report can be sent to one report log if desired. Each report log
can be specified as to how many report occurrences to save.
Report Log Configuration Guidelines

The operating parameters for a report log are specified in a Report Log aspect. A
dedicated aspect is required for each report log to be configured.
To create a Report Log aspect, create a Report Log object under a specific node in
the Node Administration structure. The Report Log aspect is automatically created
for the object. To create the Report Log object in the Node Administration structure,
refer to Adding a Report Log on page 170.
3BUF001092-510 169
Adding a Report Log Section 8 Historizing Reports
To configure the Report Log aspect, refer to Report Log Aspect on page 171.
Adding a Report Log

This section describes how to add a Report Log object to the applicable node in the
Node Administration Structure. To do this (reference Figure 104):
2. Navigate to and expand the object tree for the node where the report log is to be
added (for example, ROC90 in Figure 104).
Node Where Report Log

Object is Being Added

Figure 104. Adding a Report Log in the Node Administration Structure

170 3BUF001092-510
Section 8 Historizing Reports Report Log Aspect
History object types. The History objects (in this case, a report log) must be
4. Right-click on the Report Logs group and choose New Object from the
context menu. This displays the New Object dialog with the Inform IT Report
Log object type selected.
5. Enter a name for the object in the Name field, for example: ReportLog1, then
click Create. This adds the object under the Report Logs group, and creates a
corresponding Report Log Aspect.
Report Log Aspect

Use the Inform IT History Report Log aspect, Figure 105, to:
• Configure Report Log Operating Parameters.
• Delete a Report Log.
• View a Report Log.
Figure 105. Report Log Aspect
3BUF001092-510 171
Configure Report Log Operating Parameters Section 8 Historizing Reports
Configure Report Log Operating Parameters

When building a report log, keep the following in mind:
• Report logs do not have to be activated in order to store reports. Therefore, log
sets, log state, start state, and start time are not applicable for report logs.
• Be sure to specify the log capacity for a report log. Refer to Table 21.
• The report log’s access name is the name used in the Report Scheduler to
identify the log when reports are sent to it.
Build the report log via the Report Log Aspect. Make the appropriate entries as
described in Table 21. Then click Apply.
Table 21. Report Log Attributes
Service Group When adding the Report Log object in the Node Administration structure,
the Service Group defaults to the Basic History Service Group for the
selected node. This specification cannot be changed.
Location This is a read-only field which indicates the node where the report log will
run based on the selected Service Group.
Access Name This is the name assigned the log for retrieval. Generally, use the name of
the report as specified in the report building package. Use either the access
name or log name to retrieve the data in a log.
The access name text string can be 64 characters maximum. If the length
limitation is exceeded it will be truncated to size.
NOTE: This name will replace the object name given when this object was
created. DO NOT use spaces in the access name or the object name will be
truncated at the space when the log set name replaces the object name.
Description An optional text string for documentation purposes only. It does not have to
be unique system wide. The length limitation is 40 characters maximum. All
characters allowed.
172 3BUF001092-510
Section 8 Historizing Reports Delete a Report Log
Table 21. Report Log Attributes
Log Name The log name must be unique system wide. It is derived from the access
name. History assigns a default log name by adding a prefix $HS and a
suffix -n-o to the access name. n is an integer that uniquely identifies
different logs in a composite log. This value will always be 1 since no other
logs can exist in a composite log containing a report log. The last character
in the log name indicates whether the log is original (from disk) or restored
from tape: o = original, r = restored
The default log name can be edited but can not be more than 64 characters.
It must be unique system wide.
Capacity This is the number of reports the log can hold. Be sure to specify a log
capacity for report logs. The field will accept numeric values up to 9999. If a
log is full, new entries replace the oldest entries.
Archive Group This is the archive group to which this log is assigned. This assignment can
also be made via the Archive Group aspect as described in Configuring
Archive Groups on page 331.
Delete a Report Log

To delete a report log:
2. Navigate to and expand the object tree for the node where the report log is to be
deleted.
3. In the object tree for the selected node, navigate to InformIT History_Basic
Service Provider > InformIT History Object>Report Logs.
4. Right-click on the Report Log object that to be deleted and choose Delete from
the context menu.
View a Report Log

View report logs via the Inform IT View Report Logs aspect for the Report Logs
container in the Node Administration structure. For details, refer to the section on
viewing archive data in System 800xA Information Management Data Access and
Reports (3BUF001094*).
3BUF001092-510 173
View a Report Log Section 8 Historizing Reports
174 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Introduction
Process data collection refers to the collection and storage of numeric values from
aspect object properties. This includes properties for live process data, softpoint
data, and lab data (programmatically generated, or manually entered). This
functionality is supported by property log objects.
Process data collection may be implemented on two levels in the 800xA system.
The standard system offering supports storage of operator trend data via trend logs.
When the Information Management History Server function is installed, extended
and permanent offline storage (archive) is supported via history logs. This section
describes how to integrate and configure operator trend and history logs.
Begin with any one of the following topics depending on your current depth of
knowledge on property logs:
• To learn the concept of property logs, refer to Property Log Overview on page
176.
• If History Source aspects have not yet been configured in the system, refer to
Configuring Node Assignments for Property Logs on page 181. This must be
done before the logs are activated and historical data collection begins.
• To learn about important considerations and configuration tips before actually
beginning to configure property logs, refer to History Configuration Guidelines
on page 186.
• For a quick demonstration on how to configure a property log, refer to Building
a Simple Property Log on page 188.
• For details on specific property log applications, refer to:
– Lab Data Logs for Asynchronous User Input on page 203.
– Event-driven Data Collection on page 204.
– History Logs with Calculations on page 211.
3BUF001092-510 175
Property Log Overview Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Property Log Overview

Property logs typically collect synchronous (periodic) data from properties that
represent real-time process measurements. Property logs may also collect
asynchronous data that is input manually (lab data), or synchronous data generated
by a user program.
To begin implementing process data collection, one or more History Log Templates
is created in the Library Structure. Each template serves as a model for a specific
data collection scheme such as the one shown in Figure 106. The template defines a
log hierarchy where component logs provide different views of the historical data.
Actual (operational) property logs are instantiated within a Log Configuration
aspect which is based on a specified History Log template. The Log Configuration
aspect is added to the object whose property values will be collected, typically in the
Control structure. One property log is required for each property whose values will
be collected. The Log Configuration aspect supports as many properties and as
many property logs as required for the object. Therefore, it is recommended that just
one Log Configuration aspect for an object be created. When more than one Log
Configuration aspect for an object is created, it is recommended that all property
logs for a given property should be included in the same Log Configuration.
The first component log inserted within a property log hierarchy is typically a trend
log1 which is inserted as a direct log type. This log collects directly from an OPC
data source and resides on the connectivity server local to the data source. It
supports viewing and storage of operator trend data. This log should be configured
to store data for a time period that is slightly greater than the time the History Server
may go off line. This will allow the history (extended storage) log to back fill data
that was collected by the trend log while the History Server was offline. The trend
log also supports redundancy when parallel connectivity servers are configured.
The Information Management History Server function can connect history logs in
hierarchical fashion to the direct trend log. These history logs support long term
storage, historical data consolidation, and offline storage. The first hierarchical
history log that collects directly from the direct trend log is referred to as the
primary history log. When additional history logs are connected to the primary
history log, those logs are referred to as secondary history logs.
1. One exception to this scenario is when a property log is created to collect (consolidate) historical data from
another Information Management server in another system.
176 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Property Log Overview
For example, in Figure 106, the trend log stores high resolution data for a short time
span, while the history log stores the same high resolution data for a much longer
time span.
History Server
Connectivity
Server Hierarchical Primary History Log
Direct Trend Log

Storage Rate: 10 seconds
Source Log period: 52 Weeks
Calculation: STORE_AS_IS
Time: 2 Weeks
Figure 106. Example, Property Log Hierarchy
Dual Logs
As an option, configure a dual log where the same trend log feeds two history logs
on two different history server nodes, Figure 107. This may be required when the
application cannot wait for history data to be back-filled in the event that a history
server goes off line. For example, shift reports may be required to execute at the end
of each 8-hour shift and cannot wait days or weeks for the data to be back-filled.
Configuration guidelines are provided in Dual Logs on page 203.
Primary History Log

History Server 1
Direct Trend Log
Source
Primary History Log
History Server 2
Figure 107. Example, Dual Log Configuration
3BUF001092-510 177
Data Presentation in trend format is supported by 800xA System trend displays,

Desktop Trends, and trend displays built with Display Services. These displays are
simple graphs of process variables versus time, as shown in Figure 108. All analog
and digital attributes recorded in History can be trended. Trend sources can be
changed and multiple trends can be displayed on one chart to compare other tags
and attributes. Stored process data may also be viewed in tabular format in
Microsoft Excel using DataDirect add-ins (refer to Installing Add-ins in Microsoft
Excel on page 286).
Figure 108. Historical Data on a Trend Display
The following sections provide a brief overview of the historical collection and
storage functionality supported by history logs:
• Blocking and Alignment on page 179.
• Calculations on page 179.
• Data Compaction on page 179.
• Event Driven Data Collection on page 179.
• Offline Storage on page 180.
• Considerations for Oracle or File-based Storage on page 180.
178 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Property Log Overview
• Seamless Retrieval on page 180.

• Consolidation on page 180.
Blocking and Alignment

A Sample Blocking Rate can be configured for the primary history log. This controls
the frequency at which data is collected from the source trend log. The blocking rate
can be used to optimize performance by phasing the rate at which numeric data is
collected from the trend log, and phasing the writing of historical data to disk. For
further information refer to Sample Blocking Rate on page 227.
Calculations
Although both trend and history logs can have calculations performed on collected
data prior to storage, it is generally recommended that raw data be collected and
stored, and then the required calculations can be performed using the data retrieval
tool, for example, DataDirect. To do this for history logs, the STORE_AS_IS
calculation algorithm is generally used.
This calculation algorithm causes data to be stored only when it is received from the
data source. For OPC type logs, this calculation lets the OPC server’s exception-
based reporting be used as a deadband filter. This effectively increases the log
period so the same number of samples stored (as determined by the log capacity)
cover a longer period of time. Refer to STORE AS IS Calculation on page 230 for
further details.
Data Compaction
The recommended method for data compaction is to use the STORE_AS_IS
calculation algorithm. (STORE AS IS Calculation on page 230). The attributes on
the Deadband tab may be used in certain circumstances, for example to support
upgrades from earlier installations that used deadband, or when configuring
calculation algorithms such as minimum, maximum, and average for history logs.
Event Driven Data Collection

Data collection for property logs may be event-driven. The event which triggers data
collection is specified as a job via Application Scheduler. For further information
refer to Event-driven Data Collection on page 204.
3BUF001092-510 179
Offline Storage
All process data stored in a property log can be copied to an offline storage media.
This can be done on a cyclic or manual basis. Refer to Section 11, Configuring the
Archive Function.
Considerations for Oracle or File-based Storage

Log entries can be stored in Oracle tables or in files maintained by History. File
storage is faster and uses less disk space than Oracle storage. File-based storage is
only applicable for synchronous property logs. The default storage type is file-based
TYPE5 which supports variable size based on the type of data being collected.
ORACLE is mandatory for Asynchronous logs. This type supports collection for
floating point data only. Other storage type are available. For further information
refer to File Storage vs. Oracle Tables on page 247.
Seamless Retrieval
Seamless retrieval makes it easier to access historical data. For trends, when
scrolling back in time beyond the capacity of the specified log, the seamless
retrieval function will go to the next (secondary) log in the log hierarchy.
Applications do not need to know the name of the log in order to retrieve data.
Attributes such as data source, log period, calculation algorithm, and retrieval type
can be specified and History will search for the log which most closely fits the
profile.
Consolidation
Data from property logs on history server nodes in different systems (as configured
via the 800xA system configuration wizard) may be consolidated onto one central
consolidation node as illustrated in Figure 109.
180 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Configuring Node Assignments for Property Logs
$HSTC100,MEASURE-1-o $HSTC100,MEASURE-1-o
Data Source
Data Source
History Server
in System A
Data Source
History Server Consolidation Node
in System B in System C
Figure 109. Example - Consolidating Property Log Data
Configuring History Source Aspects

If History Source aspects have not been configured in the system, refer to
Configuring Node Assignments for Property Logs on page 181. This must be done
before the logs are activated and historical data collection begins. If this is already
done, then refer next to History Configuration Guidelines on page 186.
Configuring Node Assignments for Property Logs

Trend logs and history logs use different methods to establish their respective node
assignments (on which node each log will reside).
For history logs, the node assignment is established by selecting the node’s History
Service Group when the log is added to a property log template. This is described as
part of the procedure for configuring a log template in Creating a Log Template on
page 189.
For trend logs the node assignment is established when the Log Configuration
aspect is instantiated on an object, for example a Control Application object in the
Control structure. When this occurs, the Log Configuration aspect looks upward in
3BUF001092-510 181
Using One History Source Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
the object hierarchy to find and associate itself with the first History Source aspect it
encounters. The History Source aspect points to a History Service group on a
specified Connectivity Server. To ensure that logs are assigned to the correct nodes,
add one or more History Source aspects in the applicable structure where the log
configuration aspects will be instantiated. Care must be taken to situate the History
Source aspects such that each log will find the History Source that points to its
respective Connectivity Server. Two examples are illustrated in Figure 110 and
Figure 111.
• Property logs will not collect data until they are associated with a History
Source aspect.
• History Source aspects must be placed in the same structure where log
configuration aspects are to be instantiated.
• Add History Source aspects as early as possible in the engineering process.
The change to update the History Server for a Service Group can take a
long time for large configurations. All logged data will be lost during change
of Service Group for affected log configurations.
Using One History Source

Figure 110 shows an example where all logs are to be associated with the same
Connectivity Server. In this case, only one History Source aspect is required, and it
should be placed near or at the top of the applicable structure, for example, at the
root.
182 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Using Multiple History Sources
Control Structure
History Source
Control Application 1
Property Log
Property Log
Property Log
Property Log
Figure 110. Using One History Source
Using Multiple History Sources

In Figure 111, the property logs for Control Applications 1 and 2 must reside on
different Connectivity Servers. This is accomplished by adding a History Source
aspect to each of the Control Application objects.
Control Structure
History Source
Property Log
Property Log
History Source
Property Log
Property Log
Figure 111. History Source Associations
3BUF001092-510 183
Pointing History Source to History Service Group Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Pointing History Source to History Service Group

The History Source aspect must be configured to point to the History Service Group
for the same node where the OPC Data Source aspect points. This is illustrated in
Figure 112.
Control Structure Service Structure
Control Application 1 Basic History, Service
History Source 1 BasicHist_eng64, Service Grp
BasicHist_tar22, Service Grp

Property Logs
OPC Data Source 1
OPCDA_Connector, Service
eng64AC800Mopc, Service Grp
History Source 2
tar22AC800Mopc, Service Grp
Property Logs
OPC Data Source 2
Figure 112. Example, History Source Configuration
Adding A History Source Aspect

To add a History Source aspect:
1. Select the object where the aspect is to be added and choose New Aspect from
the context menu.
2. Select History Source in the New Aspect dialog and click Create, Figure 113.
184 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Adding A History Source Aspect
Figure 113. Selecting the History Source Aspect
3. Click on the History Source aspect and use the Service Group pull-down list to
select the Service Group for a specific node, Figure 114 (use the same node
specified in the OPC Data Source aspect (Figure 112).
4. Click Apply. This completes the History set-up requirements.
Figure 114. Configuring the History Source

Before configuring property logs, refer to History Configuration Guidelines on page
186 for important considerations and tips. For a quick demonstration on how to
configure a property log, refer to Building a Simple Property Log on page 188.
3BUF001092-510 185
History Configuration Guidelines Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
History Configuration Guidelines

This section provides a quick reference for various topics that can be reviewed
before actually starting configuring the history application. This includes:
• Data Collection and Storage Features for Optimizing Usage on page 186.
• Allocating Disk Space for File-based Logs on page 186.
• Configuring History Objects - Procedural Overview on page 187.
• Post-configuration Requirements on page 188.
Data Collection and Storage Features for Optimizing Usage

How certain data collection and storage parameters are configured directly affects
CPU load and disk usage. To optimize CPU load and disk usage, consult the
following sections before configuring logs:
• Data Collection Attributes on page 219.
• Deadband Attributes on page 234.
• File Storage vs. Oracle Tables on page 247.
Also refer to Property Log Configuration Reference on page 258. These examples
provide guidelines and recommendations for common data collection/storage
applications:
• Example 1 - Storing Instantaneous Values, No Compaction on page 240.
• Example 2 - Storing Instantaneous Values Using Compaction on page 240.
• Example 3 - Storing Calculated Values on page 242.
• Example 4 - Storing Calculated Values in Logs on page 244.
• Example 5- Storing Calculated Values with Compaction on page 245.
Allocating Disk Space for File-based Logs

To expand storage capacity for file-based logs (Storage Type = TYPE1 - TYPE5),
specify the directory (or disk), and how much of the disk is to be allocated to
History.
Be sure to allocate disk space BEFORE creating any file-based logs. Do this online
via the Directory Maintenance History Utility as described in Directory
Maintenance for File-based Logs on page 454.
186 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Configuring History Objects - Procedural Overview
Configuring History Objects - Procedural Overview

Configure property logs online using the Plant Explorer Workplace, or offline via
the Bulk Log Configuration Import/Export utility. The Plant Explorer Workplace
provides a graphical user interface for history configuration. The Bulk Log
Configuration Import/Export utility uses Microsoft Excel to create a list of object
properties, and then match object properties with their respective log templates. This
method is much quicker than using the Plant Explorer when there is a large number
of object properties that will use the same log template.
The Plant Explorer must be used to configure all other History objects. This
includes archive devices and archive groups (if using archive functionality),
message logs, report logs, and log sets. The Plant Explorer must also be used to
create log templates. The log templates can then be used with the Bulk Log
Configuration Import/Export utility to instantiate log configuration aspects on their
respective objects.
To archive History data, build archive devices and archive groups. First build the
archive devices, and then build the archive groups. Refer to Section 11, Configuring
the Archive Function.
Log sets are used to start and stop data collection for multiple logs as a single unit.
Build logs sets before the property logs if this functionality is used. Refer to Section
6, Configuring Log Sets.
Next configure message logs (Section 7, Alarm/Event Message Logging), and
Report Logs (Section 8, Historizing Reports).
After creating the supporting History objects required by the application, build the
basic property log structures to be used as templates for the property logs. A quick
demonstration is provided in Building a Simple Property Log on page 188.
Finish the remainder of the History database configuration using the Bulk Log
Configuration Import/Export utility. Refer to Bulk Configuration of Property Logs
on page 262.
3BUF001092-510 187
Post-configuration Requirements Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Post-configuration Requirements
• Make sure History Source objects have been added as required. Refer to
Configuring Node Assignments for Property Logs on page 181.
• History logs will not collect data until they are activated. Refer to Starting
and Stopping Data Collection on page 426.
• Use the stagger function as described in Stagger Collection and Storage on
page 459 to stagger collection and storage times to avoid spikes in CPU
usage which may occur when sample and storage rates cause a large
number of messages to be written to disk at one time. Do this BEFORE
activating logs. After stagger is complete, restart the History software and
then activate the logs.
• Test the operation of one or more property logs. Use the Status tab on the
Log Configuration aspect (Status on page 254), or use one of the installed
desktop tools such as DataDirect or Desktop Trends.
• Sometimes changes to Log Configurations Aspects may not take effect until
PPA History Services is restarted in the Connectivity Server where the Trend
Log resides. To prevent this problem from occurring, restart the History
Services after any History Log configuration activity. When redundant
Connectivity servers are used, the restart should be staggered.
Building a Simple Property Log

This tutorial shows how to configure a property log for the data collection scheme
illustrated in Figure 115.
Log1 - Direct Trend Log Log2 - Hierarchical History Log
Source
Storage Rate: 1 Minute Storage Rate: 1 Minute

Time: 1 Week Log period: 52 Weeks
Calculation: Store As Is
Figure 115. Example, Property Log Template
There are two basic parts to this tutorial: creating a log template, and configuring the
log configuration aspect. Start with Creating a Log Template below.
188 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Creating a Log Template
Creating a Log Template

Property logs are instantiated from log templates in the Library structure. Therefore,
the first step in implementing property data collection is to create the log template.
This template establishes the log hierarchy and data collection scheme for the
property logs. The instructions for doing this are organized in six parts:
• Adding a Log Template Object in the Library Structure on page 189.
• Adding a Trend Log on page 191.
• Configuring a Trend Log on page 191.
• Adding a History Log on page 193.
• Configuring a History Log on page 193.
Start with Adding a Log Template Object in the Library Structure on page 189.
Adding a Log Template Object in the Library Structure

To add a log template object in the Library structure:
1. In the Plant Explorer, select the Library Structure.
2. Add a History Log Template Object under the History Log Templates library.
To do this:
a. Select History Log Templates > Default Templates and choose New
Object from the context menu.
b. Select History Log Template in the New Object list, enter a name for the
log template object, then click OK.
This name identifies the log template when selecting a template for a property
log. A meaningful name will help with recognizing the template. One way is to
describe the data collection scheme, for example: Log_1M_1Wk_52Wk (direct
log for instantaneous data @ 1-minute sample rate storing for 1-week period, and
one hierarchical log storing the data at same rate for a 52-week period). If there
are multiple history servers, consider including some means to indicate the node
on which the template will be applied.
The log template name is included in the Data Source name when a log
configuration aspect is attached to an object (object name:property name,log
template name). While a long name is supported, keep it reasonable.
3BUF001092-510 189
Creating a Log Template Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
c. Click Create when finished. This adds the History Log Template object to
the History Log Template Library.
Opening the Log Template Configuration View

Select the new log template object, then select the object’s Log Template aspect.
This displays the Log Template view where the log hierarchy is built and data
collection parameters specified, Figure 116.
The hierarchy starts with the Property Log placeholder which represents the data
source (the object property for which data will be collected). All component logs in
the hierarchy will be added under the Property Log placeholder.
Log Template Selected Click Log Template Aspect Property Log Placeholder
Log Template View
Figure 116. Display the History Log Template Configuration View
Continue with Adding a Trend Log on page 191.
190 3BUF001092-510
Adding a Trend Log

The first log in the hierarchy is typically a trend log which is added as a direct log
type1. This log collects directly from an OPC source. To add this log:
1. Select the Property Log to highlight it and choose Add Log > OPC from the
context menu. This creates a Direct log with an OPC source.
The Add button at the bottom of the dialog is a less direct way of doing the same
thing. Clicking the Add button opens the New Log Template dialog used to specify
the following.
– Source. Select OPC from the Source pull-down list.
– Log Type. This defaults to Direct. This means the log collects directly
from the data source. The other option is to select a Lab Data log. Lab
data logs collect asynchronous data entered manually or through user
programs. For collecting real-time synchronous data, leave the Log Type
as Direct.
– The Collector Link option is for direct trend logs that collect from a
remote Enterprise Historian.
2. Click OK when finished. This displays the configuration view for the direct
type trend log.
Configuring a Trend Log

This configuration view has two tabs, Figure 117.
1. The one exception to this rule is when a property log is created to collect historical data from an earlier
platform such as an Enterprise Historian with MOD 300 or master software.
3BUF001092-510 191
Figure 117. Basic History Trend Log Configuration View - Log Definition Tab
1. Use the Log Definition tab to specify a log name, Figure 118. Again, use a
name that identifies the function this log will perform. For example, the name
in Figure 118 identifies the log as a trend log with a 1-week storage size.
Figure 118. Specifying a Name for the Trend Log
The Log Type, Source, and Service Group are fixed as specified in the New
Log Template dialog and cannot be modified.
2. Click the Data Collection tab and configure how this log will collect from the
OPC data source. For this tutorial, set the Storage Interval Max Time to
1 Minutes, and the Storage Size Time to 1 Weeks, Figure 119. For further
information regarding trend log data collection attributes, refer to Collection
Attributes for Trend Logs on page 219.
192 3BUF001092-510
Figure 119. Data Collection Configuration for the Trend Log
Adding a History Log

Add a history log as a hierarchical log type under the direct trend log. This log will
collect from the trend log. To add this log:
1. Select the trend log and choose Add Log > IM History Log from the context
menu. This defines a Hierarchical log type with the Collector Link checked
Linked checked, and the IM History Log selected in the Server Type. This
establishes the log as a history log with all the associated Information
Management functionality.
2. Click OK when finished. This displays the configuration view for the history
log.
Configuring a History Log

The log configuration view for history logs has four tabs, Figure 120. Most of the
log attributes on these tabs have valid default values, or are not mandatory to
complete the configuration. Attributes that MUST be configured are covered in the
3BUF001092-510 193
following steps. To configure any other attributes, refer to Property Log Attributes
on page 212.
1. Use the Log Definition tab to specify a Log Name and Service Group.
The Service Group pull-down list contains all History servers defined in the
system. Use this list to specify the server where this log will reside. The list
defaults to the local node.
Figure 120. History Log - Log Definition Tab
2. Click the IM Definition tab, Figure 121.

This tab is used to configure the Information Management functionality for this
log. This includes assigning the log to its Log Set(s) and Archive Group. It is
also used to configure a Start State and Collection Type.
When selecting archive groups from the Numeric Log IM configuration page, it
is necessary to select the IM node on the first tab, apply the change, leave the
aspect, and return. When the aspect reloads, the pick list will be correct.
194 3BUF001092-510
Figure 121. IM Definition Tab
Collection Mode defaults to Synchronous and cannot be modified. For the

purpose of this tutorial, all attributes on this tab may be left at their default
values.
3. Click on the Data Collection tab, Figure 122. For this example, this log needs
to collect samples at a 1-minute rate and store 52 weeks worth of data. Certain
data collection attributes must be configured to implement this functionality.
These attributes are described in the following steps.
3BUF001092-510 195
Figure 122. Data Collection Tab
a. Configure the Sample Interval to establish the base sample rate, for
example: 1 Minutes. The Storage Interval automatically defaults to the
same value. Also, the Sample Blocking Rate defaults to a multiple of the
Sample Interval, in this case, one hour.
b. Then enter the Log Period, for example: 52 Weeks. This determines the
Log Capacity (log capacity = log period * storage interval).
It is strongly recommended that the defaults be used for calculation algorithm
(Store As Is) and storage type (type 5). Typically, calculations are not used for
data collection. Desktop tools can perform calculations during data retrieval.
Store As Is causes data to be stored only when it is received from the data
source. In this case the sample and storage intervals are essentially ignored for
data collection, and are used only to properly size the log.
4. Click Apply when finished with both the trend and history log configurations.
This completes the template configuration. Deadband is not here.
196 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Configuring a Log Configuration Aspect
Configuring a Log Configuration Aspect

Add a Log Configuration aspect to the object from which data will be collected. The
Log Configuration aspect is a container for one or more property logs. A dedicated
property log is required for each object property whose values will be logged. The
log hierarchy and data collection scheme for each property log will be based on a
specified History Log Template.
The Log Configuration aspect will support as many properties and as many
property logs as required for the object. For simplicity, it is recommended that
just one Log Configuration aspect be created for an object. When creating more
than one Log Configuration aspect for an object, there is a restriction that all
property logs for a given property must be in the same Log Configuration aspect.
The instructions for this procedure are organized in six parts:
• Adding a Log Configuration Aspect to an Object on page 197.
• Opening the Log Configuration Aspect on page 198.
• Adding a Property Log for an Object Property on page 199.
• Reviewing the Log Configuration on page 201.
• Post-configuration Requirements on page 202.
• What to Do Next on page 202.
Start with Adding a Log Configuration Aspect to an Object on page 197.
Adding a Log Configuration Aspect to an Object

The Log Configuration aspect is typically added to an object in the Control
Structure.
1. In the Plant Explorer, select the Control Structure (or other structure where the
object resides).
2. Navigate to the object being configured for data collection, right-click, and
choose New Aspect from the context menu. This displays the New Aspect
dialog.
3. Find the History Configuration aspect category in the New Aspect dialog, and
select the Log Configuration aspect, Figure 123. Use the default name, or
specify a more meaningful name. Click Create when finished.
3BUF001092-510 197
Configuring a Log Configuration Aspect Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Figure 123. Selecting the Log Configuration Aspect
This adds the Log Configuration aspect to the object’s aspect list.
Opening the Log Configuration Aspect

To display the Log Configuration aspect view, select the object, then click the Log
Configuration aspect in the object’s aspect list, Figure 124.
198 3BUF001092-510
Selected Object Log Configuration Aspect
Log Configuration Aspect View
Figure 124. Log Configuration Aspect Added to the Object’s Aspect List
The Logged pane in the Log Configuration view shows the name of the object with
one or more property logs being added. A property log must be added for each
property whose value will be logged.
Adding a Property Log for an Object Property

To add a property log for an object property:
1. Click the Add Property button, or right-click on the object name and choose
Add Property Log from the context menu, Figure 125.
3BUF001092-510 199
Figure 125. Adding a Property Log
This displays the New Property Log dialog, Figure 126. This dialog is used to
select one of the object’s properties for which to collect data, and apply the Log
Template which meets the property’s data collection requirements. If necessary,
change the default data type specification for the selected property.
2. From the Property list, select the property for which data will be collected.
Then select a template from the Template list.
Data Type
1) Select a (Recommended
Property not to change)
2) Select a
Log Template
Figure 126. New Property Dialog
The supported data types for property logs are listed in Table 22. When a property is
selected, the default data type is automatically applied. This is the native data type
for the property as determined by the OPC server. The OPC/DA data type is mapped
to the corresponding 800xA data type. DO NOT change the data type. When the
storage type for the History log is configured as TYPE5 (recommended), the log is
sized to accommodate the data type.
200 3BUF001092-510
Table 22. Supported Data Types
OPC/DA Data Type(1) 800xA Data Type(2) Size

VT_UI1 Byte 1 Byte
VT_I1 Char 1 Byte
VT_BOOL VARIANT_BOOL 2 Bytes
VT_I2 Short Integer 2 Bytes
VT_UI2 Unsigned Short 2 Bytes
VT_I4 Long Integer 4 Bytes
VT_UI14 Unsigned Long 4 Bytes
VT_INT Integer 4 Bytes
VT_UINT Unsigned Integer 4 Bytes
VT_R4 Float 8 Bytes
VT_R8 Double 8 Bytes
VT_CY Very Long Integer 8 Bytes
(1) As indicated on the Control Connection Aspect
(2) As indicated on the Log Configuration Aspect
Reviewing the Log Configuration

The instantiated log configuration for ProcessSim1 based on the selected property
(value) and log template is shown in Figure 127.
3BUF001092-510 201
Template
OPC Object
Direct Trend Log

OPC Object Property
Hierarchical History Log
Figure 127. Instantiated Log Configuration
This aspect does not require any further configuration; however, some data
collection parameters may be adjusted via the tabs provided for each component
log. These tabs are basically the same as the tabs provided for log template
configuration. Some configuration parameters are read-only and cannot be modified
via the log configuration aspect. Also some parameters that were not accessible via
the log configuration template are accessible via the log configuration aspect.
Two additional tabs are provided for the log configuration aspect. The Presentation
tab is used to configure presentation parameters for viewing log data on a trend
display. The Status tab is used to view log data directly via the log configuration
aspect.
Post-configuration Requirements
History logs will not collect data until they are activated. Refer to Starting and
Stopping Data Collection on page 426.
Test the operation of one or more property logs. Use the Status tab on the Log
Configuration aspect (Status on page 254), or use one of the installed desktop tools
such as DataDirect or Desktop Trends.
What to Do Next
This concludes the tutorial for configuring a basic property log. To create a large
quantity of similar logs, use the Bulk Configuration utility as described in Bulk
Configuration of Property Logs on page 262. To learn about common property log
applications, refer to Property Log Applications on page 203. For more information
202 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Property Log Applications
regarding the configuration of log attributes, refer to Property Log Attributes on

page 212.
Property Log Applications

The following applications are demonstrated in this section:
• Lab Data Logs for Asynchronous User Input on page 203.
• Event-driven Data Collection on page 204.
• History Logs with Calculations on page 211.
In addition to these applications, historical process data can be integrated and
consolidated from remote history servers. Data may be consolidated from remote
History servers in the 800xA system that reside in other systems.
This functionality is configured using the History Access Importer tool and is
described in Section 12, Consolidating Historical Data.
Dual Logs
As an option, configure a dual log where the same trend log feeds two history logs
on two different history server nodes. This may be required when the application
cannot wait for history data to be back-filled in the event that a history server goes
off line. For example, shift reports may be required to execute at the end of each 8-
hour shift, and cannot wait for the hardware to be repaired and for the data to be
back-filled.
To implement this functionality, create a log template with two identical primary
history logs, with the only difference being the Service Group definition.
Lab Data Logs for Asynchronous User Input

The lab data log is a special type of property log. This log type is used to collect
asynchronous data entered manually, or by an external application such as a User
API program. Asynchronous logs must be Oracle-based (refer to Storage Type in
Data Collection Attributes on page 219).
Lab Data logs are added in the property log hierarchy at the same level as direct
logs. Select Lab Data as the Log Type in the New Log Template dialog. A lab data
log can be added as a trend log, or as a history log (IM History Log link). The
applicable configuration tabs will be displayed accordingly. The source field is
3BUF001092-510 203
Event-driven Data Collection Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
disabled since this is not applicable for lab data logs. Add a Lab Data log alone, or
as part of a log hierarchy with a direct log, Figure 128.
When added with synchronous logs, the asynchronous lab data log does not
receive data from the data source. The connection is only graphical in this case.
Lab Data Log Added With Lab Data Log Added Alone
a Direct Log
Figure 128. Representation of Lab Data Log in Property Log Hierarchy
When configuring a history-type lab data log, most of the tabs specific to history
logs are not applicable. The only attribute that must be configured for a Lab Data
log is Log Capacity as described in Data Collection Attributes on page 219.
A lab data log CANNOT be the source for another log. Secondary hierarchical
logs cannot collect from lab data logs.
Event-driven Data Collection

Data collection for property logs may be event-driven. The event which triggers data
collection is specified as a job description object configured via the Application
Scheduler, and an attached data collection action aspect.
TCP/IP must be enabled for OMF if the job is to trigger data collection for logs
on a different History server. This setting is configured via the Communication
Settings dialog. To check, launch this dialog, from the Windows task bar. Choose
Start>Settings>Control Panel>Administrative Tools> PAS>Settings. For
further information, refer to Appendix A, Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP.
The event-driven property log is configured much like any other property log as
described in Building a Simple Property Log on page 188. The only special
requirements when configuring the log for event driven data collection are:
204 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Event-driven Data Collection
• The direct trend log must always be active in order to collect data before the
event actually triggers data collection.
• The event-driven log must be a history log, and it must be the (first) primary
log connected to the direct trend log, Figure 129. Also this log must be
configured to start deactivated. The log will go active when the event trigger
occurs.
Secondary History Log
History Server
Connectivity
Server Primary History Log
Direct Trend Log
Source Event-driven Log

Start Deactivated
Always Active
Figure 129. Example, Event-driven Data Collection
• Logs that reside on a consolidation node cannot be event-driven.

Disk throughput requirements for history collection need to be based on having
the event-driven logs perpetually active. This way, when the event-driven logs are
activated, it will not overload the disk.
Create a Job
To schedule event-driven data collection, create a job with a Data Collection action
in Application Scheduler. The Scheduling Definition aspect will be set up to have
specified logs collect for a one-hour period, every day between 11:30 AM and 12:30
PM. Jobs and scheduling options are also described in System 800xA Information
Management Data Access and Reports (3BUF001094*).
To create a job in the Scheduling structure:
2. Select Job Descriptions and choose New Object from the context menu.
3BUF001092-510 205
3. In the New Object dialog, Figure 130, select Job Description and assign the
Job object a logical name (for example StartLogging1).
4. Click Create. This creates the new job under the Job Descriptions group, and
periodic schedule. The trigger event will occur once every day, starting July 3rd
at 12:00 PM, and continuing until August 3rd at 12:00 PM.
206 3BUF001092-510
Adding and Configuring the Data Collection Action

Actions are implemented as aspects on an object which is on or under a job
description in the scheduling structure.
To add an action:
1. From the Job object (for example StartLogging1), choose New Aspect from
the context menu.
Action aspect (path is: Scheduler>Action Aspect>Action Aspect). Use the
default aspect name, or specify a new name.
3BUF001092-510 207

5. Select Data Collection Action from the Action pull-down list. This displays
the Data Collection plug-in, Figure 132.
Figure 132. Plug-in for Event-driven Data Collection
6. Specify the logs to be activated with this event:

Event-driven data collection is limited to the primary history log which is
connected directly to the direct trend log. Neither the trend log, nor secondary
history logs can be event-driven. Also, event-driven data collection cannot be
applied to logs on a consolidation node.
a. Click the Add Logs button. This displays a browser dialog similar to the
Plant Explorer. Use this browser to find and select the logs in the Plant
Explorer structures, Figure 133.
208 3BUF001092-510
Figure 133. Adding Property Logs to the Log List
b. Select the object whose log will be added to the list, then select the log in
the log hierarchy, and click Add Log To List. This adds the selected log to
the log list, Figure 134.
3BUF001092-510 209
Figure 134. Logs Added to the Log List
c. Repeat steps a and b for as many logs as required.

7. Use the Number of minutes before event and Number of minutes after
event fields to specify the time range for the history logs to collect from their
respective trend logs. The maximum range is 10,000 minutes before plus
10,000 minutes after the job starts.
The data collected before the event comes from the trend log. Therefore the
number of minutes specified here CANNOT EXCEED the configured Storage
Size for that log.
210 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection History Logs with Calculations
History Logs with Calculations

Desktop tools can perform calculations during data retrieval so it is generally not
necessary to use them for data collection.
When calculations are implemented for data collection, the calculation is performed
before the data is stored in the log. This allows a single value to be stored that
represents a larger time span of values, or key characteristics of the data. For
example, a property value can be sampled every minute and the values put into a
trend log. History logs can then calculate and store the hourly average, minimum,
and maximum values. This is illustrated in Figure 135. When applying calculations
for data covering the same time span, add the history logs at the same level as shown
in Figure 135 (all collecting directly from the trend log).
In addition to any mandatory attributes that must be configured, the Calculation
Algorithm must also be configured. Change the calculation algorithm before
specifying the Storage Interval. Refer to Calculation Algorithm in Data Collection
Attributes on page 219.
Retain the defaults for the remaining attributes, or configure additional attributes as
may be required by the application. Refer to Property Log Attributes on page 212
for details.
More detailed examples are described in Property Log Configuration Reference on
page 258:
• Example 3 - Storing Calculated Values.
• Example 4 - Storing Calculated Values in Logs.
3BUF001092-510 211
Property Log Attributes Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
History Log
Storage Rate: 1 Minute

Time period: 13 Weeks
Calculation: Average
Trend Log
History Log
Source
Time: 2 Weeks Storage Rate: 1 Minute
Calculation: Minimum
History Log
Storage Rate: 1 Minute

Calculation: Maximum
Figure 135. Example, Property Log using Calculations
Property Log Attributes

This section covers attributes for all property logs including trend, lab data, and
history log types.
Attributes for individual logs within a property log hierarchy are accessible under
their respective tabs. Some attributes are configured when the log is added to the
property log hierarchy via the New Log Template dialog. For further information
regarding a log attribute category, refer to:
• New Log Template Attributes on page 213.
• IM Definition Attributes on page 215.
• Data Collection Attributes on page 219.
• Deadband Attributes on page 234.
212 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection New Log Template Attributes
• Presentation on page 253.

Limitations are:
• Most log attributes can be edited while configuring a log template and before
saving it. Exceptions are: Collection Mode and Log Capacity (for synchronous
logs). Log capacity must be configured for lab data logs.
• The configuration of a Log Template that has Log Configuration aspects
instantiated cannot be modified. To modify the template, delete the instantiated
Log Configuration aspects.
• To modify certain attributes on Log Configuration aspects, the log must be
deactivated.
• After saving the log configuration aspect, the following attributes can not be
edited (in addition to the ones above): IM Data Source, Storage Interval, and
Storage Type.
New Log Template Attributes

The New Log Template dialog is displayed when the Add button is used to add a
component log in the property log hierarchy. This dialog is used to specify: Source.,
Log Type., and Collector Link.. The preferred method is to use the predefined
selections using the Add Log context menu.
Figure 136. New Log Template Dialog
• Source.
3BUF001092-510 213
Log Definition Attributes Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
This specifies the type of data source.

– For direct trend logs, set the source to OPC or an appropriate plug-in such
as TTD.
– For all hierarchical logs the source automatically defaults to the name of
the log from which the hierarchical log collects (either a direct log or
another hierarchical log).
– Source is not applicable for lab data logs, or for direct history logs that
collect from remote (Enterprise Historian-based) logs (Linked).
• Log Type.
When adding a log, specify the type:
– Direct - Log collects directly from the data source. Use this log type for
the first component log in the property log hierarchy when building a log
that collects from an OPC object property. This log type is used to collect
from a remote (Enterprise Historian-based) log when Linked is checked.
– Lab Data - Log entries are asynchronous (manually entered or generated
from user program). Lab data logs must be added directly to the Property
Log placeholder in the log hierarchy.
– Hierarchical - Log collects either from a direct log, or another
hierarchical log. This selection is made automatically and cannot be
changed when adding a log to direct log, or another hierarchical log.
• Collector Link.
The Collector Link specification is required for history logs. Check the Linked
check box, then select the IM History Log for the Server Type from the pull-
down list. This establishes the log as a history type for hierarchical and lab data
logs.
Log Definition Attributes

There are two versions of this tab depending on whether a trend log (Direct) or
history log (hierarchical) was added, Figure 137. This tab is used to specify: Log
Name. and Service Group. (hierarchical logs only). The other attributes on this tab
are read-only. They are defined via the New Log Template dialog.
214 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection IM Definition Attributes
Figure 137. Log Definition Tab
• Log Name.
This is the name by which each component log is identified within the property
log hierarchy. Use a meaningful name. One way is to describe the data
collection scheme in the name, for example: Log_1m_13wAvg (log for data
collected @ 1-minute sample rate and storing the 13-week calculated average).
• Service Group.
The Service Group pull-down list contains all History servers defined in the
system. Use this to specify the server where this log will reside. The list
defaults to the local node.
The Default (History Source Aspect) is only applicable for trend logs.
IM Definition Attributes
This tab is only available for linked history logs using the IM History Log server
type. It is used to configure Information Management history functionality,
Figure 138. This includes: Log Set, Archive Group, Start State, Collection Type, IM
Historian Log State, and Dual Log.
Collection Mode is a read-only attribute.
The IM Data Source attributes is not accessible for log template configuration. This
attribute is defined via the IM Definition tab on the Log Configuration aspect.
3BUF001092-510 215
IM Definition Attributes Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Figure 138. IM Definition Tab
IM Data Source
The IM data source field is activated on the Log Configuration aspect view. This
field is dimmed on the log template view. The IM data source defaults to a unique
ID for the object name:property name, log template name and its path in the
structure. For hierarchical logs connected to a direct log, the IM data source is fixed
and cannot be changed.
For applications where History collects data from a remote history log configured in
an existing history database, the Collection Type is set to API. In this case enter the
name using the following format: $HSobject,attribute-n-oIPaddress
The IP address is only required when collecting from multiple sites and identical
log names are used on some sites. Refer to Consolidating Historical Process Data
on page 356.
Log Set
This is the primary Log Set to which this log belongs. The Log Set pull-down list
includes all log sets configured on the local history server. Logs can be assigned to a
second log set via the Second Log Set field. To delete a log from a log set, clear the
Log Set field. For details on configuring log sets, refer to Section 6, Configuring
Log Sets.
216 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection IM Definition Attributes
Archive Group
This is the archive group to which this log belongs. The Archive Group pull-down
list includes all archive groups configured on the local history server. To delete a log
from an archive group, clear the Archive Group field. Logs may also be assigned to
an archive group via the Archive Group aspect. This is described in Configuring
Archive Groups on page 331.
If available archive groups are not listed in the Archive Group combo box, click
Apply changes to the Log Template aspect. This makes the archive groups
available for selection via the combo box.
Start State
This is the initial log state when History Services is restarted via PAS. Choices are:
START_INACTIVE
START_ACTIVE
START_LAST_STATE (default) - restart in state log had when node shut
down
Hierarchical logs do not start collecting and storing data until the direct log becomes
active. The entire property log with all of its component logs can be activated and
de-activated as a unit via the Enable check box in the Log Configuration aspect.
Collection Mode
The collection mode determines how data is processed when it is received by
History. Collection Mode also determines the valid choices for Collection Type and
Storage Type. Collection mode is a read-only attribute whose value is fixed based on
the selected Log Type.. The mode can be either synchronous or asynchronous:
SYNCHRONOUS - periodic Time Sequence data. This is the collection mode for
logs which collect from a specified object property. The time interval between
samples received by History must always be the same. Calculations and deadband
can be applied to synchronously collected data.
If Collection Mode is Synchronous, all Storage Types are allowed. However, the
data must be entered in time forward order. This means that once an entry is stored
at a particular time, the log will not allow entries with a date before that time. This is
true for all Collection Types: API, OPC HDA, and USER_SUPPLIED.
3BUF001092-510 217
IM Definition Attributes Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Also, entries are received and stored at the configured storage rate. For example, for
a user supplied, synchronous log, attempting to add an entry every second for a log
with a 1 minute storage interval, only one entry over a one-minute period will be
stored. If only one entry is received every day for a one minute log, history will
insert at least one "NO DATA" entry between each value received.
ASYNCHRONOUS - data is entered by an application such as DataDirect, or
Display Services. This mode is for Lab Data logs. The Storage Type must be
Oracle and the Collection Type is undefined. The time between entries sent to
History does not have to be the same every time. When the log reaches its capacity,
the oldest values are deleted. Retrieval is time based.
Collection Type
This determines the application for which History collects data. Collection type is
only configurable for primary history logs. The options are:
• OPC HDA- The History log collects OPC data from a trend log.
• API - History periodically collects data from a remote history log.
• USER_SUPPLIED: Samples are sent to History from a user application such
as DataDirect. The time between samples sent is expected to be equal to the
sample rate of the log.
When Collection Mode is Asynchronous, the Collection Type is undefined;
however, the log operates as if the collection type was defined as User Supplied.
IM Historian Log State

Hierarchical logs do not start collecting and storing data until the direct log becomes
active. Use the push button to toggle the state of the IM History log.
Dual Log
This configuration parameter is not used.
Show Log List

Use the Show Log List button to refer to the Inform IT History Log List aspect
(refer to Viewing Log Runtime Status and Configuration on page 429).
218 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Data Collection Attributes
Data Collection Attributes

The Data Collection tab is used to specify how data will be collected for each
component log in a property log hierarchy. This includes specifying sample
intervals, log capacity, and so on. There are two versions of this tab depending on
whether a trend log, or a history log linked via the IM 3.5 Collector is added. Refer
to:
• Collection Attributes for Trend Logs on page 219.
• Collection Attributes for History Logs on page 223.
Collection Attributes for Trend Logs

The Data Collection tab for trend logs is shown in Figure 139. Use this tab to
configure Aggregate (hierarchical logs only), Storage Interval, and Storage Size.
This tab also provides an indication of Min and Max Capacity.
Figure 139. Data Collection Tab - Trend Logs
Aggregate
For hierarchical trend logs apply any one of the aggregates described in Table 23.
Aggregates are not applicable for Direct-type logs.
3BUF001092-510 219
Collection Attributes for Trend Logs Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Although hierarchical trend logs support this functionality, it is a good practice to

collect and store raw data, and then perform the required calculations using the
data retrieval tool, for example, DataDirect.
220 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Collection Attributes for Trend Logs
Table 23. Aggregate Options
Aggregate Description
Interpolated Interpolated values.
Total Time integral of the data over the re-sample interval.
Average Average data over the re-sample interval.
Timeaverage Time weighted average data over the re-sample interval.
Count Number of raw values over the re-sample interval.
Standard Deviation Standard deviation over the re-sample interval.
Minimum Actual Minimum value in the re-sample interval and the time stamp of the minimum
Time value (in seconds).
Minimum Minimum value in the re-sample interval.
Maximum Actual Maximum value in the re-sample interval and the time stamp of the
Time maximum value (in seconds).
Maximum Maximum value in the re-sample interval.
Start Value at the beginning of the re-sample interval. The time stamp is the time
stamp of the beginning of the interval.
End Value at the end of the re-sample interval. The time stamp is the time stamp
of the end of the interval.
Delta Difference between the first and last value in the re-sample interval.
Regression Slope Slope (per cycle time) of the regression line over the resample interval.
Regression Const Intercept of the regression line over the re-sample interval. This is the value
of the regression line at the start of the interval.
Regression Standard deviation of the regression line over the re-sample interval.
Deviation
Variance Variance over the sample interval.
Range Difference between minimum and maximum value over the sample interval.
Duration Good Duration (in seconds) of time in the interval during which the data is good.
3BUF001092-510 221
Collection Attributes for Trend Logs Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Table 23. Aggregate Options (Continued)
Aggregate Description
Duration Bad Duration (in seconds) of time in the interval during which the data is bad.
Percentage Good Percentage of data in the interval which has good quality. One (1) = 100%
Percentage Bad Percentage of data in the interval which has bad quality. One (1) = 100%
Worst Quality Worst quality of data in the interval.
Storage Interval
The storage interval is the rate at which samples are collected and stored. This is
configured using Min Time, Max Time and Exception Deviation (%) properties.
Set Min Time to the base rate at which samples are to be collected. Samples will be
stored at this rate unless data compaction is implemented using Exception Deviation
(%). The shortest possible time between two samples is one (1) sec.
Exception Deviation (%) establishes a deadband range by which to compare the
deviation of a sample value. If the current sample value deviates from the previous
sample value by an amount equal to or greater than the specified Exception
Deviation (%), then the sample is stored; otherwise, the sample is not stored.
Max Time establishes the maximum time that may elapse before storing a sample.
This way, if a process value is very stable and not changing by the specified
Exception Deviation (%), samples are stored at the rate specified by the Max Time.
To store all samples (no data compaction), set the Exception Deviation (%) to 0, and
set the Max Time equal to the Min Time.
It is always recommended to have Max Time greater than Min Time. When Max
Time equals Min Time, extra values can be inserted into the log when the next
sample point is delayed from the source.
Storage Size
Storage size can either be specified as number of points stored in the log or as the
time range covered in the log. If the number of points is specified, the time covered
in the log will be calculated and displayed in the time edit box.
222 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Collection Attributes for History Logs
Min and Max Capacity

The values shown in these fields are an approximation of the number of points
multiplied by the Min and Max Times respectively.
Collection Attributes for History Logs

The data collection function for history logs is illustrated in Figure 140. This
function collects values and buffers them internally for a period of time according to
the sample blocking rate. It then performs the specified calculation on the buffered
data. A value is calculated for every storage interval. These calculated values are
passed to the deadband function which checks to refer to if the value is within or
outside the deadband range. If deadband is not active, the value is sent to storage. If
deadband is active, the value is sent to storage if any one of the following are true:
• The value is outside the deadband range.
• The value is within the deadband range, but the deadband storage interval time
has elapsed since the last value was stored.
• The value status changes (possible statuses are: no data, bad data, good data).
If none of these criteria are met, the value is not stored.
Occurs at Sample Deadband Send to

Blocking Rate Compaction Storage
Data Data
Buffer Calculation
Source
Storage
Send to
Secondary
Secondary Data Log(s)
Figure 140. Data Collection, Functional Diagram
Figure 140 shows that data sent to a secondary log does not undergo data
compaction, even if the primary log has deadband configured. The secondary log
gets all values that result from the calculation. Thus, the calculation performed by
the secondary log is more accurate than if done using data stored after deadband
compaction.
3BUF001092-510 223
Collection Attributes for History Logs Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
History can be configured to perform calculations on collected data before the data
is actually stored in the log. When a calculation is active, the specified algorithm,
such as summing or averaging, is applied to a configured number of data samples
from the data source. The result of the calculation is stored by History.
For example, configure History to collect five values from the data source, calculate
the average of the five values, and then store the average. This calculation is actually
configured by time, not the number of values. The calculation is applied to the
values collected over a configured time period.
Data compaction can also be configured. This uses a mathematical compaction
algorithm to reduce the amount of data stored for properties. Both calculations and
deadband can be used concurrently for a log. The calculation is done first. Then the
deadband algorithm is applied to see if the result should be stored.
For examples of data collection applications, refer to Property Log Configuration
Reference on page 258.
The Data Collection tab for history logs is shown in Figure 141. Use this tab to
configure: Log Period, Sample Interval, Storage Interval, Sample Blocking Rate,
Calculation Algorithm, Storage Type, Entry Type (when storage type = 5), Start
Time, Log Capacity (for lab data log only), Bad Data Quality Limit.
Figure 141. Data Collection Tab - History Logs
224 3BUF001092-510
Log Period
Disk space is allocated to logs according to their log capacity, which is a function of
the log time period and storage interval. The log period can be adjusted on an
individual log basis to keep log capacity at a reasonable size for each log. For all
synchronous logs with or without data compaction, log capacity is calculated as: log
capacity = (log period/storage interval).
When using compaction (or Store As Is), the log period is effectively increased so
the same number of samples (as determined by the log capacity) are stored over a
longer period of time.
Enter the log period as an integer value ≤4095 with time unit indicator for Weeks,
Days, Hours, Minutes, Seconds. The maximum is 4095 Weeks.
Sample Interval
This is the rate at which data is sampled from a data source. For USER_SUPPLIED,
this is the expected time interval between samples sent to History. Whether or not
the sample is stored depends on whether or not a calculation algorithm is specified,
and whether or not a compaction deadband (or Store As Is) is specified.
Enter the sample interval as an Integer value with a time unit indicator: Weeks,
Days, Hours, Minutes, Seconds. Monthly is NOT a legal sample interval.
If data is not received within 50% of the interval prior to the expected time, or 100%
of the interval after the expected time, the entry value is marked with status
NO_DATA. Time stamps may drift due to load in the system. An example of a case
where time drift can cause NO_DATA entries to be stored is illustrated in
Figure 142.
3BUF001092-510 225
Sample Interval = 10 Seconds

Expected Times
0:00 0:10 0:20 0:30 0:40 0:50 1:00 1:10 1:20 1:30 1:40 1:50 2:00 2:10
For 1:40 time slot, NO_DATA is stored since the actual time
(1:50) is offset from the expected time (1:40)
by 100% of the sample interval (10s)
NO_DATA
0:00 0:11 0:22 0:33 0:44 0:55 1:06 1:17 1:28 1:39 1:50 2:01 2:12
Actual Times
Figure 142. Example of Time Drift
Storage Interval
This is the time interval at which data is stored in the log, except when deadband is
active (or Store As Is is used). Enter the storage interval as an Integer value with a
time unit indicator: Weeks, Days, Hours, Minutes, Seconds. The maximum is
4095 Weeks. The storage interval must be a multiple of the sample interval. For
example, if the sample interval is 5, the storage interval can be 10, 15, 20, 25, and so
on. When using Store As Is or Instantaneous as the calculation algorithm, the
storage interval must be set equal to the sample interval.
A special storage interval is monthly. This causes a value to be stored at the end of
the month. The timestamp of a monthly log depends upon the storage interval and
alignment of its data source:
• If the data source is a daily log which is aligned to 06:00, then the monthly log
values will have a time of 06:00.
• If the data source is hourly or less, then the monthly log will be around
midnight (depending on the alignment of the data source). For example, an
hourly log at 30 minutes after the hour will produce a monthly value at 00:30.
• If the data source is an ‘x’ hours log aligned to 06:00 (for example, 8 Hours log
with values stored at 06:00, 14:00, 22:00, and so on), then the monthly log will
have a time of 06:00.
226 3BUF001092-510
Sample Blocking Rate

This controls the frequency at which data is collected from the source trend log. The
sample blocking rate is only used in primary history logs (connected directly to the
direct log in the property log hierarchy).
Enter the Sample Blocking rate as an Integer value with a time unit indicator:
Weeks, Days, Hours, Minutes, Seconds. The Sample Blocking Rate must be a
multiple of the storage interval. The maximum is 4095 Weeks.
Sample Blocking Rate is used based on the type of the data source. History Logs
that get data from Trend Logs use OPC/HDA. The blocking rate represents
frequency that data is requested from the Trend Log. If the blocking rate is 60
minutes, once an hour the data will be requested from the Trend Log. For logs that
are collected from an API source, the blocking rate results in a memory buffer
allocation that can hold the blocking rate worth of values as they are received. When
the buffer is full, the array is processed and the data is stored. For all collection
types, blocking rates affect the rate that numeric data is stored to the IM disks.
Blocking rate has an additional meaning for connectivity servers that have Trend
Logs. When looking at an entire configuration, the blocking rates and the number of
logs defined represent a rate that HDA requests are made toward connectivity
servers in the system. This rate should be tuned each time the configuration is
modified using the Stagger Collection and Storage on page 459.
Sample blocking rate is based on the storage interval of the log and is set to an
appropriate value for most configurations. After new logs are created, the stagger
functionality should be used to adjust stagger and phasing for the entire IM
server. It is not recommended to attempt to adjust stagger and phasing on a per
template or per log basis. It is recommended that all IM severs run hsDBMaint,
the stagger after any configuration changes. Refer to Stagger Collection and
Storage on page 459.
Sample blocking rate is NOT used under the following conditions:
• if the storage interval is Monthly.
• if the Collection Type is USER_SUPPLIED. In this case the values are stored
as they are sent to History.
3BUF001092-510 227
Storage Type
Log entries can be stored in Oracle tables or in files maintained by History. File
storage is faster and uses less disk space than Oracle storage. File-based storage is
only applicable for synchronous property logs. The default storage type is file-based
TYPE5 which supports variable size based on the type of data being collected.
ORACLE is mandatory for Asynchronous logs. This type supports collection for
floating point data only. Other storage type are available. For further information
refer to File Storage vs. Oracle Tables on page 247.
Entry Type
For TYPE5 Storage Type the Entry Type can be specified to conserve the disk space
required per entry. The Entry Type attribute specifies whether or not to save the
original value with the modified value when a client application is used to modify a
stored history value.
Disk space is allocated for both the original and modified value whether or not the
value is actually modified. Therefore, only choose to save the original value when
the modify history value function is being used and original values need to be saved.
The choices are:
• Do Not Save Original Value - If a log entry is modified, the original value is
not saved.
• Save Original Value - If a log entry is modified, the original value is saved
along with the modified value. This allocates disk space for both values,
whether or not the value is actually modified.
• Not Applicable - For storage types other than TYPE5.
Log Capacity
This is the maximum number of entries for a log. If a log is full, new entries replace
the oldest entries.
For asynchronous collection, the log capacity is configurable. Enter an integer
value. The maximum log capacity is different for each Storage Type as indicated in
Table 24.
228 3BUF001092-510
For synchronous collection, this field is not configurable. Log capacity is calculated
as follows:
Log Capacity = (Log Period/ Storage Interval).
If the specified log period or storage interval result in a calculated log capacity
that exceeds the maximum log capacity (Table 24), an error message will be
generated and either the log period or storage interval must be adjusted. For
further information regarding these log attributes, refer to:
• Log Period on page 225.
• Storage Interval on page 226.
.
Table 24. Maximum Log Capacity for Storage Types
Storage Type Maximum Log Capacity

TYPE1 5,483,352
TYPE2 32,638,500
TYPE3 16,449,804
ORACLE 50,000
TYPE4 The maximum file size is 65278*32K + 257*2K (slightly less than
2G) for the 32K data blocks or 65278*1M + 257*2K (slightly less
than 64GB) for the 1meg datablocks.
TYPE5 315,000,000(1) when Entry Type is Do Not Save Original Value
267,255,200 when Entry Type is Save Original Value
(1) This is equivalent to 520 weeks of data collected at one-second storage rate.
Calculation Algorithm
Although both trend and history logs can perform calculations on collected data
prior to storage, it is a good practice to collect and store raw data, and then perform
the required calculations using the data retrieval tool, for example, DataDirect. To
do this, use the STORE_AS_IS calculation algorithm, Figure 143.
This calculation causes data to be stored only when it is received from the data
source. For OPC type logs, this calculation can use the OPC server’s exception-
based reporting as a deadband filter. This effectively increases the log period so the
3BUF001092-510 229
same number of samples stored (as determined by the log capacity) cover a longer
period of time. Refer to STORE AS IS Calculation on page 230 for further details.
History Server
Connectivity
Server Hierarchical Primary History Log
Direct Trend Log

Source Log period: 52 Weeks
Calculation: STORE_AS_IS
Time: 2 Weeks
Figure 143. Property Log Configuration
Other calculations may be implemented for certain property log applications. These
are described in Other Calculation Algorithms on page 232.
STORE AS IS Calculation
This calculation causes data to be stored only when it is received from the data
source. This functionality has three different applications, depending on whether it
is applied to an OPC type log, or and API (OMF) type log.
Collecting from Operator Trend Logs (OPC Data)
STORE_AS_IS is an option in the Calculation Algorithm section on the Data
Collection tab of the Log Configuration aspect. For OPC type logs, this calculation
uses the OPC server’s exception-based reporting as a deadband filter. When
collecting from an OPC/DA source, OPC returns data at the subscription rate, only
if the data is changing. This effectively increases the log period so the same number
of samples stored (as determined by the log capacity) cover a longer period of time.
For all calculations other than STORE_AS_IS, if data is not changing and samples
are not being received, History will insert previous values with the appropriate time
stamps. This is required for calculations to occur normally.
With STORE_AS_IS, no other calculations are performed (including
INSTANTANEOUS); therefore, data does not need to be stored at the specified
230 3BUF001092-510
sample rate. Samples will only be recorded when a tag’s value changes, or at some
other minimum interval based on the log configuration.
Data Forwarding of Deadbanded Data to a Consolidation Node
STORE_AS_IS can implement data compaction on the collection node, before data
forwarding to the consolidation node. This saves disk space on the collection node.
When data forwarding deadbanded data to a consolidation node, be sure to use
STORE_AS_IS rather than INSTANTANEOUS as the calculation algorithm for the
hierarchical log on a consolidation node. This eliminates insertion of NO_DATA
entries for missing samples.
Time Drift in Subscription Data
When running synchronous logs (API or USER_SUPPLIED) at a fast rate, it is
possible for time stamps to drift over time, eventually forcing a sample interval to be
missed. For all calculations other than STORE_AS_IS, History adds an entry with a
status of NO_DATA for the missing sample interval. This is a false indication of
missing data, and can cause a spike or drop in a trend display (refer to Figure 142).
By using STORE_AS_IS, rather than INSTANTANEOUS, these spikes will not
occur.
The STORE AS IS calculation is generally applied to the primary (first) hierarchical
log. The log where the STORE AS IS calculation is applied can be the data source
for a hierarchical log, if the hierarchical log is also STORE AS IS (for example data
forwarding to a consolidation node). Do not use the STORE AS IS calculation when
further calculations are required.
Deadband Storage Interval
In the case where a process is very stable and values are not changing, there may be
very long periods where no samples are stored. This may result in holes in the trend
display where no data is available to build the trends. Use the deadband storage
interval on the Deadband Attributes tab to force a value to be stored periodically,
even if the value does not change. This ensures that samples are stored on a regular
basis. Refer to Deadband Compaction % on page 237.
Shutdown and Startup
3BUF001092-510 231
Since data is not being stored if it is not changing, History will insert the current
value and current timestamp when it is shutdown. This guarantees that the data can
be interpolated correctly up until the time History was shutdown.
The following is applicable for API (OMF-based), but NOT for operator trend logs
or user-supplied logs.
At startup, NO_DATA entries will be inserted for STORE_AS_IS type logs to show
that the node was down, and that data was not collected during that time. This will
allow interpolation algorithms to work correctly, and not presume that the data was
OK during the time the node was down.
Other Calculation Algorithms

The following calculations may be implemented for history logs:
AVERAGE
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
INSTANTANEOUS - no calculation
SUM
SUM_OF_ SQRS
STANDARD DEVIATION
NUM_OF_ VALUES
Calculations can be done on data before it is stored in a hierarchical log, Figure 144.
This allows storage of a single value to represent a larger time span of values, or key
characteristics of the data. For example, to sample a variable every minute and put
those values into a trend log. Then, the hourly average, minimum, and maximum on
data in the trend log can be calculated and values stored in hierarchical history logs.
Source Direct Primary Secondary

Calculation Calculation
Trend Log History Log History Log
Figure 144. Calculations
If a calculation algorithm other than INSTANTANEOUS is specified for the log, the
algorithm is performed at each storage interval. The storage interval must be a
232 3BUF001092-510
multiple of the sample interval. For example, if the sample interval is 5 Seconds, the
storage interval can be 10, 15, 20, or 25 Seconds, and so on.
When the calculation is performed, the specified number of data samples are entered
in the algorithm, and the result is passed to the deadband function. If the calculation
algorithm is INSTANTANEOUS (no calculation), the sample and storage intervals
must be equal, and each data sample is treated as a result.
Start Time
This is the earliest allowable system time that the log can become active. If the
specified start time has already past, the log will begin to store data at the next
storage interval. If the start time is in the future, the log will go to PENDING state
until the start time arrives. Enter the start time in the following format:
1/1/1990 12:00:00 AM(default)
The order of the month, day, and year and the abbreviation of the month is
standardized based upon the language being used.
Use the start time to distribute the load. Both the blocking rate and start time may be
defined initially when configuring the History database. If the attributes are not
configured initially, or if adjustments are required, use the Stagger Collection
function in the hsDBMaint utility as a convenient means for adjusting these
parameters. Refer to Stagger Collection and Storage on page 459.
It is recommended NOT to use small differences (less than one minute) to distribute
the load. Managing log collection at slightly different times will result in significant
overhead.
The time when a log is scheduled to start collecting data is referred to as the log’s
alignment time. Alignment time is the intersection of the log’s start time and its
storage interval. For instance if the start time is 7/3 2003 10:00:00 AM, and the
storage interval is 15 Seconds, the log will store data at 00, 15, 30, and 45 seconds
of each minute starting at 10:00:00 AM on July 3, 2003. In this case, this is the
alignment time.
If the start time for a log has already passed, it will be aligned based on the storage
interval. For example, a log with a storage interval of 1 Minute will store data at the
beginning of each minute. So its alignment time is the beginning of the next minute.
3BUF001092-510 233
Deadband Attributes Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
The log stays in PENDING state until its alignment time. For the log whose storage
interval is 1 minute, it will be PENDING until the start of the next minute.
The default is: 1/1/1990 12:00:00 AM. The order of the month, day, and year and
the abbreviation of the month is standardized based upon the language being used.
Bad Data Quality Limit

When the percentage of samples with bad data quality or no data status used in a
calculation exceeds the Bad Data Quality Limit, the data quality of the calculated
result is bad. For example, 20% means that 2 out of 10 data samples can be bad.
This attribute can be used to avoid having data stored with BAD_DATA quality.
When sampling remote objects, the interval between values may vary depending
upon the load in the source node. In this case the sampled data will have status
BAD_DATA. Use of this attribute allows some of the sampled values to be bad and
still get a stored value with ok status.
For example, set sample interval to 3 Seconds, storage interval to 30 Seconds and
make the calculation Average. Set Bad Data Quality to 30%. In this case, at least
three of the ten values must have bad status in order for the calculation result to be
bad. Enter the bad data quality limit as a percent (10.500 = 10.5%). The default is 0.
Deadband Attributes
The Deadband attributes support data compaction. The recommended method for
achieving data compaction is to use the STORE_AS_IS calculation algorithm
(STORE AS IS Calculation on page 230). The attributes on the Deadband tab may
be used in certain circumstances, for example to support upgrades from earlier
installations that used deadband, or when configuring calculation algorithms such as
minimum, maximum, and average for history logs.
Deadband compaction has two advantages:
• It reduces the load on the system by filtering out values that do not have to be
stored since there is not a significant change in the value.
• It allows data to be stored online for a longer period of time since the data is not
replaced (overwritten) as quickly.
234 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Deadband Attributes
Compaction is specified on an individual log basis. It may be used for some logs and
not for others. Compaction should not be used indiscriminately in all cases.
• Use compaction if an accurate representation of the process over time is
needed, and it is not required that every data sample be stored.
• Do not use compaction if the application requires that every data sample be
stored as an instance in the log.
Deadband can be used on digital data sources so that only state changes are saved.
The Deadband filters out insignificant changes in the process variable.The deadband
defines the minimum change in value or in rate of change for the change to be
significant. The deadband is defined as a percent of the engineering units range.
For example, if a process variable is scaled from 200 to 500, the range is 300. If the
deadband is 2%, the minimum significant change is 6 (2% of 300). With these
values, if the last stored sample was 400, and the next sample is 397, then 397 is
within the deadband and will not be stored. If the next sample is 406.2, it will be
stored. A small deadband results in more stored samples than a large deadband.
Deadband is activated by configuring a compaction deadband greater than zero.
When deadband is active, the deadband algorithm determines whether the
calculation result, or raw value if calculation algorithm is instantaneous, is within or
outside the deadband. If the most recent result is outside the deadband, the previous
result is stored. If the most recent result is within the deadband, it is held until the
next result is calculated, and the previous result is discarded. If the compaction
deadband is zero, so compaction not activated, all results are stored.
A deadband storage interval is defined on an individual basis for each log. The
deadband storage interval is a multiple of the log’s storage interval. It is the
maximum time that can elapse without storing a sample when compaction is
activated. Even if the process is so stable that there are no samples outside the
deadband, samples will still be stored at the deadband storage interval. The
deadband storage interval is always measured from the time the last sample was
stored. The deadband storage interval should be at least 10 times larger than the
storage interval to ensure a high compaction ratio.
When deadband is active, a sample may be stored for any one of the following
reasons:
• sample outside the deadband.
3BUF001092-510 235
• value status changed (possible statuses are: no data, bad data, good data).
• deadband storage interval elapsed since last stored sample.
Figure 145 shows how samples are stored when deadband is active. The deadband
function holds each sample until it determines whether or not the sample is required
to plot the trend. Samples that are not required are discarded.
A sample is stored when deadband is activated at 0s. The sample at 10s is held until
the next sample at 20s. Since there is no change in slope between 0s and 20s, the 10s
sample is discarded and the 20s sample is held. This pattern is repeated at each 10-
second interval until a change in slope is detected at 50s. When this occurs, the
samples at 40s and 50s are stored to plot the change. At 90s another change in slope
is detected, so the samples at 80s and 90s are stored.
Even though there are spikes between 80s and 90s, these values were not sampled so
the slope remains constant (as indicated by the dotted line). Another change in slope
is detected at 100s. The sample at 100s is stored to plot the slope. The sample at 90s,
also used to plot the slope, was already stored. The slope remains constant
thereafter. The next sample stored is 140s since the Deadband Storage Interval (40s)
elapses between 100s and 140s. The sample at 180s is also stored due to the
Deadband Storage Interval.
Deadband Storage Interval = 40s
Sample & Storage Interval = 10s Samples stored at these Intervals
because Deadband Storage Interval
elapsed since last sample stored
Compaction activated,
sample stored
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150160 170 180 190 200
Samples stored at these Storage Intervals to plot the trend
Figure 145. Data Compaction Example
236 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Deadband Attributes
Compaction effectively increases the log period so the same number of samples
stored (as determined by the log capacity) cover a longer period of time. If the
process is very unstable such that every sample is stored and there is no data
compaction, the effective log period will be equal to the configured log period. If the
process is perfectly stable (maximum data compaction, samples stored only at
deadband storage interval), the effective log period is extended according to the
following formula:
effective log period = (deadband storage interval/storage interval) * configured
log period
In most cases, process variation is not at either extreme, so the effective log period
will fall somewhere in between the configured (minimum) and maximum value.
The calculated effective log period is stored in the EST_LOG_TIME_PER attribute.
This attribute is updated periodically according to a schedule which repeats as often
as every five days. If necessary, manually execute the update function via the hsDB-
Maint utility. This is described in Update Deadband Ratio Online on page 450.
When requesting by name, EST_LOG_TIME_PER determines which log to retrieve
data from (seamless retrieval). For instance, consider a case where the trend log
stores data at 30 second intervals over a one-day time period, and the history log
stores data at one-hour intervals over a one-week time period. The data compaction
ratio is 5:1 which extends the effective log period of the trend log to five days.
Making a request to retrieve three-day-old data causes the History retrieval function
to get the data from the primary log rather than the hierarchical log, even through
the configured log period of the primary log is only one day.
When EST_LOG_TIME_PER is updated, both internal History memory and the
history database are updated with the new values of EST_LOG_TIME_PER and
COMPACTION_RATIO. This will ensure the information will be available after a
re-start of the History node.
Before using compaction, refer to examples 2 & 5 in Property Log Configuration
Reference on page 258.
Deadband Compaction %
This is the minimum change between a sample and previously stored value that
causes the new sample to be stored. Enter this as a percent of engineering units
range (Range Max. - Range Min.). For example, 1 means 1% of range.
3BUF001092-510 237
Deadband Storage Interval

When deadband is active, this is the maximum time elapsed between storing entries.
This assures that some data is stored, even if the process is stable.
Enter deadband storage interval as an Integer value with a case time unit indicator:
Weeks, Days, Hours, Minutes, Seconds. It must be a multiple of the storage
interval.
The deadband storage interval defaults to ten times the storage interval. When the
storage interval is less than or equal to 10m, the deadband storage interval should be
much greater than ten times the storage interval. For example:
• If the storage interval = 5 Seconds, make the deadband storage interval at least
1 Hour.
• If the storage interval = 10 Minutes, make the deadband storage interval at least
8 Hours.
When the storage interval is greater than 10m, reduce the deadband storage interval
to have less time elapse without storing a value.
Estimated Period
This attribute indicates the time between the oldest and newest stored values. This is
filled in by running hsDBMaint. If necessary, use the History Utility to manually
update this attribute. Refer to Update Deadband Ratio Online on page 450.
Compaction Ratio
This is a read-only attribute that indicates the number of entries sampled for each
entry stored. It is filled in by running hsDBMaint. Refer to Update Deadband Ratio
Online on page 450.
Expected Ratio
This attribute indicates the expected ratio for number of entries sampled/each entry
stored.
238 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection IM Imported Tab
IM Imported Tab
This tab, Figure 146, is provided for log configurations that have been imported
from other systems (Importing Remote Log Configurations on page 357).
Figure 146. IM Imported Tab
This tab indicates:

• The name of the node from which the configurations were imported.
• Log Name.
• Storage Interval.
• Log Period.
• Log Capacity.
• Calculation Algorithm.
Data Collection Examples

These examples further illustrate common data collection applications:
• Example 1 - Storing Instantaneous Values, No Compaction.
• Example 2 - Storing Instantaneous Values Using Compaction.
• Example 3 - Storing Calculated Values.
• Example 4 - Storing Calculated Values in Logs.
• Example 5- Storing Calculated Values with Compaction.
3BUF001092-510 239
Data Collection Examples Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Example 1 - Storing Instantaneous Values, No Compaction

When the calculation algorithm is INSTANTANEOUS (no calculation), the sample
and storage interval must be the same. If no compaction is specified, a data instance
is stored every storage interval. Figure 147 shows the relation between these
attributes of the Primary Log. In this case a sample is stored every five seconds. The
blocking rate is 60 seconds. The data samples to be stored are held in a buffer, and
then written to disk in blocks of 12 samples at each 60-second interval. While the
data is held in the buffer, it is not available for data retrieval.
Storage Interval = 5 Seconds

Sample Interval = 5 Seconds Source Direct Operator Primary Extended
Blocking Rate = 1 Minute Trend Log History Log
Sample stored at each Storage Interval Blocking Rate
Storage Interval
(Sample Interval)
0 5 10 15 Seconds 20 60
In this case, each sample is saved for storage.

For the 60-second time period in this example,
12 sample values are written to disk.
Figure 147. Storing Instantaneous Values, No Compaction
Example 2 - Storing Instantaneous Values Using Compaction

In this example, the process variable is scaled from 200 to 500, the range is 300. The
deadband is 2%, the minimum significant change is 6 (2% of 300). Again, since
there is no calculation, the sample and storage interval must be the same. At each
storage interval the data is checked by the deadband function. If a significant change
in slope is detected, the sample is stored. Samples are discarded as the slope remains
within the deadband. However, if the deadband storage interval (in this example,
25s) elapses since the last stored sample, another sample is stored on the deadband
240 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Data Collection Examples
storage interval whether or not a change in slope is detected. In Figure 148, the data
is sampled every five seconds. Of the 17 samples taken, only 7 are stored. A
summary is provided in Table 25 below.
Table 25. Storing Instantaneous Values w/Compaction
Interval Value Stored Reason

0 406.7 Yes Deadband activated, first sample stored
5 404.5 No No significant change in slope between 5s & 10s
10 406.2 Yes Change in slope, next sample outside deadband
15 399.8. No No significant change in slope between 15s & 20s
20 394.9 Yes Change in slope from 20 to 25, sample @ 25 outside deadband
55 404.1 Yes Deadband storage interval (25s) elapsed since last stored
sample (at 30s)
70 404.1 No No significant change in slope between 605 & 70s
80 405.0 Yes Deadband storage interval elapsed since last stored sample
3BUF001092-510 241
Source Direct Operator Primary Extended

Trend Log History Log
410
Deadband Storage Interval = 25s
Storage Interval = 5s
400
390
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Figure 148. Storing Instantaneous Values w/Data Compaction
Example 3 - Storing Calculated Values

This example shows how to do a calculation before storing a value in a primary log,
Figure 149. In this example, an average is calculated over an eight-hour shift.
The storage and sample intervals determine how many samples to use in the
calculation (storage interval/sample interval). The storage interval must be an
integer multiple of the sample interval. In this case, eight samples are used in each
calculation.
Eight samples at hours 1,2,3,4,5,6,7, and 8 are averaged and the average is stored in
the primary log at hour 8 (storage interval). Similarly, eight samples for two other
sample groups are averaged and stored. The results of these three average
242 3BUF001092-510
calculations are written to disk at 24 hours (blocking rate). The process is repeated
at 48 hours and averages are stored at 32, 40, and 48 hour.
Source Direct Operator Calculation Primary Extended

Calculation Algorithm: AVERAGE (or any except instantaneous)

Storage Interval = 8h
Sample Interval = 1h
Blocking Rate = 24h
Values calculated at Storage Intervals
0 8h 16h 24h
Three calculated values written to disk at 24h (Blocking Rate)
Data samples from Data Source at: Results calculated at each Storage Interval
1h
2h
3h
4h Calculate
Calculates result at 8h
5h Average
6h
7h
8h
9h
.
. Calculate
Calculates result at 16h
. Average
16h
17h
.
. Calculate
Calculate and store result at 24h
. Average
24h
Figure 149. Primary Log Example: Calculation being Used
3BUF001092-510 243
Example 4 - Storing Calculated Values in Logs

This example shows how to do a calculation before storing a value in a secondary
log. The primary log calculates the shift average as described in Example 3, and
shown in Figure 149. The secondary log then calculates a daily average as
Source Direct Operator Calc Primary Extended Calc Secondary Extended

Trend Log History Log History Log
Direct Log Hierarchical Log
Calculation Algorithm: AVERAGE (or any except instantaneous) Same

Storage Interval 8h 24h
Sample Interval 1h 8h
Blocking Rate 24h
Values calculated at Storage Intervals
0 24h 48h 72h 168h
Data samples from direct log at:

8h
16h Calculate
Stores result at 24h
24h Average
32h
Calculate
40h Stores result at 48h Results stored at
48h Average each Storage Interval
56h
64h Calculate
Stores result at 72h
72h Average
Figure 150. Hierarchical Log Example: Calculation being Used
244 3BUF001092-510
The sample blocking rate is used for primary history logs that are connected
directly to the direct trend log. Subsequent (secondary) history logs do not use the
sample blocking rate. The sample blocking rate from the primary log determines
when values are stored for all history logs in the property log.
Example 5- Storing Calculated Values with Compaction

This example uses the same data as Example 2 - Storing Instantaneous Values Using
Compaction. The process variable is scaled from 200 to 500, the range is 300. The
deadband is 2%, the minimum significant change is 6 (2% of 300). Since a
calculation is being performed at each storage interval, the storage interval must be
an integer multiple of the sample interval. In this case, data samples are collected at
5-second intervals, and four samples are used to calculate an average at 20-second
intervals. At each storage interval the calculated value is checked by the deadband
function. If a significant change in slope is detected, the calculated value is stored.
Calculated values are discarded as the slope remains within the deadband. However,
if the deadband storage interval (in this example, 60s) elapses since the last stored
sample, another sample is stored at that time whether or not a change in slope is
detected. In Figure 151, calculations are performed at 20-second intervals. Of the 4
calculations performed, only 2 are stored. A summary is provided in Table 26.
Notice the contrast in the trends between Figure 148 and Figure 151, even though
the same data is used to plot the trends.
Table 26. Storing Calculated values w/Compaction
Interval Value Calculated Average Stored Reason

0 406.7
5 404.5
404.3 Yes First calculated average
10 406.2
15 399.8.
20 394.9
25 409.0
403.0 No No significant change in slope
30 404.2 between 1st & 2nd calculation
35 404.0
3BUF001092-510 245
Table 26. Storing Calculated values w/Compaction (Continued)
Interval Value Calculated Average Stored Reason

40 402.8
45 403.3
403.4 No No significant change in slope
50 403.2 between 2nd & 3rd calculation
55 404.1
60 404.1
65 403.8
403.7 Yes Deadband storage interval (60s in
70 404.1 this example) elapsed since last
stored sample (0s)
75 402.9
Source Direct Operator Primary Extended

410 Deadband Storage Interval = 60s

Sample Interval = 5s
400
390
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Figure 151. Storing Calculated Values w/Data Compaction
246 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection File Storage vs. Oracle Tables
File Storage vs. Oracle Tables

Property log entries can be stored in Oracle tables or in files maintained by History.
File storage is faster and uses less disk space than Oracle storage. Whether entries
are stored in Oracle tables or in files maintained by History is determined by the
STORAGE_TYPE log attribute:
• TYPE5 (default) - file storage variable size based on the collected data type.
This storage type is recommended for all history logs that collect from operator
trend logs.
• ORACLE - storage in Oracle tables @ 100 bytes per entry.
• TYPE1 - file storage with full status information @ 24 bytes per entry.
• TYPE2 - file storage with partial status information @ 4 bytes per entry.
• TYPE3 - File storage, 8 bytes per entry. Identical to TYPE2, except that an
additional 4 bytes are required per entry for precision time stamps.
• TYPE4 - Profile Log.
Refer to the Comparison of File-based Logs below to determine the type which is
appropriate for the application. For disk space requirements, refer to:
• Disk Requirements for Oracle-based Logs on page 249.
• Disk Requirements for File-based Property Logs on page 250.
• Disk Requirements for Profile Logs on page 251.
Comparison of File-based Logs

The default storage type for property logs is TYPE5. This storage type maintains the
data type of the collected data, when the STORE AS IS Calculation is used. For all
other storage types (and for TYPE5 when any calculation other than
STORE_AS_IS is applied), the collected data is converted to floating point.
TYPE1 uses 24 bytes per entry and provides complete status and related
information for each entry, as well as full precision (microsecond resolution)
timestamp. TYPE2 (4-byte) entries require less storage space; however, some status
information is sacrificed, as well as time stamp accuracy (one-second resolution).
Also, for TYPE2 entries, if a value is modified, the original value is not saved, and
no status bits are set to indicate that the value has been modified.
3BUF001092-510 247
File Storage vs. Oracle Tables Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Even though TYPE2 storage provides a reduction in disk usage, it may not be
applicable in all cases. TYPE2 storage is recommended when:
• The storage interval is 1 hour or less and is divisible into 1 hour, and the data
source is TTD. TTDs, do not have object status, and times are always aligned.
• The storage interval is one minute or less when collecting from process objects.
A time stamp is recorded every 500th storage. During the interim, values are
assumed to be exactly one storage interval apart (as noted below). Of course
larger storage intervals can be configured, but they should be confirmed as
acceptable. Since TYPE2 logs only correct their alignment after the 500th
storage, they should only be used on fast logs. For example, a one-day storage
log, if not properly aligned, will take 500 days for the alignment to correct.
TYPE2 logs should not be used for logs with storage intervals greater than one hour.
Use TYPE3 logs instead.
TYPE3 (8-byte) is similar to TYPE2. TYPE3 provides full precision time stamp
(like TYPE1), and stores a status when a value is modified. TYPE3 does not store
the original value when the value is modified. TYPE3 logs grow to 16-bytes when
the storage interval is greater than 30 minutes.
The complete information provided for TYPE1 entries is described below. The
differences between TYPE1 and other types are described where applicable.
Time Stamp
Each data entry in a log is time stamped with Universal Time (UTC) Coordinate
(Greenwich Mean Time). It is not affected by the time zone, nor daylight saving
time. This gives consistency throughout all external changes such as Daylight
Saving Time and any system resets that affect the Local time.
TYPE1, TYPE3, TYPE5, and Oracle-based logs support microsecond resolution for
timestamps. For TYPE2 logs (file-based 4-byte entries), the time is an estimate of
the actual time for the entry. The time for the entries are all defined to be a storage
interval apart. A reference time is stored for each block of 500 values. The time for
subsequent values after the reference time = Reference time + (n * storage interval)
where n is the sequential number of the value in the block (0 to 499). So if a log is
configured to store a value every 15 seconds, the entries will have timestamps at 0,
15, 30, 45s of each minute.
248 3BUF001092-510
Data Value
The data value format for all types is floating point. If the data being collected is not
floating point (for example, integer), the data will be converted to floating type and
then stored in that format. This may result in some decimal places being truncated
when the data is stored.
The only exception is when TYPE5 is used in combination with the STORE AS IS
Calculation. In this case the TYPE5 log maintains the data type of the collected
data.
Status
Status information is stored according to OPC DA specifications.
Object Status
Object status is the status of the data source when the value was sampled. This field
is not used when the data source is TTD. The format of the status (what is
represented and how) is dependent upon the data source object type. When a
hierarchical log is created, the object status is obtained from the last primary log
entry used in the calculation.
If a User Object that inherits a Basic Object is the source for a log, its status will
also be collected and stored.
Object status is not stored for TYPE2 or TYPE3 logs.
Disk Requirements for Oracle-based Logs

Each property Oracle-based log requires approximately 100 bytes per entry:
• 50 bytes for the Inform_HS_RunTime tablespace.
• 50 bytes for the HS_Indexes tablespace for logs whose capacity is > 5000
entries, or 20 bytes for the HS_Indexes tablespace for logs whose capacity is <
5000 entries.
After calculating the requirements for Oracle-based logs, add about 10% to 15% for
overhead.
3BUF001092-510 249
OPC Message Log

Each OPC/AE message entry can range in size from 2k to 6k bytes. The size is
dependent on the strings in the message. The OPC message log can hold 4K of text
per message and each attribute for a single message can hold a 4K string. It is not
typical for the messages to have such large strings. When calculating the required
space for a message log, use these metrics based on capacity of the message log.
Table 27. Message Entry Range
Average Per Average in Average in

Capacity Range
Message HS_RUNTIME HS_INDEXES
10K to 1 million 2500 2000 500
1Million to 4 Million 3000 1000
4 Million to 8 million 3500 2000 1500
8 million to 12 million 4000 2000 2000
Disk Requirements for File-based Property Logs

For file-based logs, the actual disk space may be greater than the calculated capacity
if the log is very small. For TYPE1 (24-byte) logs, the minimum capacity allocated
on disk is 84 entries. For TYPE2 (4-byte) logs, the minimum space allocated on disk
is 500 entries.
Each TYPE1 log requires about 24 bytes per entry. To calculate exact file size for
TYPE1:
#data_blocks = (#entries + 83)/84
#index_blocks = (#data_blocks + 253)/254
If (#index_blocks > 3), Then #map_blocks = 1, Else #map_blocks = 0
file size = (#data_blocks + #index_blocks + #map_blocks) *2048
Each TYPE2 log requires about 4 bytes per entry. To calculate exact file size for
TYPE2:
#data_blocks = 1+ (#entries + 499)/500
250 3BUF001092-510

Each TYPE3 log requires about 8 bytes per entry (or 16 bytes if storage interval >
30 minutes). To calculate exact file size for TYPE2:
#data_blocks = 1+ (#entries + 251)/252 (when storage interval < 30 minutes)
OR
#data_blocks = 1+ (#entries + 125)/126 (when storage interval > 30 minutes)
For file-based storage, Windows allocates 5% overhead per file.
Disk Requirements for Profile Logs

The following information is needed to calculate the size of a profile file:
• LogPeriod: Expected duration of the log, 4w, 10w, etc.
• Storage Rate (from OPC data source, 30s, 1m, etc.)
• Array Size: Maximum number of samples per scan (max allowed 32768).
Based on the storage Rate and Log Period, calculate the capacity as follows:
LogPeriod/StorageRate = Capacity.
Using Capacity and ArraySize, the file size can be calculated with the following
equation:
if arraySize is odd, adjustedArray = arraySize+1 else adjustedArray =
arraySize;
if (arraySize > 2000)
{
#data_blocks =
(1+(capacity*((adjustedArray+2)*4+32)+1048543)/1048544);
block_size = 1048544
}
else
3BUF001092-510 251
{
#data_blocks = (1+(capacity*((adjustedArray+2)*4+32)+32735)/32736);
block_size = 32736
if (#data_blocks > 65278 )

{
#data_blocks =
(1+(capacity*((adjustedArray+2)*4+32)+1048543)/1048544);
block_size = 1048544
}
}
#indexBlocks = (#dataBlocks+253)/254;
if #indexBlocks > 3, then #map_blocks = 1 else #map_blocks = 0;
fileSize = (#map_blocks + #index_blocks)*2048 + #data_blocks*block_size
#data_blocks cannot exceed 65278. For the other storage types, this means a known
maximum limit. However, since the arraySize is variable, the maximum capacity is
based on the arraySize. The maximum file size is 65278*32K + 257*2K (slightly
less than 2G) for the 32K data blocks or 65278*1M + 257*2K ( slightly less than
64GB ) for the 1meg datablocks.
For a 600 value profile, the maximum capacity would be:
(65278*32768)/((600+2)*4+32) which is approximately 875000 values. This is
about 300 days worth of data or more.
Additional duration of data can be stored because the start and ends of the array
typically do not have valid data points. Invalid values are not stored. Therefore,
values 1-5 and 590-600 were always bad, 15*4 bytes are not stored in the file,
saving that space for more entries. Additionally, if the not array values are passed
back, only a timestamp is stored, saving 600*4 bytes per entry. If the machine only
runs 10 percent of every day, then only 10% of the data to be stored is stored.
252 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Presentation and Status Functions
Presentation and Status Functions

The log configuration aspect provides two tabs which are not available on the log
template view. These are:
• Presentation for formatting history presentation on trend display.
• Status for viewing log data directly from the log configuration aspect.
Other sources of status information are the Property Log Tab, and Status Light.
Presentation
Configure presentation attributes for the Trend Display on this tab, Figure 152. The
default settings for these attributes are set in one of the following ways:
• Object Type (i.e. in the Property Aspect).
• Object Instance (i.e in the Property Aspect).
• Log (in the Log Configuration Aspect).
• Trend Display.
These are listed are in order from lowest to highest precedence.
Figure 152. Presentation Tab
For example, to override a value set in the Object Type write a value in the Object
Instance. A value set in the Object Type, Object Instance, or the Log can be
overridden in the Trend Display.
3BUF001092-510 253
Status Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
To override a presentation attribute the check box for the attribute must be marked.
If the check box is unmarked the default value is displayed. The default value can be
a property name or a value, depending on what is specified in the Control
Connection Aspect.
Engineering Units are inherited from the source. It is possible to override it. Normal
Maximum and Normal Minimum are scaling factors, used for the scaling of Y-axis
in the Trend Display. The values are retrieved from the source but are possible to
override.
The Number of Decimals are retrieved from the source but are possible to override.
The Display Mode can be either Interpolated or Stepped. Interpolated is
appropriate for real values, Stepped is for binary.
Click Apply to put the changes into effect.
Status
This tab is used to retrieve and view data for a selected log, Figure 153. As an
option, use the Settings button to set viewing options. Refer to:
• Data Retrieval Settings on page 255.
• Display Options on page 256.
Click Read to retrieve the log data. Use the arrow buttons to go to the next or
previous page. Page size is configurable via the Data Retrieval Settings. The default
is 1000 points per page.
Click Action to:
• Import Data from File. Opens csv file to Insert, Replace, or Insert/Replace data.
• Export Data to File. Opens wizard to export csv file.
• Copy Data to Clipboard.
• Restore Log from Backup. Backup object needed in Maintenance structure and
file on backup server.
254 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Status
Figure 153. Status Tab
Data Retrieval Settings

The Settings button displays the Data Retrieval Setting dialog used to change the
time frame and the number of data points to be retrieved, Figure 154.
Figure 154. Data Retrieval Settings
3BUF001092-510 255
Status Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Set the number of points per page in the Page Size area. Default is 1000 and
maximum is 10,000.
Set the time range for retrieval of data in the Time Frame area.
• Latest retrieves one page worth of the most recent entries.
• Oldest retrieves one page worth of the oldest entries.
• At time is used to specify the time interval for which entries will be retrieved.
The data is retrieved from the time before the specified date and time.
Display Options
The Display button displays the Display Options dialog used to change the
presentation parameters data and time stamp, Figure 155.
Values are displayed as text by default. Unchecking the check box in the Quality
area, displays the values as hexadecimals.
Timestamps are displayed in local time by default. Unchecking the first check box
in the Time & Date area, changes the timestamps to UTC time.
Timestamps are displayed in millisecond resolution by default. Unchecking the
second check box in the Time & Date area changes the timestamp resolution to one
second.
Figure 155. Display Options Dialog
256 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Property Log Tab
Property Log Tab

The Property Log tab, Figure 156, displays log information. This tab is displayed by
clicking the Log Configuration Template placeholder in the Log Configuration
hierarchy.
The Data Size is the size of the Property Log on disk. It is the sum of the size of all
logs. The size of each log file is the sum of the file header and the data storage size.
Figure 156. Property Log Tab
Status Light
The Service Status row shows status information for the configured Service Group.
The name of the configured group is presented in the row. If no history sources have
been defined (refer to Configuring Node Assignments for Property Logs on page
181), the text ‘Not Specified’ is displayed. Status for configured Service Group may
be:
• OK: All providers in the service group are up and running.
• OK/ERROR: At least one service provider is up and running.
• ERROR: All providers in the service group are down.
3BUF001092-510 257
Property Log Configuration Reference Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Property Log Configuration Reference

The basic configuration procedure is covered in Building a Simple Property Log on
page 188. The following sections provide further details:
• Modifying Log Configurations on page 258.
• Adding a Direct Log on page 258.
• Adding a Hierarchical Log on page 259.
• Deleting an Individual Log from the Log Template on page 259.
• Assigning a Log to a Log Set on page 259.
• Assigning Logs to an Archive Group on page 260.
• Activating/Deactivating a Property Log on page 260.
Modifying Log Configurations

When a log template with IM History logs defined is instantiated, the IM logs in that
template cannot be modified. Trend logs in the same template can be modified. If an
IM log must be modified, the IM log can be deleted from the template. Once applied
and the delete operation is completed, the desired IM log can be re-added to the log
template. The new logs will not have any data from the old logs and will start
collecting data from the time they are activated.
In some cases, it is recommended to delete all instances of the log template and
recreate everything based on the new configuration.
It is also possible to modify some IM History Log attributes on the log configuration
aspect.
Adding a Direct Log

A direct log gets its data directly from the Data Source, which can be an aspect
object property, or another History Log. The procedure is illustrated in the tutorial.
Refer to Adding a Trend Log on page 191.
More than one direct log can be in the log hierarchy. When collecting directly
from a process object, DO NOT have more than one direct log. In this case, each
direct log in the hierarchy log increase the load on the control network.
258 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Adding a Hierarchical Log
Adding a Hierarchical Log

A hierarchical log gets its data either from a direct log, or another hierarchical log.
The procedure is illustrated in the tutorial. Refer to Adding a History Log on page
193.
Deleting an Individual Log from the Log Template

To cut a log from the log hierarchy defined in a log template, right-click on the log
to be cut, and then choose Delete Log from the context menu, Figure 157. An
individual log that has children can not be cut. The children logs must be deleted
first.
Figure 157. Deleting a Log
Assigning a Log to a Log Set

Log Sets group related logs so that they can be activated or deactivated as a unit.
The only limitation is that the logs must reside on the same node. Logs sets are
configured as described in Section 6, Configuring Log Sets.
To assign a log to a log set:
1. Select the log in the log hierarchy.
2. Click the IM Definition tab.
3. Select the Log Set from the Log Set pull-down list.
To assign a log to a second log set, simply repeat the procedure, using the Second
Log Set pull-down list.
Removing a Log from a Log Set

To remove a log from a log set, make the Selected Log Set field blank, then click
OK.
3BUF001092-510 259
Assigning Logs to an Archive Group Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Assigning Logs to an Archive Group

The Archive Group structure groups related logs for timed (periodic) archival. The
only limitation is that the logs must reside on the same node. Archive groups are
configured as described in Configuring Archive Groups on page 331.
To assign a log to an archive group:
1. Select the log in the log hierarchy.
2. Click the IM Definition tab.
3. Select the Archive Group from the Archive Group pull-down list.
As an option, assign logs to an archive group via the Archive Group aspect. Refer to
Configuring Archive Groups on page 331.
Removing a Log from an Archive Group

To remove a log from an Archive Group, make the Selected Archive Group field
blank, then click OK. As an option, delete logs from an archive group via the
Archive Group aspect. Refer to Configuring Archive Groups on page 331.
Activating/Deactivating a Property Log

Activate/deactivate can be used on all the logs in a property log as a unit, or on
individual logs within the hierarchy, or for logs on a log set basis.
When activating a log, it may be activated immediately, or activation may be
delayed, depending upon how the log’s Start Time attribute is defined. Start Time
determines the earliest allowable time that the log can be activated. Start time also
determines the hour, minute, and second when the first sample is collected.
To activate a property log as a unit:
1. Go to the structure where the logged object resides and click the Log
Configuration aspect.
2. Use the Enabled check box to activate (checked) or deactivate (unchecked) all
logs in the property log, Figure 158.
260 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Activating/Deactivating a Property Log
Figure 158. Activating/Deactivating a Property Log
The enabled check box is only for Property logs (basic history).
To activate an individual log within a property log, select the log in the hierarchy,
click the IM Definition tab, and then click Activate under the IM Historian Log
State control, Figure 159.
Figure 159. Activating an Individual Log in the Property Log Hierarchy
3BUF001092-510 261
Bulk Configuration of Property Logs Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
To activate or deactivate property logs on a log set basis, refer to Activate/Deactivate

Logs in a Log Set on page 143.
Bulk Configuration of Property Logs

The Bulk Configuration tool is used to configure and instantiate property logs for a
large quantity of object properties without having to add the logs on an object-by-
object, and property-by property basis in the Plant Explorer. This tool is an add-in
for Microsoft Excel.
Add-in tools for Bulk Import are installed in Microsoft Excel on a user basis. If
the add-in tools for Bulk Import are not available when Excel is opened, use the
procedure in Installing Add-ins in Microsoft Excel on page 286 to add them now.
The Bulk Configuration tool is used to generate a load report which calculates the
disk space occupied by existing file-based property logs, and additional disk space
which will be required as a result of instantiating new property logs via this tool.
Use this report to determine whether to adjust the disk space allocation for file-
based logs. This tool also is used to verify whether or not the logs have been created
when finished.
Import filters in the Bulk Configuration tool can be used to shorten the time it takes
to read information from aspect objects into the Excel spreadsheet. The most
effective filter in this regard is an import filter for some combination of object types,
properties, and data type. Since some objects may have hundreds of properties, the
time savings can be significant.
A list of properties can be created for which logs have already been created in the
event that the log configurations for those properties need to be modified or deleted.
Extensive use of the Bulk Configuration tool may cause disks to become
fragmented. This, in turn, may impair the response time and general performance
of the system. Therefore, check the system for fragmented files after any such
procedure, and defragment disks as required.
History configuration impacts not only the History server disk(s), but also the
disk(s) on any Connectivity Servers where trend logs are configured. Therefore,
check the disks on any Connectivity Server where trend or history logs are
located.
262 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Work Flow
Work Flow
Configure all other history objects, including log templates, before using this tool.
The recommended work flow is as follows (instructions for all steps with the
exception of 2, 3 & 12 are provided in this section):
1. To start with a fresh (empty) database, refer to the procedure for Dropping the
Existing Database on page 264 and recreate the History database before adding
any new logs. If this step is not performed, the new logs will be in addition to
any existing logs in the current History database.
2. Configure log sets, message logs, report logs as required by the application. If
archival is required, create an Archive Device and Archive Groups. Refer to:
Section 6, Configuring Log Sets
Section 7, Alarm/Event Message Logging
Section 8, Historizing Reports
Section 11, Configuring the Archive Function
3. Configure the Log Templates as described in Building a Simple Property Log
on page 188. DO NOT create Log Configuration aspects at this time.
4. Create a new workbook in Excel and initialize the workbook to add the Bulk
Configuration add-ins.
5. Create a list of object properties whose values are to be logged.
6. For each object property, specify the Log Template that meets its data
collection requirements, and specify the name of the Log Configuration aspect.
7. Configure presentation attributes if necessary.
8. Generate a load report to see whether or not the disk space allocation for file-
based logs needs to be adjusted. Make any adjustments as required.
9. Create new property logs based on the spreadsheet specifications.
3BUF001092-510 263
Dropping the Existing Database Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
10. Verify that all property logs and their respective component logs have been
created.
If multiple property log configurations are created using the Bulk Import tool and
Industrial IT Basic History and Information Management logs stop collecting
follow these steps:
a. Locate the Basic History Service Providers for the log configurations just
created.
b. Restart the Basic History Service Providers located in step a.
11. Run the Load Report function again. This time, the report should indicate that
all logs have been created (existing space used = proposed space requirement).
12. Create a backup copy of the database. Refer to Backup and Restore on page
396.
13. On all nodes where either trend or history logs are configured, check system for
fragmented files, and defragment the applicable disks as required.
Dropping the Existing Database

This step is only required when starting with a fresh (empty) database. In this case,
drop and recreate the History database before running the Bulk Configuration tool
to instantiate the Log Configuration aspects. If this step is not performed, the new
logs will be in addition to any existing logs which are currently defined in the
History database.
Before drop the database, use the Plant Explorer workplace to delete the Log
Configuration aspects from the Aspect Directory. Then refer to the procedure for
dropping and recreating the History database in Create or Drop a Product Database
on page 468.
When finished, create the other History objects as described in steps 2 and 3 above,
and then continue with bulk configuration by Initializing a New Workbook on page
264.
Initializing a New Workbook

This procedure sets up the Excel spreadsheet for Bulk Import. As a prerequisite, the
Bulk Import add-ins must be available on the spreadsheet menu bar. These add-ins
264 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Initializing a New Workbook
are added on a user basis. The add-ins are automatically added for the user that
installed the Information Management software. Before running Microsoft Excel as
a different user, install the add-ins for that user. Instructions are provided in
Installing Add-ins in Microsoft Excel on page 286.
To create and initialize a new workbook:
1. Launch Microsoft Excel and create a new workbook, Figure 160.
Figure 160. Creating a New Workbook in Excel
2. Choose Bulk Import>Initialize Sheet, Figure 161.
Figure 161. Initializing the Workbook for Bulk Configuration
This sets up the workbook for bulk configuration by adding the applicable row
and column headings. Also, a dialog is presented for selecting a system (system
created via the 800xA Configuration Wizard), Figure 162.
3BUF001092-510 265
Creating a List of Object Properties Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Figure 162. Initialized Workbook
Excel sheet columns from A through E may disappear hiding any log names. This
can be corrected by unfreezing panes and refreezing panes.
3. Click Set System to connect the spreadsheet to the system indicated in the
Select a System dialog. Use the pull-down list to change the system if needed.
When finished initializing the worksheet, continue with Creating a List of Object
Properties on page 266.
Creating a List of Object Properties

This procedure imports a list of object properties whose values need to be logged.
Be sure to apply an import filter so that only those objects and properties that meet a
specific criteria are imported. This reduces the time required to complete the import,
and helps keep the list at a manageable size. Make further adjustments to the
resulting list using the filtering and sorting tools available in Microsoft Excel.
266 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Creating a List of Object Properties
Filtering may be implemented on two levels.

• First, the Bulk Import add-in provides five filters within the spreadsheet.
Spreadsheet cells near the top left corner of the spreadsheet are used to specify
object name, object type, aspect, property, and data type as filtering criteria.
Generally, a combination of object types, properties, and data type makes the
most effective filter.
• Second, import properties for a selected object or for the selected object and its
children objects can be specified. These properties can be included or excluded
for logs that have already been created. These specifications are made via
check boxes in the Select an Object dialog which is described later (step 5) of
this procedure.
The following example shows how to specify an import filter using a combination of
two object types and three properties. To do this:
1. Enter the object type specification in the Object column of the Import Filter
row (cell C2), Figure 163. Specify more than one object type if needed. If the
object type names are known, enter the names directly in the cell using the
following syntax:
TYPE:object type1:object type2
where:
TYPE: causes the following text strings to be interpreted as object type
names. Each object type name is separated by a colon (:).
To interpret the text as a pattern to match object names (for example: *TC100*),
omit the TYPE: keyword.
The example specification in Figure 163 will import all objects of the type
ggcAIN and ggcPID (TYPE:ggcAIN:ggcPID).
Import Filter Row
Figure 163. Object Type Specification Completed
3BUF001092-510 267
Use the Object Type pick list if the spelling of the object type names is not
known. To do this, right click in the Object Column for the Import Filter row
(cell C2) and choose Object Type List from the context menu, Figure 164.
Figure 164. Opening the Object Type List (Using Context Menu on Object Column)
This displays a dialog for selecting one or more object types, Figure 165. Scroll
to and select the applicable object types (in this case ggcAIN and ggcPID).
Select as many object types as required, although selecting too many will
defeat the purpose of the filter. Select an object type again to unselect it.
Click OK when finished.
268 3BUF001092-510
Figure 165. Selecting an Object Type
2. Enter the property specification in the Property column of the Import Filter
row. Specify one or more properties using the following syntax:
NAME:property1:property2, where each property is separated by a colon (:).
For example: NAME:Link.PV:Link.SP:Link.OUT, Figure 166.
To interpret the text as a pattern to match property names (for example: *value*),
omit the NAME: keyword.
Figure 166. Property Specification Completed
3. Click outside the cell to register the entry in the spreadsheet.
3BUF001092-510 269
Optionally, use a Data Type filter to make the object search more closely match
your requirements. The Data Type filter is a pattern filter. Enter the data type
manually (for example: Float), or use Data Type pick list which is available via
the Data Type cell’s context menu, Figure 167.
Figure 167. Specifying a Data Type Filter
4. When finished with the import filter specification, choose Bulk Import>Load
Sheet from System, Figure 168.
270 3BUF001092-510
Figure 168. Loading the Spreadsheet with Object Properties
This displays a dialog for selecting the root object in the Aspect Directory
under which the importer will look for objects and properties that meet the
filtering criteria, Figure 169.
Figure 169. Select an Object Dialog
5. Use the Select an Object dialog to specify the scope of properties to be

imported.
3BUF001092-510 271
Use the browser to select the root object whose properties will be imported.
Typically, the Include Child Objects check box to the right of the browser is
checked. This specifies that properties of the selected object AND properties of
all child objects under the selected object will be imported. If the box is not
checked, only properties for the selected object will be imported.
The other two check boxes specify:
• Whether or not to limit the import to properties that already have logs.
• Whether or not to enter the log configuration information in the spreadsheet
when importing properties that have logs.
ALWAYS check one or both of these check boxes; otherwise, no properties will
be imported. The operation of these check boxes is described in Table 28.
Table 28. Logged and Non-Logged Properties Check boxes
Include Include
Logged Non-Logged Operation
Properties Properties
X X Import all properties according to specified filter. For those
properties that already have logs, fill in the Log
Configuration Aspect and Log Template specifications.
X Import all properties according to specified filter. For those
properties that already have logs, do not fill in the Log
Configuration Aspect and Log Template specifications.
X Import only properties that already have logs, and fill in the
Log Configuration Aspect and Log Template specifications.
This will result in no properties being imported.
For example, the selections in Figure 170 will import the properties for objects
in the Group_01 Generic OPC Object branch based on the filter set up in steps
1&2. It will import the log configuration and log template specifications for
any properties that already have log configurations.
272 3BUF001092-510
Figure 170. Selecting a Parent Object
Only objects and properties that meet the filtering criteria will be imported.
6. Click Add when finished. This runs the importer.
A partial listing of the import result based on the specified filter is shown in
Figure 171. (The complete list is too lengthy to show.)
Figure 171. Import Filter Result
3BUF001092-510 273
Assigning Log Templates Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Use the Sheet Filter (row below Input Filter), or the sorting and filtering tools in
Microsoft Excel to make further adjustments to the list of imported objects and
properties.
Once the list is refined, continue with the procedure covered in Assigning Log
Templates below.
Assigning Log Templates

This procedure assigns a Log Template to each object property according to the
property’s data collection requirements. This procedure also is used to specify a
name for the Log Configuration aspect for each property log, or specify that the
property log be added to an existing Log Configuration aspect (if one exists for the
object where the property log is being added).
To do this:
1. Select a cell in the Property Template column. For example, Figure 172 shows
the cell for the first object property being selected.
If the name of the template is known, enter it directly in the spreadsheet cell. If
the name is not known, right-click and choose Template List from the context
menu, Figure 172.
274 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Assigning Log Templates
First row in Property Template Column selected
Figure 172. Selecting a Property Template
This displays a pull-down list for all property log templates that exist in the
system, Figure 173.
Figure 173. Template List
2. Select the template from the list then click OK.
3BUF001092-510 275
Assigning Log Templates Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
To use the same template for additional object properties in contiguous rows
under the currently selected object property, click on a corner of the cell, and pull
the corner down to highlight the Property Template column for as many rows as
required, Figure 174. The template specification will automatically be entered in
the highlighted cells when the mouse button is released.
Selected Object Property
Contiguous Object Properties
Figure 174. Applying Log Template Specification to Objects in Contiguous Rows
3. The Log Configuration aspect name is specified in much the same manner as
the property template. To create a new Log Configuration aspect for the
property log because when one does not yet exist, enter a Log Configuration
aspect name directly in the spreadsheet cell.
If no Log Configuration aspect names have been specified yet in the entire
column, typing the letter L in a cell will automatically fill in the cell with: Log
Configuration (matching the Column Name). This is a suitable aspect name. It
is not required for these names to be unique.
To add the property log to an existing Log Configuration aspect, right-click and
choose Log Config List from the context menu. This displays a list of Log
Configuration aspects that exist for that particular object. If no Log
Configuration aspects exist for the object, the list will indicate None.
As with the Property Template specification, to use the same Log
Configuration aspect name for contiguous object properties in the list, click on
276 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Configuring Other Log Attributes
corner of the cell, and pull the corner down to highlight the Log Configuration
column for as many object properties as required.
When finished assigning Log Templates and Log Configuration Aspect names,
continue with the procedure described in Configuring Other Log Attributes below.
Configuring Other Log Attributes

The spreadsheet has additional columns for log attributes that are configurable via
the Presentation tab on the Log Configuration aspect. For details, refer to
Presentation on page 253. When finished configuring other log attributes, continue
with the procedure covered in Generating a Load Report on page 277.
Generating a Load Report

The Load Report function calculates the disk space occupied by existing file-based
property logs, and additional disk space which will be required as a result of
instantiating new property logs as specified in the spreadsheet list. This report aids
in determining if the disk space allocation for file-based logs needs to be adjusted.
Run this report after creating the object property list and assigned the log templates.
To run the report, from the Excel menu bar choose
Bulk Import>Generate Load Report, Figure 175.
Figure 175. Generate Load Report
Then click the Load Report tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet, Figure 176.
3BUF001092-510 277
Generating a Load Report Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Click this tab
Figure 176. Load Report Tab
An example report is shown in Figure 177. The report shows the disk space
requirements on a per-server basis. The information for each server is presented in a
separate column. For the example in Figure 177 there is only one server.
Figure 177. Example, Load Report Result Before Creating Logs
The information provided in this report is described below.
Load Per Server The report shows the disk space requirements on a per-
server basis. In this example, there is only one server (in
this case ROC2HFVP01).
Existing This row indicates the disk space (in bytes) used by
existing property logs. In this case, 0 (zero) indicates
that no space is used since there are no existing logs.
Proposed This row indicates the space requirement (in bytes) for
the property logs which will be created based on this
spreadsheet. In this case 3,891,200 bytes will be
required.
Total This row indicates the sum of the Existing and Proposed
disk space requirements.
Grand Total This row indicates the sum of the totals for all servers.
278 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Creating the Property Logs
Compare the results of this report with the current disk space allocation for file-
based logs. Use the Instance Maintenance Wizard or hsDBMaint function as
described in Directory Maintenance for File-based Logs on page 454. Make any
adjustments as required, following the guidelines provided in the Directory
Maintenance section. When finished, continue with the procedure covered in
Creating the Property Logs on page 279.
Creating the Property Logs

This procedure updates the History database by adding Log Configuration aspects
and property logs as specified in the spreadsheet. Save the spreadsheet before
running the Bulk Configuration function. Excel can then be exited without losing
the configuration data in the event of a problem.
The update function skips those object properties in the list that already have a
property log existing in the database. To replace the existing property logs, delete
those property logs before running the update. To do this choose
Bulk Import>Delete Property Logs. This deletes all property logs for all object
properties represented in the spreadsheet.
To run the Bulk Configuration function,
1. Choose Bulk Import>Update Log Aspects from Sheet, Figure 178.
Figure 178. Updating Log Aspects from the Sheet
2. When prompted to confirm, click OK to run the update.

If the error message in Figure 179 is shown, then refer to Handling Error
Conditions on page 280. Otherwise, continue with Verifying the Update on
page 280.
3BUF001092-510 279
Verifying the Update Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Handling Error Conditions

During the update process, an error message such as the one shown in Figure 179
may be encountered. This message indicates the Bulk Configuration tool has failed
to create the log for the property at a specified row in the spreadsheet. It also
indicates the parameters specified for creating the log including object, aspect, and
property name, log configuration aspect name, and template. Review these
parameters.
If it is determined that these parameters are correct, and that the log should be
created according to these parameters, then click Yes to continue the update. This
message will not be displayed again, even if additional rows are skipped. When the
update process is finished, continue with Verifying the Update on page 280. This
procedure provides guidelines for handling the skipped rows (properties whose logs
were not created).
If it is determined that one or more of the parameters are incorrectly defined, for
example, the specified log template does not exist, then click No to abort the update.
Fix the problem, then retry the Bulk Configuration procedure starting at Initializing
a New Workbook on page 264.
Figure 179. Error Writing Property Log To the System
Verifying the Update

It may take considerable time for History Services to create the property logs,
depending on the size of the object property list. Therefore, wait some time after the
update is finished before attempting to verify the update (as a general rule, about 30
minutes for 2000 logs). After a reasonable delay, run the Verify function to verify all
property logs have been created. To do this, from the Excel menu bar choose Bulk
Import>Verify, Figure 180.
280 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Verifying the Update
Figure 180. Running the Verify Function
An example result is shown in Figure 181. The presence of a red not verified
message in the far left (A) column indicates a problem within the corresponding
row. The item that caused the failure, for example the log template, will also be
shown in red. Verified rows are shown in black.
Some rows may be marked as not verified because the verification function was run
before History Services was able to create the logs. Clear these rows by re-running
the verification function. Rows that were not verified on the previous run, but are
verified on a subsequent run are shown in green. The next time the function is run,
the green rows will be shown in black.
Not verified messages in column A
Figure 181. Example, Verify Function
Guidelines for handling not verified rows are provided in Handling Not Verified
Rows on page 284.
To get a summary for each time the verification function is run, click the Status and
Errors tab near the bottom of the spreadsheet, Figure 182. A new entry is created
each time the verify function is run. The summary is described in Table 29.
3BUF001092-510 281
Table 29. Verify Function Summary
Item Description
Date and Time Date and time when the verify function was run.
Rows Processed Number of rows that History Services finished processing at the time
this verification instance.
Rows Verified Number of processed rows that have been verified at the time of this
verification instance.
Rows Not Verified Due to Number of rows not verified due to a problem with the Log
Property Logs Configuration aspect or property log.
Rows Not Verified Due to Number of rows not verified due to a problem with component logs.
Component Logs The log configuration aspect was created, but the component history
logs do not have item IDs.
Logs Processed Number of component logs (within a property log structure)
processed.
Logs Verified Number of component logs (within a property log structure) verified.
Logs Not Verified Number of component logs (within a property log structure) not
verified.
Total Time Time taken to run the verify function.
When using the Bulk Configuration tool in Microsoft Excel, the Update System
Status information will be incorrect when a sheet has been filtered. After filtering,
only the visible rows are processed during the Update Log Aspects from Sheet
operation. However, the Status and Errors shows the number of rows written to
system as the total (unfiltered) number of rows. This is the normal mode of
operation.
282 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Verifying the Update
Figure 182. Verify Report
To further confirm that property logs have been instantiated for their respective
object properties, go to the Control structure and display the Log Configuration
aspect for one of the objects. An example is shown in Figure 183.
3BUF001092-510 283
Figure 183. Confirming Instantiation of Property Logs
Handling Not Verified Rows

If after several iterations of the verification function, rows continue to be shown as
not verified, the problem may be due to errors in the Log Template, Log
Configuration aspect, or typographical errors in the spreadsheet. Another possibility
is that History Services failed to access the Aspect Directory to get data required to
build the log.
During the update procedure, if an error message is encountered indicating the Bulk
Configuration tool failed to create the log for the property at a specified row in the
spreadsheet (Figure 179), then at least some not verified rows are due to History
Services failing to access the Aspect Directory. This problem may be corrected by
simply filtering the property list to show only those rows that are not verified, and
then re-running the update process. Further guidelines for this procedure are
provided in Troubleshooting on page 285.
If there is a potential problem with a specification in the property list, the problem
must be corrected, and then the Bulk Configuration tool must be run again starting
with Initializing a New Workbook on page 264.
284 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
On occasion, the Bulk Configuration Tool may fail to create logs for one or more
properties in the property list because the tool was temporarily unable to access the
Aspect Directory for data. The rows for these properties will have a red not verified
message in column A of the spreadsheet after running the verification function
(Verifying the Update on page 280). Also, the item that caused the failure (for
example, the log template) will be shown in red. If this occurs, use the following
procedure to modify the property list to show not verified rows, and then re-run the
Bulk Configuration tool to create the logs for those rows:
1. Select column A, and then choose Data>Filter>Auto Filter from the Excel
menu bar, Figure 184.
Figure 184. Applying the Auto Filter
2. Choose NonBlanks from the Auto Filter menu, Figure 185.
Click here to show menu
Figure 185. Auto Filter Menu
This will hide all rows that have no content in Column A. These rows have
been verified. Only rows that have not been verified will be shown, Figure 186.
3BUF001092-510 285
Installing Add-ins in Microsoft Excel Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
Figure 186. Result After Querying for No Blanks
3. Re-run the bulk configuration process again by choosing Bulk

Import>Update Log Aspect from Sheet (refer to Creating the Property Logs
on page 279).
Depending on the quantity of rows that were not verified, steps 1-3 may need to be
repeated more than once. Continue to repeat these steps until the error message
stops. Also run the verification function again as described in Verifying the Update
on page 280.
Installing Add-ins in Microsoft Excel

Add-ins are automatically installed in Microsoft Excel for the user that installed the
Information Management software. If other users will be using these applications,
the add-ins must be installed in Microsoft Excel specifically for those users or they
will not be available.
To install the add-ins for a different user (bulk import tool for example):
1. Log on to the Information Management server computer as the user requiring
the add-ins.
2. Launch Microsoft Excel.
3. Click on the office button in the upper right hand corner.
4. Select Excel Options from the bottom of the menu.
5. Select Add-ins from the pane on the left.
6. Click the go button in the right pane.
286 3BUF001092-510
Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection Installing Add-ins in Microsoft Excel
7. Click Browse, then browse to C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\History\bin.

Select the file named Inform IT Bulk Import.xla.
8. Click OK. This adds the Bulk Import add-in to the Add-ins tool, Figure 187.
Figure 187. Bulk Import Added
9. Verify that the Inform IT Bulk Import box is checked in the Add-ins tool,
Figure 187, then click OK.
10. Verify the Bulk Import add-in tools are added in Excel, Figure 188.
Figure 188. Verify Add-in Tools Available in Excel
Unless Archive Macros are signed, Excel Macro Security must be set to low for
the macros to function. When the Bulk Import Tool or the Archive import tool is
used, the macro security must be set to LOW.
3BUF001092-510 287
What To Look For When Logs Do Not Collect Data Section 9 Historical Process Data Collection
What To Look For When Logs Do Not Collect Data

• No History Data. Only the operator trend data is seen when a log is first
activated and not the history (Information Management-based) data. A lag may
exist in the sample blocking rate configured on the Data Collection tab of the
Log Template. The blocking rate controls the frequency at which data is
collected by the history log from the source trend log. If this lag happens, check
the sample blocking rate to determine whether or not that is the cause.
• Inform IT Logs Not Collecting. A history source aspects needs to be added in
the structures where the logs reside when not collecting data for operator trend
logs. Refer to Configuring Node Assignments for Property Logs on page 181.
• History configuration functions can not be used. Another web service may
have been installed over and shut down the Internet Information Service. Use
the Windows Service utility in the Windows Control Panel to make sure this
service is enabled.
• History Source aspect points to a connectivity server that does not exist.
Log Configuration aspects use the basic history service group ID on the
Information Management server and carry that specification to the destination
system when importing or synchronizing from an engineering system to a
production system. The correct linkage between a Log Configuration aspect
and its respective basic history service group can be fixed by making a quick
change on the applicable log template(s).
1. Find the log template used to create the log configuration aspect as
indicated on the Log Configuration aspect.
2. Go to the Log Definition tab for the Information Management log on
the Log Template configuration aspect and select the service group.
3. Ignore the contents of the Log Configuration update message (...Partly
Succeeded...) and click OK to acknowledge.
288 3BUF001092-510
Section 10 Profile Data Collection
Introduction
This section provides an overview of the Profile Historian function in the 800xA
system, and instructions for configuring this functionality.
Profile Historian Overview

History profiles are used to monitor critical quality measurements in flat-sheet
manufacturing applications. For instance, in the Pulp and Paper industry history
profiles may be used to monitor basis weight and moisture content. Collection,
storage and retrieval of the profile data is supported by the Profile Historian option
for Information Management.
Profile Historian consists of three basic components - AccuRay Object Server,
Profile Historian Server, and Profile Historian Client. Figure 189 illustrates how
these components are integrated into the manufacturing application.
Quality measurements associated with reel turn-ups and grade changes are recorded
by frames (scanners) on one or more machines. These measurements are routed via
each machine’s dedicated controller to the AccuRay Object Server, where the
measurements are consolidated in an OPC Database.
The Profile Historian Server contains the History Server and History database
where the profile data is stored. History Services is used to configure profile logs
which collect and store quality measurements from the Accuray Object Server.
Reel-turn ups, grade changes, and dayshift events for each machine are processed
according to the Reel/Grade report which is created via the Reel Report
Configuration Tool. The names, time stamps and other information associated with
these events are stored in Production Data Logs (PDLs) in History. This information
3BUF001092-510 289
Section 10 Profile Data Collection
may be accessed by Information Management client applications such as DataDirect

and Display Services, and by other reporting applications that support SQL queries.
The Profile Historian Client is used to view the quality measurements with
industry-standard Contour Maps, Machine Direction (MD) graphs, and Cross
Direction (CD) graphs.
The AccuRay Object Server, Profile Historian Server, and Profile Historian Client
applications all run on the Windows platform. These applications may be installed
on the same computer or dedicated computers. The Profile Historian Server must be
installed on the Information Management Server.
TCP/IP
Machines 1..n
Profile Historian Profile Historian
Server Client
Frame S1-1
Profile Logs in
AC 800M AccuRay
History Database Client
Controllers Object
Frame S1-2 1..n Server Displays
Reel/Grade Report
Configuration
Profile Historian Application
1) Measurements Recorded by Frames 2) Profile Logs on the Server 3) Client Displays

are Routed to Accuray Object Server Collect and Store Profile Data Access Profile Data
Figure 189. Profile Historian Architecture
Profile Historian Configuration Overview

There are four basic steps for configuring data collection for Profile logs:
• Configuring a Log Set for Profile Logs on page 291.
• Configuring Profile Logs on page 291.
• Configuring Reports on page 301.
• Exporting/Importing a Reel Report Configuration File on page 311.
290 3BUF001092-510
Section 10 Profile Data Collection Configuring a Log Set for Profile Logs
Configuring a Log Set for Profile Logs

Every profile log MUST belong to a log set. This section provides specific
requirements when configuring a log set for profile logs. Configure the log set
before configuring a profile log. The name of the log set must be known to configure
the profile log.
When specifying the log set name, use the name of the machine where the sensors
corresponding to the OPC tags for the profile log are located. This same machine
name will be used when configuring the Reel Report as described in Configuring
Reports on page 301. An example is shown in Figure 190. Refer to Section 6,
Configuring Log Sets for instructions on configuring log sets.
The Log Set name MUST MATCH the

Machine Name specified in the Reel Report
Figure 190. Machine Name to be used for Log Set Name
Configuring Profile Logs

Profile logs are added as objects in the Node Administration structure. To do this
(reference Figure 191):
2. Navigate to and expand the object tree for the node being added to the Profile
Log (for example, ENG110 in Figure 191).
3BUF001092-510 291
Configuring Profile Logs Section 10 Profile Data Collection
History object types. The History objects (in this case, a Profile Log) must be
4. From the Profile Logs group, choose New Object from the context menu. This
displays the New Object dialog with the Inform IT Profile Log object type
selected.
Node Where Log Set Object

is Being Added

Profile Log Container
Figure 191. Adding a Profile Log in the Node Administration Structure
5. Enter a name for the object in the Name field, for example: CA1Profile, then
click Create. This adds the object under the Profile Logs group, and creates a
corresponding Profile Log Aspect. This aspect is used to configure the profile
log attributes.
6. To display this aspect, select the applicable Profile Log object, then select the
Inform IT History Profile Log aspect from the object’s aspect list.
7. Use this aspect to configure the Profile Log Attributes.
292 3BUF001092-510
Section 10 Profile Data Collection Profile Log Attributes
Profile Log Attributes

The profile log attributes are configured via the Inform IT History Profile Log
aspect, Figure 192. The attributes are organized under three tabs. Only a few
attributes need to be configured. Most are automatically configured based on the
configuration of another attribute, or may be left at their default value. Configure the
mandatory attributes as described below. To configure other profile log attributes,
refer to Profile Log Attributes Summary on page 299.
The following profile log attributes MUST be configured:
• On the Main tab configure:
– Data Source on page 294.
– Log Set on page 296.
• On the Collection tab configure:
– Array Size on page 296.
– Log Period on page 297.
– Storage Interval on page 298.
• On the Data Source tab configure: Machine Position on page 298.
Figure 192. Displaying the Inform IT History Profile Log Aspect
3BUF001092-510 293
Profile Log Attributes Section 10 Profile Data Collection
Data Source
The profile log has multiple data sources - one for each of the quality measurements
being stored in the profile log. The Data Source entered on the Main tab specifies
the root portion of the OPC tag. The full data source tags for each of the quality
measurements are automatically filled in on the Data Source tab based on the root
portion of the OPC tag.
To select the OPC tag:
1. Click the browse button for Data Source, Figure 193.
Click the Browse Button
Figure 193. Browse Button for Data Source
This displays the Select Data Source dialog for browsing the OPC server for
the applicable object.
2. Use this dialog to select the OPC object which holds the profile data as
demonstrated in Figure 194. Typically, the object is located in the Control
structure, under the Generic OPC Network object for the Profile data server.
294 3BUF001092-510
Figure 194. Selecting the OPC Tag
3. Click Apply when done. This enters the object name in the Data Source field,
Figure 195.
Figure 195. Data Source Defined
In addition, the data source tags for the quality measurements are automatically
entered under the Data Source tab, Figure 196.
3BUF001092-510 295
Figure 196. Profile Log Data Source Specifications
The!DATA_SOURCE! string represents the root of the OPC tag which is common
for all data sources. The string following the colon (:) specifies the remainder of the
tag for each measurement, for example !DATA_SOURCE!:FirstBox,
!DATA_SOURCE!:ProfileAverage, and so on.
Log Set
Use the Log Set pull-down list on the Main tab to select the log set which was
configured specifically for the profile logs. The name of this log set must match the
machine name, for example PM1 as shown in Figure 197. Log Sets should not be
used for xPAT configurations.
Figure 197. Selecting the Log Set
Array Size
The Array Size attribute is located on the Collection tab, Figure 198. Array size
must be configured to match the number of data points per scan for the machine
from which the data points are being collected. The default is 100.
296 3BUF001092-510
Figure 198. Collection Tab
To determine the correct array size for the profile log via the Control Connection
aspect of the selected OPC tag, Figure 199, select the Control Connection aspect,
check the Subscribe to Live Data check box, then read the value for ProfileArray
(for example, 600 in Figure 199).
If Array Size is configured too large or too small, the file will not be
appropriately sized for the expected log period. For instance, consider a case
where the log period is eight days and the machine generates 200 data points per
scan. If the array size is set to 100, the log will only be capable of holding four
days worth of data. If the array size is set to 400, the log will store 16 days worth
of data, and needlessly consume more disk space.
Log Period
Disk space is allocated to logs according to their log capacity, which is a function of
the log time period and storage interval. The log period can be adjusted on an
individual log basis to keep log capacity at a reasonable size for each log. For profile
logs, log capacity is calculated as: log capacity = (log period/storage interval). Enter
the log period as an integer value ≤4095 with time unit indicator for Weeks, Days,
Hours, Minutes, Seconds. The maximum is 4095 Weeks.
3BUF001092-510 297
Figure 199. Determining the Proper Array Size
Storage Interval
This is the time interval at which data is stored in the log. Enter the storage interval
as an Integer value with a time unit indicator: Weeks, Days, Hours, Minutes,
Seconds. For example: 40d = 40 days, 8h = 8 hours. The maximum is 4095 Weeks.
Machine Position
This attribute is located on the Data Source tab, Figure 200. Enter the name of the
object which holds the Reel Footage value. An example is shown in Figure 201.
Using this example, the Machine Position value would be
PM1/SQCS/MIS/RL/ACCREP:ReelFootage.
298 3BUF001092-510
Figure 200. Data Source Tab
Figure 201. Finding the Object Which Holds the Reel Footage Value
Profile Log Attributes Summary

The profile log configuration attributes are described in:
• Table 30 - Main Tab.
3BUF001092-510 299
• Table 31 - Collection Tab.

• Table 32 - Data Source Tab.
Table 30. Main Tab
Data Source Refer to Data Source on page 294.
Log Set Refer to Log Set on page 296.
2nd Log Set Optional second log set.
Archive Group Typically, to archive the profile log, assign the log to an archive group. For
details regarding archive groups, and the archive function in general, refer to
Section 11, Configuring the Archive Function.
Description Enter an optional descriptive text string for this log.
Start State This is the initial log state when History Services is restarted via PAS. Choices
are:
START_INACTIVE
START_ACTIVE
START_LAST_STATE (default) - restart in state log had when node shut down
Calculation Type This defaults to OPC and CANNOT be changed.
Calculation Mode This defaults to Synchronous and CANNOT be changed.
Table 31. Collection Tab
Log Period Refer to Log Period on page 297.
Storage Interval Refer to Storage Interval on page 298.
Array Size Refer to Array Size on page 296.
Compression Type This attribute is not implemented in this version of History Services
and may be left at its default value (No Compression).
300 3BUF001092-510
Section 10 Profile Data Collection Configuring Reports
Table 31. Collection Tab (Continued)
Log Capacity This is the maximum number of entries for a log. If a log is full, new
entries replace the oldest entries. This field is not configurable. Log
capacity is calculated as follows:
Log Capacity = (Log Period/ Storage Interval).
Storage Type Storage Type defaults to type 4 which is the only valid storage type for
profile logs. This attribute cannot be modified.
Start Time This is the earliest allowable system time that the log can become
active. If the specified start time has already past, the log will begin to
store data at the next storage interval. If the start time is in the future,
the log will go to PENDING state until the start time arrives. Enter the
start time in the following format:
1/1/1990 12:00:00 AM(default)
The order of the month, day, and year and the abbreviation of the
month is standardized based upon the language being used.
Log Data Type Data type defaults to Float which is the only valid data type for profile
logs. This attribute cannot be modified.
Table 32. Data Source Tab
Machine Position Refer to Machine Position on page 298.
All other attributes These are the names for the objects which hold the quality
on this tab. measurements for the profile log. The root object name is specified
via the Data Source attribute on the Main tab, and is represented as
!DATA_SOURCE! in the respective fields on this tab.
Configuring Reports
History Profiles may be configured to collect data for: reel turn-up events, product
grade change events, day shift, and roll setup. This functionality is configured via
the Reel Report Configuration Tool.
3BUF001092-510 301
Configuring Reports Section 10 Profile Data Collection
The Reel Report Configuration Tool is used to build these four reports for each
machine in the plant. An example is shown in Figure 202.
For each machine specified, the Reel Report Configuration Tool provides a template
to facilitate report configuration. This template provides place holders for each of
the signals/variables which must be specified. Add signals/variables as required.
To collect data for a particular report, specify the tag corresponding to each
signals/variable. The signals/variables are read from OPC data items stored in an
OPC server.
Start Machine Specification for PM1
Trigger, Measurement,
& Reel Number for PM1
Reel Turn-up Event
Grade Change Event

DayShift (details not shown)
RollSetUp
Start Machine Specification for PM2
Figure 202. Example Tree Model for Reel Reports
Launching the Reel Report Configuration Tool

To launch the Reel Report Configuration Tool, from the Windows task bar, choose:
Start>Programs>ABB Industrial IT 800xA>Information MgmtProfiles>
Reel Report Configuration.
When opening this window for the first time, the tree is empty except for the Plant
Level object, Figure 203.
302 3BUF001092-510
Figure 203. Reel Report Configuration Tool
Start by adding a machine, and then specify the OPC data items to be read for that
machine.
Adding a Machine to the Hierarchy

To add a machine:
1. Select Plant Level, right-click and choose Add New Tag from the context
menu, Figure 204.
Figure 204. Adding a New machine
3BUF001092-510 303
This adds a new machine with the default structure as shown in Figure 205.
The default machine structure provides a default specification for REEL turn-
up, GRADE change, DAYSHIFT, and RollSetup.
Figure 205. Default Machine Structure
2. Specify the machine name. To do this, click on Machine Name, and then enter
a new name, for example: PM1, Figure 206. This machine name must also be
used as the name for the log set to which all profile logs for this machine will
be assigned.
Specifying Machine Name
Figure 206. Specifying the New Machine Name
304 3BUF001092-510
Saving Changes while Working

Periodically saving changes is recommended. Either save after every change or
when done. To continue editing, click on the next item that to be changed.
Click the Save Changes button to periodically save changes. This saves the
configuration, but does not apply the changes to the Profile server. Exiting without
saving displays a prompt to save the changes.
When finished, apply the changes to the Profile server by clicking Save and Apply
Changes.
Pressing Enter after every change requires responding to two prompts after every
change. This may be annoying when configuring a large report.
Specifying Signals for Reel Turn-up

To collect data for a particular report specify the tag corresponding to each
signals/variable. If a tag is not specified for a particular report, the data will not be
collected and the report will not be generated. Continue by specifying the signals for
Reel Turn-up section. This section is required for all reports. The other sections
(Grade, DayShift, and RollSetUp) are optional.
The default specification for Reel Turn-up (REEL) provides place holders for the
Report Trigger, reel number counter, and ReelTrim. The Report Trigger signals the
occurrence of each reel turn-up on the machine. The Number counter increments the
reel number for each reel turn-up that occurs on the machine.
These signals are mandatory in order to generate a Reel Turn-up report. They cannot
be deleted. One or more additional measurements can be added to collect on an
optional basis. To specify the OPC tags for these signals:
1. Click on the OPC tag place holder for the REEL Report Trigger, Figure 207.
Figure 207. Selecting the REEL Report Trigger Place Holder
3BUF001092-510 305
2. Enter the OPC tag for the trigger that indicates the occurrence of a reel turn-up.
An example is shown in Figure 208.
Figure 208. OPC Tag for REEL Trigger Specified
3. Repeat this procedure to specify the OPC tag for the REEL Number counter
and ReelTrim. An example completed specification is shown in Figure 209.
Figure 209. Mandatory Signals for Reel Turn-up Completed
4. Add additional signals for this report as follows:

a. Select REEL and choose Add New Tag from the context menu. This adds
a new Report Heading in the tree under REEL, Figure 210.
Figure 210. New Report Heading Added
b. Select the Report Heading place holder and enter the new report heading,
for example: ProductionSummary. There are no specific requirements
for the heading, except that it must be unique within the event (in this case,
within the REEL for PM1).
306 3BUF001092-510
c. Right-click on the report heading and choose Add New Tag from the
context menu. This adds an OPC tag place holder for the new
measurement.
d. Specify the OPC tag for the measurement. This procedure is the same as
for configuring any other signal. An example is shown in Figure 211.
Figure 211. New Measurement Specified
Multiple report headings can be added under REEL. Multiple

measurements under each report heading can also be added. An example
is shown in Figure 212. Remember to save periodically.
Figure 212. Example Completed Report
Specifying Signals for Grade Change

The default specification for Grade Change (GRADE) provides place holders for the
Report Trigger, On Grade Trigger, and Reel Number Counter, Figure 213. The
Report Trigger signals the end of the current grade. The On Grade Trigger signals
that product quality has reached the new grade. The Number counter increments the
reel number for each reel turn-up that occurs on the machine.
These signals are mandatory in order to generate a Grade Change report. They
cannot be deleted. One or more additional measurements can be added to collect on
an optional basis. The procedure for specifying the signals is the same as the
procedure described in Specifying Signals for Reel Turn-up on page 305.
3BUF001092-510 307
Figure 213. Grade Change Default Specification
Configuring the DAYSHIFT

The default specification for DAYSHIFT has a place holder for the Report Trigger,
Figure 214. This signals when to generate a new DAYSHIFT report. This signal is
mandatory in order to generate the DAYSHIFT report. The procedure for specifying
this trigger, and for adding other signals is the same as for specifying the reel turn-
up report as described in Specifying Signals for Reel Turn-up on page 305.
Figure 214. Example DAYSHIFT Report
Configuring ROLLSetup
This report is used to examine sets and rolls within a reel. This setup divides the reel
lengthwise into a specified number of sets. Each set is divided by width into a
specified number of rolls. This is illustrated in Figure 215.
The default specification for ROLLSetup is shown in Figure 216. The variables are
described in Table 33. These signals are mandatory in order to generate a
ROLLSetup report. They cannot be deleted. One or more additional measurements
can be added to collect on an optional basis. The procedure for specifying the
signals is the same as the procedure described in Specifying Signals for Reel Turn-
up on page 305.
308 3BUF001092-510
Figure 215. Roll/Set
Table 33. ROLLSet Report Specification
Signal Description
NumberOfRolls Indicates the number of rolls for the current set being processed.
ReelNumber Indicates the reel number for the current reel.
ReelTrim Indicates the width of the reel.
RollTrimArray One value for each roll in the current set indicates the width of each
roll.
SetFootage Indicates the actual length of the current set.
3BUF001092-510 309
Table 33. ROLLSet Report Specification
Signal Description
SetLength Indicates the recommended or target length of any set for this reel.
SetNumber Indicates the current set number.
SetupReadyTrigger Indicates when the current set has been completed.
Figure 216. Default Specification for ROLLSetup
Deleting Objects from the Reel Report Configuration Tool

Individual measurements can be deleted that were added under machine objects, or
an entire machine can be deleted. Deleting a machine deletes the entire machine
structure. Individual Trigger or Number specifications can not be deleted for a
machine, nor are Reel or Grade events permitted to be deleted.
To delete an object,
1. Select the object and choose Delete This Tag from the context menu,
Figure 217. A confirmation message is displayed in the AdvHistProfCfg
dialog: “Selected item and all subitems will be deleted”.
310 3BUF001092-510
Section 10 Profile Data Collection Exporting/Importing a Reel Report Configuration File
Figure 217. Example, Deleting a Machine
2. Click Yes to confirm, or No to cancel the delete operation.
Exporting/Importing a Reel Report Configuration File

A reel report configuration can be exported to a binary (.dat) file. This is used to
save and re-use a reel report configuration. To export the reel report configuration
click Export Configuration. The configuration is saved to a file named
PDLConfig.dat in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\ABB\IM\History\tmp. Typically, one export file at a time is maintained.
Attempting to export a new configuration when an export file already exists in the
tmp directory will cause a prompt for overwriting the existing file.
Maintain multiple export files by renaming the existing files before exporting a
new one. Keep in mind that the import function will always import the file named
PDLConfig.dat.
A valid export file can be used to create reel report configurations on other Profile
Historian servers. To do this, click Import Configuration. If a reel report
configuration already exists on the server, a prompt for overwriting the existing
configuration will be displayed.
Archiving Profile Log and Reel Report Data

Reel and grade events are stored as level 1 PDL tasks. Along with the PDL task,
History also creates a History Association for each profile log in the log set
corresponding to the machine (Section 6, Configuring Log Sets). When a PDL task
having History Associations is archived, the archive function automatically archives
the profile log data pointed to by the PDL History Association. PDLs are described
in detail in System 800xA Information Management Profile Historian Operation
(3BUF001121*).
3BUF001092-510 311
Activating Profile Logs Section 10 Profile Data Collection
Since profile log data is automatically archived with the PDL data, only the PDL
archive function for the Profile Historian application will need to be configured. For
details regarding this procedure, refer to PDL Archive Configuration on page 350.
Activating Profile Logs

The same methods for activating and deactivating numeric logs also apply to Profile
logs. The basic method is to use the Composite Log window. For details, refer to
Starting and Stopping Data Collection on page 426.
312 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
Archive Function Capabilities

The archive function supports permanent offline storage for:
• Numeric process data stored in history logs.
• Finished reports scheduled and executed via Application Scheduler, and stored
in report logs, or as completed report objects in the Scheduling structure.
• Production data from batch control applications and stored in Production Data
Logs (PDLs).
• Alarm messages, event messages (including audit trail events), and system
messages generated by 800xA system applications and stored in message logs.
Alarm, event, and system messages can also be archived directly from the 800xA
System alarm/event message services, although these messages are more typically
archived from the message logs in History Services.
Without the archive function, when a history log becomes full, the oldest entries will
be overwritten by newer entries. When archiving is used, the contents of specified
logs are copied to a designated archive media to prevent the loss of critical historical
data.
Archive Media Supported

Two types of archive media are supported:
• A single Magnetic/Optical (MO) disk - With this media, MO platters must be
removed and replaced as they become full.
• Hard disk:
3BUF001092-510 313
Archive Configuration Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
The hard disk may be partitioned into multiple volumes which are sized to
match CD ROM or DVD media. The archive backup function may be set up to
write the contents of archive volumes to ISO Image files as volumes become
full. The ISO image files may be burned onto CD ROM or DVD media for
permanent storage. As files are saved on the CD or DVD media, the file copies
on hard disk must periodically be purged to make room for new archive entries.
As an alternative, specify the archive backup function to create shadow copies
of filled archive volumes on network file servers. Use both ISO image files and
shadow copies as needed.
Archive Configuration
Archiving is managed by one or more archive device objects which are configured
in the Node Administration structure. An archive device is a logical entity that
defines where and how archive data is written. Every MO or disk drive used for
archiving must have at least one archive device aspect configured for it. A single
drive may have several archive devices configured for it to satisfy different archive
requirements. For example, more sensitive data may be archived through a separate
device which is configured to prevent automatic overwriting of stored data.
Archiving may be scheduled to occur on a periodic or event-driven basis through the
Application Scheduler, or execute manual archive operations on demand. For
manual archives, if the specified time range has no samples, no data will be
archived. For scheduled archives, even if no new samples were collected, at least
one sample (the last valid point) will be archived. Each archive operation is referred
to as an archive entry.
Scheduled archiving is implemented through archive groups. These are user-defined
groups of logs which are archived together as a single unit. Scheduling instructions
for archive groups are specified in job description objects created in the Scheduling
structure. The schedules are associated with their respective archive groups through
an Archive Action aspect attached to the job description object. Manual archiving
may be done on an archive group basis, or by selecting individual logs.
314 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Accessing Archived Data
Accessing Archived Data

Archive volumes support viewing of archive data (through the corresponding
archive volume aspect). The MO media has one archive volume. Partition the hard
disk media into any number of archive volumes. Archive volumes are automatically
created for all removable disk drives (DVD and CD drives) to support viewing of
archive data on DVDs and CDs which contain archive files. Further, additional read-
only volumes can be created for reading archive volumes that have been copied to a
mapped network drive, or for viewing archive files that have been copied to the local
drive.
Archived historical data may be viewed via desktop applications such as DataDirect,
Desktop Trends, and 800xA system tools. Archived data may also be incorporated
into reports which are created with a report building package such as DataDirect or
Crystal Reports, and then scheduled and executed via the Application Scheduler.
In order for client applications to access archived log data, the archived logs must be
restored from the archive media to the restored history database, or the applicable
archive volume must be published. The method used depends on the type of entry.
Oracle-based log types (reports and PDL) and completed report objects must be
restored.
For numeric (property) logs, the archive volume where the archived data resides
must be published. The contents of a complete volume, or even multiple volumes
can be published in relatively few steps. This method does not require the archive
data to be written to Oracle tables in the restored database. Since Oracle tablespace
is limited, the publishing method is used to expose a larger amount of archive data
for client applications at any one time.
Message log data stored on the published volume is also published. This is used to
access the message log data via alarm/event lists configured in the 800xA System.
Archive message logs must be restored to access the archive data via the SQL-based
tools in DataDirect, Desktop Trends, and Crystal Reports.
Planning for Reliable Archive Results

Occasionally, one or more scheduled archive operations may be missed due to the
storage device being full, or hardware failure. This produces an accumulation of
data to be archived until a successful archive operation occurs. This accumulation
3BUF001092-510 315
Archive Topics Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
may eventually exceed the capacity of the archive media. To reduce the risk of this
occurring, configure the archive device and archive groups according to the
guidelines described in Archive Configuration Guidelines on page 316.
Archive Topics
• Configuring Archive Devices on page 321.
• Configuring Archive Groups on page 331.
• Setting Up the Archive Schedule for an Archive Group on page 342.
• Adding a Read-Only Volume for a Mapped Network Drive on page 349.
• PDL Archive Configuration on page 350.
• Accessing and managing archive data is described in System 800xA
Archive Configuration Guidelines

Take the time to plan the archive function to ensure reliable and predictable
operation. Consider the quantity and storage rate for History logs, and the size of the
archive media.
First, determine how often the archive media needs to be changed. Next, plan the
configuration of archive groups. The key to determining the correct number of
archive groups is calculating the optimum size of an archive entry. The amount of
data archived at any one time should be substantially less than the maximum
capacity of the archive media. This will compensate for the possible accumulation
of archive data in the event that a reasonable number of archive operations are
missed. At the same time, the amount of data should not be so small that the archive
media is used inefficiently.
Example History Database

The following example configuration will clarify these guidelines.
• 500 logs @ 2-second storage rate (15,000 points per minute), 20-day log
period.
• 3000 logs @ 15-second storage rate (12,000 points per minute), 20-day log
period.
316 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Estimating How Often to Change the Archive Media
• 2000 logs @ 60-second storage rate (2000 points per minute), 20-day log
period.
The archive media is a 5-gigabyte MO platter (2.5 gigabytes per side). After
subtracting archive overhead, each side can hold about 2.2 gigabytes.
This example may be adapted for the hard disk/ROM archive scenario. In this
case, the hard disk must have approximately 2.2 gigabytes of free space allotted
to storage of archive data.
This example covers numeric data only.
To proceed with planning for this configuration, follow the procedures described in:
• Estimating How Often to Change the Archive Media on page 317.
• Determining the Quantity and Size of Archive Groups on page 318.
Some calculation results are approximated or rounded. For instance, a calculation

that yields 3.3 archive groups is rounded to 4.
Estimating How Often to Change the Archive Media

Calculate the estimated time to fill one side of the MO platter to determine how
frequently the platter needs to be changed (change sides, or install a new platter).
This estimation is based on the size of the platter, the number of logs in the History
database, and their respective storage rates.
The basic equation is:
Time = size of 1 platter side / (total storage rate expressed as points per minute
* 60 minutes * 24 hours * 21 bytes per archive entry)
Substituting the numbers for this example:
Time = 2.2 gigabytes1 / (29,000 ppm * 60 *24 * 21) = 2.5 days
For archiving to hard disk, calculate the estimated time to fill all volumes.
1. 2.2 Gigabytes = 2.2*109
3BUF001092-510 317
Deadband Considerations Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
Deadband Considerations
Deadband decreases the rate at which the platter is filled.1 For example, if deadband
results in only 70% of the samples being saved, the rate at which the platter is filled
will decrease as shown below:
Time = 2.2 gigabytes / (29K ppm * 0.7 * 60 *24 * 21) = 3.6 days
Calculation Reliability Considerations

This equation uses all logs of a given configuration, whether or not they are assigned
to archive groups. Therefore, this estimate may be considered a worst-case scenario.
Get a more accurate estimate by considering only those logs to be assigned to
archive groups.
Also, the reliability of the estimate may vary over the short term, depending on how
the archive groups are configured. For instance, three disks may be filled in one day
and then none for the next ten days, or one disk may be filled every 3.3 days. The
reliability of the estimate improves over a longer time period.
Media Full Indication

A message is sent to the System Message Log when a platter needs to be changed.
Determining the Quantity and Size of Archive Groups

Carefully plan archive group configuration with regard to quantity and size (number
of logs). This will help to avoid accumulating excessive amounts of archive data that
exceed the capacity of the archive media.
The size of an archive entry is determined by the number of logs assigned to the
archive group, the archive interval (time elapsed between archive operations for the
archive group), and whether any previous archive attempts failed. The amount of
data archived at any one time must be limited based on the platter capacity (one
side), and a reasonable estimate for the maximum number of times in a row that the
scheduled archive operations might fail.
The estimate for maximum number of missed archives varies based on the archive
interval, and how closely archive operations are monitored. Shorter intervals (one
day), may cause six or seven archive attempts in a row to be missed, if the current
1. Deadband is defined in percentage of engineering units range.
318 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Determining the Quantity and Size of Archive Groups
platter is full and archive operations are not monitored over that time period. A
longer interval (two weeks) is less likely to miss so many archive attempts.
If the cumulative size of the current archive entry and the previous failed attempts
exceeds the capacity of the archive media, the archive entry will be split into some
number of smaller entries such that one entry will not exceed the available space. To
minimize this occurrence, use a conservative estimate for reasonable number of
consecutive failures. At the same time, keep in mind that being overly conservative
will result in an abnormally large number of archive groups.
Use the following procedure to calculate a reasonable size for an archive entry. This
procedure must be done for each unique log configuration (storage rate/log period).
To illustrate, the following calculation is for the log configuration that has 500 logs
@ 2-second storage rate, and 20-day log period:
1. Calculate the archive interval. It is recommended that an interval which is no
greater than 1/4 the log time period be used. This allows for a number of
archive failures (due to media full or drive problems) without loss of data.
A smaller archive interval is recommended for large log periods (one year). This
limits the amount of data that may be lost in the event of a hardware failure. Do
not make the archive interval too small. This causes a greater percentage of the
disk to be used for overhead.
For a 20-day log period, the recommended archive interval = 1/4 * 20 = 5 days.
2. Calculate the amount of archive data that one log generates over the archive
interval. The following calculation is based on the 2-second storage interval.
21 bytes per archive entry * 30 points per minute * 60 minutes
* 24 hours * 5 days = 4.5 megabytes1
For systems using deadband, the amount of data per archive interval will be
reduced.
3. Calculate the maximum archive entry size for any archive group supporting this
log configuration:
1. 4.5 Megabytes = 4.5*106
3BUF001092-510 319
Summary of Results for Other Log Configurations Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
size of one platter side / (reasonable estimate for number of missed

archives + 1) = 2.2 gigabytes/4 = 550 megabytes.
By limiting each scheduled archive operation to 550 megabytes, archive data
for up to three missed archive attempts can be accumulated before exceeding
the capacity of the 2.2 gigabyte platter. Remember, if the cumulative size of the
current archive entry and the previous failed attempts exceeds the capacity of
the archive media, the archive entry will be split into some number of smaller
entries such that one entry will not exceed the available space.
4. Calculate number of archive groups needed for the 500 logs @ 2-second
storage rate. This is done in two steps:
a. # of logs per archive group = result of step 3 / result of step 2 =
550 megabytes / 4.5 megabytes = 125 logs per group
b. # archive groups = total # logs of this type / # logs in one archive group=
500 / 125 = 4 archive groups
Steps 1-4 must be repeated for each of log configuration (storage rate, log period
combination).
Summary of Results for Other Log Configurations

Rather than show detailed calculations for the other log configurations, the results
for those configurations are summarized in Table 34.
Table 34. Archive Group Calculations Summary
No. of Archive
Configuration One Log’s Data/ Archive Interval Logs/Group
Groups
500 @ 2-sec. 21bytes*30ppm*60m*24h*5d = 4.5Mbytes 550/4.5 = 125 500/125 = 4
3000 @ 15-sec. 21bytes*4ppm*60m*24h*5d = 605Kbytes 550/.605 = 909 3000/909 = 4
2000 @ 60-sec. 21bytes*1ppm*60m*24h*5d = 151Kbytes 550/.151 = 3642 2000/3642 = 1
Configure Archiving
Configure the archive application according to the results of your calculations:
320 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Configuring Archive Devices
1. Configure the archive device as described in Configuring Archive Devices on

page 321.
The recommended Device Behavior for MO Drive is Stop When Full. This is
because the platter must either be turned over, or replaced when the current side
is full.
For Disk Drive, the recommended Device Behavior is Wrap When Full. This
will support the archive backup scenario whereby the contents of a volume is
written to an ISO Image file, or a shadow copy is created on a network file
server when the volume becomes full. The Disk Drive device can be configured
to re-initialize itself when all volumes are full, and the Overwrite Timeout has
expired.
2. Configure archive groups as described in Configuring Archive Groups on page
331. Configure the required number of archive groups for each log
configuration as indicated in Table 34.
Guidelines for Message Logs
Create Message Archive Groups as needed. If a message log is created with a
capacity of 10,000 and expect 2000 messages per day, the message log will
have approximately 5 days of messages. Therefore, an archive group time
interval of one or two days is reasonable. The one-day interval should be
sufficient.
3. Create a job to schedule archival according to Setting Up the Archive Schedule
for an Archive Group on page 342. In this case, schedule archiving to occur
once every five days.
Configuring Archive Devices

This section describes how to configure archive devices to define where and how
data will be archived on a specific archive media. Two device types are supported:
• MO Drive - requires removing and replacing platters as they become full.
• Disk Drive - The hard disk may be partitioned into multiple volumes which are
sized to match CD ROM or DVD media.
Several disk archive devices can be configured on the same partition to satisfy
several different archive schemes.
3BUF001092-510 321
Adding an Archive Device Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
Removed archive volumes don't recapture used disk space. The second step of
manually deleting the extra or deleted volumes ensures archive data is not deleted
as a result of a configuration mistake.
When deleting volumes from a Disk Drive archive device, delete the folder
manually. Look for a folder under the Device File with the name nnArch where
nn is the volume number. Delete folders that match the volumes that were deleted
from the device.
Refer to the computer’s documentation for instructions on connecting storage
devices to the computer where the archive service runs.
The operating parameters for each archive device are specified in the corresponding
archive device aspect. This requires adding one or more archive device objects for
each archive media (MO or disk drive), and then configure the archive device
aspects. For instructions, refer to Adding an Archive Device on page 322.
Adding an Archive Device

Archive Device objects exist in the Node Administration Structure. Each node,
where the archive service runs, has an Industrial IT Archive object under the
Industrial IT Archive service provider. The aspect list for this object has an
Archive Service Aspect which facilitates adding Archive Device objects (as well as
Archive Group and Archive Volume objects).
To add an Archive Device object (reference Figure 218 for steps 1-4):
1. In the Plant Explorer, select the Node Administration structure.
2. Expand the object tree for the node where the archive device is being added
(for example, TAR105 in Figure 218).
3. In the object tree for the selected node, expand the Industrial IT Archive
Service Provider and select the Industrial IT Archive object.
4. Select the Archive Service Aspect from this object’s aspect list.
322 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Adding an Archive Device
Node Where Archive Device Object is being Added Archive Service Aspect
Click Here
Industrial IT Archive Object
Figure 218. Adding an Archive Device in the Node Administration Structure
5. Click Archive Device in the Create New Archive Object section. This displays
the New Archive Device dialog, Figure 219.
6. Enter a name for the object in the Name field, for example: ArchDev2OnAD,
then click OK.
Keep the Show Aspect Config Page check box checked. This will automatically
open the configuration view of the Archive Device aspect.
3BUF001092-510 323
Archive Device Aspect Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
Figure 219. New Archive Device Object Dialog
This adds the Archive Device object under the Industrial IT Archive object and
creates an Archive Device Aspect for the new object. Use this aspect to configure
the device as described in Archive Device Aspect below.
Archive Device Aspect

The Archive Device aspect Config view is shown in Figure 220.
Figure 220. Archive Device Config View
324 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Archive Device Aspect
This aspect also has a main view for managing the archive volumes on the archive
device. This is described in System 800xA Information Management Data Access
and Reports (3BUF001094*).
The archive device operating parameters which must be configured, and the manner
in which they are configured depends somewhat on the type of device (MO or hard
disk). Review the guidelines below. Details are provided in the sections that follow.
When done, click Apply to apply the changes.
Guidelines
To configure an archive device, first specify the type of media for which the device
is being configured, and then configure the operating parameters according to that
media.
The Archive Path specifies the drive where archive data will be written. If the
archive media is a hard disk, specify the directory.
The Device Behavior and Overwrite Timeout fields are used to specify how
archiving will proceed when the current archive media (volume) becomes full.
When using a disk drive, partition the disk into one or more volumes. This is not
applicable for MO drives. To configure volumes, specify the number and size of the
volumes, and set up volume naming conventions. Optionally, specify whether or not
to have archive volumes automatically published when the volumes have been
copied to a removable media (CD or DVD) and the media is remounted.
For disk-based archiving, it is recommended that automatic backup of archive data
to another media be configured. This way when a volume becomes full, an ISO
image or shadow copy, or both are created on another media. This is not applicable
for MO media which are removable and replaceable.
Optionally, specify whether or not to generate an alarm when the archive media (or
backup media) exceed a specified disk usage limit. If these features are enabled, the
alarms recorded in the 800xA System message buffer.
Attempting to apply an invalid parameter setting causes the Device State field to
be highlighted in red to indicate an invalid configuration.
Device Type
Specify the type of media for which the archive device is being configured:
3BUF001092-510 325
MO Drive (single magnetic/optical drive).

Disk Drive
Archive Path
This specifies the location where data will be archived. If the Device Type is an MO
drive, enter the drive letter, for example: D: or E: If the Device Type is Disk Drive,
specify the full path to the directory where data will be archived for example:
E:\archive (root directory is not a valid entry for disk drive).
Device Behavior and Overwrite Timeout

Device Behavior and Overwrite Timeout fields determine how archiving will
proceed when the current archive media (volume) becomes full. For Device
Behavior the choices are:
• Stop When Full (default, and recommended for MO drives) - Return device
full error when the device is full.
• Advance When Full - Advance the active volume until one of the following is
found: a valid media with storage capacity, or a media that is not initialized. If a
volume that is not initialized is found, initialize the volume and start archiving
to it. If not, return device full error.
• Wrap When Full (Recommended for Hard Disk devices) - First look for a
valid or not-initialized media. If a valid media is found, start archiving to it. If a
not-initialized media is found, initialize it and then start archiving to it. If
neither of these is found, look for a full media whose Overwrite Timeout has
expired, and with the earliest last archive time. Then reinitialize that media and
start archiving to it. Wrap When Full requires a finite overwrite timeout.
The Overwrite Timeout specifies the delay between the time when a media
becomes full and the time when the media can be reinitialized (overwritten). Set this
to the duration for which the data must be preserved. For example, to preserve data
for one year, set the Overwrite Timeout to 365 days. This means 365 days after the
LAST data has been written to the media, the media can be automatically initialized
by the archive service if the media is in the drive.
Use the pull-down list for this field to select the units: Hours, Days, or Weeks. Then
enter the number of units. The default is 0 which means infinite delay. To get
326 3BUF001092-510
virtually no delay, enter a very small delay, for instance: 1 second. The Overwrite
Timeout is stored on the media, so removing the media from the drive and then
replacing it will not affect the Overwrite Timeout. Overwrite Timeout can be
changed via the Initialize dialog when a media is initialized for manual archiving.
When using archive backup (Configuring Archive Backup on page 329) follow
these guidelines for configuring Device Behavior and Overwrite Timeout.
When using archive backup, it is recommended that the device behavior be set to
Wrap When Full, and set the overwrite timeout to allow for periodic checking of the
backup destination to make sure its not full. The overwrite timeout should be two to
three times the interval that is checked for the backup destination. If checking once a
week, then set the overwrite timeout to two or three weeks. Also, the number of
volumes and volume size must be configured to hold that amount of data (in this
case two to three weeks). This is covered in Configuring Volumes on page 327.
Following these guidelines will ensure reliable archival with ample time to check
the backup destination and move the archive files to an offline permanent storage
media.
Configuring Volumes
Hard disks can be partitioned into multiple volumes. This involves configuring the
number of volumes, the active volume, volume quota, volume name format, and
volume name counter. Specify whether or not to have archive volumes
automatically published when the media where the volumes have been copied are
remounted. Configuring volumes is not applicable for MO drives.
The Volumes field specifies the number of volumes on the media that this archive
device can access. The maximum range is 64. The quantity specified here will result
in that number of Archive Volume objects being created under the Archive Device
object after the change is applied, Figure 221.
3BUF001092-510 327
Figure 221. Specified Number of Volumes Created Under Archive Device Object
Volume Quota is the partition size for each volume in megabytes. For example, a
20 gigabyte hard disk can be partitioned to five 4000-megabyte partitions where
4000 (MB) is the Volume Quota and five is the number of volumes as determined by
the Volumes field. Typically, size volumes on the hard disk to correspond to the size
of the ROM media to which the archive data will be copied, for example 650 MB for
CD ROM, or 4000 MB for DVD. The minimum Volume Quota value is 100M. The
maximum Volume Quota is 97.6GB.
The Volume Name Format is a format string for generating the volume ID when
initializing a volume during timed archive. Enter any string with/without format
characters (all strftime format characters are accepted). This can be changed when
manually initializing a volume. The default value is ‘%d%b%y_####’:
%d = day of month as a decimal number [1,31].
%b = abbreviated month name for locale, for example Feb or Sept.
%y = year without century as a decimal number [00,99].
#### is replaced by the Volume Name Counter value to make it a unique volume ID,
the number of #’s determines the number of digits in the number.
The Volume Name Counter is used to generate a unique volume id when the
volume is initialized. The default value is 1. This number is incremented and
appended to the Volume ID each time the volume is initialized.
The Active Volume field is the volume number of the current volume being
archived, or to be archived.
The Create Auto-Publish Volumes check box is not operational in this software
version.
328 3BUF001092-510
Configuring Archive Backup

It is recommended that the archive backup feature be used when archiving to a disk
drive. There are two backup methods: ISO image and copy files. With ISO image,
when a volume becomes full, the contents are written to an ISO Image file at the
specified Backup Destination. The ISO files can then be burned onto CD ROM or
DVD for permanent storage. As an alternative, specify that a shadow copy of the
volume be created on a network file server. Both methods can be used.
When archive backup is configured, as volumes are backed up, the volumes are
marked backed up. Volumes cannot be overwritten until they are marked backed up.
If necessary, override this feature and mark volumes as backed up even if they are
not. This is described in the section on managing archive media in System 800xA
When using Archive Backup, ensure that there is always space available in the
destination device to fit the size of the Archive Volume(s) to be copied to it.
Regular maintenance to make offline backups of copied files allowing for the
deletion of copied Archive Volumes is highly recommended.
Also, follow the guidelines for configuring Device Behavior and Overwrite
Timeout as described in Device Behavior and Overwrite Timeout.
When ISO backups are selected, individual archives are limited to 2GB. The ISO
file format does not support files greater than 2GB. If ISO backups are not used,
the maximum individual archive can be equal to the maximum archive volume
size.
Archive backup is configured with the Backup Archive Path and Backup Type
fields.
The Backup Archive Path specifies the destination for ISO Image files and/or
archive copies when backing up archive data. The path must specify both the disk
and directory structure where the archiving is to take place, for example:
E:\archivebackup.
The ISO image and shadow copy can be made on a remote computer which does not
require Information Management software. The directory on the remote node must
be a shared folder with the correct privileges (the write privilege must be one of the
privileges). For example: \\130.110.111.20\isofile.
3BUF001092-510 329
There are two requirements for the computer where the destination directory is
located:
• The destination directory must exist on the computer BEFORE configuring
the archive device.
• The computer must have a Windows user account identical to the account
for the user under which the Archive Service runs. This is typically the 800xA
system service account.
If these conditions are not met, the error message shown in Figure 222 will be
displayed after applying the archive device configuration. The object will be created
(Apply Successful initial indication); however, the archive device will not be
operational, and the error message will appear when the message bar updates.
Figure 222. Backup Destination Error Message
The Backup Type specifies the backup method. The options are:
ISO Image creates an ISO image file for the currently active volume when the
volume becomes full. The ISO Image file can then be copied to a ROM media for
permanent storage.
When ISO backups are selected, individual archives are limited to 2GB. The ISO
file format does not support files greater than 2GB. If ISO backups are not used,
the maximum individual archive can be 50GB and the maximum archive can be
100GB.
Copy Files creates a shadow copy rather than an ISO Image file.
BOTH creates both an ISO image and a shadow copy.
Disk Utilization Alarms

The two check boxes near the bottom of the Config view are used to choose whether
or not to generate an alarm when the archive media (or backup media) exceed a
specified disk usage limit. Specify the limit as a percentage of disk usage, or as
megabytes used. Choose to generate alarms by checking the respective check boxes.
The alarms are recorded in the 800xA System Message Services.
330 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Activate/Deactivate an Archive Device
Activate/Deactivate an Archive Device

An archive device must be active in order to archive data to, or restore data from the
device. When the archive media is MO Drive, the corresponding archive device
must be deactivated to remove and replace a platter. To activate/deactivate an
archive device, go to the Archive Device aspect main view, click Actions and choose
Activate or Deactivate.
Configuring Archive Groups

Archive groups support scheduled or manual archiving for a group of logs as a
single unit. This is done through an archive group aspect. One or more archive
groups may be added to this aspect, and each group specifies a set of items (logs
and/or aspect objects) to be archived as a unit.
To configure scheduled archive operations, configure a job in the Scheduling
structure. The association between the schedule and a specific archive group is
made via an Archive Action aspect which must be added to the job in the
Scheduling structure.
This section describes how to create an archive group and configure a job to
schedule archive actions. Start with Adding an Archive Group on page 331. To
configure scheduled archiving, refer to Setting Up the Archive Schedule for an
Archive Group on page 342. The Maintenance... button tool is used when archive
groups are improperly created and the system needs to be cleaned up, refer to
Delete/Create Archive Logs using Maintenance Button on page 348.
Adding an Archive Group

Archive groups are configured and managed via the archive group object. Typically,
this object is added under the Industrial IT Archive object in the Node
Administration structure (using the Archive Service Aspect as described in Adding
an Archive Device on page 322). To do this:
2. Navigate to and expand the object tree for the node being added to the archive
group.
3BUF001092-510 331
Adding an Archive Group Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
3. In the object tree for the selected node, expand the Industrial IT Service
Provider tree and select the Industrial IT Archive object.
5. Click Archive Group, Figure 223.
Click here
Figure 223. Creating a New Archive Group
This displays the New Archive Group dialog, Figure 224.
Figure 224. New Archive Device Object Dialog
6. Enter a name for the object in the Name field, for example: ArchGroupOnAD,
then click OK.
Keep the Show Aspect Config Page check box checked. This will automatically
open the configuration view of the Archive Device aspect.
332 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Archive Group Aspect
This adds the Archive Group object under the Industrial IT Archive object and
creates an Archive Group Aspect for the new object. Use this aspect to configure
one or more archive groups as described in Archive Group Aspect on page 333.
Archive Group Aspect

The Archive Group aspect is shown in Figure 225.
Figure 225. Archive Group Aspect
When configuring the History database, the primary function of this aspect is for
adding and configuring archive groups. This is described in Adding and Configuring
an Archive Group on page 334.
After configuring an archive group, make changes to the group, or to the archive
entries added to the group. This is described in Adjusting Archive Group
Configurations on page 341.
This aspect also is used to invoke manual archive operations on an archive group
basis. This is described in System 800xA Information Management Data Access and
Reports (3BUF001094*).
3BUF001092-510 333
Archive Group Aspect Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
Adding and Configuring an Archive Group

To do this:
1. Right click inside the archive groups window (or click Actions) and choose
New Group, Figure 226.
Figure 226. Adding an Archive Group
This displays the Add Archive Group dialog, Figure 227.
Figure 227. Add Archive Group Dialog
2. Use this dialog to specify the Group name, description (optional), and the
Industrial IT Archive Service Group whose service provider will manage this
archive group.
3. Click OK when finished.
4. Click Apply to initialize the new group.
Repeat this to add as many groups as required. Then specify the contents of each
archive group as described in Adding Entries to Archive Groups.
334 3BUF001092-510
Adding Entries to Archive Groups

This procedure specifies the logs (and/or objects) to be archived as part of this
archive group. Different entry types can be mixed in the same group. To add entries:
1. Select the archive group from the list of archive groups, right click and choose
New Entry from the context menu, Figure 228.
Figure 228. Adding a New Entry
This displays the Add Group Entry dialog.

2. Use this dialog to select an entry type, Figure 229, then click OK. The options
are described in Table 35.
Figure 229. Add Archive Group Dialog
3BUF001092-510 335
Table 35. Archive Group Entry Options
Entry Type Description

Numeric Log Creates an entry for numeric (property) logs. Selecting this option displays
the Add Archive Group Numeric Log Entry dialog, Figure 230. Use this
dialog to browse the aspect directory for the object whose property log(s) to
be included in the archive group.
The Include Child Objects check box is selected by default to include logs
for all child objects of the selected object. If this check box is not checked,
only logs for the selected object will be included. A filter based on the
following criteria may also be specified:
• Template Aspect - Include logs whose log template matches the
specified filter.
• Log Configuration Name - Include logs whose log configuration
aspect name matches the specified filter. Accepts wildcard characters.
• Property Name - Include logs whose property matches the specified
filter. Accepts wildcard characters.
• Log Name - Include logs whose name matches the specified filter.
Accepts wildcard characters.
• Collector Link - Use this to filter on IM History Log (default prevents
all PPA logs in an archive from being included), IM Importer Link, All
Collector Link Logs (adds PPA logs), No Collector Link Logs (just
PPA logs).
Wildcard characters are * and ?. Asterisk (*) means 0 or more of any
character. Question Mark (?) means a single character.
Event Log Creates an entry for alarm/event messages stored in the 800xA System
alarm/event buffer. There is no dialog associated with this option.
Typically, this option is used when the system does not have Information
Management History Server function. If the History Server function exists,
the 800xA System alarm/event messages are stored in a message log, and
the messages may be archived by creating an entry for IM Object types as
described below.
336 3BUF001092-510
Table 35. Archive Group Entry Options (Continued)
Entry Type Description

IM Object Creates an entry for message and/or report logs. Selecting this option
displays the Select IM Object dialog, Figure 230. Use this dialog to browse
the aspect directory for a report or message log object.
Platform Creates an entry for file viewer aspects which contain finished reports
Object executed via the Application Scheduler, or any other object type. For details,
refer to Adding Entries for Platform Objects on page 338.
If adjustments are needed to an archive group configuration, refer to Adjusting

Archive Group Configurations on page 341.
To set up a schedule for an archive group, refer to Setting Up the Archive Schedule
for an Archive Group on page 342.
Numeric Log Entry IM Objects Entry
Figure 230. Add Archive Group Numeric Log Entry, IM Objects Entry
3BUF001092-510 337
Adding Entries for Platform Objects

This dialog is used to select file viewer aspects which contain completed reports.
These aspects are attached to Completed Report objects in the Scheduling structure.
Other object types may also be selected.
The dialog has two preset configurations used to select Completed Reports - one for
signed report objects, and one for unsigned report objects. To use a preset
configuration, use the browser to go to the Scheduling structure and select the
Reports object, Figure 231. Then use the Preset Configurations pull-down list to
select either Report Objects (unsigned reports), or Signed Report Objects. In
either case, the filters and other settings are automatically configured for the
selection made. Figure 231 shows the preset configuration for signed report objects.
The configuration for unsigned reports is essentially the same, except that the
Require Signatures area is disabled for unsigned reports.
Make sure the reports are digitally signed. Do not let the archive utility build up
to the maximum number of reports before unsigned reports are deleted.
When the preset configuration is Signed report Objects, and if the completed
reports (FileViewer aspects in the completed reports objects) are not signed, the
Scheduled Platform object archiving skips the archiving of these report objects.
When the aspects are signed, these skipped reports will be archived with the next
archive entry.
There is a possibility that the unsigned reports missed by the archive will be deleted
before they are archived due to the Report Preferences setting in the Reports tree
of the scheduling structure. Make sure that reports are digitally signed. Do not let
the archive utility build up to the maximum number of reports before unsigned
reports are deleted.
338 3BUF001092-510
Select
Browse
Config.
Figure 231. Platform Object Dialog
If another type of object must be selected, adjust one or more settings, or simply
understand what each setting does, refer to Table 36.
3BUF001092-510 339
Table 36. Platform Object Settings
Feature Description
Browser Left-hand side of dialog provides a browser similar to Plant Explorer for
navigating the aspect directory and selecting the root object. Objects and
aspects under the selected root will be selected based on the filters.
Object Type & These filters are used to specify whether to include or exclude all objects
Aspect Filters and/or aspects of one or more selected types.
To use a filter, the corresponding Enabled check box must be checked.
The Inclusive Filter check box is used to specify whether to include or
exclude all object (or aspect) types that satisfy the filter. Inclusive includes the
selected aspects/objects in the list, exclusive (check box not checked)
excludes them.
To add an object (or aspect) to the filter, click the corresponding Add button.
This displays a search dialog. Set the view in this dialog to hierarchy or list.
Any object or aspect type that has been added may be removed from the list
by selecting it and clicking Remove.
Required This area is used to specify whether or not to check for signatures on selected
Signatures aspects. When Enabled, only aspects which have been signed with the
specified number of signatures (default is one signature) will be archived.
To select an aspect, click the Add button. This displays a search dialog. Set
the view in this dialog to hierarchy or list. Any aspect that has been added may
be removed from the list by selecting it and clicking Remove.
The Change button displays a dialog used to change the number of required
signatures (up to five maximum).
Generate This check box is used to specify whether or not to generate an event when
warning if not the archive service does not archive an aspect because the aspect is not
signed signed. If an aspect has missed an archive because it was not signed, once
the aspect is signed, it will be archived with the next archive entry.
Restored object This area is used to specify the type of object to create when an archived
type aspect is restored. Check the corresponding check box, then click Select to
select the object type.
340 3BUF001092-510
Adjusting Archive Group Configurations

Changes can be made to the archive group configuration on two levels. When
selecting an archive group in the archive group list, the context menu, Figure 232,
(or Actions button) is used to:
• Change the archive group description (Modify Group).
• Delete the archive group (Delete Group).
• Rescan the archive group (Rescan Group) - This rereads the archive group
configuration in the event that logs have been added to or deleted from the
group.
Reset Last Archive Time, List Group Items, and Manual Archive are related to
runtime operations and are described in the archive section in System 800xA
Information Management Data Access and Reports, 3BUF001094*.
Figure 232. Changing an Archive Group Configuration
When selecting an entry from the entries list for an archive group, the context menu
(or Group Entries button) is used to modify or delete the entry, Figure 233. The
Modify Entry command displays the object selection dialog as described in Adding
Entries to Archive Groups on page 335.
Figure 233. Editing Group Entries
3BUF001092-510 341
Setting Up the Archive Schedule for an Archive Group Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
Setting Up the Archive Schedule for an Archive Group

Scheduling instructions for archive groups are specified by adding a job in the
Scheduling structure, and configuring the job’s scheduling definition aspect. The
schedule may be cyclic, periodic, weekly, monthly, a list of dates and times, or
conditional. But, periodic schedule is recommended for all the timed archives. The
schedule is associated with a specific archive group via the Archive action aspect
which must be added to the job object. This section quickly demonstrates how to
add a job and use the scheduling definition aspect to set up a periodic schedule. It
also describes how to add and use the Archive action aspect. For further information
on jobs and scheduling options, refer to the section on scheduling in System 800xA
It is expensive, in terms of physical media, to archive frequently. Therefore, try to
maximize the time between archives. General guidelines are provided below. For
detailed guidelines, refer to Archive Configuration Guidelines on page 316.
• When specifying the schedule, configure the archive interval between 1 hour
and 1/4th the log period. For example, if the log time period is four weeks,
archive once a week. This allows for a number of archive failures (due to media
full or drive problems) without loss of data. If the archive is scheduled more
frequently, any missed archives will have more chances to recover before the
source log(s) wrap.
• For Property logs use the following guidelines:
10,000 logs per archive group maximum, 5,000 recommended
25,000 entries per log per archive
For example, for a storage interval of 30s, which is 2 entries per minute, 25,000
entries in 12,500 minutes (208 hours or 8 days), schedule archiving for about
once a week.
• For Message log: max of 50,000 messages in a single archive.
If a sample blocking rate for numeric logs is configured, the time stamps for
some logs in the archive group may not be aligned with the scheduled archive
time. Compensate for this by following the procedure described in Aligning
Staggered Time Stamps on page 347.
For scheduled archives, even if no new samples were collected, at least one
sample (the last valid point) will be archived.
342 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Setting Up the Archive Schedule for an Archive Group

menu, Figure 234.
Figure 234. Adding a New Job Object
3. Browse to the Scheduling Objects category and select the Job Description
object (Object Types>ABB Systems>Scheduling Objects>Job Description),
Figure 235.
4. Assign the object a logical name.
Job Description
Selected
Object
Name
3BUF001092-510 343
periodic schedule. A new archive will be created every three days, starting June
9th at 5:00 PM, and continuing until September 9th at 5:00 PM.
Adding and Configuring the Archive Action

Actions are implemented as aspects on an object which is on or under a job
description in the scheduling structure.
To add an action:
1. Right-click on the Job object (for example ScheduleArchGrp1 in Figure 237)
and choose New Aspect from the context menu.
344 3BUF001092-510
Figure 237. Adding an Action Aspect
Action aspect (path is: Scheduler>Action Aspect>Action Aspect),
Figure 238.
Use the default aspect name, or specify a new name.
Figure 238. New Aspect Dialog

3BUF001092-510 345
Figure 239. Action Aspect Configuration View

Select the archive group to be scheduled by this action. The Service Group and
Archive Devices fields will be automatically filled in according to the selected
archive group. If a different archive device needs to be specified, use the
corresponding pull down list to display a list of available devices.
The Last Archive Time is filled in by History. This is the time the last archive
operation occurred for a group. This time is remembered by the system so that the
next archive operation will archive data starting at that time. Change (reset) this time
to cause the next archive operation to go back farther in time, for example to account
for a failed archive, or skip ahead to a later time, for example to stop the archive
from collecting data for a certain time period. To do this, change the date and time,
then press Reset. The last archive time can also be reset from the Archive Group
aspect as described in Adjusting Archive Group Configurations on page 341.
346 3BUF001092-510
Aligning Staggered Time Stamps

Staggering, phasing, and sample blocking rate are methods for balancing CPU load
due to data collection and storage (Stagger Collection and Storage on page 459).
Using any one of these methods may result in some logs in an archive entry having
time stamps not be aligned with the scheduled archive time. This does NOT result in
any data being lost; however, if it is important that time stamps for all logs within an
archive entry are aligned with the scheduled archive time, then use the Offset
Minutes function in the Archive Group aspect to accomplish this.
First, configure the schedule for the archive group to delay the archive operation for
a number of minutes equal to or slightly greater than the largest sample blocking
rate (or phasing span). This allows all logs in the archive group to store their
respective values prior to the scheduled archive.
Then use the Offset Minutes field in the Archive Action to reset the end time of the
archive operation to the desired alignment time. The Offset Minutes value is
subtracted from the scheduled Archive time so that data will be collected up to the
desired alignment time where all logs will have the same time stamp.
For example: consider the need to archive on a daily basis at midnight (00:00), and
data storage for logs in the archive group are phased over a nine (9) minute period.
In this case, schedule the archive operation to occur at 10 minutes after midnight
(00:10), and set the Offset Minutes to 10.
Archive Entry Time Range Alignment
Time
Stagger
Logs Effect
Scheduled
Archive
Time
00:00 00:00 00:10
Figure 240. Using Offset Minutes
3BUF001092-510 347
Delete/Create Archive Logs using Maintenance Button Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
Delete/Create Archive Logs using Maintenance Button

The Maintenance... button tool, reference Figure 223, is used when archive groups
are improperly created and the system needs to be cleaned up. The Maintenance tool
can also put links back on existing logs. This is used to not wait for the next timed
archive. In addition, the Maintenance tool can delete restore (_Rst) logs on all PPA
logs that were accidentally configured.
After selecting the Maintenance... button, use the Maintenance Dialog, Figure 241,
to create and delete archive logs.
Specify parameters as in the numeric log archive group entry dialog. Next, go
through the system and create or delete archived log references that match specified
criteria.
The Validate Archive Logs button verifies the correctness of the references,
updates them if they are not, and reports the number of updated references to the
user.
Figure 241. Maintenance Dialog
348 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Adding a Read-Only Volume for a Mapped Network
Adding a Read-Only Volume for a Mapped Network Drive

To access archived history data, either restore the archived logs to the Restored
History database, or publish one or more selected volumes for direct viewing.
(Publishing applies to property and message logs only.)
The MO media and volumes created for any archive device are read/write volumes.
This means archive data can be written to those volumes, and use data access
applications such as DataDirect to read the archive data from those volumes.
Read-only volumes are automatically created for all removable disk drives (DVD
and CD drives). This is used to read archive data from DVDs and CDs on to which
archive volumes are copied and when those DVDs or CDs are mounted.
Additional read-only volumes can be created for reading archive volumes that have
been copied to a mapped network drive. These volumes should not be associated
with (created beneath) any archive device object. The recommended method is to
use the Archive Service Aspect. This is basically the same procedure used to add
archive devices and archive groups (Adding an Archive Device on page 322).
To add a volume for a mapped network drive:
1. In the Plant Explorer, select the Node Administration structure.
2. Expand the object tree for the node where the volume is to be added.
3. In the object tree for the selected node, expand the Industrial IT Archive
Service Provider and select the Industrial IT Archive object.
5. Click Archive Volume. This displays the New Archive Volume dialog.
6. Enter a name for the object in the Name field, for example: Drive H,
Figure 242, then click OK.
Figure 242. New Archive Volume Dialog
3BUF001092-510 349
PDL Archive Configuration Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
7. This adds the Archive Volume object under the Industrial IT Archive object and
creates an Archive Volume aspect for the new object.
8. Use the config view to select the Service Group that will manage archive
transactions for this volume, and set the volume path to the mapped network
drive.
Figure 243. Archive Volume Aspect
PDL Archive Configuration

The PDL Archive aspect is used to configure PDL archive parameters.
350 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Archive and Delete Modes
1. Select the Inform IT History Object under the applicable node in the Node
2. Select the Production Data Log Container.
3. Select the Inform IT PDL Auto Archive aspect, Figure 244.
Inform IT PDL Auto Archive
History Object Aspect
Figure 244. PDL Archive Configuration Window
Archive and Delete Modes

Archive and Delete modes must be configured in unison. Table 37 indicates the
legal combinations of archive and delete modes, and the corresponding delay mode.
3BUF001092-510 351
Archive and Delete Modes Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
Table 37. Legal Combinations for Archive Mode, Delete Mode, and Delay Mode
Archive Mode Legal Delete Modes Applicable Delay Mode

No_auto_archive No_auto_delete Not Applicable
After_job (campaign) Delete Delay
After_batch (reel or grade) Delete Delay
On_job_end (campaign) No_auto_delete Archive Delay
After_archive Archive Delay + Delete Delay
On_batch (reel or grade) No_delete Archive Delay
After_archive Archive Delay + Delete Delay
Use the Archive Mode button to select the archive mode. The choices are:
• No_auto_archive - Archive PDLs on demand via View Production Data Logs.
• On Job End - Archive PDLs automatically after specified delay from end of
job (for Batch Management, job = campaign).
If On Job End is chosen for a Batch Management campaign with multiple
batches in the campaign, Information Management archives data at the end of
each batch in the campaign, and at the end of the campaign. For example, if there
are three batches in a campaign, and On Job End is selected as the Archive
mode, there will be three archives: batch 1, batch 1 and batch 2, and batch 1,
batch2, and batch 3.
• On Batch End - Archive PDLs automatically after specified delay from end of
batch. (For Profile Historian, batch = reel or grade.)
For Profile Historian applications, configure the archive mode as ON BATCH
END.
Use the Delete Mode button to select a delete mode. The choices are:
• No_auto_delete - Delete PDLs on demand via PDL window.
• After Archive - Delete PDLs from PDL database automatically, a specified
time after they have been archived.
352 3BUF001092-510
Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function Archive Delay
• After Job End - Delete PDLs after specified delay from end of job (for Batch
Management, job = campaign). The PDL does not have to be archived.
• After Batch End - Delete PDLs after a specified delay from the end of the
batch. The PDL does not have to be archived to do this. (For Profile Historian,
batch = reel or grade.)
For Profile Historian applications, configure the delete mode as AFTER
ARCHIVE. Also the Delete Delay must be set to a value greater than or equal to
the profile log time period.
Archive Delay
A delay can be specified between the time a job or batch finishes and the time the
PDLs are actually archived. This field is only applicable if On Job End or On
Batch End for archive mode is selected.
Configure the delay to be at least five minutes (5m). This ensures that all data is
ready for archive after the end of a job or batch. A delay of hours (h) or days (d) can
be specified if time is needed to enter additional data for archive.
Delete Delay
A delay until PDLs are actually deleted can be specified. This delay is not
applicable when the delete mode is configured as NO_AUTO_DELETE. This delay
has a different purpose depending on whether the PDL is archived or not.
When the PDL is being archived, this is the amount of time to delay the delete
operation after the archive. This is used to archive the data immediately for security,
and keep the data online for a period of time for reporting, analysis and so on.
When the PDL is not archived, this is the amount of time to delay after the end of
the job or batch before deleting. Configure the delay to be at least five minutes (5m).
A delay of hours (h) or days (d) can be specified.
For Profile Historian applications, configure the Delete Delay equal to or slightly
greater than the profile log time period.
Archive Device
Enter the archive device name.
3BUF001092-510 353
Archive Device Section 11 Configuring the Archive Function
354 3BUF001092-510
Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data
Introduction
This section describes how to consolidate historical process data, alarm/event data,
and production data from remote history servers on a dedicated consolidation node.
This includes data from 800xA 5.1 or later Information Management nodes in
different systems.
The consolidation node collects directly from the History logs on the remote nodes.
For instructions on consolidating historical process data, refer to Consolidating
Historical Process Data on page 356.
For instructions on consolidating alarm/event data stored in message logs, and
production data stored in PDLs, refer to Consolidating Message Logs and PDLs on
page 389.
Consolidating Batch PDL Data with History Associations

History associations are created in the source node for Batch data. The log name
typically contains three parts:
• Object name.
• Property name.
• Log name.
These are defined by the History Log template that was used in the Log
Configuration aspect. For example: TIC100:MEASURE,IMLog, where TIC100 is
the object name, MEASURE is the property name, and IMLog is the name of the
log in the Log Configuration aspect.
3BUF001092-510 355
Consolidating Historical Process Data Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data
When the consolidation node is set up, a new Log Configuration aspect is manually
created on the consolidation node. If the naming convention for the numeric log
does not match the one on the source node, any attempt to retrieve data in a report
will fail.
When setting up numeric consolidation on nodes that will also consolidate Batch
PDL data with history associations, the naming convention on the Numeric Log
template on the consolidation node must match the naming convention for the
numeric log template on the source node.
Consolidating Historical Process Data

Process object names may be duplicated from one ABB network to the next. In the
event that duplicate log names are used, the remote History node’s IP address is
used to distinguish one log from the other.
Setting up Historical data consolidation is a three-step process:
• Interaction between two or more History nodes (as is the case with historical
data consolidation) requires the OMF domain to be extended to TCP/IP. This
must be done prior to performing the other steps described in this section. For
details, refer to Appendix A, Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP.
• The log configurations on the nodes from which historical data is being
consolidated must be imported to the consolidation node.
This step does not establish historical data collection and storage on the local
(consolidation) node for the imported logs. The Log Configuration aspects
created as a result of this step merely provide a window for viewing the
historical data stored in the log configurations on the remote nodes.
• To establish local data collection and storage on the consolidation node for the
imported logs, create a second set of Log Configuration aspects on the
consolidation node.
When ready to import from IM, start with the procedure for Importing Remote Log
Configurations on page 357.
Other considerations are:
• When consolidating message logs, the target (consolidation) log must already
exist on the consolidation node. This is not required when consolidating PDLs.
356 3BUF001092-510
Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data Importing Remote Log Configurations
• When consolidating message logs or PDLs from Information Management, a

user account must be set up on the source node. This account must use the
same user name and password as the installing user for the target consolidation
node. Also, this user must be added to the HistoryAdmin group. Detailed
instructions for adding user accounts are provided in the section on Managing
Users on page 569.
Importing Remote Log Configurations

This procedure shows how to import the log configurations from remote history
servers. This is a prerequisite step for creating the logs which consolidate the
historical data from the remote history logs. These imported log configurations also
support viewing of the historical data using the Information Management desktop
tools, as well as tools supported by 800xA System.
Launching the History Access Importer Tool

From the Windows task bar choose Start>Programs>ABB Industrial IT 800xA>
Information Mgmt>History>History Access Importer Tool.
The History Access Importer is a wizard-like tool for importing remote history log
configurations. The first step is to read the log configuration information from the
remote history server.
Reading the Remote Log Configurations

Use the dialog in Figure 245 to read log configuration information from a specified
remote history server into an xml file on the Information Management node:
1. Specify whether to generate a new file, or use an existing file.
Always use the Generate New File option if the information has not yet been
read from the remote history server.
The Use Existing Definition File option is used only when the information
from the remote history server has been read and an import operation that is
partially completed is being finished.
2. For Import Type select IM Historian Database.
3. Enter the computer name and IP address for the remote history server.
3BUF001092-510 357
Importing Remote Log Configurations Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data
4. Enter the port number. as 1521.

5. Specify an xml file name.
6. Click Next when done.
Figure 245. History Access Tool - Initial Dialog
This starts the process of reading the log configuration information from the
specified remote history server. The progress is indicated in the dialog shown
in Figure 246. When the Importer Module successfully loaded message is
displayed, the read-in process is done.
Figure 246. Progress Status Window
358 3BUF001092-510
7. Click Next, then continue with the procedure for Assigning Objects to the
Imported Tags on page 359.
Assigning Objects to the Imported Tags

Every Log Configuration aspect must be associated with an object and object
property. For consolidation, the IM Import utility is used to create dummy objects
whose sole purpose is to provide a place to instantiate the Log Configuration aspects
for the imported tags. To configure these log/object associations:
1. Use the dialog in Figure 247 to select the method for associating the imported
tags with their respective objects. In most cases, the Create new objects for
imported tags option should be used. This option is selected by default.
As an option, the default Root object name may also be changed. This is the
name of the root object under which the imported log configuration aspects
will be located. The object is created as part of the import operation. The
default name is derived from the specified source node name. Use the default,
or modify it as required, then click Next to continue.
If Multisystem Integration is used, the Match option can be selected. Instead of
creating generic objects and properties, the imported log configurations will be
associated with the same objects and properties from the source system.
3BUF001092-510 359
Figure 247. Assigning Objects to Imported Tags
This displays a dialog for specifying the location and naming conventions for
the Log Template object, and the Log Configuration aspects, Figure 248.
2. Typically, the default settings can be used. This will create the Log Template in
the History Log Template Library and provide easy-to-recognize names for
the template and Log Configuration aspects. Adjust these settings if necessary.
Click Next when done.
360 3BUF001092-510
Figure 248. Template Specification
This displays a dialog which summarizes the log/object association process,

Figure 249. At this point no associations have been made. There are no tags
assigned to new objects.
3BUF001092-510 361
Figure 249. Assign Objects Summary - Before Assign Objects Done
3. Click Assign Objects. This displays the Assign Objects dialog, Figure 250.
This dialog lists all logs that have been imported from the remote history node
and are now in the resulting xml file. The status of each log is indicated by a
color-coded icon in the Access Name column. The key for interpreting these
icons is provided in the lower left corner of the dialog.
4. Use the Assign Objects dialog to make any adjustments to the imported tag
specifications that may be required.
Making Adjustments for Tags

Adjustments to the Object and Property names are required to make the History
configurations on the source and consolidation nodes match. More than one
property may be logged for a given object. Generally, the property logs for all
properties being logged for an object are contained within one Log Configuration
Aspect. When importing log configurations from Information Management nodes,
by default the importer will create a separate object and Log Configuration aspect
for each property being logged. Thus, there will be a one-to-one correspondence for
property logs on the source and consolidation nodes; however, additional objects
362 3BUF001092-510
and Log Configuration aspects may be created on the consolidation node that do not
exist on the source node. Use the following procedure to avoid this.
Figure 250. Assign Objects Dialog
To modify the object and property names to make the History configurations match:
1. Split the Access Name into two fields - field 1 will become the object name,
and field 2 will become the property name. To split the Access Name:
a. Make sure the selected Object String is Access Name.
b. Click the Add button associated with the Split String At field. This
displays the Add String Split Rule dialog, Figure 251.
3BUF001092-510 363
c. For Split Character, enter the character that splits the object and property
names. For Information Management, the comma (,) character is used.
Leave the other parameters at their default settings: Occurrence = 1st,
Search Direction = Forward.
d. Click OK.
Figure 251. Add String Split Rule
2. Make Field 1 of the split Access Name (text left of the split character) the
Object String, and trim (remove) the split character (in this case, the comma)
from the Object String. To do this (reference Figure 252):
Figure 252. Object String Specification
a. In the String for Object Name section, select 1 from the Field pull-down
list. This specifies Field 1 (text left of split character) as the Object String.
b. In the Trim section check the Right check box and enter 1. This specifies
that one character will be trimmed from the right end of the text string.
As changes are made, the Object String will change accordingly. The resulting
Object String is shown in Figure 253.
364 3BUF001092-510
Figure 253. Object String Modified Showing Results of Object String Adjustment
3. Make Field 2 of the split Access Name (text right of the split character) the
Property String. To do this, in the String for Object Property section, select 2
from the Field pull-down list, Figure 254. This specifies Field 2 (text right of
split character in the Access Name) as the Object Property String.
Figure 254. Property String Adjustments
The finished specification is shown in Figure 255.
3BUF001092-510 365
Figure 255. Completed Assign Objects Specification
After any desired adjustments are made, continue with the procedure for Creating
the Object/Tag Associations on page 366.
Creating the Object/Tag Associations

At this point, either create object/tag associations for all tags, or select a portion of
the tag list for which to create associations. For example, when the list is very large
and only a portion of the tag list is to be processed. If the History Access Import tool
is exited and then restarted, the Use Existing Definition File option (step 1 of
Reading the Remote Log Configurations on page 357) can be used to read the log
366 3BUF001092-510
configuration information from the existing XML file rather than re-read the remote
history server.
To create the associations:
1. For the entire tag list, click Create All. For a partial list, first select the tags,
then click Create Selected.
The result (for creating selected tags) is shown in Figure 256. The status
indicator for tags that have been assigned to new objects will be green.
Figure 256. Create Selected Result
2. Click Close. This displays the Assign Objects summary again. This time the
summary indicates the result of the assign objects process, Figure 257.
3BUF001092-510 367
Figure 257. Assign Objects Summary
3. Click Next. This displays a dialog for specifying parameters for creating the
new Log Template and Log Configuration aspects.
4. Continue with the procedure for Specifying the Service Group and Other
Miscellaneous Parameters on page 368.
Specifying the Service Group and Other Miscellaneous Parameters

Use the dialog in Figure 258 to specify the History Service Group for the source
node from which the log configurations are being imported. This dialog also is used
to group the Log Configuration aspects into folders. This improves system
performance when the tag list is very large, because it is time consuming to open a
folder with an excessive number of objects.
To use this feature, click the Enable check box in the Grouping New Imported
Objects section. The default size for each group is 250 tags. Create larger or smaller
groups as needed. Do not make groups larger than 1000 tags.
Enter a prefix for each group’s folder name. The specified counter type (A-Z or 0-9)
will be appended to the prefix to make each folder name unique. For example, by
368 3BUF001092-510
specifying eng130_ as the prefix, and 0...9 as the Counter Type, the following group
names will be used: eng130_0, eng130_1, and so on.
Set the Source Type to Remote Historian.
Figure 258. Selecting Service Group
Click Next when done. This displays an import preview where settings can be
confirmed, Figure 259.
3BUF001092-510 369
Figure 259. Import Summary
Read the preview. When ready, click Next to start the import.
The progress status is displayed while the log configurations are being imported,
Figure 260. When the Import has completed successfully message appears, click
Finish.
370 3BUF001092-510
Figure 260. Progress Status
The Log Configuration aspects have now been created for the imported log
configurations.
A History Source object must be present above the Log Configuration aspects in
the structure where they reside, Figure 261. If the History Source object is not
present, refer to the procedure for adding History Source objects in Configuring
Node Assignments for Property Logs on page 181.
3BUF001092-510 371
Figure 261. Example, History Source
The Log Configuration aspect’s Status tab (or any Desktop tool such as DataDirect
or desktop Trends) can now be used to read historical data from the remote log. An
example is shown in Figure 262.
Figure 262. Example, Viewing Historical Data from an Imported Log Configuration
Finish the set-up for historical data consolidation by Collecting Historical Data from
Remote History Servers on page 373.
372 3BUF001092-510
Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data Collecting Historical Data from Remote History Servers
Collecting Historical Data from Remote History Servers

The logs created in the previous procedure simply provide a window for viewing the
historical data. They DO NOT perform a data collection function, nor do they
actually store data.
The procedure described in this section creates a second set of property logs that
will collect historical data from the remote history server, and store the data on the
consolidation node. This procedure uses the Microsoft Excel add-in Bulk Import
tool. Detailed instructions for this tool are provided in Bulk Configuration of
Property Logs on page 262. This section provides specific instructions for using this
tool to instantiate Log Configuration aspects to collect historical process data from
remote history logs.
The basic steps are described below. Further details are provided in the referenced
sections:
• Determine the storage interval of the remote logs. The storage interval for
the new logs being created should match or be a multiple of the storage rate for
the remote logs being collected. To determine the storage rate of the remote
logs, refer to a Log Configuration aspect created for an imported log
configuration. Refer to Determining the Storage Rate on page 373.
• Create a new Log Template. This procedure is basically the same as Building
a Simple Property Log on page 188, except that the direct log in the property
log hierarchy must be an IM 3.5 Collector link type, rather than a basic history
trend log. Also, the storage interval recorded in the previous step will be used.
For details refer to Creating a New Log Template on page 374.
• Use the Bulk Import tool to instantiate the property logs. When this is done,
change the Item IDs for all objects, and apply the new Log Template. Refer to
Using the Bulk Import Tool to Instantiate the Property Logs on page 376.
Determining the Storage Rate

The storage interval for the new logs that are being created should match or be a
multiple of the storage rate for the remote logs being collected. The storage rate can
be found using one of the Log Configuration aspects created for an imported log
configuration. The storage rate is indicated on the IM Imported tab, Figure 263.
Record this storage rate for use when creating the new Log Template as described in
Creating a New Log Template on page 374.
3BUF001092-510 373
Collecting Historical Data from Remote History Servers Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data
Figure 263. Example, Looking Up the Storage Rate for the Remote Logs
Creating a New Log Template

This procedure is basically the same as Building a Simple Property Log on page
188, except that the direct log in the property log hierarchy must be an IM History
Log link type. When adding the direct log in the property log hierarchy, click the
Linked check box, and then select the IM History Log link from the Server Type
pull down list, Figure 264.
374 3BUF001092-510
Figure 264. Adding the Direct Log as IM History Log Link
When configuring the Data Collection parameters, set the storage interval to match
or be a multiple of the remote log’s storage interval, Figure 265.
Figure 265. Configuring the New Template
3BUF001092-510 375
Using the Bulk Import Tool to Instantiate the Property Logs

This section provides specific instructions for using the Bulk Import tool to create
property logs that collect from remote history logs. These property logs will be
added to the same Log Configuration Aspects that were created for the imported log
configurations (Importing Remote Log Configurations on page 357). For further
information regarding the operation of the Bulk Import Tool, refer to Bulk
Configuration of Property Logs on page 262.
Start by loading the sheet from the system. When the location from which to import
objects is specified, select the root object under which the objects created for the
imported log configurations reside, Figure 266. Also check the Include Child
Objects check box.
For this application, specifying a filter prior to importing is not required.
Figure 266. Selecting the Objects to Import
Modify the Item IDs in the spreadsheet to make the IM data source for the direct
logs reference the remote history log names. The IM Data Source specification has
the following form: $HSobject, attribute-n-oIPaddress.
376 3BUF001092-510
The IP address is only required when collecting from multiple sites, and some
sites use identical log names. The IP address is not required when all data sources
are unique.
Scroll to the Item ID column. The remote log name is embedded in the
corresponding object’s Item ID, Figure 267.
Item ID
Column
Log Name
Figure 267. Log Name Embedded in Item ID
The portion of the Item ID text string before the start of the .$HS string must be
stripped away and be replaced with DS, Figure 268. This instructs the Bulk Import
tool to use the remainder of the Item ID ($HSobject, attribute-n-oIPaddress) as the
log’s data source.
Replace this
part with DS
Figure 268. Trimming the Item ID
Use Excel’s Find and Replace function to do this, Figure 269.

Be sure to remove the wildcard (*) character from the Find criteria; otherwise,
the entire Item ID (not just the prefix) will be replaced.
3BUF001092-510 377
Figure 269. Find/Replace Example
The result of the find and replace operation is shown in Figure 270.
Figure 270. DS Prefix Replacing Original Prefixes in Item IDs
When consolidating a dual log configuration, edit the ItemID string to specify
BOTH logs in the dual log configuration. The syntax for this is described in
Additional ItemID Changes for Dual Logs on page 378.
Additional ItemID Changes for Dual Logs

To consolidate historical data from a dual log configuration, modify the ItemID
string to specify as the data source, BOTH history logs in the dual log configuration.
If dual logs are not being consolidated, skip this section and continue with
Selecting the Log Template Configuration on page 380.
The correct syntax depends on if it is a simple dual log configuration (no secondary
history logs), or a hierarchical configuration with secondary history logs.
378 3BUF001092-510
Simple Dual Log Configuration

For a simple dual log configuration (two history logs), Figure 271, the syntax is:
DS.$HSobject,attribute-1-d or DS.$HSobject,attribute-1-d2
The number following the first dash (-1) identifies the first log added to the log
template. The d following the second dash identifies the matching dual log, in this
case, the second log added to the template. The number following -d defaults to:
first dash number+1. With this configuration, the matching dual log is always -2;
therefore the number does not have to be entered following d. For example:
DS.$HS02-B1-001,MEASURE-1-d = DS.$HS02-B1-001,MEASURE-1-d2
Consolidation Log
Direct Trend Log
Source Dual History Logs
Figure 271. Simple Dual Log Configuration
Hierarchical Dual Log Configuration

When the dual log configuration includes secondary history logs, the syntax may
depend on the order in which the individual logs were added to the log configuration
template. This is illustrated in Figure 272 and Figure 273.
In Figure 272, since the two source logs (-3 and -4) follow sequentially, the number
following -d is optional. In Figure 273, since the two source logs (-2 and -4) are
NOT sequential, the number following -d MUST be specified.
3BUF001092-510 379
1 3
Direct Trend Log Consolidation Log
2 4
syntax = DS.$HSobject,attribute-3-d OR
DS.$HSobject,attribute-3-d4
Figure 272. Hierarchical Dual Log Configuration, Example 1
1 2
Direct Trend Log Consolidation Log
3 4
syntax = DS.$HSobject,attribute-2-d4
Figure 273. Hierarchical Dual Log Configuration, Example 2
Selecting the Log Template Configuration

Replace the current Log Template specification with the new Log Template.
1. Delete the existing template before replacing it by selecting the Delete option
on the Bulk Import Menu.
2. From the Property template Column for the first (top) object, choose Template
List from the context menu.
380 3BUF001092-510
3. Select the template from the list provided Figure 274.
Figure 274. Changing the Log Template Specification
4. Click on a corner of the cell, and pull the corner down to highlight the Property
Template column for the remaining objects. The template specification will
automatically be entered in the highlighted cells when the mouse button is
released, Figure 275.
Figure 275. Applying the New Log Template Specification to All Objects
5. When finished, run the Bulk Configuration utility to update the log aspects
from the spreadsheet. To do this, choose Bulk Import>Update Log Aspect
from Sheet.
To check the results, go to the location where the Log Configuration aspects have
been instantiated, and use the Status tab of a Log Configuration aspect to read
historical data for the log. These logs will be located under the same root object as
the imported log configuration aspects. An example is shown in Figure 276.
3BUF001092-510 381
Collecting from TTD Logs Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data
IM History Log Linked Log
Importer Linked Log
Figure 276. Checking Results
Collecting from TTD Logs

Property logs can be configured on the Information Management node to collect
from TTD logs on an AC 400M Controller.
382 3BUF001092-510
Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data Collecting from TTD Logs
In order to do this the TTD log configurations must be present in the Aspect
Directory. Refer to the applicable AC 400 Controller documentation for this
procedure. This creates a Log Configuration Template and Log Configuration
Aspect for each TTD log group. The Log Configuration Aspects will be located
under an object in the Control structure as specified during this procedure.
This step does not establish historical data collection and storage on the local
node for the imported logs. The Log Configuration aspects created as a result of
this step merely provide a window for viewing the historical data stored in the
TTD logs on the remote nodes.
Once the TTD log configurations are present in the Aspect Directory, follow the
guidelines in this section to create property logs to collect from the TTD logs. There
are two basic steps as described below. Further details are provided in the referenced
sections:
• Create a new Log Template. This procedure is basically the same as Building
a Simple Property Log on page 188, except that the direct log in the property
log hierarchy must be an IM Collector link type, rather than a basic history
trend log. Also, the Collection Type must be OPC HDA. For details refer to
Creating a New Log Template on page 383.
• Use the Bulk Import tool to instantiate property logs to collect from the TTD
logs. When this is done, specify the Item IDs for all objects to reference the
TTD logs, and apply the new Log Template. Refer to Using the Bulk Import
Tool to Instantiate the Property Logs on page 385.
Creating a New Log Template

This procedure is basically the same as Building a Simple Property Log on page
188, except that the direct log in the property log hierarchy must be an
IM 3.5 Collector link type, and the Collection Type must be OPC HDA.
When adding the Direct log in the property log hierarchy, click the Linked check
box, and then select the IM History Log from the Server Type pull down list,
Figure 277.
3BUF001092-510 383
Figure 277. Adding the Direct Log as IM History Log
When configuring the IM Definition parameters, set the Collection Type to

OPC HDA, Figure 278.
Figure 278. Configuring the New Template
384 3BUF001092-510
Using the Bulk Import Tool to Instantiate the Property Logs

This section provides specific instructions for using the Bulk Import tool to
instantiate the property logs to collect from the TTD logs. The property logs will be
added to the same Log Configuration Aspects that were created when the TTD log
configurations were imported. For further information regarding the operation of the
Bulk Import Tool, refer to Bulk Configuration of Property Logs on page 262.
Start by loading the sheet from the system. When the location from which to import
objects is specified, select the root object under which the objects created for the
imported TTD log configurations reside, Figure 279. Also check the Include Child
Objects check box.
For this application, a filter is not required prior to importing.
Figure 279. Selecting the Objects to Import
Modify the Item IDs in the spreadsheet to make the IM data source for the direct
logs reference the TTD log names. The IM Data Source specification has the
following form: DS.object:property,TTDlogname. To do this, do the following for
each TTD log specification:
3BUF001092-510 385
1. Obtain the object name from the Object column. The object name is the text
string that follows the last delimiting character in the full text string,
Figure 280.
Last delimiting character

(In this case, a forward slash)
Object Name = AIC4_1
Figure 280. Obtaining the Object Name
2. Obtain the property name from the Property column, Figure 281.
Figure 281. Obtaining the Property Name
3. Obtain the TTD log name from the applicable log template which was created
in the Aspect Directory for the TTD log group, Figure 282.
386 3BUF001092-510
Figure 282. Obtaining the TTD Log Name
4. Enter the Data Source specification in the Item ID column, Figure 283.
Figure 283. Entering the Data Source Specification
Replace the current Log Template specification with the new Log Template. To do
this, right click on the Property template Column for the first (top) object, and
choose Template List from the context menu. Then select the template from the list
provided Figure 284.
3BUF001092-510 387
Figure 284. Changing the Log Template Specification
Click on a corner of the cell, and pull the corner down to highlight the Property
Template column for the remaining objects. The template specification will
automatically be entered in the highlighted cells when the mouse button is released.
When finished, run the Bulk Configuration utility to update the log aspects from the
spreadsheet: choose Bulk Import>Update Log Aspect from Sheet.
To check the results, go to the location where the Log Configuration aspects have
been instantiated, and use the Status tab of a Log Configuration aspect to read
historical data for the log. An example is shown in Figure 285.
Figure 285. Checking the Results
388 3BUF001092-510
Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data Consolidating Message Logs and PDLs
Consolidating Message Logs and PDLs

Message logs and PDLs on one or more history server nodes can be consolidated on
one central Consolidation node. This is done by creating a job with one or more IM
Consolidation actions to run on the target consolidation node. A separate action is
required for each source node from which the consolidation node will consolidate
messages and PDL data.
Follow these basic steps and refer to the referenced section in each step for details:
1. When consolidating message logs, make sure the consolidation (LocalName)
logs already exist on the consolidation node and that they are correctly
configured. To consolidate PDL data for Batch Management applications,
create one PDL_MESSAGE log on the consolidation node to consolidate PDL
messages from all Batch Management nodes. Procedures for configuring
message logs is described in Section 7, Alarm/Event Message Logging.
Avoid consolidating Batch Management created PDL Message Logs if a PDL
Message Log does not exist on the Information Management Consolidation node.
Perform the following procedure if a PDL Message Log has not been
configured on the Information Management Consolidation node, or if it has
been configured incorrectly. Although a PDL Message Log created by Batch
Management will be consolidated from the target node, if a PDL Message Log
has not been configured on the Information Management Consolidation node,
or if it has been configured incorrectly, it will not contain any messages for any
of the tasks when viewed on the Consolidation node.
a. Correctly configure the PDL Message Log on the Consolidation node.
b. Use SQLPLUS on the target node to set the Archive Status to 0 for all
tasks in the task table.
c. This forces the PDL Message Logs to be reconsolidated at which time the
messages will be consolidated.
2. When consolidating message logsm, a user account must be set up on the
source node. This account must use the same user name and password as the
installing user for the target consolidation node. Also, this user must be added
3BUF001092-510 389
Setting Up the Schedule Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data
to the HistoryAdmin group. Detailed instructions for adding user accounts are
provided in the section on Managing Users on page 569.
3. On the consolidation node, create the Job Description object and configure the
schedule and start condition(s) through the respective aspects. Refer to Setting
Up the Schedule on page 390.
4. Add an action aspect to the Job Description object. Refer to Setting Up the
Schedule on page 390.
5. Open the action aspect view, and select IM Consolidate Action from the
Action pull-down list. Then use the dialog to specify the source and target
nodes, and the source and target log names. Each action is used to specify logs
for ONE source node. Refer to Using the Plug-in for IM Consolidation on page
392.
6. Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 for each source node from which the consolidation
node will consolidate message and PDL data.
Reuse of Batch ID (TCL) is supported by PDL Consolidation. A warning is
displayed in the log file when processing a remote task entry (TCL batch) that
already exists on the local node with a different start time. The user can decide
what to do about the duplicate. If nothing is done, the local entry will eventually be
removed through the archive process.
Setting Up the Schedule

Consolidation of alarm/event messages and/or PDL data from an Information
Management node is scheduled by adding a job in the Scheduling structure, and
configuring the job’s scheduling definition aspect. The schedule may be cyclic,
periodic, weekly, monthly, a list of dates and times, or conditional. The schedule is
associated with a specific node via the IM Consolidation action aspect which must
be added to the job object. This section quickly demonstrates how to add a job and
use the scheduling definition aspect to set up a weekly schedule. It also describes
how to add and use the IM Consolidation action aspect. For further information on
jobs and scheduling options, refer to the section on scheduling in System 800xA

390 3BUF001092-510
Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data Setting Up the Schedule

menu.
3. Add the Job object as a Job Description object. Assign the object a logical
name.
weekly schedule. Consolidation for the specified node will occur every Sunday
at 11:00 PM, starting July 3rd, and continuing until December 31st at 11:00
PM.
3BUF001092-510 391
Using the Plug-in for IM Consolidation Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data
Adding and Configuring the Archive Action

1. Right-click on the Job object (for example ScheduleArchGrp1) and choose
New Aspect from the context menu.
Action aspect (Scheduler>Action Aspect>Action Aspect).
Use the default aspect name, or specify a new name.
Using the Plug-in for IM Consolidation

To configure the IM Consolidate action:
1. Select IM Consolidate Action from the Action pull-down list. This displays
the Consolidate Logs plug-in, Figure 287.
2. Specify the node name and IP address for the source node from which the
consolidation node will consolidate messages and PDL data.
392 3BUF001092-510
Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data Using the Plug-in for IM Consolidation
Figure 287. Consolidate Logs Aspect View
3. Leave the Unix Node? check box cleared, as it is not supported.

4. To consolidate PDL data, check the Consolidate PDL check box. For Batch
Management, this includes PDL message logs, so it is not required to specify
PDL message logs in the message log list as described in Step 5. However, the
PDL_MESSAGE log must exist on the consolidation node.
When consolidating PDL data for MOD 300 software applications, the
corresponding MODMSGLOG must be added to the message log list.
5. Specify the message logs to be consolidated as follows:
a. Click the Add Log button.
b. In the Add Log dialog enter the full log name of the consolidation log in
the Local Name field, and the full log name of the log from which
messages are being collected in the Remote Name field, Figure 288.
3BUF001092-510 393
Using the Plug-in for IM Consolidation Section 12 Consolidating Historical Data
NOTE: the $HS prefix and -n-o suffix must be used when specifying the
local and remote log names.
c. Select the Message Log Type - OPC, DCS, or Audit Trail.
Figure 288. Add Log Dialog
d. Click OK when finished. This puts the log specification in the list of
message logs to be consolidated, Figure 289.
Consolidate Log
Specification Added
Figure 289. Log Added to List
Repeat Step a through Step d- for as many message logs as required.
394 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Overview
This section provides instructions for optimizing and maintaining the history
database after configuration has been completed. Utilities for some of these
maintenance functions are available via the Windows task bar.
The procedures covered in this section are:
• Backup and Restore on page 396 describes how to create backup files for the
current History database configuration, restore a history database configuration
from backup files, and synchronize the Aspect Directory contents with the
current Information Management History database configuration.
• Schedule History Backups on page 425 using the Report Action of the Action
Aspect to schedule a History backup.
• Starting and Stopping History on page 424 describes how to stop and start
history processes under PAS supervision. This is required for various database
maintenance and configuration procedures.
• Starting and Stopping Data Collection on page 426 describes various methods
for starting and stopping data collection.
• Viewing Log Runtime Status and Configuration on page 429 describes how to
use the Log List aspect for viewing runtime status for logs.
• Presentation and Status Functions on page 434 describes how to use the
Presentation and Status tabs on the log configuration aspect for formatting
history presentation on Operator Workplace displays, and for viewing log data
directly from the log configuration aspect.
• History Control Aspect on page 440 describes how to read status and network
information for the History Service Provider for a selected node in the Node
3BUF001092-510 395
Accessing History Applications Section 13 History Database Maintenance
• Database Maintenance Functions on page 442 describes various maintenance

operations including extending tablespace, maintaining file-based storage,
staggering data collection.
Accessing History Applications

To access maintenance functions related to History from the Windows task bar,
choose Start>Programs>ABB Industrial IT 800xA>Information Mgmt>
History>application.
Integrating History into the 800xA System Platform

The following links between History and the 800xA system are typically auto-
configured as part of the post installation process. Linkage requirements are covered
here for reference, and to verify, if necessary:
• Linking Information Management History with the 800xA System Trend
Function on page 480.
• Integrating System Message and History Servers on page 482.
The interface between the History server and the 800xA system message service is
pre-configured and typically does not require adjustments. The following may need
to be adjusted:
• The maximum number of messages which may be stored, and the threshold for
when messages are forwarded from the history client to the server.
• How far back in time the Event Collector should get historical events.
Backup and Restore

The Backup and Restore utility provides a graphical user interface for running the
command line-based hsBAR function. This utility is used to:
• Create backup files for your History database. This procedure creates all the
files that are required to completely recreate the Information Management
History database. This includes all configuration data, log data from both file-
based and Oracle-based logs, and the Aspect System definition file. This does
396 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Backup and Restore
not include archive data which may be backed up by using the Backup
Destination feature as described in Configuring Archive Backup on page 329.
Trend log configurations are backed up by this utility ONLY when they exist in a
property log structure in combination with a History log (as defined by the log
template). Property logs made up entirely of trend logs are NOT backed up.
These log configurations must be backed up via the 800xA system backup.
• Restore a history database from backup files. This procedure recreates the
Information Management History database using the backup files described
above. If the backup was created from an earlier History database version, the
restore utility will convert the restored database to the current version.
• Synchronize the Aspect Directory contents with the current Information
Management History database configuration. This procedure ensures that
the Information Management History database is at the current version, and
that the Aspect Directory matches the current database configuration.
Considerations
When backing up or restoring the History database, make sure the disk is ready and
available on the machine on which the procedure is to occur. Also, these preparatory
steps are required before performing a restore operation:
• All services under PAS supervision must be stopped.
• The Inform IT History Service Provider must be stopped.
• There must be NO applications accessing the Oracle database.
The log file should be checked after each backup and restore operation to make sure
that each backup or restore operation completed successfully.
Backup and Restore Utility

To start this utility, choose: Start>Programs>ABB Industrial IT
800xA>Information Mgmt> History>Backup and Restore. For instructions on
using this utility, refer to the applicable section:
• Backing Up the History Database on page 398.
• Restoring the History Database from Backup Files on page 405.
• Synchronizing the Aspect Directory with the History Database on page 412.
3BUF001092-510 397
Backing Up the History Database Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Backing Up the History Database

This procedure creates all the files required to completely recreate the Information
Management History database. This includes all configuration data, log data from
both file-based and Oracle-based logs, and the Aspect System definition file.
Trend log configurations will only be backed up by this utility when they exist in
a property log structure in combination with a history-based log.
As an option, choose to backup just the Aspect System Definition file. This provides
a file that can be used to recreate the History database configuration in the Aspect
Directory.
How Backup Works

During a backup operation, all data in the Oracle database owned by the Oracle
History user is exported to the specified destination and compressed into a zipped
archive, along with any files that have been created to store file-based property log
entries (called flat files).
The History database can be backed up to any drive, including any mapped network
drives. The disk type should be NTFS for the backups.
To avoid any ambiguity, the backup operation produces a zipped archive of
compressed History database files for each drive that contains at least some portion
of the database, where each archive contains only the database files that are stored
on the corresponding drive. The backup utility uses the naming convention
name-drive.zip for the zipped archives that it produces. For example, if the
History database is located entirely on the C:\ drive and you wish to back up the
database to a zipped archive called hist, the backup operation will compress the
database files into a zipped archive named histDB-C.zip.
If the data files exceed two gigabytes, or if there are more than 25,000 files, then
multiple zip files will be created using the following naming convention:
• First File name-drive.zip
• Next File name-drive0001.zip
• Next File name-drive0002.zip
398 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Backing Up the History Database
When backing up the History database, make sure the disk is ready and available on
the node on which the procedure is to occur. The log file should be checked after the
backup operation to make sure that the backup operation completed successfully.
Make sure the system drive is not getting full. Temp space is required to make the
backup. If the log file indicates that the Oracle export failed, use the option to export
to a disk with more space.
The following procedures can be used to backup all information related to
Information Management software. Information Management software includes:
• Inform IT History (includes Archive).
• Inform IT Display Services.
• Inform IT Application Scheduler.
• Inform IT Data Direct.
• Inform IT Desktop Trends.
• Inform IT Open Data Access.
• Inform IT Calculations.
Not all components require additional steps to backup local files. An Information
Management server will have all the software installed while other nodes will have
only some of the software used. For each component that is configured and used on
a node, all the files should be backed up occasionally. The following procedure
provides the steps to perform the backups.
Node Types
The IM software run on three basic node types.
• Information Management Server.
• Information Management Client, with optional Desktop Tools components.
• Desktop Tools installation.
For a given node type, the backup steps depends on the type of software installed
and the software used on the node. If software is installed and not utilized, there will
be nothing to backup. The following steps identify how to backup an Information
Management 800xA Server node. The steps to backup the other node types will
reference the server backup procedure.
3BUF001092-510 399
ABB Process Administration Service (PAS)

Perform the following procedure to run the PAS utility.
1. Run the Process Administration Service (PAS) utility on the Information
Management Application Server node. From the Windows Taskbar select:
Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > PAS >
Process Administration
This opens the Process Administration Service dialog box.
2. Click Stop All to stop all processes under PAS supervision.
3. Click Close when the dialog box indicates that all processes are stopped.
4. Use standard Windows procedures, via the Services selection from
Administrative Tools in Windows Control Panel, to place the ABB Process
Administration Service into manual and insure that it is stopped.
Cleaning the History Database

It is recommended that the history database be cleaned before making the backup.
1. Open a Windows Command Prompt and enter hsDBMaint -checkDB.
2. If any problems are found, enter hsDBMaint -clean to fix them.
Information Management History Backup and Restore Utility

Use the Information Management History Backup/Restore utility to create all the
backup files that are required to completely back up the Information Management
History database. This includes all configuration data, log data from both file-based
and ORACLE-based logs, and the Aspect System definition file.
The IM Server must be connected to an active aspect system at this time. The fol-
lowing steps require acesss to the aspect directory.
1. Select:
Start > All Programs > ABB Industrial IT 800xA > Information
Mgmt > History > Backup and Restore
2. Verify the Create Backup Files of Current Configuration option is enabled
in the IM Historian Backup/Restore Utility window.
400 3BUF001092-510
3. Click Next. A window for setting up the backup operation is displayed

(Figure 291).
4. Specify the location where the backup files are to be created in the New
Directory Path for the Backup field. This path must already exist and the
directory must be empty. If necessary, click Browse to create a new directory
(Figure 291). Add a D:\HSDATA\History as an additional option. Figure 291
shows the Browser dialog being used to browse the existing path C:\Backup,
and then create a folder named T3 in the Backup directory.
The backup of the History data must be in a directory of its own, not the
D:\HSDATA\History directory. If the data is put into the D:\HSDATA\History
directory, it will get lost.
a. This option enables an alternate location to be specified for the temporary
and oracle DB export files used during history database backup.
To specify a different folder for the export other than the system drive,
enter the following in the additional options dialog:
d:\export
Where d:\export is a folder created on a disk with enough space for the
export.
5. Verify the Only Generate Aspect Definition File option is disabled.
6. Click Next. The HsBAR Output Window is displayed.
7. Select the Automatically Close Upon Completion option.
Refer to Specifying Additional hsBAR Options on page 419 to specify additional
options for the hsBAR command.
After the HsBAR Output Window closes, monitor the progress in the Progress
Status area of the IM Historian Backup/Restore Utility window and click
Finish when the backup is complete. The Browser dialog is used
If a message appears stating that there are inconsistencies between the log config-
urations in the Aspect System and the log configurations in Oracle, it may be
because the database was not cleaned before running the backup. Use the hsDB-
Maint -clean function to clean the database and then rerun the backup. If this does
not fix the problem, contact ABB Technical Support for further assistance.
3BUF001092-510 401
Figure 290. Backup/Restore Utility - Backup Option Selected
Figure 291. Setting Up the Backup Operation
402 3BUF001092-510
8. The HsBAR Output window may be opened over and hide the progress status
window. There is a check box for specifying that the HsBAR window be closed
automatically when finished, Figure 292. This is recommended. When the
window is not closed automatically, wait for the Close button to be activated on
the bottom of the output window, then click the Close button.
Check to close Or wait for Close button to go active

window automatically
Figure 292. Closing HsBAR Output Window
9. Start all PAS services.
3BUF001092-510 403
Saving Other Information Management Related Files

There are several other files related to Information Management that need saved as
part of total system backup.
More detailed instructions for this procedure can be found in the section on
backing up individual Information Manager applications in the appropriate
Information Management instruction.
• History Archive Data: For each archive device, go to the location specified by
the Device Filename and copy the folders under that directory to a safe
location. Do this even if automatic backup is configured. If automatic backups
are for local disks, also transfer them to a safe media at this time. Archive state
information must be saved. The Archive folder from the following path must be
saved to a safe location:
C:\ProgramData\ABB\IM\
• Reports: Save any report template files created in Microsoft Excel,
DataDirect, and/or Crystal Reports. Also save report output files created as a
result of running these reports via the Scheduling Services.
• Desktop Trends: Back up trend display, ticker display, and tag explorer files.
• Display Services: Back up the directories for custom users, as well as display
and user element definitions.
• DataDirect: Back up custom text files for object, object type, and attribute
menus used on the DataDirect windows.
All files should be copied to a remote storage medium after the saving is completed.
Use PAS to start all Information Management processes and the Inform IT History
service provider for this node.
The procedure can be performed by using the pasgui command in the Run dialog
box (Start > Run).
a. Use the Windows Taskbar to select:
Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > PAS > Process
Administration
b. Click Start All in the PAS dialog box. This will start the Inform IT
History Service Provider.
404 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Restoring the History Database from Backup Files
Non-Information Management Server nodes.

Any nodes that are installed and are configured to use Desktop Trends, Data Direct,
Application Scheduler (reporting) should backup any application specific files after
backup process is completed on the node. The backup files include:
• Reports: Save any report template files created in Microsoft Excel,
DataDirect, and/or Crystal Reports. Also save report output files created as a
result of running these reports via the Scheduling Services.
• Desktop Trends: Back up trend display, ticker display, and tag explorer files.
• DataDirect: Back up custom text files for object, object type, and attribute
menus used on the DataDirect windows.
Restoring the History Database from Backup Files

This recreates the Information Management History database from backup files
created with this utility (Backing Up the History Database on page 398). If the
backup was created from an earlier History database version, the restore will convert
the restored database to the current version. For an overview, refer to How Restore
Works on page 405. To perform a restore, refer to Restoring a History Database on
page 406.
How Restore Works

During the restore, the existing database is dropped, and a new one is created.
Mount points and additional table spaces are created based on the database being
restored. Oracle data is imported, and the file-based property logs are copied back
into the system. Unless a different mount point is specified, the History database
will be restored to its original location (its location prior to being backed up).
The History database can be restored from any drive, including any mapped network
drives. The restore utility will first search a specified location for zipped archives
matching a specific name and fitting the form name-drive.zip (such as histDB-
C.zip, histDB-A.zip, and histDB-D.zip), and will then restore the
compressed database files contained within the archives to their respective original
locations (their locations prior to being backed up).
3BUF001092-510 405
Restoring the History Database from Backup Files Section 13 History Database Maintenance
For any object in the original database that had more than one Log Configuration
aspect, the contents of those aspects will be merged into one Log Configuration
aspect per object.
Be sure to follow the preparatory steps (1-4) in Restoring a History Database on

page 406 before beginning the actual restore operation.
Restoring a History Database

Complete these preparatory steps before beginning the restore operation:
If Log Configuration aspects are imported via the 800xA System import/export
utility prior to this restore, those Log Configuration aspects and corresponding
log templates must be deleted.
1. Stop all PAS processes. Refer to Starting and Stopping History on page 424.
2. Make sure no third-party applications are accessing the Oracle database.
3. Stop the Inform IT History Service Provider. To do this (reference Figure 293):
a. Go to the Service structure in the Plant Explorer and select the
Inform IT History Service Provider.
b. Select the Service Provider Definition aspect.
c. Click the Configuration tab.
d. Uncheck the Enabled check box then click Apply.
406 3BUF001092-510
Figure 293. Stopping the Inform IT History Service Provider
When finished with the aforementioned preparatory steps, run the restore utility as
described below:
1. Start the Backup/Restore utility. When the Backup/restore utility is started, the
Create Backup option is selected by default.
2. Click the Restore configuration from backup files option, Figure 294.
3BUF001092-510 407
Figure 294. Starting a Restore Operation
3. Click Next. This displays a dialog for setting up the restore operation,
Figure 295.
4. Specify the location of the backup files from which the History database will
be recreated. Enter the path directly in the Path of IM historian backup field, or
use the corresponding Browse button. Figure 291 shows the Browser dialog
being used to browse to C:\Backup\T3.
– As an option specify a new mount point path for file-based logs. Use the
corresponding Browse button and refer to Mount Point on page 422 for
further guidelines.
– Also, specify that a different Oracle tablespace definition file be used.
This may be required when restoring the files to a machine that has a
different data drive layout than the original backup machine. Use the
corresponding Browse button and refer to Moving hsBAR Files to a
Different Data Drive Configuration on page 423 for further guidelines.
– Also, specify additional hsBAR options. These options are described in
Specifying Additional hsBAR Options on page 419.
408 3BUF001092-510
Figure 295. Setting Up the Restore Operation
5. Click Next when finished with this dialog. This opens the progress status
window and the HsBAR Output Window.
If the restore operation fails with Oracle Error Message 1652 - Unable to extend
tmp segment in tablespace tmp - it may be due to a large OPC message log which
exceeds the tmp tablespace capacity during the restore operation.
Use the Database Instance Maintenance wizard to increase the tmp tablespace.
The default size is 300 megabytes. Increase the tablespace in 300-megabyte
increments and retry the restore operation until it runs successfully. Refer to
Maintaining the Oracle Instance on page 135.
6. The HsBAR Output window may be opened over and hide the progress status
window. There is a check box for specifying that the HsBAR window be closed
automatically when finished, Figure 296. This is recommended. If the window
is not closed automatically, then wait for the Continue button to appear on the
bottom of the output window, then click the Continue button when ready.
3BUF001092-510 409
Check to close Or wait for Continue

window automatically button to appear
Figure 296. HsBAR Output Window
7. After the HsBAR window is closed, monitor the Progress in the Progress Status
window, Figure 297. Ignore the error messages that indicate error deleting
aspect.
410 3BUF001092-510
Figure 297. Progress Status Window
8. Click Finish when the Click to Exit the Application message is

displayed.
9. Start all processes under PAS supervision. For further details, refer to Starting
and Stopping History on page 424.
10. Start the Inform IT History Service Provider. To do this (reference Figure 293):
a. Go to the Service structure in the Plant Explorer and select the
Inform IT History Service Provider.
b. Select the Service Provider Definition aspect.
3BUF001092-510 411
Synchronizing the Aspect Directory with the History Database Section 13 History Database
c. Click the Configuration tab.

d. Check the Enabled check box then click Apply.
Figure 298. Restarting Basic History
This completes all steps required to restore a history database.
Synchronizing the Aspect Directory with the History Database

This procedure makes sure that the Information Management History database is at
the current version, and that the Aspect System matches the current history database
configuration.
To use this utility, click Update IM Historian/Aspect System Configuration, and
then check one or more of the applicable options, Figure 299.
412 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Synchronizing the Aspect Directory with the History
SELECT THIS OPTION ONLY FOR FAILED

UPGRADES. IT STARTS THE CONVERSION
PROGRAM WHICH WILL EXIT IF THE
CURRENT VERSION OF THE SOFTWARE IS
LOADED. DO NOT SELECT THIS OPTION ON
A RUNNING SYSTEM.
SELECT THIS OPTION TO REBUILD THE
NODE ADMINISTRATION STRUCTURE IF IT
IS ACCIDENTALLY DELETED.
SELECT THIS OPTION TO REBUILD ALL LOG

TEMPLATES AND LOG CONFIGURATIONS IN
THE SYSTEM IF THE SYSTEM WAS LOST, A
VALID IM BACKUP EXISTS, AND THERE IS A
DESIRE TO RESTORE THAT IM BACKUP TO
VIEW ITS DATA.
Figure 299. Synchronizing the Aspect Directory with the History Database
An example Synchronization operation is demonstrated in the following steps:

1. Click Next to start the Synchronizer which makes sure that the Information
Management History database is at the current version, and that the Aspect
System matches the current history database configuration.
The synchronizer automatically accesses the applicable aspect system
definition file which was created during the backup, Figure 300.
3BUF001092-510 413
Figure 300. Synchronizer - Step 1
2. Click Next to continue. This displays a dialog for mapping controller object
locations, Figure 301. It is NOT necessary to make any entries in this dialog
unless the locations have changed since the backup was made.
3. Enter the mapping specifications if necessary (typically NOT REQUIRED),
then click Next to continue. This displays the Progress Status, Figure 302.
414 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Synchronizing the Aspect Directory with the History
Figure 301. Location mapping Dialog
Figure 302. Synchronization Progress Status
3BUF001092-510 415
4. Click Next when ready.

5. Use the dialog in Figure 303 to make sure the imported Service Groups are
properly mapped to the Service Groups that currently exist in the Aspect
Directory. On rare occasions there may be a problem if Service Group
configurations in the Aspect Directory have changed.
a. To check, click on a group in the Imported Service Groups list. If the
Service Providers in the Imported and Current Service Providers lists
below match, then the Service Groups are properly mapped.
If the imported Service Groups do not match the current Service Groups,
or if adjustments need to be made for some other reason, refer to
Adjusting Service Group Mapping on page 417.
b. When satisfied that the imported and current Service Groups are properly
matched, click Next to continue. This displays another Progress Status,
Figure 304.
Figure 303. Checking Service Groups
6. Click Next when ready to leave Progress Status.
416 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Adjusting Service Group Mapping
Figure 304. Progress Status
7. When the execution complete message is displayed, Figure 305, click Finish.
Figure 305. Finish Synchronization
Adjusting Service Group Mapping

During the restore or synchronization of a History database configuration, the
Service Group definitions in the configuration being restored or synchronized are
matched to their corresponding Service Groups in the Aspect Directory. The Service
Group mapping dialog, Figure 306, is displayed to verify that all Service Groups are
properly matched, and correct any mapping error that may occur. The dialog may
3BUF001092-510 417
Adjusting Service Group Mapping Section 13 History Database Maintenance
also be used to make adjustments. For instance, to merge two restored Service
Group configurations into one Available Service Group.
Figure 306. Adjusting Service Group Mapping
In this dialog, Service Group definitions being restored or synchronized are called
Imported Service Groups. The actual Service Groups which are available in the
Aspect Directory are called Current or Available Service Groups. The
backup/restore utility automatically maps Imported Service Groups to an Available
Service Group by matching the host name for each Imported Service Group with the
host name for an Available Service Group. (The host name is specified in the
Service Group’s Service Provider configuration.)
If Service Group configurations in the Aspect Directory have changed since the
creation of the History database configuration now being restored or synchronized,
some Imported Service Groups may not be mapped to any Available Service Group.
This condition is illustrated in Figure 306 where the Current Service Group column
for Imported Service Group eng38 is blank. If this occurs, use the dialog manually
to map the Imported Service Group to an Available Service Group.
418 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Specifying Additional hsBAR Options
To do this:
1. From the Imported Service Groups list (top left pane), select the Imported
Service Group whose mapping is to be changed.
When this is done, the host names for the imported and currently mapped
Service Providers for the selected Imported Service Group are indicated in the
respective Service Provider lists (bottom right panes).
2. From the Available Service Groups list (top right pane), select the current
Service Group to be mapped to the selected imported Service Group. When
this is done, the host name for the Service Provider for the selected Available
Service Group is indicated in the Current Service Providers list (bottom left
pane). This helps when matching the host name for the Imported Service
Group with the host name for the Available Service Group.
3. When satisfied that the appropriate Available Service Group was selected, click
the left (<<) arrow button. This puts the name of the selected Available Service
Group in the Current Group column for the Imported Service Group.
4. Check the host names for the Imported and Current mapped Service Providers
in the respective Service Provider lists (bottom right panes) to verify that the
Imported and Available Service Groups were mapped as intended.
5. Repeat this procedure to map additional Imported Service Groups to the same
Available Service Group if needed.
To change the Current Service Group for an Imported Service Group, first unmap
the Current Service Group. To do this, select the Imported Service Group, then click
the right (>>) arrow button. This removes the name of the currently mapped Service
Group. At this point the Imported Service Group is not mapped to any Available
Service Group. Repeat the above procedure starting at step 2 to do this.
Specifying Additional hsBAR Options

By default the backup operation runs hsBAR with the -m b option (b specifies
backup). Other options may be specified. A list of available options is provided
below:
-h < storage location on hard drive > specifies the location to which the History
database is to be backed up to or restored from. Refer to Storage on page 421.
3BUF001092-510 419
Running hsBAR Section 13 History Database Maintenance
-c < compression level > is used to specify the compression ratio to use for backing
up the History database. Refer to Compression Level / Ratio on page 421.
-f < log file name > is used to specify the file to use for storing program output
during a backup or restore procedure. Refer to Log File on page 422.
-o indicates flat files are to be excluded when backing up the History database on
the hard drive. Refer to Excluding Flat Files on Backup on page 424.
-a is used to specify an alternate location for the temporary and oracle DB export
files used during history database backup. Default directory for these files is
C:\HsData\History\
-k This option can be used when restoring oracle-only database backup to skip
the creation of empty datafiles. If backup was performed with the datafiles, -k is
ignored
-b instructs hsBAR to extract oracle data info file and put it in the specified
directory. Therefore this option can only be used on existing database backup files
and -mr has to be specified.
-e Used on restore only. This option tells hsBAR to ignore the Oracle data info
file found in backup and use the one specified instead. This includes table
information stored in stats. file (as in prior 2.5 versions of History). The stats
information from the specified Oracle data info file will be used instead.
Running hsBAR
As an option, use hsBAR from a command line. This backup procedure stores the
files that hold file-based logs, and Oracle tables that hold configuration data and any
logs that are Oracle-based (message logs and asynchronous property logs).The
hsBAR executable resides in %ABB_ROOT%History\bin and is run from the
command line. (The default path for %ABB_ROOT% is c:\Program Files\ABB
Industrial IT\).
Run hsBAR using the following command:
“%HS_HOME%\bin\hsBAR” <options>
The syntax for hsBAR is as follows:
“%HS_HOME%\bin\hsBAR” -m b|r -h source/destination
[ -c compression level ] [ -f log file name ]
[ -p [ -n new mount point directory ] ] [ -o ]
420 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance hsBAR Explanations and Examples
Due to a limitation in the ORACLE import facility, paths specified for hsBAR
cannot contain spaces in the directory or file names. This includes the
environment variable, %HS_DATA%
hsBAR Explanations and Examples
Operation Mode
In order for the hsBAR program to execute, the operation mode must be specified by
entering the -m option, followed by either:
-b (back up the current History database) or
-r (restore a previously backed up History database)
Storage
In addition to specifying the mode (through the -m option), in order for the hsBAR
program to execute, a storage location must also be specified. On an hsBAR backup
operation, the -h option must be used to specify the destination to which the
History database is to be backed up. On an hsBAR restore operation, the -h option
must be used to specify the source from which the History database is to be restored.
The drive, directory path, and file name must all be specified to use as the backup
destination or restore source location, as no default is provided:
For backup “%HS_HOME%\bin\hsBAR” -m b -h C:\Temp\history
For Restore “%HS_HOME%\bin\hsBAR” -m r -h C:\Temp\history
In the above example, the backup operation will produce in the C:\Temp directory
one or more zipped archives (depending on the number of directories containing
History database-related files) of the form history-drive.zip (such as history-C.zip or
history-D.zip, depending on the drive containing the database files). The restore
operation in the above example will search in the C:\Temp directory for zipped
archives matching the format history-drive.zip, and will then attempt to restore the
files contained within the found archives.
Compression Level / Ratio

The -c option is used to specify the intensity level with which to compress the
History database files during a backup procedure. This option must be followed by
3BUF001092-510 421
hsBAR Explanations and Examples Section 13 History Database Maintenance
an integer value ranging from 1 (very low compression) to 9 (very high

compression). Using a lower compression ratio results in a relatively quick backup
of the History database, but more hard disk space is required for storage. If a higher
compression ratio is used, less hard disk space is needed for storing the backed up
database, but the backup operation runs slower. If this option is not provided, a
default compression level of 6 will be used for the backup operation:
“%HS_HOME%\bin\hsBAR” -m b -h C:\Temp\history -c 8
Log File
All progress messages and errors related to hsBAR are printed to a log file. The
default log file for a backup operation is %HS_LOG%historyBackup.log,
while the default log file for a restore operation is
%HS_LOG%historyRestore.log. The hsBAR program, however, can write
messages to an alternate log file specified by entering the -f option, followed by
the full directory path and log file name:
For backup “%HS_HOME%\bin\hsBAR” -m b -h C:\Temp\history -f
C:\Temp\backup.log
For restore “%HS_HOME%\bin\hsBAR” -m r -h C:\Temp\history -f
C:\Temp\restore.log
Mount Point
The mount point specifies the location to which the History database is to be
restored on an hsBAR restore operation. The -p option is used to restore flat files
(file-based logs) to the mount point itself, and not necessarily to a location that is
relative to the root. If this option is omitted, all flat files will be restored relative to
the root, and not relative to the mount point itself. The -n option may be used in
conjunction with the -p option. This is used to specify a new mount point. If the -p
option is used alone (without the -n option), the default mount point for the History
database C:\HsData\History (%HS_DATA%) will be used. If the -p and -n
options are used together, the old History database will be deleted from its original
location and restored to the new specified mount point. This option is especially
useful in that it can take a History database that was backed up on several different
drives and restore it all to a centralized location on one drive:
“%HS_HOME%\bin\hsBAR” -m r -h C:\Temp\history -p -n C:\Temp
422 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance hsBAR Explanations and Examples
Moving hsBAR Files to a Different Data Drive Configuration

There are two cases to consider when moving haBAR Files to a data drive with a
different configuration:
Backup was Made on Information Management 4.n or Earlier. The -b and -e

options are used to move hsBAR files to a machine that has a different data drive
layout than the machine where the hsBAR backup was created. For example, if the
source machine has Oracle data files on drives C,D,E&F, and the files are being
restored to a machine with drives C,E,F&G, the restore will fail when hsBAR
attempts to restore files to the D drive.
In order for this restore to succeed, the files that were originally located on the D
drive must be restored to the G drive on the new machine. To do this:
1. Run hsBAR with the following options to extract the datafiles_config
information:
hsBAR -mr -h c:\myDB -b C:\\
where myDB is the file name that was entered when the backup was made and
-b is the location to extract the datafiles_config file to.
2. Edit the datafiles_config file. An example is shown in Figure 307.
Edit Drive Specification

In this example, change
three instance of
D to G
Figure 307. Editing the datafiles_config File
3. Run hsBAR with the following options to use the modified datafiles_config
file:
3BUF001092-510 423
Starting and Stopping History Section 13 History Database Maintenance
hsBAR -mr -h c:\myDB-C.zip -e C:\datafiles_config

After editing the datafiles_config file, a file an extension is added (for example
datafiles_config.txt), that extension must be included in the specification for the -
e option in hsBAR.
Excluding Flat Files on Backup

By default, the flat files associated with any property logs are stored during a
backup of the History database. The -o option is used to exclude these flat files
from the backup procedure. In cases where the History database contains many log
files, this option may allow for a significantly faster backup operation, but only the
Oracle database files are backed up:
“%HS_HOME%\bin\hsBAR” -m b -h C:\Temp\history -o
Viewing the Contents of the Zipped Archive

The hsUnzip utility can be used to produce a listing of the files that were
compressed into a zipped archive during a backup of the History database:
“%HS_HOME%\bin\hsUnzip” -v C:\Temp\history-C.zip
Getting Help with hsBAR

When the hsBAR utility is run with missing or invalid arguments, a brief but
informative message gets displayed. Though technically for error handing purposes,
the message contains information explaining the correct usage of the hsBAR
program, along with a brief description of the utility's options. The simplest way to
view this message is by trying to run the hsBAR utility with no arguments:
“%HS_HOME%\bin\hsBAR”
Starting and Stopping History

Certain procedures require History to be stopped and then restarted. The
recommended method for stopping and restarting History is to stop and start all
ABB processes under Process Administration Services. To do this:
424 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Schedule History Backups
1. From the Windows task bar, choose Start>Settings>Control Panel>

Administrative Tools>PAS>Process Administration. This displays the main
PAS window, Figure 308.
Figure 308. PAS Main Window
2. To stop all processes under PAS supervision, click Stop All. PAS is still active
when all processes are stopped. Click Start All to start all processes. The
Restart All button stops and then restarts all processes.
3. Click Close to exit PAS when finished.
Schedule History Backups

Use the Report Action of the Action Aspect to schedule a History backup (the
scheduler always runs as an admin user).
• Creating multiple history backups in this manner will consume a significant
amount of disk space. Ensure the disk where the backup files will be stored
has sufficient storage capacity.
• Also, keep in mind that a new backup will be created each time the report
action runs. Configure the scheduling definition aspect accordingly. Create a
schedule with a reasonable interval between executions.
3BUF001092-510 425
Starting and Stopping Data Collection Section 13 History Database Maintenance
– Use the Report Template Path to browse to and enter hsBackupApp.exe

(typically C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\History\bin).
– Select Output Options: Report Parameters and Execute File.
– Use /CreateBackup <backup path> as parameters to hsBackupApp by
using the Edit Parameter List button. The hsBackupApp will accept
command line arguments from the parameter list. Be sure to create a
folder where the scheduled history backup files will be stored. For
example, the result shown in the Edit Parameter List could be:
path = /CreateBackup \d:\SchedHistBackups
Starting and Stopping Data Collection

Data collection is started and stopped by activating or deactivating logs. There are
three basic methods:
• These two methods are applicable for history logs, but not for operator trend
logs:
– The Log List aspect is used to activate/deactivate logs on a list basis. Refer
to Viewing Log Runtime Status and Configuration on page 429.
– Log sets are used to activate and deactivate logs on a log set basis. Refer to
Activate/Deactivate Logs in a Log Set on page 143.
• Individual logs (both history and trend) can be activated via the Activate and
Deactivate menu items in the applicable configuration window. This is also
applicable for message logs.
– For property logs, refer to Activating/Deactivating a Property Log on page
260.
Activating/Deactivating a Property Log

Activate/deactivate all the logs in a property log as a unit, or activate/deactivate
individual logs within the hierarchy. Or, activate/deactivate logs on a log set basis.
When a log is activated, it may be activated immediately, or activation may be
delayed, depending upon how the log’s Start Time attribute is defined. Start Time
426 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Activating/Deactivating a Property Log
determines the earliest allowable time that the log can be activated. Start time also
determines the hour, minute, and second when the first sample is collected.
To activate a property log as a unit:
1. Go to the structure where the logged object resides and click the Log
Configuration aspect.
2. Use the Enabled check box to activate (checked) or deactivate (unchecked) all
logs in the property log, Figure 309.
Figure 309. Activating/Deactivating a Property Log
To activate an individual log within a property log, select the log in the hierarchy,
click the IM Definition tab, and then click Activate under the IM Historian Log
State control, Figure 310.
To activate or deactivate property logs on a log set basis, refer to Activating Logs
with Log Sets on page 428.
3BUF001092-510 427
Activating Logs with Log Sets Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Figure 310. Activating an Individual Log in the Property Log Hierarchy
Activating Logs with Log Sets

This section describes how to activate and deactivate logs on a log set basis.
Activating or deactivating a log set affects all of the logs belonging to that log set.
Log sets are configured as described in Section 6, Configuring Log Sets.
This procedure is performed via the log set aspect for the log set whose logs is to be
activated or deactivated. These aspects are generally located in the Node
Administration structure (reference Figure 311):
2. Expand the object tree for the node where the log set is to be deleted.
History_nodeName Service Provider > InformIT History Object>Log Sets.
4. Select the Log Set aspect.
5. Click Mode and choose Activate or Deactivate.
428 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Viewing Log Runtime Status and Configuration
Log Set
Aspect
Aspect View
Selected
Log Set
Click Mode to display
Activate/Deactivate menu
Figure 311. Accessing the Configuration View for the Log Set Aspect
Viewing Log Runtime Status and Configuration

The Log List aspect supports viewing of runtime status for property, message, and
report logs. To access this view (reference Figure 312):
1. Select the Node Administration structure in the Plant Explorer.
2. Select the History service provider for the node where history is being
configured (InformIT History_BasicYourService Provider).
3. From the History service provider, navigate to and select the InformIT
History Object.
4. Select the Inform IT History Log List aspect.
3BUF001092-510 429
Viewing Log Runtime Status and Configuration Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Figure 312. Accessing the Configuration View for the Log List Aspect
Click Update Log Lists to display the log list (Figure 313). This list provides both
system-level and log-level information. The System Information section indicates
the total number of logs configured for the applicable Service Group. It also
indicates the number of logs whose state is Active, Inactive, or Pending.
The log-level information is displayed as columns in the log list. Select columns to
show or hide. Also, specify a filter to show a specific class of the logs. The list can
be filtered based on log state, log type, log name, archive group, and log set. These
procedures are described in Filtering the Log List and Visible Columns on page 431.
The context menu is used to activate or deactivate logs in the list. This is described
in Activating/Deactivating Logs on page 433.
Double-clicking on a specific Log Information row, the Log Configuration aspect
containing the log will open as an overlap window.
430 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Filtering the Log List and Visible Columns
System
Information
Log
Information
Figure 313. Log List Example
Filtering the Log List and Visible Columns

Click Filter to display the Filter dialog, Figure 314. Then use the Log Filter and
Visible Columns sections to specify the filter. Click Apply to apply the filter, and
then click Update Log List.
Figure 314. Filter Logs Dialog
3BUF001092-510 431
Filtering the Log List and Visible Columns Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Showing/Hiding Columns
To show/hide specific columns simply check to show or uncheck to hide the
corresponding column.
Filtering the Log List

For further information regarding the log filtering criteria, refer to Table 38. An
example is provided below.
Table 38. Log Filter Criteria
Field Description
Log State This is used to show all logs regardless of their state, or show just Active, Inactive,
or Pending logs.
Log Type This is used to select any combination of these log types: Numeric (property),
Message, Report. Profile logs are applicable if Profiles is installed.
Log Name Include logs whose name fits the specified text string. * is a wild card text string. By
itself * indicates all logs.
Archive Include logs assigned to an archive group whose name fits the text string specified
Group this field. * is a wild card text string. By itself * indicates all archive groups.
Log Set Include logs assigned to a log set whose name fits the text string specified this field.
* is a wild card text string. By itself * indicates all log sets.
Filter Example
The following example show how to apply a filter. In this case the filter is based on
log name. The filter will reduce the list to only those logs whose name includes the
text string *30s* Figure 314. The filter result is shown in Figure 315.
432 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Activating/Deactivating Logs
Figure 315. Example Filter
Activating/Deactivating Logs
Activate and deactivate individual logs, a subset of displayed logs, or the entire log
list. To do this select the logs to be activated or deactivated, and then right-click and
choose the applicable menu item from the context menu, Figure 316.
Figure 316. Activating/Deactivating Logs
3BUF001092-510 433
Presentation and Status Functions Section 13 History Database Maintenance
After executing an Activate All or Deactivate All from the Inform IT History Log
List, the State does not get updated. Use the Update Log Lists button to refresh
the list.
Presentation and Status Functions

The log configuration aspect provides two tabs which are not available on the log
template view. These are:
• Presentation for formatting history presentation for 800xA operator trends.
• Status for viewing log data directly from the log configuration aspect.
Other sources of status information are the Property Log Tab, and Status Light.
Presentation
This tab, Figure 317, is used to configure presentation attributes for the 800xA
operator trend display.
The default settings for these attributes are set in one of the following ways:
• Object Type (i.e. in the Property Aspect).
• Object Instance (i.e in the Property Aspect).
• Log (in the Log Configuration Aspect).
• Trend Display.
These are listed are in order from lowest to highest precedence.
434 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Presentation
Figure 317. Presentation Tab
For example, override a value set in the Object Type by writing a value in the Object
Instance. A value set in the Object Type, Object Instance, or the Log can be
overridden in the Trend Display.
To override a presentation attribute the check box for the attribute must be marked.
If the check box is unmarked the default value is displayed. The default value can be
a property name or a value, depending on what is specified in the Control
Connection Aspect.
Engineering Units are inherited from the source. It is possible to override it. Normal
Maximum and Normal Minimum are scaling factors, used for the scaling of Y-axis
in the Trend Display. The values are retrieved from the source but are possible to
override.
The Number of Decimals are retrieved from the source but are possible to override.
The Display Mode can be either Interpolated or Stepped. Interpolated is
appropriate for real values, Stepped is for binary.
Click Apply to put the changes into effect.
3BUF001092-510 435
Status Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Status
This tab is used to retrieve and view data for a selected log, Figure 318. As an
option, use the Display and Settings buttons to set viewing options. Refer to:
• Data Retrieval Settings on page 436.
• Display Options on page 437.
Click Read to retrieve the log data. The arrow buttons go to the next or previous
page. Page size is configurable via the Data Retrieval Settings. The default is 1000
points per page.
Figure 318. Status Tab
Data Retrieval Settings

The Settings button displays the Data Retrieval Setting dialog which is used to
change the time frame and the number of data points to be retrieved, Figure 319.
436 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Status
Figure 319. Data Retrieval Settings
Set the number of points per page in the Page Size area. Default is 1000 and
maximum is 10,000.
Set the time range for retrieval of data in the Time Frame area.
• Latest retrieves one page worth of the most recent entries.
• Oldest retrieves one page worth of the oldest entries.
• At time is used to specify the time interval for which entries will be retrieved.
The data is retrieved from the time before the specified date and time.
Display Options
The Display button displays the Display Options dialog which is used to change the
presentation parameters data and time stamp, Figure 320.
Values are displayed as text by default. Unchecking the check box in the Quality
area, displays the values as hexadecimals.
Timestamps are displayed in local time by default. Unchecking the first check box
in the Time & Date area, changes the timestamps to UTC time.
Timestamps are displayed in millisecond resolution by default. Unchecking the
second check box in the Time & Date area changes the timestamp resolution to one
second.
3BUF001092-510 437
Property Log Tab Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Figure 320. Display Options Dialog
Property Log Tab

The Property Log tab, Figure 321, displays log information. This tab is displayed by
clicking the Log Configuration Template placeholder in the Log Configuration
hierarchy.
The Data Size is the size of the Property Log on disk. It is the sum of the size of all
logs. The size of each log file is the sum of the file header and the data storage size.
438 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Status Light
Figure 321. Property Log Tab
Status Light
The Service Status row shows status information for the configured Service Group.
The name of the configured group is presented in the row. If no history sources have
been defined (refer to Configuring Node Assignments for Property Logs on page
181, the text ‘Not Specified’ is displayed. Status for configured Service Group may
be:
• OK: All providers in the service group are up and running.
• OK/ERROR: At least one service provider is up and running.
• ERROR: All providers in the service group are down.
3BUF001092-510 439
History Control Aspect Section 13 History Database Maintenance
History Control Aspect

The History Control aspect provides status and network information for the History
Service Provider for a selected node in the Node Administration structure.
1. Select the Inform IT History Object under the applicable node in the Node
2. Select the Inform IT History Control aspect, Figure 322.
History
Control
Aspect
History
Control
Aspect View
Selected
Node’s
History
Object
Figure 322. Accessing the Configuration View for the History Admin Aspect
Use the View selection to get information on: Hard Drive Usage, Database Usage,
and History Logs for a particular node. The configuration view allows selection of
History nodes from an available list. Additionally, the tree view has selections for
OMF Network Status, PAS Control, and User Tag Management status.
PAS Control
Refer to Starting and Stopping History on page 424.
Synchronization
For object and log name synchronization, use the Resynchronize Names button. To
force sysncronization of every object on the selected node with the Aspect Server,
use the Force Synchronization button. The Check Names button produces a report
of the object names, log names, and object locations in the aspect directory that are
440 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance User Tag Management Status
different or not in the Oracle database. The Check Synchronization button

produces a report of all the items in the aspect directory that are different or are not
in the Oracle database.
User Tag Management Status

User Tag Management is described in System 800xA Information Management Data
Access and Reports (3BUF001094*).
OMF Network Status

The detailed view of the OMF Network Status for History Manager data is shown in
Figure 323 and is described in Table 39.
Figure 323. History Managers List

Table 39. History Manager Data and Related Information
Field Description
History Managers The History Managers field indicates the node name for the local History
Manager and any available remote History Managers.
Status A History Manager’s status is set by the system:
• ACTIVE - History Manager is ready to receive data.
• INACTIVE - History is on the node, but is not running.
Version This indicates the version of the History software for the corresponding
History Manager. When working with a remote History Manager via the
local History Manager, both must use the same version of History software.
3BUF001092-510 441
Database Maintenance Functions Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Table 39. History Manager Data and Related Information
Network This field indicates:

• DCN address for nodes in systems with MOD 300 software.
• MasterNet address for nodes in systems with Master software.
• TCP/IP for nodes that are not connected to OCS control network via an
RTA board.
TCP/IP This field indicates the IP address, for example: 222.111.99.66
Boot Time This field indicates the time that the node started.
Database Maintenance Functions

History Services provides several utilities for maintaining the history database. This
includes functions for changing tablespace capacity for Oracle tablespaces,
changing file storage capacity for file-based logs (TYPE1-TYPE5), and staggering
data collection for numeric logs, as well as other various maintenance functions.
Most of these functions may be performed with History running. Some functions
require that History be stopped. There are three methods for using these utilities. A
brief overview of each is provided below.
• The Instance Maintenance Wizard provides utilities for extending Oracle
tablespaces and for managing files for file-based logs using a graphical user
interface. How to access the utilities via the wizard is described in Maintaining
the Oracle Instance on page 135. In addition, the wizard can be run using
hsDBMaint -instance.
• The hsDBMaint menu provides access to the utilities for extending Oracle
tablespaces and for managing files for file-based logs, as well as other utilities
not supported by the Instance Maintenance Wizard. Guidelines for launching
and using this menu are provided in Using the hsDBMaint Menu on page 443.
• Some database maintenance functions can be performed using the command
line (DOS Command Prompt). Instructions are provided when applicable.
442 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Using the hsDBMaint Menu
Using the hsDBMaint Menu

The hsDBMaint menu is started by invoking the hsDBMaint command which
resides in the %HS_HOME%\bin directory. Invoke the hsDBMaint command from
the DOS command prompt:
c:> “%HS_HOME%\bin\hsDBMaint.exe”
The list of available functions depends on whether the menu is invoked while
History is online or offline. The online and offline menus are described in
• Online Database Maintenance Functions on page 443.
• Offline Database Maintenance Functions on page 445.
Online Database Maintenance Functions

If the hsDBMaint menu is launched without stopping History, the online
hsDBMaint menu is displayed, Figure 324. These functions are described in
Table 40. To invoke a function, enter the corresponding number, and then press
ENTER. For example, for a Database Free Space Report, enter 1. Then follow the
instructions as indicated in Table 40. To exit hsDBMaint, choose Exit (0).
Figure 324. Database Maintenance Menu when History is Running
3BUF001092-510 443
Using the hsDBMaint Menu Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Table 40. Online Database Maintenance Functions
Refer to When to Use

Database Free Space Report on page 446. Generate a report on free space in Oracle
tablespaces on the History disk.
Entry Tables Report on page 448. Create a list of all property logs, their capacity,
and other statistics.
Update Deadband Ratio Online on page 450. Update deadband ratio and estimated log time
period for logs that use deadband.
Extend a Tablespace: Extend Tablespace for If a greater storage capacity is required than
Oracle-based History Files on page 451 or provided by default Oracle tablespace sizes.
Extending Temporary Tablespace on page If the user gets a message indicating that there
453. is not sufficient temporary tablespace to
complete a certain task.
Add/Alter/Delete/List NumericLog Directories, Configure directories for file-based storage.
refer to Directory Maintenance for File-based
Logs on page 454.
Reset Object Status States on page 457. Determine whether the collection function will
update the trend presentation attributes, or
whether user-entered values will be used - Not
applicable for OPC-type logs.
Cascade Attributes for Composite Logs on This is required for logs where presentation,
page 458. engineering units, and alarm attribute values
have been entered manually for the primary
log and must be propagated from the data
source to secondary logs.
Stagger Collection and Storage on page 459. Adjust data collection attributes for more even
distribution of CPU load.
PDL Maintenance Functions on page 465. Check the status of PDL configuration and
correct error if necessary.
Check OPC Message Log Configurations. Check tables, indexes, constraints for all OPC
Message logs or for a specific OPC Message
log.
444 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Using the hsDBMaint Menu
Table 40. Online Database Maintenance Functions (Continued)

Check History Database State. Checks state of logs (unused, empty, invalid
access, and so forth) that need to be deleted,
dropped or fixed.
Create/Drop User Indexes on page 465. Create and drop user indexes to improve
performance for SQL queries.
Export Files for Upgrade. Do not use. This is to support future upgrades
from 800xA 5.0.
Offline Database Maintenance Functions

Some database maintenance functions require History to be shut down. This is done
via the Process Administration tool as described in Starting and Stopping History on
page 424. If History is shut down before invoking the hsDBMaint command the
complete (offline) menu is displayed, Figure 325. The offline functions are
described in Table 41.
Figure 325. Database Maintenance Menu when History is offline
3BUF001092-510 445
Database Free Space Report Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Table 41. Offline Database Maintenance Functions

Create or Drop Oracle Create a new Oracle instance or drop (delete an existing instance).
Instance on page 467
Create or Drop a Product Create a new data base of type History or PDL, or to drop (delete an
Database on page 468 existing database).
Clean History Database Deletes dangling references from the database. In the case of the
on page 469 dangling log name, this means that the name can be used again.
Restore or Initialize Redefine missing tables for Oracle logs and missing files for file-
History Logs on page 469 based logs. Initialize all log tables and log file essentials, and erase
all runtime data.
Purge History Data on Clear History data erroneously collected in the future.
page 470
Database Free Space Report

The Free Space Report indicates how much space is available in the tablespaces. To
create a Free Space Report, choose Database Free Space Report from the
hsDBMaint menu. This displays the Free Space Report Menu, Figure 326.
Figure 326. Free Space Report Menu
Choose option 1 - Create free space report now. This creates the Free Space
Report. An example is shown in Figure 327.
446 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Database Free Space Report
Figure 327. Example, Free Space Report
Also, view a free space report on the Tablespace/Datafiles tab of the Instance
Maintenance wizard. Refer to Maintaining the Oracle Instance on page 135.
• OPC Message log uses INFORM_HS_RUNTIME and HS_INDEX
tablespaces.
• numeric logs use HS_CONFIG and HS_ICONFIG tablespaces.
• PDL application uses Adjust the HS_PDL and HS_IPDL tablespaces.
• Consolidation of OPC and PDL messages, and PDL data use the
INFORM_HS_RUNTIME and HS_INDEX tablespaces. If they run out of
space, OPC and PDL message consolidation will fail. If the HS_PDL and
HS_IPDL (index) tablespaces run out of space, PDL data consolidation will
fail.
3BUF001092-510 447
Entry Tables Report Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Entry Tables Report

This function generates a report of all property logs, their current capacity, and other
useful statistics. It also provides good information for troubleshooting numeric logs.
This report can be used to determine whether the problem is with history or another
application such as the base system, or data access application. Run this function
from the hsDBMaint menu, or from the DOS command prompt.
If this function is run via the hsDBMaint menu, then these report settings can be
modified before the report is run:
• log ID to process. Use to generate a report for all logs, just one log, or a range
of logs. The default is for ALL LOGS.
• change the line per page. The default is 24 lines per page.
If the above default settings are OK, it is best to run from the command line. This is
used to direct the output to a file. Use the hsDBMaint menu to change a default
setting.
This function may take a couple hours to complete for a large database, and
generates a high CPU load.
To use one of these methods refer to:

• Running Entry Tables Report from the Command Prompt.
• Running Entry Tables Report from the hsDBMaint Menu.
Running Entry Tables Report from the Command Prompt

This generates a report for all logs and directs the report output to a specified text
file. To run the report, from the DOS command prompt, enter:
c: > hsDBMaint -report > \tmp\filename.txt
where filename is the name of the file where the report output will be directed to.
or enter
hsDBMaint -report > report.txt 2> error.txt
This creates two text files in the location from which the report was ran.
448 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Entry Tables Report
The file is given a .txt extension for viewing in a text editor. The entry table provides
statistics to verify whether or not numeric logs are functioning properly. It can also
be used to look up the Log ID for a specific log name. Log IDs are used in SQL
queries against historical tables.
Rows marked with an asterisk (*) indicate logs with errors. A summary is provided
at the end of the report. This information is useful for level-4 (development)
support.
Running Entry Tables Report from the hsDBMaint Menu

To run this function from the menu, choose the Entry Tables Report option. This
displays the Entry Tables Report Menu, Figure 328.
Figure 328. Entry Tables Report Menu
This menu shows the current settings for log ID to process and lines per page. The
current settings can be changed before running the report.
If any of the settings need to be changed, choose the corresponding option from this
menu and follow the dialog. When finished with the dialog, the Entry Tables Report
menu is shown and the current settings will be changed according to the dialog.
When the settings are correct, at the menu prompt, choose the Create entry table
report now option. This generates the report in the Command Prompt window,
Figure 329. A short summary is provided at the end of the report, Figure 330.
Adjust the height and width of the Command Prompt window to display the
report properly.
3BUF001092-510 449
Update Deadband Ratio Online Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Figure 329. Sample Entry Tables Report
Figure 330. Report Summary
Update Deadband Ratio Online

Use this function to update deadband ratio and estimated log time period for logs
that use deadband. Disk space is allocated to logs according to their log capacity,
and not the amount of data actually stored. The log period can be adjusted on an
individual log basis to keep log capacity at a reasonable size for each log. For all
synchronous logs with or without data compaction, log capacity is calculated as
follows: log capacity = (log period/storage interval).
When compaction is used, the log period is effectively increased so the same
number of samples (as determined by the log capacity) are stored over a longer
period of time. Consider the following two cases. On a very unstable process, such
that every sample is stored and there is no data compaction, the effective log period
will be equal to the configured log period. On a perfectly stable process (maximum
data compaction, samples stored only at deadband storage interval), the effective log
period is extended according to the following formula:
effective log period = (deadband storage interval/storage interval) * configured log period
450 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Extend Tablespace for Oracle-based History Files
In most cases, since the amount of process variation will not be at either extreme,
the effective log period will fall somewhere in between the configured (minimum)
and maximum value. The effective log period calculated according to the above
formula is stored in the EST_LOG_TIME_PER attribute. This attribute is updated
periodically according to a schedule which repeats as often as every five days. If
necessary, use the History Utility to manually update this attribute.
EST_LOG_TIME_PER is used by the History Manager when it needs to determine
which log to retrieve data from (seamless retrieval). For instance, consider an
application with a composite log where the primary log stores data at 30 second
intervals over a one-day time period, and the secondary log stores data at one-hour
intervals over a one-week time period. The data compaction ratio is 5:1 which
extends the effective log period of the primary log to five days. If a request is made
to retrieve data that is three days old, the History Manager will know to get the data
from the primary log rather than the secondary log, even through the configured log
period of the primary log is only one day.
When EST_LOG_TIME_PER is updated, both internal History memory and the
History database are updated with the new values of EST_LOG_TIME_PER and
COMPACTION_RATIO. This will allow History Managers access to the
information and when the History node is restarted the information will also be
available.
To update deadband ratio and estimated log time period, choose Update Deadband
Ratio Online from the Main Menu. This will generate a prompt that asks whether
or not to continue. At the prompt, enter y (Yes) to continue, or n (No) to cancel and
exit out of the hsDBMaint menu.
For a large database, this function may take several hours to complete.
Extend Tablespace for Oracle-based History Files

Extend the tablespace in the system when greater storage capacity is required than is
provided by the default tablespace sizes. Use one of the following methods:
• Extending Oracle Tablespace Via Instance Maintenance Wizard.
• Extending Tablespace via the hsDBMaint Menu.
3BUF001092-510 451
Extend Tablespace for Oracle-based History Files Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Extending Tablespace via the hsDBMaint Menu

First, review the current settings in the Tablespace Extension menu, Figure 331. To
display this menu, choose Extend a Tablespace from the Main Menu.
Figure 331. Tablespace Extension Menu
If these settings are acceptable, simply select option 4 - Extend tablespace with
current settings. If one or more of these settings need to be changed, then follow
the applicable procedure below.
Specify the Tablespace to Extend
The default tablespace is INFORM_HS_RUNTIME. To extend a different
tablespace, select option 1 - Change tablespace to extend. This displays the Table
Spaces available for extension menu, Figure 332.
Figure 332. Table Spaces Available for Extension Menu
Enter the number corresponding to the tablespace to be extended (for example 3 for
HS_REPORTS). The Tablespace Extension menu is returned with the new
tablespace indicated for option 1.
Specify the Amount of Tablespace
The default amount is 50 Mb. To change this, select option 2 - Change size to
extend by. This displays a prompt to enter the size to extend table space by in Mb.
Enter the size as shown in Figure 333.
Figure 333. Entering New Tablespace Size
452 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Extending Temporary Tablespace
The Tablespace Extension menu is returned with the new value indicated for option
2.
Change the Directory
The default directory is c:\HsData\History\oracle. The oracle Instance
Wizard requires the default directories and will not work if the directories are
changed.
To specify a different directory for the extended tablespace data, select option 3 -
Change directory to put data file. This displays a prompt to enter the new data file
directory. Enter the directory. The Tablespace Extension menu is displayed with the
new directory indicated for option 3.
Apply the Changes
At this point, the criteria for extending tablespace should be correct, and the
tablespace can actually be extended.
To extend tablespace with the current settings for size, directory, and tablespace,
select option 4 - Extend tablespace with current settings.
This extends the specified tablespace by the specified amount, and then returns the
Tablespace Extension menu.
Repeat above procedures to extend another tablespace. When finished, return to the
Main Menu by selecting option 0-Return to main menu.
Extending Temporary Tablespace

Temporary and rollback (or UNDO) tablespaces are sized based on the selections
made in the Oracle instance wizard. Generally, the default tablespace is sufficient. If
a message indicating that there is not sufficient temporary tablespace to complete a
certain task appears, then extend the temporary tablespace. Reasons for extending
temporary tablespace are:
• Complex SQL queries that use joins.
• Complex SQL queries against PDL.
• PDL deletion operations.
• Restoring a history database.
3BUF001092-510 453
Managing Rollback Segments (Oracle UNDO Rollback) Section 13 History Database Maintenance
• Additional users may need added tablespaces.

For PDL operations, an indication of insufficient temporary or rollback space means
the query needs adjusting or deleting the PDL data and making smaller increments.
The restore will fail if it runs out of space during a restore operation and the space
will need to be increased before retrying the restore.
Use the Instance Maintenance Wizard and click on the Oracle Temp Space link to
to change the Extend By or Max Size of the TEMP_1.DBF tablespace. The
Datafile may autoextend if the Autoextend column is checked. The Datafile capacity
will extend by the amount indicated in the Extend By column. The Datafile may be
extended in this manner up to the specified Max Size.
Managing Rollback Segments (Oracle UNDO Rollback)

Oracle provides tablespace for Rollback Segments (UNDO Rollback). This is used
to temporarily hold the original data when changes are being made to the Oracle
database. For example, if data is being deleted from a message log, the messages to
be deleted are held until the change is actually committed. If an attempt to change
the Oracle database would exceed rollback space, the change is not allowed and an
error message is generated.
Use the Instance Maintenance Wizard and click on the Oracle UNDO Rollback
link to change the Extend By or Maz Size of the UNDO_1.DBF tablespace. If the
current size has reached the maximum size, then increase the maximum size. The
recommended guideline is to double the current size.
The temp or rollback size cannot be decreased. Therefore, take care to increase
the size by a reasonable amount that will provide the space needed. The only way
to revert back to a smaller size is to make a backup of the database, drop and
recreate the Oracle instance, and then restore the database.
Directory Maintenance for File-based Logs

This function is used to configure and maintain a directory structure for file-based
storage of property logs. (File-based storage is applicable for property logs whose
Storage Type is configured to be one of the filed-based types: TYPE1, TYPE2,
TYPE4, TYPE5. For guidelines on file-based storage, refer to File Storage vs.
Oracle Tables on page 247. To learn about the directory structure, refer to Directory
454 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Directory Maintenance for File-based Logs
Maintenance Overview on page 455. To get started, use one of the following
methods:
• Flat File Maintenance via the Instance Maintenance Wizard on page 137.
• Using the Directory Maintenance Functions from the Menu on page 456.
Directory Maintenance Overview

Use the Directory Maintenance window to change the filed-based storage allocation
or allocate space on other disks. To allocate space on a disk, specify the path for the
disk, and how much memory is to be allocated for files. The system automatically
creates directories on the specified disks as needed.
The example directory structure shown in Figure 334 illustrates how file-based
storage works. This list can be displayed using the List property Log Directories
function of hsDBMaint.
Figure 334. Example Directory Structure
This list shows one default directory: c:\HsData\History\HSFF. File-based logs are
always stored sub-directories under a directory named HSFF. This is why the HSFF
directory as a file quota of 0 (each log constitutes one file). These subdirectories are
automatically created under the HSFF directory as needed.
The subdirectory names are three-digit sequential numbers starting with 000. For
instance, c:\HsData\History\HSFF\000. Each subdirectory stores up to
1000 files. When the number of files exceeds 1000, another subdirectory (\001) is
created to store the excess. Subdirectories are added as required until the quota on
that disk is reached. New logs create files on the next disk (if space has been
allocated). Disks are used in the order they are added.
In the example above, the default location has three subdirectories. A total of 2,437
files are stored in these directories. Directories \000 and \001 hold 1000 files each.
Directory \003 holds 437 files.
3BUF001092-510 455
Directory Maintenance for File-based Logs Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Using the Directory Maintenance Functions from the Menu

To configure a specific directory structure, choose Add/Alter/Delete/List
NumericLog Directories from the main menu. This displays the Add Directories
for Fast Numeric menu, Figure 335.
Figure 335. Add Directories For Fast Numeric Menu
This menu is used to add a directory, change the quota for a directory, delete a
directory, or list all directories. To return to the main menu, choose option 0 -
Return to Main Menu.
For guidelines on using one of these functions, refer to:
• Add a Directory on page 456.
• Update Directory List on page 456.
• Delete From Directory List on page 457.
• List the Directory on page 457.
Add a Directory
To add a directory, choose option 1 - Add to Directory List. This initiates a dialog
for configuring a new directory. Specify a quota and path for the new directory.
Follow the guidelines provided by the dialog. Make sure the disk where the
directory is being added has enough space for the directory. A directory with the
name HSFF will be added under the path entered. For example, if the path is
\disk3, a new directory will be created as follows: \disk3\HSFF
Update Directory List

This function is used to change the quota for a specified directory. The dialog is the
same as for adding a directory.
456 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Reset Object Status States
Delete From Directory List

This function is used to remove a directory from the list of directories that are
available for file-based storage. Delete is not allowed if there are files in the
directory.
List the Directory

This function provides a list of available directories. The information provided in
this list is similar to the information provided on the Flat File Maintenance tab of
the Instance Maintenance window. Refer to Flat File Maintenance via the Instance
Maintenance Wizard on page 137.
Reset Object Status States

Use this function to reset attrsUpdated and userEntered bits. These bits determine
whether the collection function for a log will update the data presentation attributes
for property logs, or whether user-entered values will be used. If the attrsUpdated
bit for a property log is set (1), when the log is activated, the collection function gets
the data presentation attribute values from the data source. Any user-defined values
will be overwritten. When the userEntered bit is set, it prevents the collection
function from overwriting the user-defined values.
At any given time, only one of these bits can be set for a property log. The Reset
Object Status States function toggles the state for one or both bits.
To reset object status states, from the hsDBMaint menu, choose the Reset the
Object Status states option. This displays the reset OBJECT_TABLE Status Bits
menu, Figure 336.
Figure 336. Reset OBJECT_TABLE Status Bits Menu
This menu shows the current settings for logs to process, and attributes to reset. The
current settings can be changed before executing the reset operation. To change any
3BUF001092-510 457
Cascade Attributes for Composite Logs Section 13 History Database Maintenance
of the settings, choose the corresponding option from this menu and follow the
dialog. For log name to process, choose:
• All logs.
• All logs in a specific composite log hierarchy.
• Just one specific log.
For attributes to reset, choose:
• Both attrsUpdated and userEntered bits.
• Just attrsUpdated.
• Just userEntered.
When the settings are correct, choose the Reset specified log(s) with current
settings now option.
To return to the database maintenance menu, choose the Return to Main Menu
option.
Cascade Attributes for Composite Logs

This function propagates presentation, engineering units, and alarm attributes from
the data source to secondary logs in the composite hierarchy. This is required for
logs where attribute values have been entered manually.
To do this:
1. From the hsDBMaint main menu, choose the Cascade Attributes option. This
displays the Cascade Attributes Log Menu, Figure 337.
Figure 337. Cascade Attributes Log menu
2. Specify the log to pass attributes to. The default is for all logs. If this is
acceptable, skip this step and go directly to step 3. To specify a specific log,
choose option 1 - Change log ID to process. This displays the prompt: Do
you want to do all composite logs? [yn]
458 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Stagger Collection and Storage
Choose n. This displays the following prompt:

Enter the log ID of any log in the composite
hierarchy>
Enter the log name. The Cascade Attributes Log Menu is returned.
3. To cascade attributes with current setting for log, choose option 2 - Cascade
attributes with current settings now. This passes the applicable attributes
from the data source to the specified log, and then returns the Cascade
Attributes Log Menu.
Stagger Collection and Storage

The following stagger functionality is recommended for all Information
Management History configurations. After a history configuration is staggered, the
collection of Basic History Service data from Process Portal is normalized to
distributed loading of the Connectivity Servers evenly over time. History
configurations are not staggered by default. If 960 logs are created with a one-
second sample/storage interval, the activated logs will wake up every four minutes,
which is the default for one-second logs, and request four minutes of one-second
data from 960 logs. When staggered, collection will request four minutes of data
from four logs every second. Over time, the Connectivity Servers will see a steady
load from the Information Management Server. This improves performance of the
entire 800xA System.
There are two methods for distributing CPU load for collection and storage: Stagger
and Phasing. Refer to the applicable sections to determine which method to use, and
then refer to How to Use the Stagger Collection Function on page 460.
Stagger
Stagger is typically applied to a number of logs with the same alignment, storage
interval, and sample interval, and where sample and storage interval are equal.
Stagger assigns a blocking rate greater than the storage interval. The first Activation
Time is modified to distribute the load. For example, consider an application with
120 logs with the following configuration:
3BUF001092-510 459
Stagger Collection and Storage Section 13 History Database Maintenance
sample & storage interval = 30 seconds

alignment = 12:00:00
Blocking Rate = 150s
Without staggering, 120 messages with 5 entries each will be sent to storage every
2.5 minutes (150s). This will cause a spike in CPU usage. To distribute the load
more evenly, use the Stagger Collection function to apply a blocking rate of 10m,
and specify that 1/10 of the logs (12 messages with 20 entries each) be sent to
storage every minute.
Phasing
Phasing is typically applied to a number of logs with the same alignment, storage
interval, and sample interval, and the storage interval is significantly greater than the
sample interval. For example, consider an application with 120 logs sampled at a 1-
minute rate and an average calculated on a daily basis.
In this case, the 150s blocking rate would not prevent a CPU load spike at 00:00:00
(midnight). Phasing allows a set of logs to have slightly different blocking rates to
prevent all logs from processing at the same time. For example, for a blocking rate
of 30 minutes, phasing can be implemented by sub-dividing the 120 logs into groups
and assigning different blocking rates to each group as follows:
40 logs w/ Blocking Rate = 29m
In this case a spike will only occur once every 26,979 minutes (29x30x31).
How to Use the Stagger Collection Function

This function must be run while History is running. To run this function, from the
hsDBMaint main menu, choose the Stagger Collection of data to improve
performance option. This displays a summary of the current collection/storage
performance, Figure 338.
460 3BUF001092-510
Figure 338. Summary of Collection/Storage Performance
The summary categorizes the logs by sample rate and storage rate. Each line of this
summary provides the following information for a category of logs:
Total Total number of logs in this category. This includes both cyclic
subscriptions to OCS objects and periodic retrieval of OPC/HDA
from controllers.
Prim Number of logs in this category from cyclic subscriptions to OCS
objects.
OPC/HDA Number of logs in this category from periodic retrieval of
OPC/HDA from controllers (refer to Figure 338).
Time First Activation time for logs in this category.
Sample Sample rate for logs in this category (in seconds).
Storage Storage rate for logs this category (in seconds).
Blocking Shortest blocking rate for any logs in this category (in seconds)/
Range Longest blocking rate for any logs in this category (in seconds).
AvgRate Calculated average number of requests per minute for this
category based on number of logs, and sample, storage, and
blocking rates. This equates to the average number of disk
access transactions per minute for the system.
The prompt following the summary is used to either exit this function (by pressing
n), or continue with the Stagger function (by pressing y).
3BUF001092-510 461
If continuing with the Stagger function, recommendations to improve performance

for logs in the first category are displayed, Figure 339.
Using the Default Values

If the defaults are used, the program will ask whether or not to use stagger now.
Press y to apply the new stagger values, or n to ignore the changes made. The
Information Management processes (PAS) must be restarted in order for the stagger
changes to take effect.
Other Considerations
It is generally accepted that the Information Management requests per minute
should be kept in the 500 to 1,000 requests per minute range. If the requests per
minute are over 1,000, the performance of the Connectivity Servers can suffer.
Because most 800xA sources are exception driven, a one-second log typically does
not have 60 values per minute. If the rate is over 1,000 per minute, the custom
selection should be used to increase the blocking rates, decreasing the average
OPC/HDA request rate to the Connectivity Servers.
462 3BUF001092-510
Figure 339. Defaults for Stagger Function
Changing the Default Values

If the defaults are not used, the program will step through a procedure for changing
the defaults, one value at a time. This procedure is described below.
If the values are changed, instructions for entering a new blocking rate are
displayed, Figure 340.
Figure 340. Instructions for Changing Blocking Rate
3BUF001092-510 463
Enter a new blocking rate (without units) at the prompt. The range is 0 to 4095. For
example, enter 12.
Enter value( 0-4095 ): 12
When the prompt for units is displayed, enter the units by entering the appropriate
integer code: 3 = seconds, 4 = minutes, 5 = hours, 6 = days, 7 = weeks. In the
example below, the integer code for minutes (4) is selected.
Enter unit(3 for omfSECONDS etc.):4
When the prompt for stagger is displayed, Figure 341, enter an integer value within
the specified range. The range is based on the blocking rate specified.
Figure 341. Prompt for Stagger
The stagger value specifies the number of divisions within the specified blocking
rate that will be used to distribute the load. After entering the stagger value, a
summary of the changes made is displayed, Figure 342.
Figure 342. Summary of Changes
The prompt following this summary can be used to either accept these values (by
pressing n), or change these values (by pressing y). In this case, the specified
blocking rate is 12 minutes. The selected stagger divides each blocking interval into
24 30-second time slots. Thus at every 30-second time slot,
This procedure must be repeated for each category. When completed for each
category, a new summary will be displayed with a prompt to choose whether or not
the changes made should be applied, Figure 343.
464 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance PDL Maintenance Functions
Figure 343. Revised Summary with Prompt to Apply Changes
Press y to apply the new stagger values, or n to ignore the changes made. The
Information Management processes (PAS) must be restarted in order for the stagger
changes to take effect.
PDL Maintenance Functions

These functions, Figure 344, are used to check the status of the PDL configuration
and correct error if necessary. The PDL configuration may become corrupted
following an hsBar restore if the backup file being used was made when history was
still running. The check function (2) may be done online. The correct errors function
(3) requires history to be stopped via PAS.
Figure 344. PDL Maintenance Menu
Create/Drop User Indexes

This is used to create and drop user indexes to improve performance for SQL
queries.
3BUF001092-510 465
Create/Drop User Indexes Section 13 History Database Maintenance
To access this function, from the hsDBMaint main menu, choose the Create/Drop
User Indexes option. This displays the Table Index Maintenance menu, Figure 345.
Figure 345. Table Index Maintenance Menu
Dropping an Index
To drop an index:
1. From the Table Index Maintenance menu, choose Action to perform (1), and
then enter d to select the drop action.
2. Choose Current index name (2), then enter the name of the index to drop.
3. Choose Drop the index (7) to drop the selected index.
Creating an Index
To create an index:
1. From the Table Index Maintenance menu, choose Action to perform (1), and
then enter c to select the create action.
2. Choose Current index name (2), and then enter the name for the new index.
3. Choose Name of table index belongs to (3), then enter the name of the table.
4. Choose Name of column index will be based on (4), then enter the column
names. Separate each name with a comma, and DO NOT enter any white space
between names. Press <Enter> to display a list of column names.
5. Choose Name of tablespace to create index in (5), then enter the tablespace
name. Press <Enter> to display a list of tablespace names.
466 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Create or Drop Oracle Instance
6. Choose Size of Initial and Next extent(s) (6), then enter the size in kilobytes.
7. Choose Create the index... (7) to create the new index based on the entries
made for steps 3-6.
Creating indexes requires additional disk space. Be sure to extend the PDL
tablespace or PDL Index tablespace (if it exists) before creating a new index.
Also, indexes make retrieval faster, but slow down storage and deletion
operations. This should be considered when adding indexes to tables.
Create or Drop Oracle Instance

Use this offline function to create or drop (delete) an Oracle instance. History
MUST be shut down prior to creating or dropping a database. Use PAS to stop
History Services as described in Starting and Stopping History on page 424.
Choosing Create/Drop Oracle Instance displays a usage file describing the
hsDBMaint -instance options (refer to below) and steps. The command prompt is
then returned.
The History database configuration and all Oracle-based Historical data will be
lost when the database instance is dropped.
USAGE: hsDBMaint -instance [-c [-h][-r <resumeStep>] | -d | -m | -q] [-a][-f

<configFileName>][-v][-t <traceFileName>]
-c: Create an Oracle instance.
-h: Create the History database after creating the Oracle instance.
Must be used in conjunction with -c.
-f: Use <configFileName> instead of the one stored in "%HS_DATA%".
-r: Start the creation process at <resumeStep>.
Must be used in conjunction with -c.
-d: Drop the entire Oracle instance and any associated files.
-m: Modify the table spaces and flat files to match the config file.
-q: Query the table space and flat files and save to the config file.
-v: Run in verbose mode.
-t: Write all output to <traceFileName>.
3BUF001092-510 467
Create or Drop a Product Database Section 13 History Database Maintenance
-a: Auto adjust table spaces and flat files to fit the History configuration. Must
be used in conjunction with -c or -m.
Create or Drop a Product Database

Use this offline function to create or drop (delete) a database. History MUST be shut
down prior to creating or dropping a database. Use PAS to stop History Services as
described in Starting and Stopping History on page 424.
When dropping a database, all configuration data and stored log data is deleted. Use
this function only if it is determined that it would be better to delete any work up to
this point and start from scratch.
If dropping a database after History has been running (database has live data), be
sure to archive any data that needs to be saved.
To create or drop a product database, from the hsDBMaint main menu.choose
Create/Drop Product Database. This displays the Create/Drop Product Database
menu, Figure 346.
Figure 346. Create/Drop Product Database Menu
This menu shows the current settings for type of database to create/drop, and the
operation to perform (create or drop). Change the current settings before executing
the create or drop operation.
To change any of the settings, choose the corresponding option from this menu and
follow the dialog. For type of database choose History or PDL.
For operation to perform, choose Create or Drop.
Creating History will automatically create PDL if the option is installed.
When finished with the dialog, the Create/Drop Product Database menu will return
and the current settings will be changed according to the dialog. When the settings
468 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Clean History Database
are correct, choose the Create/drop product database with current settings now
option. When the operation is finished, the Main Menu will be displayed again.
To return to the database maintenance main menu, choose the Return to Main
Menu option (0).
Clean History Database

Use this function to clean the History database. History MUST be shut down prior
to cleaning the History database. The menu item will not be available in the
hsDBMaint menu if the menu is opened while History is started. Use PAS to stop
History Services as described in Starting and Stopping History on page 424.
Once, History has been stopped, from the hsDBMaint main menu choose Clean
History Database. This displays the Clean History Database Menu, Figure 347.
Figure 347. Clean History Database Menu
Choose option 2 - Clean History database now. This cleans up the database, and
then returns the Clean History Database menu. To return to the Main Menu, choose
option 0 - Return to main menu.
Restore or Initialize History Logs

Use this function to:
• Redefine missing tables for Oracle logs (storage type Oracle) and missing files
for file-based logs storage type (TYPE1, TYPE2, TYPE4, TYPE5).
• Initialize all log tables and log file essentials, and erasing all runtime data.
History MUST be shut down prior to initializing History logs. The menu item will
not be available in the hsDBMaint menu if the menu is opened while History is
started. Use PAS to stop History Services as described in Starting and Stopping
History on page 424.
3BUF001092-510 469
Purge History Data Section 13 History Database Maintenance
To restore or initialize History logs, from the hsDBMaint main menu, choose
Restore/Initialize History Logs.
Purge History Data

If, for some reason, the system time is set ahead this will cause History to collect
data "in the future". For instance, this would occur if the time was set wrong. If this
occurs, even if the time is fixed, History will not collect any more data because it
will not collect data that is older than the most current data collected. In this case
use the Purge History Data function to delete all data with future time stamps.
History MUST be shut down prior to purging History data. The menu item will not
be available in the hsDBMaint menu if the menu is opened while History is started.
Use PAS to stop History Services as described in Starting and Stopping History on
page 424.
Use either the -purge command line option, or use hsDBMaint.
To use hsDBMaint, from the hsDBMaint main menu, choose Purge History Data.
Invoking this function prompts to actually purge the data or just check which logs
have future data, Figure 348. The default selection is to just check, and not purge.
Figure 348. Prompt to Purge or Check
After specifying whether or not to purge, a prompt for a time to compare data time
stamps with is displayed, Figure 349. The default is the current time.
Figure 349. Prompt for Time
When the function is finished, a table is displayed that indicates the number of logs
checked, and the number of logs found to have future data, Figure 350. When
History detects a time change of greater than 75 minutes (this is configurable via the
environment variable HS_MAX_TIME_CHANGE), History will log an operator
message stating that fact.
470 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance History Resource Considerations
Figure 350. Purge Future Data Results
History Resource Considerations

History places a load on the CPU, disk, and process memory resources in the
History node. Data collection and storage place a fixed load on History node
resources, based on the History database configuration. This load can only be
adjusted by changing the database configuration.
For instance, sample rates, deadband, blocking rates and so on can be adjusted. Data
retrieval applications such as Reports and trend displays, place a variable load that
depends on the extent and frequency of those applications.
For a detailed breakdown of these resources, refer to Resource Requirements
Related to History Configuration on page 472 and Resource Requirements for User
Applications on page 473.
It is important to determine whether or not the History configuration and user
applications will overload the History node resources. To analyze resource usage by
the History configuration and user applications, refer to Determining Resource
Usage for Your Application on page 475. This analysis will show where the
configuration or user applications may overload resources. Based on this analysis,
any one or a combination of the following steps to make any necessary adjustments
can be made:
• Expand/upgrade the hardware for the History node (more disks, more memory,
faster processor), or install a second node.
• Modify the History configuration.
3BUF001092-510 471
Resource Requirements Related to History Configuration Section 13 History Database
• Modify user applications.
Resource Requirements Related to History Configuration
CPU
CPU performance is related to capacity for History collection and storage functions.
This can be adjusted by configuring sample rates, deadbands, and blocking rates.
Disk Space
Disk space resources are used by the History filesets that are loaded on disk when
History is installed, by Oracle tablespace for logs and archive database entries, and
by file-based logs. Disk space allocation for Oracle and file-based logs is calculated
and set by the Database Instance Configuration wizard based on the selections made
in the wizard at post-installation or later if required, refer to Maintaining the Oracle
Instance on page 135.
• The disk space required for the History filesets is fixed at 30 meg.
• Oracle tablespace is used by message logs, report logs, PDLs, asynchronous
property logs, synchronous property logs with Oracle storage type, log
configuration data, and archive database entries. Extend Oracle tablespaces for
runtime based on the per/entry requirements in Considerations for Oracle or
File-based Storage on page 180.
• File space for file-based property logs is automatically allocated. Additional
disk space can be allocated. Memory requirements per file are described in
Considerations for Oracle or File-based Storage on page 180.
Random Access Memory (RAM)

RAM resources are required for:
• Operating System resources. This includes:
– Six Shared Memory IDs for:
Runtime Shared Memory Size = (600+ total # of all logs) * 64 + (500 +
# of property & message logs) * 184 Bytes
472 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Resource Requirements for User Applications
Other resources = 3.76 Meg.

• OMF.
– Object names = 500 * objects defined (50 maximum) Bytes.
– Advant OCS Object Data Sources = 1Kbyte per primary log minimum.
• hsServer process = total # of History objects * 100 Bytes where History objects
are Log Groups, Log Sets, Composite Log Typicals, Log Typicals, Composite
Logs, and so on.
• hsCollection process = total # of all logs * 376 Bytes.
• Overhead.
– History executables = 11 Meg.
– Oracle Shadow Processes = 24 Meg. + (6 Meg. * # of archive devices).
Resource Requirements for User Applications

Load on resources for User applications comes from Reports, Display Services, and
trend displays. These applications place a load on local and remote History
Managers:
• Requests from local History Manager to local hsServer = 40Kbytes OMF
shared memory per request for property log (500 property values maximum).
• Requests from remote History Manager to local hsServer = 20Kbytes OMF
shared memory per request for property log (500 property values maximum).
Expanding dB Block Buffer Space

History uses Oracle for everything except synchronous file-based logs. Performance
for PDL, Report, and Message logs can be improved with additional shared
memory. The default size for shared memory is based on the configuration
parameters selected when the database was configured, and the maximum memory
in the server. The minimum value is 512M. The maximum value is 2560Meg.
The total System Global area can not exceed 2.5 GB (2560Meg) on 32-bit
operating systems. If the new value is greater than 2.5GB, Oracle will not start.
3BUF001092-510 473
Expanding dB Block Buffer Space Section 13 History Database Maintenance
The following procedure can be used to adjust the Oracle shared memory. It is
recommended that the value is modified and the server is rebooted. After reboot, the
new values will be used.
Here is an example that changes the value to 600Meg.
The procedure to type in the command line is as follows (commands to be typed are
shown in bold and the responses are shown in normal text):
C:\Users\800xaInstall> sqlplus /
SQL*Plus: Release 11.1.0.7.0 - Production on Tue Jun 8
16:41:58 2010
Copyright (c) 1982, 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
Connected to:
Oracle Database 11g Release 11.1.0.7.0 - Production
SQL> show parameter memory
NAME TYPE VALUE
------------------------------------------------------
hi_shared_memory_address integer 0
memory_max_target big integer 532M
memory_target big integer 532M
shared_memory_address integer 0
SQL> alter system set memory_max_target=600M

scope=spfile;
System altered.
SQL> alter system set memory_target=600M scope=spfile;
System altered.
SQL>exit
Then restart the PC to have the new values take effect.
The maximum value for these parameters is 2560M, 2.5 GB.
474 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Determining Resource Usage for Your Application
The memory in use for a given server should always be less than the memory
installed. If a system has 700Meg for oracle shared memory, has 3GB of memory
installed, and the current memory usage is 2.5GB, it would be safe to add 500Meg
or less to the oracle shared memory. If the value is changed to a higher value and the
memory in use is consistently higher than the installed memory, then the value
should be reduced to keep the memory equal or less than the memory installed.
The Process Administration Service (PAS) utility can also be opened by typing
pasgui in the Run dialog (Start > Run) and clicking OK.
Determining Resource Usage for Your Application

Use these guidelines to determine how the History database configuration and user
applications will load resources. The affected resource is indicated in parenthesis:
• What type of Operator Station Graphics and Trending, Reports, and other user
applications are expected:
– How many operator stations will this History node service? (User
Applications, CPU and Memory).
– The frequency and type of applications using NUMLOGVAL? (User
Applications, CPU and Memory).
– Will Display Services be Installed? (User Applications, CPU and
Memory).
– Are any reports expecting certain types of data? (1 hour report returning
60 values, 1 for each minute in the hour) (History configuration, CPU,
memory).
• Will PDL be used? If YES, consider the following:
– Adjustment of HS_PDL tablespace to hold max number of PDLs.(Disk).
– Log associations to property logs. The maximum log period should be
greater than the expected duration of the batch to allow archival of all data
and reporting to complete before the property log wraps.(History
configuration, CPU memory).
• Will message logs be used? If YES, consider the following:
– ORACLE tablespace is used for message logs.(Disk).
3BUF001092-510 475
Determining Resource Usage for Your Application Section 13 History Database Maintenance
– Capacities over 250,000 yield poor performance.(History configuration,

CPU).
– Will archiving be used for message logs (CPU, will need archive group).
• Will report logs be used? If YES, consider the following:
– ORACLE tablespace (HS_REPORTS) is used to store reports in history.
(Disk).
– Will archiving be used for report logs (CPU, will need archive group).
• Will property logs be used? If YES, determine:
– the number of source tags and their names. (Real Time Accelerator Board,
CPU).
– the rates to collect from tags. (100 logs at 30s, 200 logs at 1m, 1000 logs at
2m)(Real Time Accelerator Board, CPU).
In MOD 300, sample rates for tags should be based on the loop processing
rate configured for the tags in CCF (interaction of processing rate,
processing phase, and base rate). A sample rate for a tag should never be
faster than the tag’s loop processing rate.
In fact, in many cases, the sample rate can be slower than the loop
processing rate. If sampling is done at a rate that is faster than the rate at
which the process value changes, most of the sample data will be
redundant, and will use CPU resources which could otherwise be used for
additional logs. If a report requires 60 values for an hourly report, a 1m
storage interval would make sense.
– Can deadband be used. If YES, what is the expected compaction
ratio?(5:1?) (History configuration, CPU, memory).
– Will archive of data be necessary?
– For all clients of history (numlogval, OS, reports, PDL), What log periods
are required? (1 w, 2 w, 4w, etc.) (Disk).
Log Period should be determined by the clients who view log data. The
OS is the biggest concern here. Do the operators need 1 week or 4 weeks
of online data.Batch applications are another consideration. The log
associations in PDL require the log to have a log period at least 2 times the
476 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Determining Resource Usage for Your Application
longest batch time to guarantee all the property data can be archived with
the PDL. If all functionality for history data is clearly defined, a database
satisfying 95% of the planned functionality can be created on the first try.
In addition, if care is taken to only define what is needed (1 w logs instead
of 1 year logs), overall system performance will be much better.
– Are hierarchies needed?
• Will DUAL history be used? If YES, consider the following:
– DUAL history allows history configurations to be distributed on multiple
history nodes. A composite log with a primary log on two different history
nodes is a DUAL history log. With a DUAL history log, each primary log
collects data from the same data source independently. This means the
data and timestamps will be similar but not equal for the two primary logs.
– DUAL history allows clients of history (OS, REPORTS) to get data for
logs when one of the two nodes is down.
– DUAL history creates twice the load on controllers and the DCN.
Having two nodes configured with DUAL history logs makes loading an issue.
With DUAL history, both nodes use the same amount of RTA/OMF resources
to collect data. However, the retrieval of data can be directed to one node more
than the second node.
In addition to the seamless algorithm applied for retrieval requests, the
following criteria have been added to better handle selection of a log for a
request by access name:
– Uptime of node where log exists.
– local is chosen over remote (local should always be faster than remote).
– sequence number of log. (all other conditions being equal, the lowest
sequence numbered log will be used. Sequence number is the ‘-1-o’ or ‘-2-
o’ attached to the generated log name.
These additional sorting parameters will allow configurations to:
– Evenly distribute retrieval load on two History nodes (on average) by
creating half the logs with the first log created on Node A and the other
half with the first log on Node B.
3BUF001092-510 477
Temporary File Disk Space for History Section 13 History Database Maintenance
– Favor one History node over the other by creating all the logs with the first
log on NodeA. (One history node may be faster and have more memory
than the other.)
Temporary File Disk Space for History

History uses disk space for temporary files during runtime. This includes:
• Archive - 16 meg. per volume (M/O drive = one volume).
• Inter-process communication - 5 meg.
• Collection snapshot files:
– For Numeric, Message, and Report Logs: Minimum = # of Start Active
Logs * 136, Maximum = 4 * (# of Start Active Logs * 136).
Start Active logs are logs whose Log Start-up state is configured to be Active.
• Storage shutdown file - 2 to 5 Meg.

To assure that there is disk space to accommodate these temporary files, leave free
space in whichever volume group %HS_DATA uses, using the above numbers as
guidelines. This free space is in addition to any other free space requirements that
your History application may call for.
Environment Variables
Environment variables are created when installing Information Management
software, and are used by Information Management to specify locations for data,
configuration, and executable files. The location of these files may vary from one
installation to the next. The environment variables provide a uniform and consistent
method for specifying the location of these files for all Information Management
installations.
Most environment variables are used internally by Information Management
applications during installation and start-up. Some environment variables can be
used while performing system administration functions, for example to run the
hsBAR.exe file when backing up History data (Running hsBAR on page 420).
The environment variables that are most likely to be used are described in Table 42.
478 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Environment Variables
These variables are generally used in commands entered via the Windows
Command Prompt. The variables may also be used in Windows dialogs that require
a path specification (for example, Open File dialogs).
Table 42. Environment Variables
Variable Points To(1)

%ABB_ROOT% The ABB Industrial IT directory where Information Management
System Services is installed. Default path: C:\Program Files\ABB
Industrial IT\
This is the location for most directories and files related to Information
Management software.
%HS_HOME% The History directory where History Services software is installed. The
default path is C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\History\
This is the location for executable files including system administration
utilities such as hsDBMaint (database maintenance), hsBar (History
backup), and dbConfig (History configuration).
%HS_DATA% The HsData\History directory on the History data drive specified during
History Services installation. The default path is C:\HsData\History\
This is the location for Oracle and History runtime data files.
%HS_CONFIG% The HsData\History directory under the History data drive specified
during History Services installation. The default path is
C:\HsData\History\
This is the location for History configuration data including the History
domain list, and the OPC server configuration file.
%HS_LOG% The History\Log directory where History Services software is installed.
The default path is C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\History\Log\
This is the location for log files. ABB support may ask for the contents
of these files for troubleshooting.
%USERAPI_HOME% The UserAPI directory where Information Management System
Services are installed. The default path is C:\Program Files\ABB
Industrial IT\SystemServices\UserAPI
This is the location for directories and files related to User API. The
examples folder in this directory contains example User API programs.
3BUF001092-510 479
Linking Information Management History with the 800xA System Trend Function Section 13 History
Table 42. Environment Variables (Continued)
Variable Points To(1)

%RTA_HOME% The default path is C:\ABB\RTA
%ABB_DATA% Where all the data that cannot be stored in ABB_ROOT anymore is
stored. The path is c:\programdata\ABB\
(1) To look up the actual definition for an environment variable, use the Set command in the Windows Command
Prompt. Refer to Figure 351.
Enter the set command at the prompt to list all environment variables
Figure 351. Looking Up Environment Variable Definitions
Linking Information Management History with the 800xA

System Trend Function
The Information Management history logs collect from 800xA System operator
trend logs which collect directly from OPC data sources. To support this
functionality, three links are added to the Basic Platform Service Group for the node
where Information Management History Server runs. These are IM History Log, IM
Archive Link, and IM Importer Link. The importer link supports importing log
configurations from remote history servers. This linkage is required to consolidate
historical process data from Information Management history servers that reside in
other Aspect Systems.
480 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Linking Information Management History with the 800xA
These components are automatically added to the Basic Platform Service Group
when the Information Management Process Administration Supervision (PAS) is
started during post-installation.
Confirm that these components have been added as follows (reference Figure 352):
1. Go to the Service structure in the Plant Explorer workplace.
2. Select the Basic History Service Group for the Information Management node.
3. Click the Service Group Definition aspect.
4. Go to the Special Configuration tab.
5. Check for the presence of IM History Log, IM Archive Link, and IM Importer
link in the Supported Links (right) list.
6. If one or more of these required items are not in the Supported Links list, select
the item from the Available Links list and click the right arrow button. This
puts the item in the supported links list.
7. Click Apply.
Figure 352. Checking IM History Links for Basic History Service Group
3BUF001092-510 481
Integrating System Message and History Servers Section 13 History Database Maintenance
Integrating System Message and History Servers

Certain message-generating applications in the 800xA system, including History
Services, Softpoint Services, AC 800M/C, and AC 400 write their messages to the
800xA System Message Server via application-specific OPC alarm servers. These
application-specific OPC alarm servers must be added to the Alarm and Event
Service Group for each connectivity server where the applications run. These
Service Groups reside under the Alarm and Event Services category in the Service
structure.
This configuration should have already been done as part of the Information
Management post-installation. Guidelines for verifying this configuration are
provided below.
To check (reference Figure 353):
This example shows how to check for the OPC alarm server for history. The OPC
alarm server for softpoints will reside in a different Service Group (for example,
tar101Softpoint Service Group in Figure 353).
1. Go to the Service structure in the Plant Explorer, find the Event Collector,
Service, and then select the Service Group for a node where History Services
runs (for example, Figure 353).
2. Click on the Service Group Definition aspect to display the configuration
view, and select the Special Configuration tab.
ABB Hs OPC Alarm Event Server should be present in the Collector
Program IDs list. The applicable OPC alarm servers are added when the
History Service is started under PAS during the post installation set up for
History.
482 3BUF001092-510
Section 13 History Database Maintenance Integrating System Message and History Servers
Figure 353. Checking for OPC Alarm Server
3BUF001092-510 483
Integrating System Message and History Servers Section 13 History Database Maintenance
484 3BUF001092-510
Section 14 Open Data Access
Overview
This section provides instructions for setting up real-time and historical data access
for third-party applications via the Open Data Access (ODA) Server. This server
supports client applications that use ODBC data source, for example: Crystal
Reports or Microsoft Excel (without DataDirect add-in).
Virtual database tables in the ODA Server map 800xA system data types to ODBC
data type. When the client application submits an SQL query toward a virtual table,
the ODA Server parses the query, and returns the requested data to the client.
There is one predefined table named numericlog to support access to historical
process data.
For real-time data access, configure custom tables to expose aspect object properties
that need access. These tables are then combined to form one or more virtual real-
time databases. The custom-built real-time databases support read and write access.
The custom views are used to impose restrictions on data access for certain users.
One predefined table named generic_da is provided for real-time data access. This
is a read-only table that exposes all properties for all real-time objects.
Client applications which access data via ODA may run locally on the Information
Management server where the ODA Server is installed, or on a remote computer
client. Remote computer clients required the Information Management Client
Toolkit. To install this software, refer to Industrial IT 800xA Information
Management Installation.
The architecture for Open Data Access is illustrated in Figure 354, and described in
ODA Architecture on page 487. When ready to begin configuring ODA access, refer
to What to Do on page 488 for guidelines.
3BUF001092-510 485
Section 14 Open Data Access
Third Party ADO-supported

Applications Programming Languages Microsoft Office
Crystal Reports Excel, etc...
(VB, etc...)
ADO
ODBC
ABB ODA ODA Data Source
Provider
Real-time ODA Server

DB1
Numericlog
Information Real-time Table
DB2 ODA Database
Management
Server Real-time generic_da
DBn Table
IMHDA AIPHDA
OPC DA Proxy Server Server
Calculation Softpoint
Services Server History Logs
Connectivity Server Trend Logs
Process Data Sources
Figure 354. Historical and Real-time Data Access Via ODA Server
486 3BUF001092-510
Section 14 Open Data Access ODA Architecture
ODA Architecture
Client applications that use Open Data Access must connect to a specified ODA
database. This is a virtual database which merges the predefined numericlog and
generic_da tables with one user-configured real-time database. The real-time
database is configured to have one or more custom table definitions which expose
selected object properties.
For example, Figure 355 shows two sets of user configured table definitions
(motor1, pump1, valve1; and motor2, pump2, valve2). These table definitions are
combined to form two real-time database definitions: DatabaseX and DatabaseZ.
These two database definitions are then used to create two ODA databases:
Database1 and Database2, each of which includes the two predefined tables
(numericlog and generic_da), and one custom real-time database definition. The
client application may connect to one ODA database at a time.
ODA Table Definitions ODA Table Definitions

motor1 pump1 valve1 numericlog generic_da motor2 pump2 valve2
Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table
DatabaseX DatabaseZ
numericlog numericlog DatabaseZ

DatabaseX
Table Table
motor1 pump1 valve1 motor2 pump2 valve2
Table Table Table generic_da generic_da Table Table Table
Table Table
ODA Database1 ODA Database2
Client Application
Figure 355. ODA Database Architecture
3BUF001092-510 487
Default Set-up Section 14 Open Data Access
The contents and operating parameters for the ODA database are specified in a
configuration file that was set up using the ODBC Data Source Administrator. This
file is used by the ODBC data source. This configuration file specifies:
• Which user-configured real-time database to use for real-time data access.
Clients connect to one database at one time.
• Which OPC HDA server to use for historical data access: the 800xA OPC HDA
server, or the History Server (IM) OPC HDA server.
The 800xA OPC HDA server is the default, and is recommended because it
supports seamless access to both operator trend logs and history logs. This
server also supports the ability to access log attributes.
The IM OPC HDA server can only access history logs. This server does not
support access to log attributes. It is provided primarily to support earlier data
access applications configured to use this server.
• For remote client connections, this file also specifies the server’s IP address.
Default Set-up
The default connection is to an ODA database named DATABASE1. Without
requiring any configuration, this database supports read access to all system objects
via the generic_da table, and read/write access to history data via the numericlog
table and 800xA OPC HDA server.
The default set up can be changed to use the IM OPC HDA server, and/or specify a
different real-time database table which includes user-configured ODA table
definitions. Further, additional ODA databases can be created where each one
specifies a different real-time database. This is used to connect the client application
to a different ODA database, depending on the particular data access requirements.
What to Do
ODA can be used with the default set up (DATABASE1). This supports access via
the predefined numericlog and generic_da tables. To use the functionality supported
by the custom-built real-time database tables (read/write access, and restricting
access on a user-basis), then use the following procedures to configure ODA to meet
the data access requirements:
488 3BUF001092-510
Section 14 Open Data Access Configuring Real-time Data Access Via the ODA Server
• Configure the virtual database tables for real-time data access. Then combine
these tables to form one or more real-time databases. This is described in
Configuring Real-time Data Access Via the ODA Server on page 489.
Access to historical process data stored in property logs is supported by a
predefined mapping table that does not require configuration by the end-user.
• Set up an ODA database per the data access requirements and specify:
– Which user-configured real-time database the client will be able to access.
Only one can be connected at one time.
– Whether to use the 800xA OPC HDA server, or IM OPC HDA server for
accessing history data.
– For remote client connections, specify the server’s IP address.
As an option, create additional ODA databases to provide different views to
real-time data. Since a client application can only connect to one ODA
database at a time, only one real-time database view is available at a time. This
set up is performed via the ODBC Data Source Administrator as described in
Setting Up the ODA Database on page 508.
Configuring Real-time Data Access Via the ODA Server

The mapping required to support real-time access via the ODA server is
implemented in two parts: ODA Table Definition aspects and Database objects.
ODA Table Definition aspects expose selected object properties as columns in a
database table. These aspects also specify whether each column (property) is
writable, and whether there will be additional columns for each property’s OPC data
quality and timestamp.
ODA Table Definition aspects may be added to object types in the Object Type
structure, or to instantiated objects in any other structure. Some object types, for
example the AC 800M Control Program, do not permit ODA Table Definition
aspects to be added. To expose object properties under these circumstances, be sure
to add the ODA Table Definition aspects to the instantiated objects.
When adding ODA Table Definition aspects to an object type, each aspect
represents one table through which data from all objects of the containing type will
be made accessible. The table may be configured to also expose properties for
3BUF001092-510 489
Configuring Real-time Data Access Via the ODA Server Section 14 Open Data Access
children of the object type (as defined by a formal instance list). The table will
contain a row for each instantiated object created from the object type. An example
is shown in Figure 356.
Object Instance Property 1 Property 2 Property 3 Property n

Instance 1
Instance 2
Instance n
Figure 356. Example Table for Object Type
Adding ODA Table Definition aspects directly to instantiated objects is used to

expose object properties that are unique to a specific instance. When adding the
aspect to an object instance, the resulting table will contain a single row, and only
those properties that belong to that object may be exposed, Figure 357.
Instance 1 Property 1 Value Property 2 Value Property 3 Value Property 4 Value
Figure 357. Example Table for Object Instance
If properties for children of an object instance need to be exposed, add an ODA

Table Definition aspect to those children.
Any number of tables can be defined for the same object or object type to be used in
the same or different databases. Once the ODA table definitions are created, assign
the table definition aspects to one or more Database objects to create real-time
databases. This is done in the Library structure. Each database will consist of one or
more tables defined by the ODA table definition aspects described above. Tables
may be reused in more than one database.
The relationship between database objects and table definitions is illustrated in
Figure 358. Two databases are defined. DB1 exposes properties for three object
types. DB2 exposes one object type, and also exposes an instantiated object.
The scope of each database is restricted to a specified object root. Typically the
object root is specified at or near the top of a structure, for example Control
structure, in the Plant Explorer. When adding table definitions in the database for
instantiated objects, the instantiated objects must reside under the object root
490 3BUF001092-510
Section 14 Open Data Access Configuring Real-time Data Access Via the ODA Server
defined for the database. When adding table definitions that point to an object type,
those table definitions will provide access to objects of that type that are instantiated
under the object root. To expose objects in more than one structure, configure a
dedicated database for each structure.
For example, since DB2 includes a table definition for an object which is
instantiated in the Control structure, its object root must be defined within the
Control structure (probably at the top). In that case the AI table definition in DB2
will be limited to AI objects in the Control structure. Assuming the object root for
DB1 is specified at the top of the Location structure, the tables in DB1 will be
limited to PID, DI, and AI objects instantiated in the Location structure.
Multiple databases can be configured to expose different sets of properties for
different users. Client applications can only connect to one real-time database at a
time.
The database objects must be inserted under the Databases group in the Library
structure. Configure as many database objects as required to provide different views
of the real-time database.
3BUF001092-510 491
Configuring Real-time Data Access Via the ODA Server Section 14 Open Data Access
Databases Library Structure Object Type Structure

PID - Object Type
DB1 Database Definition ODA Table Definition Aspect
Tables:
Table Name: PID
PID
Columns:
DI
Value
AI
Setpoint
High Limit
Low Limit
DB2 Database Definition Alarm State
Tables:
AI
DI - Object Type
Motor
ODA Table Definition Aspect
Table Name: DI
Control Structure Columns:
State
Motor - Object Instance
ODA Table Definition Aspect AI - Object Type
Table Name: Motor ODA Table Definition Aspect
Columns:
State Table Name: AI
RPM Columns:
Value
Figure 358. Object Structure for Databases and Database Table Definitions
To implement real-time data access via the ODA server:

• Create ODA table definition aspects for object types and objects whose
properties need to be accessed. Refer to Creating ODA Table Definitions on
page 493.
• Then create one or more database objects in the Library structure, and add the
ODA table definitions to them. Refer to Creating a Database Object on page
504.
492 3BUF001092-510
Section 14 Open Data Access Creating ODA Table Definitions
Creating ODA Table Definitions

The following procedure show how to add an ODA Table Definition aspect to an
object type in the Object Type structure. The same procedure can be used to add the
aspect to an object instance in any other structure. Exceptions are noted where
applicable.
To add an ODA table definition aspect:
1. Go to the Object Type structure in the Plant Explorer and select the object type
where the ODA Table Definition aspect is to be added. Then right-click and
2. In the New Aspect dialog find and select the ODA Table Definition aspect,
Figure 359.
Figure 359. Selecting the Table Definition Aspect
Use either the default aspect name, or enter a different name. The table
represented by this aspect will be named from within the Table Definition
aspect as described later. Specify a unique Aspect Description to help identify
the table. This is particularly important when creating multiple tables with the
same table name.
For example, in Figure 359 the Aspect Description is specified as Engineer’s
View. This description will be used as the Table Description when adding tables
to the database. If the aspect has no description, the object type description (if
3BUF001092-510 493
Creating ODA Table Definitions Section 14 Open Data Access
any) will be used. Change the Aspect Description later as described in Using
the Description Property on page 502.
3. Click Create when finished. This adds the aspect in the object type’s aspect
list.
4. To show the configuration view for this aspect, select the object type and then
click on the aspect, Figure 360.
Figure 360. Table Definition Aspect
5. Configure the table definition as described in ODA Table Definition View.
ODA Table Definition View

To use the ODA Table Definition View:
1. Enter a table name.
2. Filter the property list to make it easier to find the properties needed.
3. Select properties to include in the table.
494 3BUF001092-510
4. Configure selected properties.

For details on these basic steps, refer to:
Table Name on page 495
Filtering the Property List on page 495
Selecting Properties on page 499
Configuring Selected Properties on page 500
Table Name
Specify the table name as shown in Figure 361. This name is referenced in the ODA
Database Definition when adding tables to the database (Creating a Database Object
on page 504). This is also the name used in SQL queries. More than one table with
the same name can be created; however, table names must be unique within the
database where they are used.
• If the same table name for more than one table needs to be used, use the
aspect’s Description property to differentiate tables. If a unique Aspect
Description is not already specified, do it later as described in Using the
Description Property on page 502.
• If table names that have leading numeric characters are specified (for
example 01Motor, or are completely numeric (01), when using those names
in queries, the names will have to be entered in double quotation marks
(“01Motor”)
Specify
Table Name
Figure 361. Specifying the Table Name
Filtering the Property List

Use the filtering options to reduce the number of properties presented in the
property list to a manageable quantity. Properties are filtered on a group basis. as
shown in Figure 362 and as described below:
• Special Properties:
3BUF001092-510 495
– Object Attributes - These are not actually properties, but rather attributes
of the object such as the object name, hierarchical name, parent, and so on.
Always include object attributes. It is strongly recommended that to always
include the :NAME object attribute in the table. This is the most efficient way of
referencing an object.
– Name Categories - An object can have a number of different names. Each
name is assigned as an aspect. The main name is the name associated with
the object in the Plant Explorer. This is generally the name used for
absolute object references. It is accessed as an object attribute as described
above. Other names may be accessed as Name categories, but this is
seldom necessary.
• Aspect Properties - These are properties related to aspects of the object (or
object type). Properties can be filtered on an aspect-by-aspect basis. For
example, in Figure 362 the ProcessDataSim object has four aspects, but only
one (Calculation) is selected.
• Child Object Properties - For object types, the properties of children objects
are grouped on an object-by-object basis in a manner similar to the aspect
properties. This is not applicable for object instances. For example, in
Figure 362, the ProcessDataSim object has two child objects: RealSim and
upDown. Each of these objects has aspects and special properties.
496 3BUF001092-510
Figure 362. ODA Table Definition - Property Filter
The Aspect column in the property list indicates to which group each property
belongs, Figure 363. For aspect properties, the aspect name is shown. Object
attributes and name categories are indicated by these respective text strings in the
Aspect column: (Object Attributes) or (Name Categories). For properties of child
objects, the object relative name is indicated in the Aspect column, in the form:
.relName:aspectName.
Figure 363. Aspect Column
To remove a property group, click the Filter View button in the ODA Table
Definition aspect, Figure 365. This displays the Property Filter dialog.
3BUF001092-510 497
Figure 364. Filter View Button
Property groups that are visible in the list are marked with a check. To remove a
group, uncheck the corresponding check box. As this is done, the applicable
properties are removed from the property list. Replace any group and corresponding
properties that have been removed by reselecting the check box. Figure 365 shows
the following groups selected:
• The RealSim object (child of the ProcessDataSim object).
• The Real PCA and Relative Name Aspects of the RealSim object.
• The Object Attributes for the RealSim object.
Figure 365. Launching the Filter Dialog
A group that already has properties selected cannot be removed. To remove such
a group, unselect the properties first.
Unchecking groups whose properties will not be used significantly reduces the
property list. This makes it easier to select the properties to be included in the table.
498 3BUF001092-510
DO NOT click the Hide Unused button at this point. This hides unselected
properties. Since no properties have been selected yet, this will hide all properties.
To proceed, click Exit to close the Filter dialog. Then follow the guidelines for
selecting properties in Selecting Properties on page 499.
Selecting Properties
To select a property, click the far left column. Selected properties are indicated by
black dots, Figure 366. Clicking on a selected property will un-select it.
Remember, it is recommended that the NAME object attribute be selected as an
efficient means of referencing the object in data queries. Do not confuse this
NAME attribute with other name properties in the property list.
Selected
Property
Indication
Figure 366. Selecting Object Properties to Expose
When finished selecting properties, simplify the view by showing just selected
properties. To do this, right click on the list and choose Show Selected from the
context menu, Figure 367. The result is shown in Figure 368.
Figure 367. Showing the Selected Properties
3BUF001092-510 499
Figure 368. Showing Selected Properties Result
To bring back the hidden unselected properties, click Show All. If any mistakes are
made selecting the wrong properties, start over by clicking Deselect All. To select
all properties, click Select All. The Deselect All and Select All functions operate on
the properties that are currently visible on the grid. Hidden properties will not be
selected or deselected.
Configuring Selected Properties

The columns for selected properties are configurable. This is used to specify the
column name for each property in the database table (default is property name),
whether a property may be updated, and whether additional columns for the OPC
Data Quality and OPC Time Stamp will be included in the table.
These columns are described in Table 43. Refer to Navigation and Configuration
Tips on page 502 for guidelines on navigating the property grid.
• The text string in the Name column in this grid will be used as the column
name in the database table. The default is to use the Property name. This
may result in duplicate column names which is NOT permitted.
For example, in Figure 368, two properties named NAME are selected.
When this occurs, change one or all duplicate names. Figure 369 shows the
column name changed for one of the NAME properties. In this case, it is
recommended the Object Attribute NAME keep the default name.
• If the column name includes a dot (.) character, the column name text string
must be delimited with double quotation marks when used in a query, for
example:
SELECT “object1.value” FROM ai
500 3BUF001092-510
Changing the Name to make it unique Default Name
Figure 369. Duplicate Names Changed
Table 43. Database Table Definition Columns
Item Description
Name This is the property’s column name in the database table. This defaults to the
Property name. Column names cannot be duplicated within the table. If duplicate
names occur, they must be changed.
Aspect This identifies the aspect or other category to which this property belongs. Refer
to Filtering the Property List on page 495. For aspect properties, the aspect name
is shown. Object attributes and name categories are indicated by these respective
text strings in the Aspect column: (Object Attributes) or (Name Categories). For
properties of children objects, the object relative name is indicated in the Aspect
column along with the aspect.
Property This is the name of the property, object attribute, or Name category.
Data Type Data Type
Writable This indicates whether or not the column is writable. Properties that cannot be
configured as writable are dimmed.
False (default) - is not writable
True - is writable
Quality This indicates whether to create a column for data quality. The column name in
the table will be the data column’s name with _qual appended.
False (default) - no column for quality
True - include column for quality
3BUF001092-510 501
Table 43. Database Table Definition Columns (Continued)
Item Description
Timestamp This indicates whether to create a column for the time stamp. The column name in
the table will be the data column’s name with _time appended.
False (default) - no column for timestamp
True - include column for timestamp
Description This is used to specify an optional description for the column. When the system
provides a description, it will be the default.
Navigation and Configuration Tips

The easiest way to navigate the grid is by mouse-clicking the targeted cell, or by the
arrow keys to move from one cell to the next. The arrow keys can only be used if the
current cell is not selected for updating. A cell is opened for updating by the
presence of a depressed text box or combo box.
Once data is entered (or selected) into an updateable cell it will be committed to the
current work area by any subsequent operation. To not commit the update, use Esc
to return to the previous data as long as the cell remains open for updates.
Cells in the Name column must be filled in with unique names for all selected
properties. Whenever a property row is selected, if the selected property row does
not have an associated Name, the field will be defaulted to the property name.
The Name can be set to the default by selecting the Name cell and double clicking.
When all changes to the local work area are completed, commit these changes by
clicking Apply. At this time, the data is checked to insure that a Table Name is
present, and that all selected properties have been assigned unique names.
Using the Description Property

Multiple tables having the same name can be created. For example, two different
tables for a motor object type can be created where each table has different property
lists. If the same name is to be used for both tables, for example Motor, differentiate
the tables using the ODA Table Definition aspect’s Description property. This will
help when selecting the appropriate table when adding tables to a database (Creating
a Database Object on page 504).
502 3BUF001092-510
This does NOT permit adding multiple tables having the same name to the same
database. It is merely intended to help select the correct table when adding tables
to the database.
To specify the Description property for a Database Table Definition aspect:
1. Select the ODA Table Definition aspect, right-click and choose Properties
2. Then use the Description field in the Properties dialog to specify a meaningful
description that will help identify the table, Figure 370.
Figure 370. Specifying a Meaningful Description
3. Click Apply. The description will be indicated in the aspect list, Figure 371.
Figure 371. New Description Defined
3BUF001092-510 503
Creating a Database Object Section 14 Open Data Access
Creating a Database Object

This section describes how to create a Database object and add one or more table
definition aspects to the Database object.
As an option, rather than creating a new object, use the default database named
Database1. This database is empty initially. One advantage to using this database
is that the default ODBC data source (ODA Database) is set up to point to
Database1. Using this database saves from having to edit the ODBC data source
to point to a database.
Database objects must be added under the ODA Databases group in the Library
structure. To create a database object:
1. In the Plant Explorer, select the Library Structure. Then right-click on
ODA Databases and choose New Object from the context menu.
2. Add the Database object as an ODA Database type (selected by default in the
New Object dialog). Assign the object a logical name (Ctrl1 for example). This
is the name to use when specifying the database in the ODBC configuration file
as described in Setting Up the ODA Database on page 508.
3. Click Create. This creates a new database under the ODA Databases group,
Figure 372.
New Database Object
Figure 372. Database Object Added
To show the configuration view for the database, click on the ODA Database
Definition aspect, Figure 373.
504 3BUF001092-510
Section 14 Open Data Access Creating a Database Object
Figure 373. Database Definition View
4. Configure the database as described in Database Definition View on page 505.
Database Definition View

Use this view to add table definitions to the database, and to specify the location of
the objects whose data will be accessible from this table. This is used to restrict the
database to objects within a specific structure, or object root within a structure.
To add table definitions to the database:
1. Click Add Tables. This displays a dialog which lists all existing Database
Table Definition aspects, Figure 374. If the list contains any tables that have
already been added to this database, those tables will be marked with a dot (.).
Also tables created for object instances rather than object types are indicated by
the (Instance) label in the Object Type column.
Figure 374. Adding a Table
3BUF001092-510 505
Creating a Database Object Section 14 Open Data Access
The bottom portion of this dialog has a check box and buttons to adjust the list
of tables, Figure 375. The Exclude instance tables check box is used to limit
the list to tables defined in the Object Type structure. The Search Under Root
button is used to limit the list to instance tables that exist under the root object
specified in the Object Root field on the ODA Database Definition aspect.
Figure 375. Select Database Table Check box and Buttons
2. Select a table, then click Add Table. The added table is listed immediately in
the Database Definition view, Figure 376. The dialog remains open so more
tables can be added.
Table Added
to Database
Figure 376. Table Added
3. Repeat step 2 to add as many tables as required.

The database may NOT have more than one table with the same name. Duplicate
table names will be indicated in red text. In this case either delete tables with
duplicate names, or change table names to make them unique within the ODA
database. Refer to Fixing Databases with Duplicate Table Names on page 507.
Tables that were created for object instances rather than object types are indicated
by the (Instance) label in the Object Type column.
4. Click Exit when finished with this dialog.
506 3BUF001092-510
Section 14 Open Data Access Creating a Database Object
The scope of the database is determined by the Object Root specification. Only
objects under the specified object root will be accessible via this database. This
defaults to the Control structure. A different structure can be specified if necessary.
Further, the scope can be made more restrictive by selecting an object within a
structure. For example, to restrict the database scope to a specific controller within
the Control structure. To change the object root specification:
1. Click the Browse button for the Object Root field, Figure 377. This displays a
browser similar to the Plant Explorer.
Figure 377. Starting the Browser
2. Use this browser to select the structure (and folder if necessary) where the
objects that will populate this table reside, Figure 378.
Figure 378. Selecting the Object Root
3. Click OK and then Exit when finished.

4. Click Apply in the Database Definition view to save the definition.
Fixing Databases with Duplicate Table Names

Do not add multiple tables having the same name; however, duplicate table names
may occur if a table name is changed after it has been added to the database. This
will prevent client applications from connecting to the database, and the database
3BUF001092-510 507
Setting Up the ODA Database Section 14 Open Data Access
definition must be fixed either by deleting duplicate tables, or by renaming the

tables via the Database Table Definition aspect
The condition will be annunciated the next time the Database Definition is opened.
Tables having the same name will be indicated in red text, Figure 378.
Figure 379. Duplicate Table Names Highlighted in Red
If all tables having duplicate names are required in the database, rename the tables
so that each has a unique name. Do this via their respective Database Table
Definition aspects as described in Creating ODA Table Definitions on page 493).
If one or more tables are not required, select those tables and then click Delete
Tables. If a mistake is made, cancel the delete command by clicking Cancel
BEFORE applying the change. This restores all deleted tables.
Setting Up the ODA Database

Client applications that use the ODA server must be connected to a specific ODA
database. This determines the scope of data access for the client application. The
ODA database specifies:
• which user-configured real-time database the client will be able to access. Only
one can be connected at one time.
508 3BUF001092-510
Section 14 Open Data Access Setting Up the ODA Database
• which OPC HDA server to use for historical data access: the 800xA OPC HDA
server, or IM OPC HDA server.
• for remote client connections, the server’s IP address. A remote client must
also change the OpenRDA ODBC 32 setup parameter, and edit the openrda.ini
text file.
One ODA database named DATABASE1 is provided as standard. By default this
ODA database uses the 800xA OPC HDA server, and connects to a real-time
database named Database1, which by default has no assigned table definition
aspects. Add table definitions to Database1 as described in Creating a Database
Object on page 504.
The default set up supports access via the predefined numericlog and generic_da
tables, and to table definitions added to Database1 (if any). To change the default set
up, use the IM OPC HDA server, and/or specify a different real-time database.
Further, additional ODA databases can be created where each one specifies a
different real-time database. This is used to connect the client application to a
different ODA database, depending on the data access requirements.
After successfully creating the object, go to the IM node on which the ODA server
is running. Using Windows Explorer, navigate down to the configuration directory
for ODA. Generally the path would be:
C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\ODA Provider\Server\cfg
In this directory, make a backup copy of the file oadm.ini. This is the ODA
configuration file for the server. After making a copy, edit the original file using a
text editor.
Database sources are kept in this file and have the following form:
[DataSource_1]
Type=6
DataSourceWorkArounds2=8192
DataSourceLogonMethod=Anonymous
DataSourceIPType=DAMIP
DataSourceIPSchemaPath=C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial
IT\Inform IT\ODA Provider\Server\ip\schema
3BUF001092-510 509
ServiceName=ABB_ODA
DataSourceName=DATABASE1
This is the definition of the default database for ODA. To include the new database
that was added in Process Portal, copy the above text, paste it directly after the
original, and edit the DataSource_1 and DATABASE1 entries.
The DataSource_ entry is a numerical progression of how many data sources you
have. So, to add a second datasource, then the entry should be for DataSource_2.
The DataSourceName then needs to point to the new database name, so
DATABASE1 would be changed to Ctrl1. So what we should see is now:
[DataSource_1]
Type=6
ServiceName=ABB_ODA
DataSourceName=DATABASE1
[DataSource_2]
Type=6
ServiceName=ABB_ODA
DataSourceName=Ctrl1;
510 3BUF001092-510
Save the file, and reboot the machine. If further databases are required, the same
procedure can be used, keeping in mind that the first modification to the
DataSource_x number must increment upwards with each new database.
Remote Client Set-up

Client applications which access data via ODA may run locally on the server where
the ODA server is installed, or on a remote computer client. Remote clients require
ODA client software, and a remote ODA database must be set up on the remote
client computer. A connection for a remote computer client can also be configured
which is outside the 800xA system domain. Special setup requirements for remote
clients are described in this procedure as applicable.
To set up (or add) an ODA database:
1. Open the Administrative Tools on the Windows Control Panel, then launch the
ODBC Data Source Administrator, Figure 380.
LAUNCH THIS TOOL
Figure 380. Launching ODBC Data Source Administrator
Go to the System DSN tab on the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog and
select the data source named ABBODA, Figure 381.
3BUF001092-510 511
Figure 381. ODBC Data Source Administrator
2. Click Configure. This displays the ODBC Data Source Setup dialog. The
Database name defaults to ABBODA. Typically, the default is used unless
additional databases are configured.
512 3BUF001092-510
Figure 382. ODBC Data Source Set Up
3. Select the Service Host.

4. Select the Service Data Source. The data source, DATABASE1, that is created
is taken as the default. But, the user can configure more as described in Setting
Up the ODA Database on page 508.
3BUF001092-510 513
To get a list of databases, including the default database, click on the selection
box. View the example in Figure 383 that lists the default and other configured
databases.
Figure 383. List of Databases
The parameters are described in Table 44.

5. Click Apply and then OK when finished.
If unable to connect to the selected database, it may be because the database
definition is invalid (more than one database table having the same name). In this
case, fix the database definition. Refer to Fixing Databases with Duplicate Table
Names on page 507.
Table 44. ODA Setup Parameters
Field Description
Data Source The default data source name.
Name
Service Host The machine to connect to. By default, it is localhost for this machine. But, this
would be changed for the client machines to the name of the machine that ODA is
running on.
514 3BUF001092-510
Section 14 Open Data Access Logging Status Information for Numericlog Queries
Table 44. ODA Setup Parameters (Continued)
Field Description
Service Port The Service Port should stay as 19986.
Service Data The name of the database to be connected to in the ODA.
Source
Logging Status Information for Numericlog Queries

The ODA Server has a logging function to facilitate debugging. Status information
for each query against the Numericlog table is recorded in a log file. Logging is
disabled by default. Leave logging disabled unless the system is having problems
that need to be provided to ABB support with a record of query activity.
This log does not record status information for queries against the real-time
database tables.
To enable (or disable) logging, use the EnableLogging tool and specify a new log
file name to maintain individual log files for each client connection.
The contents of the log file is deleted each time a new client connects to the ODA
Server. This minimizes the likelihood that the log file will grow too large. To
preserve the contents of a log file for a particular client connection, specify a
unique file name when logging is enabled.
1. Open the Enable/Disable logging dialog using the EnableLogging.exe
application file located in the ODA Provider folder. The default path is:
C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\ODA Provider\bin.
2. To enable or disable logging, Figure 384, click the corresponding radio button.
The Log File Name is a default file name. If new logging activity cannot
overwrite the existing log, enter a new name (with a .txt extension).
3. Click OK to register the changes.
3BUF001092-510 515
Logging Status Information for Numericlog Queries Section 14 Open Data Access
Figure 384. Enable/Disable Logging Dialog
The log file is associated with a specific data provider. The default file name for
ABBDataAccess Provider is ODAProviderLog.txt. This file is located in the ODA
Provider/Log folder. The default path is
C:\ProgramData\ABB\IM\ODA
To open the log file in the default text editor, double-click, or choose Open from the
context menu. An example log file is shown in Figure 385.
For each query the log file indicates the data source (table name), and echoes the
query. The log file also provides information regarding the status of internal ODA
Server components. This information is intended for ABB technical support
personnel for debugging.
Figure 385. Example Log File
516 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
Data Provider Applications

This section describes how to configure data providers to support access to 800xA
system data by Display Services, Desktop Trends, and certain add-in tools in
DataDirect (Excel Data Access). The default data provider installation supports
most data access requirements. Table 45 provides a quick reference for common
data provider applications that require site-specific configuration. Data provider
architecture is illustrated in Figure 386. To learn how data providers work, refer to
the Overview of Data Provider Functionality on page 520. General procedures such
as adding a new data provider, editing an existing data provider, or starting/stopping
data providers are covered in General Procedures on page 529.
Third party applications and SQL-based dialogs and scripts for Display and Client
Services, for example the SQL Query dialog in DataDirect, use Open Data Access
(ODA) rather than these data providers. How to set up ODA to support these
applications is described in Section 14, Open Data Access.
Table 45. Data Provider Applications
Application Type Description

Access to Oracle data by: ADO The ADO data provider named DBA supports access to
• PDL Extractor. message logs, PDLs, and Oracle-based numeric logs.
• DataDirect and Note: This data provider requires some site-specific
Display Services. configuration for Oracle access which is done during
post installation.
Enabling write access to DCS,OPC, Lets DataDirect and display clients write to process,
process, OPC, and LOG, OPC or numeric log objects. Refer to Enabling Write
numeric log objects. IMHDA Access on page 527.
3BUF001092-510 517
Data Provider Applications Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
Table 45. Data Provider Applications (Continued)
Application Type Description

SQL access to numeric ADO SQL queries for numeric log data require an ADO data
log data provider that provides Oracle access via the Open Data
Access (ODA) database named Database1. The
easiest way to create this data provider is to copy the
OR
existing ADO data provider, and make the following two
Improving performance on changes to the data provider argument list:
queries to DataDirect
• Change the -name argument, for example: from
Batch_Trend view
DBA to DBA1.
• Set the -dbname argument to Database1.
This same data provider may be used to improve the
performance of the DataDirect Batch_Trend view.
For further details on how to copy and configure data
providers, refer Copying an Existing Data Provider on
page 529.
Disallowing write access ADO If needed, add the disallow_sql_write argument to the
to the ADO data provider. argument list to NOT allow any SQL statements other
Note: Doing this will than those that begin with the SELECT keyword. Refer
disable PDL updates via to Editing Data Provider Configuration Files on page
DataDirect. 536.
Aspect System has OPCHDA The OPCHDA browser uses the forward slash character
properties being as a separator by default, and will not parse objects and
historized whose name properties correctly if they use this character. In this
contains the forward slash case, the OPCHDA browser must use a different
(/) character, or whose separator character. This is done by adding an optional
ancestor objects contain argument named
that character. -Browser_Separator to the AIPHDA data provider
One application for this is argument list.
with Harmony For systems where the / character is not used in the
Connectivity Servers property names nor in ancestor object names, no
where the default change in configuration is necessary.
separator cannot be used. For further details regarding configuration of this
argument, refer to the OPCHDA data provider argument
list in Table 54.
518 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers Data Provider Applications
NOTES:
1) The Information Management and
Connectivity Servers may reside on the
Display and Client Services same node.
Display Services 2) The Industrial IT Process Values,
DataDirect History Values, and Alarm/Event dialogs
Desktop Trends in DataDirect do not use data providers.
Information Management Server
ODBC
Oracle IMHDA AIPHDA Data Providers
DBA AIPOPC
OPC DA Proxy
IMHDA AIPHDA
Server Server
Calculation Softpoint
Services Server
Oracle-based
Message Logs
Numeric Logs
History Logs
PDLs
Connectivity Server Trend Logs
Process Data Sources
Figure 386. Data Provider Data Access
3BUF001092-510 519
Overview of Data Provider Functionality Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
Overview of Data Provider Functionality

Data access for Display Services, DataDirect, Desktop Trends, and Batch
Management PDL PFC display are supported by the ABB Data Service. This
service is composed of a service provider and data providers which are installed
with Display Services on the Information Management server. The default data
providers and supporting services are described in Table 46.
Table 46. Default Data Providers and Supporting Services
ADSS Default
Type Description
Label(1) Name(2)
OPC HDA Provides access to historical data from an OPC HDA server.
Returns up to 65,534 values per request. Two OPC HDA Data
providers are provided by default:
AIPHDA AIPHDA AIPHDA connects to the 800xA OPC HDA server. This server
supports seamless access to trend logs and history logs. It
also supports access to log attributes.
IMHDA IMHDA
IMHDA connects to the History Server OPC HDA server. This
server can only access history logs and is provided primarily
to support earlier data access applications configured to use
this server. It does not support access to log attributes.
AIPOPC AIPOPC OPC DA Provides access to realtime data from object properties. This
data provider connects to the default Aspect System.
ADO DBA ADO Provides access to Oracle data for Display Services,
DataDirect, and Batch Management PDL Browser. Site-
specific configuration is required during post-installation.
DCSOBJ DCS ABB OCS Used on Enterprise Historian 3.2/x or earlier for access to
Process realtime process data from Advant OCS objects, for example
Data CCF_CONTIN_LOOP in systems with MOD 300 software,
and PIDCON for systems with Master software.
DCSLOG LOG ABB OCS Used on Enterprise Historian 3.2/x or earlier for access to
History historical process (numeric) data. Returns up to 3200 values
Data per request.
OPC OPC OPC Provides access to realtime data from third party DA 1.0 &
2.0 data access server. Site-specific configuration is required.
520 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers Overview of Data Provider Functionality
Table 46. Default Data Providers and Supporting Services (Continued)
ADSS Default
Type Description
Label(1) Name(2)
ADO-DEMO DEMO ADO Supports Oracle data access for the Display Services
demonstration displays.
COM COM Service Connects data providers with client applications.
Provider
DDR DDR Display Manages display requests and command execution on the
Manager server. These displays are described in Information
Management Configuration for Display Services.
(1) Used to uniquely identify data provider in the ADSS Configuration tool.
(2) Used by data access applications to reference a specific data provider when there is more than one of the same
type.
Typically the default data providers are sufficient to support most data access
applications. Certain data access applications require small site-specific
adjustments. These are summarized in Table 45.
Additional data providers can be configured as required by the application. For
example, there may be a need to create an additional ADO data provider to support
SQL access to numeric logs, or access to another third-party database.
How the Service Provider - Data Provider Architecture Works

Desktop clients connect to the service provider on a server which is specified when
logging into the client application (for example, DataDirect). The client can use all
data providers connected to the service provider. This is illustrated in Figure 387.
By default, only local data providers are connected to the service provider. In this
case the client can only access data from the server it is connected to (local server).
This functionality is implemented in Node #1.
As an option, data providers can be configured on remote nodes and then connected
to the local service provider. This is used to combine data from multiple sources
(nodes) on the same screen. This functionality is implemented in Node #2.
3BUF001092-510 521
Overview of Data Provider Functionality Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
Desktop Client Desktop Client
Node #1 Node #2
Local Data Server Remote Data Server
Service
Provider
ADO (DBA) AIPOPC AIPOPC ADO (DBA) AIPOPC

Oracle Data History Data Real-time Data Oracle Data History Data
Data Providers
Figure 387. Architecture for Local/Remote Data Providers
To install remote data providers for Oracle Data Access on a platform that is
external to an Industrial IT system, consult ABB for additional guidelines.
Uniquely Identifying and Referencing Data Providers

If multiple data providers of the same type need to be configured on a server, ensure
that each data provider has a unique identification. The service provider will not
allow more than one data provider of the same type to connect unless the data
providers are uniquely identified. The unique ID is established by three data
provider attributes: type, channel number, and name.
Earlier Enterprise Historian platforms used channel number and type exclusively.
Since it is possible for an 800xA system application to have data providers and
service providers running different software versions, always consider software
version when configuring service and data providers. Table 47 describes the
relationship between type, channel number and name for different versions of the
service provider and data providers.
If more than one data provider of a given type is not used, the data access
applications are not required to reference a specific data provider. Data requests will
522 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers Overview of Data Provider Functionality
be routed via the correct data provider based on the type of data being requested.
When multiple data providers of the same type are connected, if a specific data
provider is not referenced, the data request will default to the data provider with
channel 0. If a different data provider needs to be used, it must be explicitly
referenced. Each of the client applications use a different method for referencing
data providers.
Display Services uses channel number for all data provider references EXCEPT
data statements. The default channel is zero (0). When using data statements in
Display scripts, and a data provider reference is required, use the -name argument.
DataDirect is used to choose whether to use channel number or -name. The default
setup is to use -name. This is recommended because channel number does not
support some data access functions, including process value update, history update,
history retrieval of raw data, and history bulk data retrieval. If channel number is
used, the same channel number applies to all data providers. The default channel is
zero (0). Select a different channel if necessary.
Batch Management PDL PFC display is hardcoded to use an ADO data provider
with the name DBA. This is the default name for the ADO data provider. Be sure
that the ADO data provider supporting those applications is named DBA, and that
no other active data providers use DBA.
3BUF001092-510 523
Data Service Supervision Configuration Dialog Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
Table 47. Operation of Channel Number, Type, and Name Based on Software Version
Versions Description
Both Service Provider The data provider connects to the service provider with name, type and
and Data Provider are channel number. When connecting only one data provider of a given
Version 3.2 or higher type to a service provider, the default channel number and name can be
used. When more than one data provider of the same type connects to a
service provider, each data provider MUST have a unique name. The
service provider does not allow multiple data providers of the same type
to connect unless their names are unique.
NOTE: Assign a unique channel number to each data provider when
connecting multiple data providers of the same type to a service
provider. This is not required to connect to the service provider; however,
channel number is used by many Display scripting functions and
DataDirect.
Assigning a new channel number also assigns the data provider a
unique default name. For example:
DSCOBJ -channel 0 is assigned the name DCS
DCSOBJ -channel 8 is assigned the name DCS8
Therefore, if a new channel number is assigned, a new name does not
have to be assigned. A name other than the assigned default can be
used.
Service Provider = 3.2 The Data Provider connects to the Service Provider with type and
or higher channel number. The Service Provider then uses these attributes to
Data Provider = 3.0 or generate a unique name as described above.
3.1
Service Provider = 3.0 The Data Provider connects to the Service Provider with type and
or 3.1 channel number. The version 3.0 Service Provider ignores Data Provider
Data Provider = 3.2 or names.
higher
Data Service Supervision Configuration Dialog

Configuration and management of services providers and data providers is via the
ABB Data Service Supervision (ADSS) Config dialog. To display the ADSS Config
524 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers Data Service Supervision Configuration Dialog
dialog, from the Windows task bar, choose Start>Settings>Control Panel and then
double-click on the ADSS Config Icon, Figure 388.
Double-click ADSS Config Icon to Display the ABB Data Service Supervision Config Dialog
Figure 388. Opening the ABB Data Services Supervision Configuration Dialog
The left side of this dialog is a browser that is used to select the data providers and
their respective attributes, Figure 389. Use the +/- button to show/hide data
provider’s and attributes.
The Supervision process for ADSS supervises all service and data providers. ADSS
is automatically started as a Windows process. To monitor and control ADSS, use
the Services icon in the Windows control panel. ADSS starts the service provider
and data providers according to their respective configurations. The service provider
(COM) is always started first. For details on configuring a data provider’s attributes,
refer to Editing Data Provider Configuration Files on page 536.
When a provider is selected in the browser, the following information is displayed
for the selected provider:
Provider, Status Indicates the selected provider’s label and status. This label is
only used in this dialog. This is NOT the name that desktop
client applications use to reference the data provider.
Argument Value Indicates the current value for the selected attribute. This field
can be edited to modify the service’s configuration. These
attributes are described in Table 49.
3BUF001092-510 525
Data Service Supervision Configuration Dialog Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
Click to
Show/Hide
Providers
ADO
Data Provider
ADO
Data Provider
Attributes
Other
Data Providers
Figure 389. Showing the Data Services Under Supervision
The context (right-click) menu, Figure 390, provides access to the following
provider management functions: Adding a Data Provider, Starting and Stopping
Providers, Deleting a Data Provider, and Adding Arguments to a Data Provider.
Figure 390. Context Menu for Data Services

Some functions are not available while the selected provider is running. In this
case, stop the provider to see the complete menu.
526 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers Enabling Write Access
Enabling Write Access

Write access lets Display and DataDirect users write to history logs, process objects,
and OPC objects. This is also required to support Bulk History Data Export.
Write access must be enabled on two levels:
• For history logs:
– at the system level - the corresponding (LOG or IMHDA) data provider’s
argument list must include the -Allow_Log_Write argument. This
argument is present by default.
– at the user level - the LOGWRITE user preference must be set to True
(enabled). This user preference is disabled by default. To enable it, refer to
Configuring User Preferences for Write Access on page 527.
• For process objects:
– at the system level - the data provider’s argument list must include the
-Allow_Object_Write argument. This argument is present by default.
– at the user level - the OBJECTWRITE user preference must be set to
True (enabled). This user preference is disabled by default. To enable it,
refer to Configuring User Preferences for Write Access on page 527.
• For OPC objects:
– at the system level - the data provider’s argument list must include the
-Allow_Object_Write argument. This argument is present by default.
– at the user level - the OBJECTWRITE user preference must be set to
True (enabled). This user preference is disabled by default. To enable it,
refer to Configuring User Preferences for Write Access on page 527.
Configuring User Preferences for Write Access

To do this:
1. Start the display client: Start>Programs>ABB Industrial IT
800xA>Information Mgmt>Display Services>Client>Client.
2. From the menu bar, choose User > Preferences, Figure 391.
3BUF001092-510 527
Configuring User Preferences for Write Access Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
Figure 391. Accessing User Preferences
3. From the User Preferences dialog, Figure 392, Click + to expand the RIGHTS
section, select OBJECTWRITE or LOGWRITE, or both, and check the check
box to change the preference value to True.
Select the Preference
Set Value to True
Figure 392. Enabling the OBJECTWRITE User Preference
When the LOGWRITE or OBJECTWRITE user preference is enabled for a user,

make sure that user has a secure password. Change the password if the default
password is still valid.
4. Reboot the computer to register the changes. Any changes made to user
preferences will not take affect until the computer is restarted.
528 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers General Procedures
General Procedures
This section describes the following procedures:
• Adding a Data Provider on page 529.
• Editing Data Provider Configuration Files on page 536.
• Starting and Stopping Providers on page 549.
• Deleting a Data Provider on page 549.
• Adding Arguments to a Data Provider on page 550.
These procedures are supported by the Data Service Supervision Configuration
Dialog.
Adding a Data Provider

There are various ways to add a data provider:
• The easiest way to add a new data provider is to copy an existing one. This
procedure is described in Copying an Existing Data Provider on page 529.
• Considerations for adding a remote data provider are described in Adding a
Remote Data Provider on page 531.
• A data provider can also be added from scratch. This procedure is described in
Adding a New Data Provider from Scratch on page 533.
To edit a data provider, refer to Editing Data Provider Configuration Files on page
536.
The ADO data provider supports connection to third-party databases: MDB,

ODBC, or GENERIC. When adding an ADO data provider for connection to a
third party database, ensure the database is properly installed and configured. For
details, refer to the applicable OEM user’s guide.
Copying an Existing Data Provider

To copy an existing data provider:
1. Start the ADSS Config function from the Windows Control Panel.
2. Use the browser to select the data provider to be copied.
3BUF001092-510 529
Copying an Existing Data Provider Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
If the data provider to be copied is currently running (Status = Started), then stop
it. Right-click and choose Stop Provider from the context menu.
3. After the data provider to be copied is stopped, right-click again and choose
Copy Provider from the context menu. This displays a dialog for specifying
the unique name for the new data provider, Figure 393.
Figure 393. Copy Server Dialog
4. Enter a new name, then click OK. This adds the new data provider in the
browser under Supervision. This name labels the data provider in the browser.
This name DOES NOT uniquely identify the data provider for data access by
display elements.
5. Configure any data provider attributes as required.
If both the original data provider and the copy are being connected to the same
service provider, then either the -name or -channel arguments, or both MUST
be edited. The Service Provider will not allow connection of more than one
Data Provider of the same type, unless they have different names.
Assigning a new channel number also assigns a new name. Therefore, if a new
channel number is assigned, then a name is not required. The assigned default
name does not have to be used.
To access the -channel or -name argument, click Arguments. Then enter a
new channel number or name in the Argument Value field, Figure 394.
If the -channel or -name argument is not included in the argument list, then add
the argument to the list.
Typically, defaults can be used for all other attributes. For details regarding
attributes, refer to Table 49 in Editing Data Provider Configuration Files on
page 536.
6. Click Save to save the new data provider.
530 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers Adding a Remote Data Provider
7. Click Start to start the new data provider.

8. To verify proper start-up and review any status errors, refer to Checking
Display Server Status on page 550.
Enter new name

specification
Figure 394. Configuring Data Provider Attributes
Adding a Remote Data Provider

This procedure is basically the same as Adding a Data Provider. The only difference
is that data providers are installed and configured on the remote computer. Also,
there are special considerations for the -server and -name arguments. Refer to the
guidelines below:
• The -server argument must be set to the node name of the computer where the
corresponding service provider resides.
• If a local Data Provider of the type being added remotely is already connected
to the Service Provider, then be sure that the -name argument assigned to the
remote Data Provider is unique.
Assigning a new -channel number also assigns a new name. Therefore, if a
new channel number is assigned, then a name is not required. The assigned
default name does not have to be used.
The following two examples illustrate the procedure for installing and configuring a
remote data provider. In both cases a remote data provider is required to connect a
computer client to a third party (Oracle) database on a remote node. In example 1,
Display Services software is installed on both the local display server, and the
3BUF001092-510 531
Adding a Remote Data Provider Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
remote computer where the Oracle database is installed. In example 2, the computer
where the Oracle database is installed does not have Display Services software.
Example 1 - Remote Computer Has Display Services

Two computers, node01 and node02, both have Display Services installed. The
display clients connected to node01 need to access data from an Oracle database on
node02.
On node02, add an ADO-type data provider and edit the new data provider’s
configuration file, Figure 395. The -server argument is set to node01 and the
channel argument is set to a unique channel number as related to node01 (for
example, channel 1).
ADSS must be stopped on node02. ADSS will be restarted when the computer is
restarted. The new ADO data provider will be initiated and establish a connection to
the service provider on node01.
To verify proper operation, from node01 check the server status. The newly
configured data provider should be visible as a connected data provider to the
service provider on node01.
Enter new server

specification here
Enter new channel

specification here
Figure 395. New Entry to Configuration File on node02
532 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers Adding a New Data Provider from Scratch
Example 2 - Remote Computer DOES NOT Have Display Services

This scenario is essentially the same as described for example 1, except the remote
computer does not have Display Services software installed. Be sure to load the
Display Server software on the remote computer before configuring data providers
on that computer. The Client software does not need to be loaded.
In each case the license for the additional data providers is located with the service
provider.
Since the computer is being used just as a data provider, only the data providers are
required for the local ADSS. These services must be removed:
• COM.
• DDR.
• And any other data provider that is not required.
Then modify or add the data providers and channels required. ADSS will be started
when the computer is re-started. The data providers are then started by ADSS. The
data provider will establish communication to the service provider configured.
To verify configuration, on the node with the service provider, check the server
status to verify that the data providers are established.
If an application client specifies an invalid channel, the application defaults to
channel 0. To prevent defaulting to channel 0 in the event of an invalid channel
specification, be sure that no data providers are assigned channel number 0. To do
this, change the channel number of the default data providers, and do not use
channel number 0 for any additional data providers.
Adding a New Data Provider from Scratch

To add a new data provider:
1. Invoke the ADSS Config function from the Windows Control Panel. To do this,
choose Start>Settings>Control Panel. Then double-click on the ADSS
Config Icon. This displays the Data Service Supervision Configuration dialog.
2. Use the browser to right-click on any item (for instance Supervision), and
choose Add Server from the context menu, Figure 396.
3BUF001092-510 533
Adding a New Data Provider from Scratch Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
Figure 396. Adding a Data Provider
This displays the New Server dialog, Figure 397.
Figure 397. New Server Dialog
Server Type in this dialog does NOT refer to the type of data provider, but rather
the method by which Windows handles this process (COM or Command Line).
Currently, only command line processes are supported. Thus the Server Type is
fixed as CMD and cannot be changed.
3. Enter a unique name for the data provider in the Server Name field. This is the
name that the data provider will be identified by in the browser under
Supervision. This name DOES NOT uniquely identify the data provider for
data access by display elements.
4. Enter the path to the executable (.exe) file for the data provider. Enter the path
directly in the Server Path field, or use the Browse button. The executable files
reside in: c:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\ Inform
IT\Display Services\Server\bin.
The file names correspond to the process names as indicated in Table 48.
534 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers Adding a New Data Provider from Scratch
Table 48. Default Data Providers
Data Provider Default

Description Process Name
Type Name
Historical data in Historical process data (numeric log ADSdpOPCHDA.EXE AIPHDA
800xA system data).
OPC Data Provides access to realtime data from ADSdpOPC.EXE OPC
either DA 1.0 & 2.0 data access server.
Third-party Third-party database on specified host. ADSdpADO.EXE DBA
Database
ABB OCS Realtime process data from Advant OCS ADSdpDCS.EXE DCS
Realtime Process objects, for example Note: Same executable
Data CCF_CONTIN_LOOP in systems with is used for ABB OCS
MOD 300 software, and PIDCON for real time and historical
systems with Master software. data.
ABB OCS History Historical process data (numeric log ADSdpDCS.EXE LOG
Data data).
5. Click OK when finished. This adds the new data provider under Supervision in
the browser.
6. Configure any data provider attributes as required.
If a data provider of the type being added is already connected to the service
provider, then edit either the -name or -channel arguments, or both. These
arguments uniquely identify the data provider. The name is NOT automatically
updated when a new data provider name in the New Server dialog (step 2) is
specified. The Service Provider will not allow connection of more than one
Data Provider of the same type, unless they have different names.
Assigning a new channel number also assigns a new name. Therefore, it is not
necessary to edit the name unless something other than the assigned default
name is preferred.
Refer to the procedure for Copying an Existing Data Provider to learn how to
access the -name and -channel arguments.
3BUF001092-510 535
Editing Data Provider Configuration Files Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
Editing Data Provider Configuration Files

The configurable parameters for each service are listed under the service name in
the browser. Show/hide the configurable attributes for a specific service by clicking
the corresponding +/- symbol.
The attribute values can be read while the service is still running; however, the
service must be stopped before one or more of its attributes can be changed. To
stop a service, refer to Starting and Stopping Providers on page 549.
Table 49 describes the configuration parameters for the display, management, and
data access services. Common arguments for all data providers are described in
Table 50. Specific arguments based on service type are described in Table 51 -
ADSspCOM, Table 52 - ADSdpDDR, Table 53 - ADSdpADO, and Table 55 -
ADSdpDCS.
When changing arguments to a data provider, add them at the beginning of the
line or only have a single parameter at the end of a command line. Changes to
data provider arguments cannot be saved when an additional argument is added at
the end of the line.
Table 49. Common Configuration Parameters for Windows-based Server
Server Type This does NOT refer to the type of data provider, but rather the method by which
Windows handles this process (COM or Command Line). Currently, only
command line processes are supported. Thus the Server Type is fixed as CMD
and cannot be changed.
Path This is the path to the executable (.exe) file for the data provider. The path is
initially defined when the data provider was added as described in Adding a Data
Provider on page 529.
The executable files reside in: c:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\
Inform IT\Display Services\Server\bin.
The file names correspond to the process names as indicated in Table 46.
Wait This is the time to wait on the initial attempt to start up. The value is in
milliseconds. The default is 100.
536 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers Editing Data Provider Configuration Files
Table 49. Common Configuration Parameters for Windows-based Server (Continued)
Arguments Arguments depend on the data service type. For arguments common to all data
providers, refer to Table 50. For specific arguments for each type of service, refer
to:
Table 51 for ADSspCOM.EXE
Table 52 for ADSdpDDR.EXE
Table 53 for ADSdpADO.EXE
Table 54 for ADSdpOPCHDA.EXE
Table 55 for ADSdpDCS.EXE
Table 56 for ADSdpDCS.EXE
Table 57 for ADSdpOPC.EXE
Priority The default is -1.
CanRestart This specifies whether or not the service is restarted by supervision if the service
goes offline.
TRUE- Data Service can be restarted. This is the default value.
FALSE - Data Service can not be restarted.
MaxRestarts This is the number of times the data provider should attempt to re-start if its
server has stopped. The default is 3.
StartAfter This specifies the place in the starting order for a Data Service. COM is always
the first data service to be started, followed by DDR. After DDR, all other services
are given equal precedence.
WaitForLogin This specifies whether or not the Service will wait for login before it is started.
TRUE- Do not start until client is logged in. Data Service can be restarted.
FALSE - Start immediately. Do not wait for log in. This is the default value.
StartupMode This specifies whether or not the service is started automatically by supervision,
or must be started manually via the ABB Data Service Supervision Config dialog.
AUTOMATIC - Start automatically by supervision. This is the default value.
MANUAL - Must be started manually via the dialog.
3BUF001092-510 537
Table 49. Common Configuration Parameters for Windows-based Server (Continued)
RestartDelay This is an optional parameter to specify the interval between re-start attempts (in
milliseconds). The default is 100.
TerminateDelay This specifies the time to delay (in milliseconds) when the service is asked to
stop. The default is 0.
Table 50. Arguments Common to All Data Providers
Argument1 Description
-name This name is used by certain data access applications to identify a specific
data provider when there are more than one data provider of that type.
Specifically, the -name argument is used by DataDirect when the Use
Channel Numbers option is disabled, and by display scripts that use the
Data statement.
When more than one Data Provider of the same type is connected, each
Data Provider MUST have a unique name. Assigning a new channel number
also assigns a new name. Therefore, if a new channel number is assigned,
the name does not have to be edited unless the assigned default name is
not preferred.
-channel This also uniquely identifies a specific data provider when there are more
than one data provider of that type. The -channel argument is used by
DataDirect when the Use Channel Numbers option is enabled, and by
display scripts that do not use the Data statement.
Default data providers are assigned CHANNEL 0. If an application client
specifies an invalid channel, the application defaults to channel 0. To prevent
defaulting to channel 0 in the event of an invalid channel specification, be
sure that no data providers are assigned channel number 0. To do this,
change the channel number of the default data providers, and do not use
channel number 0 for any additional data providers.
538 3BUF001092-510
Table 50. Arguments Common to All Data Providers (Continued)
Argument1 Description
-server This is the name or IP address of the service provider. For a local node
installation, this should be the name of the local node. To not have the data
provider start automatically when the corresponding Display server is
started, set the value for Server in Arguments to NoNode.
NOTE:
1. For specific arguments for each type of service, see Table 51 for ADSspCOM.EXE, Table 52 for
ADSdpDDR.EXE, Table 53 for ADSdpADO.EXE, Table 54 for ADSdpOPCHDA.EXE, Table 55 for
ADSdpDCS.EXE, Table 56 for ADSdpDCS.EXE, Table 57 for ADSdpOPC.EXE.
Table 51 describes the arguments that are unique for the ADSspCOM.EXE data
provider. This data provider also has arguments common to all data providers as
The no reverse DNS setting on the COM process is set to -UseReverseDNS 0 by
default so DNS lookup does not prevent data provider communication. COM
arguments are not reset upon upgrade of a system and defaults may have to be reset.
Table 51. ADSspCOM.EXE Arguments
Argument Description
-server The host name or TCP/IP address where the service provider runs. For a local
node installation, this should be the name of the local node. To not have the
service provider start automatically when the corresponding ADSS is started,
set the value for Server to NoNode.
-port The TCP/IP socket port number. Three sockets are used, starting from the one
specified.
Default: 19014
Range: 1000<= n <= 65000
3BUF001092-510 539
Table 51. ADSspCOM.EXE Arguments (Continued)
-AliveTimeOut Used to disconnect clients if they are quiet for the time specified. It can also be
used on data providers to indicate how long to wait to disconnect a data provider
from the main service provider.
Default: 60
Range: 0 <= x <= ...
Unit: Seconds
Remote data providers to an Information Management node may not recognize
that the Information Management node has been restarted causing the data
provider to wait for the period defined by this argument before reconnecting.
Normally, the Data Provider on the remote node detects that the Com Port has
been closed and kills itself so that it can reconnect after the node restarts. In
some cases, the Data Provider doesn't detect the Com Port closing and hangs
until the -AliveTimeout argument expires causing the Data Provider to wait
before killing itself so that it can reconnect. Set this argument to a reasonable
period (about 300 seconds) so the node has time to reboot. This is especially
important for the AIPHDA and IMHDA data providers if their values retain an old
default value of 6000 seconds.
-license_key & These are the license key and text as entered when the display server is
-license_text installed, or when the license was updated. The key is entered in quotes.
-UseReverse ADSspCOM is configured to avoid DNS lookup (default for a new system). This
DNS 0 is used when there are DNS server problems. For example, ADSspCOM may
time out accessing the DNS server and clients trying to connect will time out as
their time out is likely to be less than the DNS server time out.
Table 52 describes the arguments that are unique for the ADSdpDDR.EXE data
540 3BUF001092-510
Table 52. ADSdpDDR.EXE Arguments
-server The host name or TCP/IP address where the service provider runs.
For a local node installation, this should be the name of the local
node. To not have the data provider start automatically when the
corresponding ADSS is started, set the value for Server to NoNode.
-port The TCP/IP socket port number. Three sockets are used, starting
from the one specified.
Default: 19014
Range: 1000<= n <= 65000
-datapath This is the path to the directory where the display files reside. The
default is: c:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\ Inform
IT\Display Services\Server\Data
-Allow_System_Access This argument is required to support bulk data export for client
applications such as DataDirect. This argument is provided by
default. In addition to this argument, the SYSTEMACCESS user
preference must be enabled. This is the default setting for this
preference.
Table 53 describes the arguments that are unique for the ADSdpADO.EXE data
Table 53. ADSdpADO.EXE Arguments
-server The host name or TCP/IP address where the service provider runs. For a
local node installation, this should be the name of the local node. To not
have the data provider start automatically when the corresponding ADSS
is started, set the value for Server to NoNode.
-port The TCP/IP socket port number. Three sockets are used, starting from
the one specified.
Default: 19014
Range: 1000<= n <= 65000
3BUF001092-510 541
Table 53. ADSdpADO.EXE Arguments (Continued)
-dbtype This is the type of database to which this data provider connects. The
choices are: MDB, ODBC, and GENERIC. For MDB and ODBC
databases, be sure to also configure the corresponding username and
password. For GENERIC databases, be sure to specify the connection
string (-constr argument).
-dbname This is the name or full path to the database. For dbtype MDB, use the full
path. For dbtype ODBC, use the ODBC name.
-user This is the user name for logging into the database. This is required when
the dbtype is ODBC or MDB.
-password This is the password for logging into the database. This is required when
the dbtype is ODBC or MDB.
disallow_sql_write Add this argument to the argument list to NOT allow any SQL statements
other than those that begin with the SELECT keyword.
-constr This is the full connect string. This is only required when the dbtype is
GENERIC.
-CmdTMO <n> This is the command timeout in seconds (n = number of seconds). The
default is 30 seconds
ReConnINT <n> This is the reconnect interval in seconds (n = number of seconds). The
default is 0. When n = 0, reconnect is disabled, otherwise the provider will
attempt connecting the database at the specified interval, until successful
connection or the reconnect timeout period (if specified) is exceeded.
-ReConnTMO <n> This is the Reconnect timeout period in seconds (n = number of
seconds). The default is 0. When n = 0 there's no timeout and the
provider will keep on trying to connect to the database. If the reconnect
timeout period is exceeded, the provider will terminate.
542 3BUF001092-510
Table 53. ADSdpADO.EXE Arguments (Continued)
FatalErrors This is a listing of error codes which should be treated as Fatal (for
"<n1>;<n2>;....;<nX example, missing connection to the database). If such an error occurs,
>" the data provider will terminate. The format to specify error codes is a list
of numbers separated by semicolons (;) and enclosed in quotation marks.
For example: -FatalErrors "11; 567;-26"
Entering an asterisk in place of error codes will cause the provider to
terminate at any error. For example: –FatalErrors “*”
-ReturnAllErrors Refer to ReturnAllErrors Argument below.
"TRUE|FALSE"
ReturnAllErrors Argument
Normally, on errors the ADO provider returns an array containing:
ADS Error Header DP Error Header DP Error Text

ADS specific Error code Last DP specific Error code Last DP specific Error Text
Some data base providers are capable of generating several errors as a result of one
request. If ‘ReturnAllErrors’ is FALSE (default), only the last error code/text is
returned. If ‘ReturnAllErrors’ is TRUE, the returned array will contain all the error
codes/texts encountered:
ADS Error Header DP Error Header DP Error Text

ADS specific Error code 1st DP specific Error code 1st DP specific Error Text
ADS specific Error code 2nd DP specific Error code 2nd DP specific Error Text
Example:
The connection to the SQL server fails. If ReturnAllErrors FALSE (default):
3BUF001092-510 543
ADS Error ADO Error Text

-106 11 [Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][TCP/IP
Sockets] General network error. Check the network
documentation.
If ReturnAllErrors TRUE:
ADS Error ADO Error Text

Sockets] ConnectionWrite (send()).
Sockets] General network error. Check the network
documentation.
Table 54 describes the arguments that are unique for the ADSdpOPCHDA.EXE data
Table 54. ADSdpOPCHDA.EXE Arguments
-OPCHDAServer <xxx> ProgID for OPCHDA server.
If the AIPOPCHDA Server is being used, the Server ProgID is
ABB.AfwOpcDaSurrogate.
If the IMOPCHDA Server is being used, the Server ProgID is
HsHDAServer.HDAServer.
-OPCHDAServerHost <xxx> H Host name of the computer where the OPCHDA server resides.
This is only required if OPCHDA server is on a remote host.
-ALLOW_LOG_WRITE If this argument is not specified, clients cannot write to history
logs. In addition to this argument, the LOGWRITE user
preference must be enabled. The default setting for this
preference is disabled. For details on how to set this user
preference, refer to Configuring User Preferences on page 579.
544 3BUF001092-510
Table 54. ADSdpOPCHDA.EXE Arguments
-Browser_Separator This applies to the AIPHDA data provider and is used when an
Aspect System has properties being historized whose name
contains the forward slash (/) character, or whose ancestor
objects contain that character. One application for this is the
Harmony Connectivity Server where the default separator
cannot be used.
The OPCHDA browser uses the forward slash character as a
separator by default, and will not parse objects and properties
correctly if they use this character. In this case, the OPCHDA
browser must use a different separator character. The
supported separator characters are "\","-" , "," and ".".
As an example, to declare the backslash as the separator, add
the argument as follows: -Browser_Separator \
For Aspect Systems where the / character is not used in the
property names nor in ancestor object names, no change in
configuration is necessary.
NOTE: A data provider will support access to a data source that
uses a special browser separator, but it will not support the
other data source. For example, the data provider will not
support both a special browser separator configured for 800xA
for Harmony process opbjects and data sources that use the
default browser separator such as AC 800M process objects.
Creating multiple data providers, one for each different required
browser separator, and selecting the applicable data provider as
required in the client application will solve this problem.
Table 55 describes the arguments that are unique for the ADSdpDCS.EXE data
3BUF001092-510 545
Table 55. ADSdpDCS.EXE Arguments
server The host name or TCP/IP address where the service provider runs. For
a local node installation, this should be the name of the local node. To
not have the data provider start automatically when the corresponding
Display server is started, set the value for Server to NoNode.
the one specified.
Default: 19014
Range: 1000<= n <= 65000
-name This is the assigned name for the data provider.
-Allow_Object_Write If this argument is specified, clients can write to process objects. If this
argument is not specified, write transactions are not allowed.
In addition to this argument, the OBJECTWRITE user preference must
be enabled. The default setting for this preference is disabled.
For details on how to set this user preference, refer to the section on
configuring user preferences in Configuring User Preferences on page
579.
Table 56 describes the arguments that are unique for the ADSdpLOG.EXE data
546 3BUF001092-510
Table 56. ADSdpLOG.EXE Arguments
server The host name or TCP/IP address where the service provider runs. For
a local node installation, this should be the name of the local node. To
not have the data provider start automatically when the corresponding
Display server is started, set the value for Server to NoNode.
the one specified.
Default: 19014
Range: 1000<= n <= 65000
-name This is the assigned name for the data provider.
LogHandler
-Allow_Log_Write If this argument is specified, clients can modify existing log entries, and
add new log entries. If this argument is not specified, write transactions
are not allowed.
In addition to this argument, the LOGWRITE user preference must be
enabled. The default setting for this preference is disabled.
579.
Table 57 describes the arguments that are unique for the ADSdpOPC.EXE data
3BUF001092-510 547
ADO Data Provider for Oracle Access Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
Table 57. ADSdpOPC.EXE Arguments
-OPCprogID <xxx> Logical name for OPC server.
For remote OPC servers such as Symphony, Freelance, or SattLine, use
the Data Provider Configuration Wizard to get this information.
-OPChost <xxx> Host name of the computer where the OPC server resides. This is only
required if OPC server is on a remote host. Do not specify if OPC server
and data provider are on the same host.
For remote OPC servers such as Symphony, Freelance, or SattLine, use
the Data Provider Configuration Wizard to get this information.
-Allow_Object_Write If this argument is specified, clients can write to OPC objects. If this
argument is not specified, write transactions are not allowed.
In addition to this argument, the OBJECTWRITE user preference must be
enabled. The default setting for this preference is disabled.
579.
-EventUpdateRate There is no event subscription on OPC, but a low update rate can simulate
<nnn> this. Default: 250, Unit: milliseconds
-EventDeadBand Percent of difference between low and high engineering units range of
<nnn> analog values. (EU values are specified on the OPC server). Default: 0.00,
Unit: Percent
-CacheWrites If true, the OPC initialization and setup for write commands will never be
removed, resulting in better performance for following writes to the same
object. This uses more memory. Default: Not specified not cached). Range:
Specified | Not specified
ADO Data Provider for Oracle Access

Table 58 indicates the ADO data provider configuration to support Oracle access. If
another ADO data provider is being added to support SQL access for Oracle-based
numeric logs, copy the existing data provider with the configuration shown in
Table 58, and change the -name argument (for example: DBA2).
548 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers Starting and Stopping Providers
Table 58. ADO Data Provider Set-up for Oracle Access
Argument Value
-port 19014
-channel 0
-pass history - Password for the history user.
-server localhost
-dbtype ODBC
-ReconnINT 10 - Retry interval (in seconds) for reconnecting to the Oracle database if the
data provider is disconnected from the Oracle database.
-user history - Username for the history user.
-dbname Defaults to localhost. DO NOT change this specification
-name DBA
-FatalErrors “03114” (quotation marks required) - Indicates that oracle error code “03114” for
disconnect will be considered fatal.
-dbname matches ODBC Data Source Name
Figure 398. Detailed View of ADO Arguments
Starting and Stopping Providers

To manually start or stop a data provider, select the data provider, right-click, and
then choose Start Provider or Stop Provider from the context menu.
Deleting a Data Provider

To delete a data provider, use the browser to select the data provider, right-click, and
then choose Delete Provider from the context menu.
3BUF001092-510 549
Adding Arguments to a Data Provider Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
The data provider will be deleted immediately (after the specified

TerminateDelay time). There is NO prompt to confirm or cancel.
Adding Arguments to a Data Provider

For some data providers, arguments can be added which are then displayed in the
configuration dialog. To add arguments, first stop the provider. Then right-click, and
choose Add arguments from the context menu. This displays a dialog for selecting
the argument to add. Figure 399 show the add arguments dialog for an ADO data
provider.
Figure 399. Example Add Arguments Dialog
Checking Display Server Status

To check server status, from the Windows task bar,
1. Choose Start>Programs>ABB Industrial IT 800xA>Information
Mgmt>Display Services>Server Status.
This displays a dialog for specifying the server hostname, Figure 400.
550 3BUF001092-510
Section 15 Configuring Data Providers Checking Display Server Status
Figure 400. Specifying Server Hostname
2. Enter the hostname for the data server where the data providers are located.
Leaving the hostname blank defaults to localhost. As an option, specify the
maximum time to wait for the server to respond.
3. Click OK. This displays the server status window, Figure 401.
Number of Client Licenses
Number of Data Providers

List of Connected
Data Providers
Number & List of

Connected Clients
Figure 401. Display Server:COMM Window
3BUF001092-510 551
Checking Display Server Status Section 15 Configuring Data Providers
This window provides the following information related to the Display Server:
License Text This field indicates the license text.

License Will This indicates when the current license is scheduled to
Expire expire. After entering the permanent license, this should
indicate that the permanent license will never expire.
Started This field indicates when the server was started.
Facilities This is not applicable at this time.
Licenses These fields show the total number of purchased licenses,
and the available licenses not currently being used:
• Build - When logging in with Build access Display
Services can be used in both the Build mode and the
Run mode.
• MDI - Multiple Document (Display) Interface. When
logging with MDI Run access, multiple displays can be
run at the same time.
• SDI - Single Document (Display) Interface. When
logging with SDI Run access, only one display at a time
can be run.
• ADD - DataDirect.
• DP - This is the number of data providers connected.
Data Providers This shows the number of data providers connected. Display
Connected Services must have one data provider connected.
Clients Connected This shows how many clients are connected to this server.
The information provided includes the node name, type (MDI
or SDI), and date and time when the client connected.
552 3BUF001092-510
Section 16 Authentication
Usage within Information Management

Authentication can be configured for certain operations related to Information
Management to help meet FDA 21CFR part 11 requirements. Authentication
determines whether or not approval will be required before a user will be allowed to
perform a certain function, for example: activating logs in a log set.
Authentication may be set to one of three levels:
• None,
• Reauthentication requires one user to be approved (by entering user name and
password), and
• Double authentication requires two users to be approved.
If authentication for an operation is configured, a dialog is displayed when the
operation is attempted, Figure 402, and the user must enter the proper credentials
before the operation can proceed.
The standard authentication mechanism used by other 800xA system functions is
NOT used by Information Management. This section describes how to use
The
authentication specifically for Information Management.
Authentication for runtime operations related to softpoint signals is configured
via the signal configuration aspect. This is described in Configuring
Authentication for Signal Types on page 49.
For aspects related softpoint configuration, refer to Configuring Authentication
for Aspects Related to Softpoint Configuration on page 558.
3BUF001092-510 553
Configuring Authentication Section 16 Authentication
Single Authentication Dialog
Double Authentication Dialog
Figure 402. Authentication Dialogs
Configuring Authentication
Authentication may be configured on an individual basis for each operation
associated with aspect categories (except softpoints). Table 59 lists the operations
for which authentication may be configured. The operations are listed by aspect
category, which are grouped by aspect system.
554 3BUF001092-510
Section 16 Authentication Configuring Authentication
Authentication is configured via an aspect category’s Inform IT Authentication

Category aspect. Typically, this aspect already exists in the aspect category’s aspect
list, and all operations will be preset to None. It this case, the authentication level
may be changed for an aspect category operation by displaying the aspect’s
configuration view, selecting the operation, selecting the authentication level, and
then clicking Apply. This is illustrated in Figure 403.
1) Display Inform IT Authentication Category Aspect for an Aspect Category
2) Select an
Operation
3) Select the
Authentication
Level
Figure 403. Configuring Authentication
If the Inform IT Authentication Category aspect does not yet exist, then add it to the
aspect category’s aspect list. If the list of operations for the aspect category is not
complete, then any missing operations may be added. To do this, click Add, then
enter the operation name and click OK, Figure 404.
3BUF001092-510 555
Configuring Authentication Section 16 Authentication
Add the Inform IT Authentication Category aspect to the History Configuration,

Aspect System/Log Configuration, Aspect Type/Log Configuration, Aspect
Category to allow authentication of numeric logs.
Figure 404. Adding an Operation
Table 59. Operations for which Authentication may be Configured
Aspect System Aspect Category Operations

Inform IT Authentication Inform IT Authentication Modify
History Configuration Log Configuration Modify
Activate
Log List Activate
Log Set Modify
Activate
Message Log Modify
Activate
Inform IT Historian
Report Log Modify
Activate
View Logs Activate
View PDL Modify
Delete PDL
556 3BUF001092-510
Section 16 Authentication Configuring Authentication
Table 59. Operations for which Authentication may be Configured (Continued)

Archive Device Modify
Publish
Unpublish
Initialize
Remount
Override Backup
Archive Group Modify
Industrial IT Archive Rescan
Reset Last Archive Time
Manual Archive
Archive Volume Modify
Restore
Initialize
Publish
Unpublish
Copy Volume
Action Aspect Modify
Read
Job Description Modify
Read
Scheduler
Manage
Scheduling Definition Modify
Read
Start
Calculation Enable
Modify
Execute
Calculation
Calculation Status View Enable
Modify
Execute
3BUF001092-510 557
Configuring Authentication for Aspects Related to Softpoint Configuration Section 16 Authentication
Table 59. Operations for which Authentication may be Configured (Continued)

OLE DB DA Tables Modify
OLE DB Data Access Tables
OLE DB HIstory Access Tables Modify
Configuring Authentication for Aspects Related to

Softpoint Configuration
This section describes how to configure authentication for aspects related to
softpoints. This procedure is different than the one used to configure authentication
for aspects related to other Information Management functions.
Authentication for runtime operations for softpoint signals is configured as
described in Configuring Authentication for Signal Types on page 49.
Authentication can be configured for the following aspect types related to softpoint
configuration:
• In the PCA Aspect System:
Binary
Integer
Object
Real
String
• In the Softpoint System Aspect System:
Alarm Event Configuration
Alarm Event Settings
Collection
Deploy
Generic Control Network
Process Object Configuration
Signal Configuration
For these aspect types, when authentication is configured, that configuration applies
to all operations which may be performed on those aspects (unlike the other
558 3BUF001092-510
Section 16 Authentication Configuring Authentication for Aspects Related to Softpoint Configuration
Information Management aspects where authentication can be applied on an

operation-by-operation basis.
To configure authentication for one or more of the above aspect types:
1. Set the Advanced Access Control to True. This is done via the System Settings
aspect for the Domain object in the Admin structure, Figure 405.
This will enable authentication for all aspect categories which have been
configured to be enabled. If the Advanced Access Control was set to false to
disable authentication on those aspect categories, they will now be enabled.
Figure 405. Setting Advanced Access Control to True
2. Then (reference Figure 406):

a. Go to the Aspect System structure.
b. Select the applicable aspect type under the PCA or Softpoint aspect
system.
c. Select the Aspect category Definition aspect.
3BUF001092-510 559
Configuring Authentication for Aspects Related to Softpoint Configuration Section 16 Authentication
d. Check the check box for the authentication level desired:

Re-authentication Required or Double Authentication Required.
Figure 406. Configuring Authentication
560 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration
Overview
This section describes administrative procedures for Information Management
applications in the 800xA system. Access to most of these functions is via the
Administrative Tools utility on the Windows Control Panel, Figure 407. To access
the PAS administrative tools, from the Windows task bar choose:
Start>Settings>Control Panel>Administrative Tools>PAS.
Figure 407. Accessing Information Management System Administration Functions
3BUF001092-510 561
Configuring OMF Shared Memory Section 17 System Administration
To use these system administration functions, Domain Administrator privileges is

required in the Windows system. The user name used must have Domain
Administrator rights.
For consolidation nodes, a domain user with domain administrator privileges may
be used, or a locally-defined user with administrator privileges, depending on
whether or not the consolidation node resides in a domain.
Configuring OMF Shared Memory

OMF Shared memory size defines the size of shared memory for processes that use
the OMF software. If the shared memory is too small, processes may be aborted
without any error messages (the Process Administration Services will discover that
the process has been aborted). The default shared memory size is 8,192 Kbytes. To
adjust OMF shared memory size, refer to OMF Shared Memory Size on page 607.
Start-up and Shutdown

Information Management software processes are started, shut down, and supervised
by the Process Administration Services (PAS) window, Figure 408, independent of
Windows. Refer to Stopping Oracle on page 567 to stop Oracle processes.
Stop PAS first before restarting or shutting down the computer once History
Services has been started and is collecting data. PAS performs an orderly
shutdown of the ABB software and any user processes under its supervision.
Failure to stop PAS before restarting or shutting down the computer will result in
loss of History data, and may corrupt History data files.
562 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration PAS Window
Figure 408. Process Administration Service Window
PAS Window
To access the PAS window, log in as an Domain Administrator-level user or a user
in the PAS operator list. Open the PAS window from the Windows task bar:
Start>Settings>Control Panel>Administrative Tools >PAS>Process
Administration.
This window is for starting and stopping all processes under PAS supervision. It
also provides access to advanced functions for debugging.
The process list shows all processes specified in the Windows registry under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\ABB\PAS\Startup. The information
provided in this list is described in Table 60. PAS Window controls are described in
Table 61.
3BUF001092-510 563
Starting and Stopping All Processes Section 17 System Administration
Table 60. PAS Process List
Field Description
Process Name Name of the processes.
Supervision Enabled When a process is removed from PAS supervision (Advanced Functions on
or Disabled page 565), an X icon is placed to the left of the process name.
Process State State of the supervised process, normally Started or Stopped.
Priority Order in which processes run. When the processor is busy, this determines
which processes will be run at all.
Table 61. PAS Window Controls
Button Description
Start All/Stop All Start or stop all processes. Refer to Starting and Stopping All Processes.
Restart All Stop and then restart all processes.
Reset Resets failed processes to the Stopped state.
Refresh Clears the process list and queries PAS for the current process list. This may
be used if the list gets out of sync with the PAS internal state.
Advanced>> Expands the window to show controls for advanced functions. Refer to
Advanced Functions on page 565.
Connect This button is only visible when the PAS window is disconnected from PAS. If
this occurs, use this button to reconnect the PAS window to PAS
Starting and Stopping All Processes

To stop all PAS processes without shutting down the computer, open the PAS
window, from the Windows task bar.
1. Choose Start>Settings>Control Panel> Administrative
Tools>PAS>Process Administration.
2. Click Stop All. PAS is still active when all processes are stopped.
3. To restart all stopped processes, click Start All.
564 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration Advanced Functions
Processes start in the order specified by their respective WhenToStart parameters.

This order corresponds to the order in which the processes are listed in the PAS
window. The processes are stopped in the reverse order from which they are started.
Advanced Functions
Click Advanced>> in the PAS Window to show the Advanced functions,
Figure 409.
Figure 409. Advanced Dialog
The advanced functions are organized on three levels:

• Process Control - Table 62.
• PAS Service Control - Table 63.
3BUF001092-510 565
Advanced Functions Section 17 System Administration
Table 62. Advanced Functions for Individual Processes
Button Description
Start Process/Stop Start or stop the selected process.
Process CAUTION: PAS does not perform dependency checks before
starting/stopping an individual process. Therefore, as a rule, stop or start
all processes rather than individual processes.
Disable/Enable This button alternately disables and re-enables PAS supervision for a
Administration process. For example, if a process fails to start for some reason,
consider removing it from PAS supervision so as not to affect the start-up
of other processes. This is generally used for troubleshooting.
Reinitialize Settings This is for technical support personnel. It is used when the registry
information for a process has been changed. When this occurs, the
process must be reinitialized in order for the changes to take effect.
Table 63. Advanced Functions for PAS Service
Button Description
Stop PAS/Start PAS Start PAS starts PAS. If Autostart flag in the registry is set or is not
specified, PAS will begin the Start All sequence as soon as it starts.
Stop PAS stops PAS. Before PAS service stops, it will shutdown all
processes including the ones that have disabled administration.
NOTE: Only Domain Administrator users are permitted to use start/stop.
Users in the PAS Operator list are not permitted to start/stop PAS.
Global Reinitialize This command can only be issued when all processes are stopped. It
tells the PAS service to completely erase all its data structures and
reinitialize them with current registry settings. Any changes in the
registry including PAS global setting, Node Type, and individual process
settings will take effect when this command is issued.
Send Message This displays a dialog for sending messages as an alternative method for
interacting with the PAS service, Figure 410. The messages that have
been sent to a process can also be read. This functionality is generally
reserved for debugging by technical support personnel.
View Logs Displays execution log for PAS service.
566 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration Advanced Functions
Figure 410. Send Message Dialog
Stopping Oracle
To stop Oracle, first stop the Windows services for the Oracle database instance and
Listener. This is done via the Services utility in the Administrative Tools on the
Windows Control Panel. To do this:
1. Launch the Services utility as shown in Figure 411.
2. Scroll to the OracleServiceADVA service, right-click and choose Stop
from the context menu. Figure 412.
3. Scroll to the service named OracleTNSListener, right-click and choose Stop
3BUF001092-510 567
Advanced Functions Section 17 System Administration
Figure 411. Accessing the Windows Services Utility
Figure 412. Stopping OracleServiceADVA
568 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration Managing Users
Managing Users
The Information Management installation creates default user accounts and user
groups. To add, remove, or otherwise edit any user accounts, use this section to
understand how to manage user access for the Information Management server.
User access is handled on four levels:
• Windows User - The computer where the server software is installed requires
you to log on with a Windows username and password. Windows users are
created and managed via the User Manager on the Windows control panel. A
default user configuration is created by the Windows installation. Other
Windows users may be created by the installing user.
The Information Management and Oracle software installations create
additional users and groups. These are described in Windows Users and Groups
for Information Management on page 570.
• Oracle Access - Oracle user authority is required by certain Information
Management processes for access to the Oracle database. A default user
configuration is created by the Information Management and Oracle software
installations. These users are described in Oracle Users on page 572.
• Display Client Users - Standard user files are provided for the desktop
applications - DataDirect, Desktop Trends, and Display Client. Additional
users can be created by copying and renaming an existing user file. New
passwords, configure user preferences, and customize language translations
can also be specified. Refer to Managing Users for Display Services on page
575.
Change the default passwords for certain Windows users and Oracle users
immediately after installing the Information Management software. This helps
protect the system from unauthorized access. Guidelines are provided in Securing
the System on page 572.
To support Information Management applications such as historical database

maintenance, and other administrative procedures one or more Industrial IT users
must be added to the HistoryAdmin Group.
3BUF001092-510 569
Windows Users and Groups for Information Management Section 17 System Administration
Windows Users and Groups for Information Management

The default user configuration following installation of Information Management
and Oracle software is illustrated in Figure 413, and described below.
Figure 413. Default Windows Users
570 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration Windows Users and Groups for Information Management
This default user configuration is sufficient to support all Information Management

operation, configuration, and administration activities. Create additional users and
modify user accounts as required via the Windows User manager.
HistoryAdmin Group
This group is created by the Information Management software installation. Users in
this group have access to History configuration and History database maintenance
functions. These users can access History database maintenance functions and other
Information Management administrative procedures seamlessly without having to
change users, or enter Oracle passwords.
This group is included in the PAS OperatorList by default. This grants all users in
the HistoryAdmin group access to PAS, even if these users are not Domain
Administrator-level users. This enables HistoryAdmin users to start and stop PAS
services as required by certain History database maintenance functions.
To grant HistoryAdmin users access to History database configuration, but deny
access to PAS, remove this group from the PAS OperatorList. Instructions for
editing the PAS OperatorList are provided in PAS OperatorList on page 574.
User for 800xA System Service Account

When the 800xA base system software is installed, an 800xA service account is
configured. The user for this account is assigned to the ORA_DBA and
HistoryAdmin user groups and all History services will run as this user. To support
this, this user must also be specified for the log-in accounts for these services. This
is done when the History database instance is configured. The IM History Service
Account dialog used to set up this account may also be launched from the Windows
task bar Start>Settings>Control Panel>Administrative Tools>PAS>
Password Administration). This method for launching the IM History Service
Account dialog should only be used for certain upgrade procedures. Instructions for
using the dialog will be provided in the applicable upgrade instructions.
ORA_DBA Group
This group is created by the Oracle software installation. Users in this group have
Oracle access for database maintenance functions. Such access is generally reserved
for technical support personnel.
3BUF001092-510 571
Oracle Users Section 17 System Administration
Oracle Users
The default Oracle user configuration created by the Oracle and Information
Management software installations is described in Table 64.
Table 64. Oracle Users
User(1) Description
SYS Created by Oracle.
SYSTEM Created by Oracle.
OUTLN Created by Oracle.
DBSNMP Created by Oracle.
HISTORY This user is created when the Oracle database instance is created. This user
has read access to Oracle tables and views.
OPS$OCSHIS This is the oracle account for the IM history database.
OPS$_____ This is an Oracle user account created for the Windows user that installed the
Information Management software. This user account is classified as
EXTERNAL, meaning it does not have an Oracle password. To log into Oracle
when you are already logged in as the Windows user that installed the
Information Management software, just enter a slash(/) following the sqlplus
command. For example, sqlplus /.
(1) Since Information Management users are not licensed for write access to Oracle tables, the HISTORY user account
is the only Oracle user that operators should use.
The default Oracle user configuration does not have to be changed; however, it is
strongly recommended that the default passwords be changed for all Oracle users
with the exception of the HISTORY user, and users whose password is indicated as
EXTERNAL. This procedure is described in Securing the System on page 572.
Securing the System

Change passwords for Windows and Oracle users as soon as possible after software
installation to protect the system from unauthorized access.
572 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration Securing the System
Changing Passwords for Oracle Users

The default Oracle users are described in Oracle Users on page 572. The current
Oracle user information resides in the Oracle table named dba_users. Use sqlplus to
access the contents of this table as shown in Figure 414.
The passwords for the following users need to be changed to make the system
secure: SYS, SYSTEM, OUTLN, DBSNMP, and OPS$OCSHIS.
DO NOT change the password for the HISTORY user. The history account has read
only access and the password MUST remain unchanged for compatibility with
existing and new READ ONLY clients. Changing this password will break
applications.
The OPS$____ (Windows user that installed Information Management software)
does not have an associated password, and therefore does not need to be modified.
Use the following procedure to change the passwords for the other Oracle users:
1. Log in to sqlplus as the SYS user. The default password is change_on_install:
sqlplus /nolog
connect sys/change_on_install as sysdba
2. To change the password for this user enter:
alter user sys identified by password1 ;
where password1 is the new password.
3. repeat this for the other Oracle users whose passwords must be changed:
alter user system identified by password2 ;
alter user outln identified by password3 ;
alter user dbsnmp identified by password4 ;
alter user ops$ocshis identified by password5 ;
The same password can be used for all users. All these passwords can be set
using the Change Password button on the Instance Maintenance wizard.
3BUF001092-510 573
PAS OperatorList Section 17 System Administration
Figure 414. Displaying Oracle Users and Changing Passwords
PAS OperatorList
OperatorList is a configuration parameter for the PAS Service in the Windows
Registry. This parameter specifies a list of groups and users other than Domain
Administrator-level users who can use the PAS window to start and stop processes
under PAS supervision. Groups and users in this list have complete access to all
functions in the PAS window, except starting and stopping the PAS service itself.
Only Domain Administrator users can start and stop PAS. This list can be edited to
grant/deny users and groups access to PAS.
The HistoryAdmin Group is included in the PAS OperatorList by default. To

grant HistoryAdmin users access to History database configuration, but deny
access to PAS, remove this group from the PAS OperatorList.
To edit the PAS OperatorList:

1. Open the Registry Editor. From the Windows task bar, choose Start>Run.
Then enter regedit in the Run dialog.
574 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration Managing Users for Display Services
2. Navigate to the location in the registry where the processes under PAS
supervision are specified -
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\ABB\PAS, Figure 415.
Figure 415. Locations of PAS Processes
3. Double-click the OperatorList parameter.

The list is specified as names separated by pipe( | ) character with no spaces
between the name and the pipe. Example: HistoryAdmin|User1|User2
Managing Users for Display Services

Display Services comes with the following default users: aid, mdi, sdi. These users
are used when logging into Displays Services, a display client, DataDirect (Excel
Data Access), and Desktop Trends.
3BUF001092-510 575
Creating New Users Section 17 System Administration
User configurations are maintained in a separate Preferences.svd file for each

user. These files are located in .svg folders in:
C: \Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\Display Services\Server\Data
The user name is the second word in the name (following the underscore),
Figure 416.
Preferences.svd file for aid user
Figure 416. User Configuration Data
The following user management procedures are covered here:

• Creating New Users.
• Creating User Passwords.
• Configuring User Preferences.
• Customizing Language Translations.
Creating New Users

To create additional users, copy and then rename an existing user folder. For
instance, navigate to the AID_aid.svg folder as shown in Figure 416. Then right-
click on the folder and use the context menu to copy and rename the folder,
Figure 417.
576 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration Creating New Users
Copy and Rename this folder

to create a new user
Figure 417. Copying and Renaming a User
When a folder is copied and renamed, the user name is the second word in the
name (following the underscore, for example in AID_aid.svg, the user name is
aid).
When a new user is created, then create a unique password for that user. Refer to
Creating User Passwords on page 578.
Also, configure user preferences and/or customize language translations for that
user. Refer to Configuring User Preferences on page 579, and Customizing
Language Translations on page 585.
3BUF001092-510 577
Creating User Passwords Section 17 System Administration
Creating User Passwords

This describes how to change the password for an existing user, or assign a unique
password for a new user. This is a two-step process. First run the Create User
Password utility to get an encrypted password key. Then, associate the new
password with a specific user by entering the password key in the
Preferences.svd file for the user.
Create User Password

To run the Create User Password utility,
1. From the Windows task bar, choose:
Start>Programs>ABB Industrial IT 800xA>Information Mgmt>
Display Services>Server>Create Password.
This displays the Create Password dialog.
2. Enter the new password in the Typed Password field. The encrypted password
key is displayed in the AdvaInform Display Password field, Figure 418.
Figure 418. Password Key
Associate New Password with a Specific User

To associate a new password with a specific user, record the password key (from
AdvaInform Display field in Create Password dialog), and enter it in the user’s
Preferences.svd file.
Navigate to the applicable user folder (directory) as described in Managing Users
for Display Services on page 575. Then open the applicable folder, for example,
578 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration Configuring User Preferences
AID_AID.svg. This folder contains Preferences.svd for the AID user,

Figure 416.
To enter the new password, open the Preferences.svd file with a text editor,
and then edit the file. An example is shown in Figure 419.
Copy the value from the AdvaInform Display Password field and then paste it in
the Preferences.svd file, or simply enter the value directly.
This is where the encrypted password is entered

(from AdvaInform Display Password field in
Create Password dialog).
Figure 419. Editing the Preferences.svd File
Configuring User Preferences

By configuring user preferences, Table 65, the user interface can be customized
according to the specific user that logs in to Display Services (or one of the desktop
applications).
To allow users to change preferences, the corresponding preferences file must
have read/write access, Figure 420. To find how to access a preferences file, refer
to Managing Users for Display Services on page 575.
3BUF001092-510 579
Configuring User Preferences Section 17 System Administration
RO = Read Only
RW = Read/Write
Figure 420. Configuring a Preference for Read-Only or Read/Write Access
To configure a user preference:

1. Start the Windows client.
2. From the menu bar, choose User > Preferences. This displays the User
Preferences dialog.
3. Use the navigation tool to find the user preference to be configured.
4. Click on the preference. When a selection is made, the dialog displays
interactive widgets as required to configure the selected preference. For
instance, if TEXTCOLOR under EDITOR is selected, the dialog displays the
current color selection, and a Change button. Clicking this button displays the
color palette so the color can be changed, Figure 421.
Any changes made to user preferences will not take affect until the computer is
restarted.
580 3BUF001092-510
Button to display Current Color Color palette

color palette Selection
Figure 421. Configuring TEXTCOLOR
3BUF001092-510 581
Table 65. User Preferences
Name Default Description

AID-PASSWORD 47D2D5F8 Encrypted password, not accessible via the User
Preferences dialog. Refer to Creating User
Passwords on page 578.
AID-STARTUP-DISPLAY- Group name of the display presented when the
GROUP application is started. By default, no startup display is
specified. If a startup display is specified, it is
generally from the Batch group. Display groups are
listed under the host root in the Object Browser.
AID-STARTUP-DISPLAY- Name of the display presented when the application is
DISPLAY started. By default, no startup display is specified. If a
startup display is specified, it is generally from the
Batch group.
AID-STARTUP- Group name of the base display presented when the
BASE_DISPLAY-GROUP application is started.The base display is shown in a
third frame at the bottom of the main window. By
default, no base display is specified. If a base display
is specified, it is generally from the Batch group.
AID-STARTUP- Name of the base display presented when the
BASE_DISPLAY-DISPLAY application is started.The base display is shown in a
third frame at the bottom of the main window. By
default, no base display is specified. A command
application is to specify the MessageDisplay as the
base display.
AID-BROWSER- False This toggles between the normal browser view
ROOTASTAB (default) and the tabbed view where roots on the tree
are displayed as tabs.
AID-BROWSER- 5 This adjusts the scroll speed for the browser.
SCROLLSPEED
AID-BROWSER- 2 This adjusts the delay (in seconds) for expanding a
SPRINGLOADDELAY folder in the browser when using drag-and-drop.
582 3BUF001092-510
Table 65. User Preferences (Continued)

AID-EDITOR-FONT 49 Font used in Display Services. This is only applicable
with a build license for Display Services.
AID-EDITOR-TEXTCOLOR 0 Color for text in Display Services. This is only
applicable with a build license for Display Services.
AID-EDITOR- 255 Color for strings in Display Services. This is only
STRINGCOLOR applicable with a build license for Display Services.
AID-EDITOR- 35328 Color for comments in Display Services. This is only
COMMENTCOLOR applicable with a build license for Display Services.
AID-EDITOR-WORDCOLOR 16000000 Color for keywords in Display Services. This is only
applicable with a build license for Display Services.
AID-VIEW-TOOLBAR True Show or hide the toolbar.
AID-VIEW-ELEMENTBAR True Show or hide the element bar. This is only applicable
with a build license for Display Services.
AID-VIEW-USERBAR True Show or hide the user bar.This is only applicable with
a build license for Display Services.
AID-VIEW-STATUSBAR True Show or hide the status bar.
AID-VIEW-BROWSER True Show or hide the browser.
AID-VIEW- True Use the old-style or new-style frame.This is only
OLDSTYLEFRAME applicable with a build license for Display Services.
AID-VIEW- 1 Color of display boarder.
DISPLAYBOARDERCOLOR
AID-VIEW- 1 Color of the inactive area.
INACTIVEAREACOLOR
AID-AUTOLOGOFF- 15 Minutes This is used to configure a user to be automatically
AFTERMINUTES logged off after a period of inactivity. The autologoff
function must be enabled for this setting to take affect.
3BUF001092-510 583
Table 65. User Preferences (Continued)

AID-AUTOLOGOFF- False (0) This is used to enable or disable the AUTOLOGOFF
ENABLED function.
False(0) = Disabled
True (1) = Enabled
AID-DATARETRIEVAL- NORMAL This is used to specify whether numeric display
DCSDATA elements will query process objects directly for real-
time data, or whether the numeric elements will query
the process object’s associated History log.
The default is to get real-time data directly from
process objects (NORMAL). By setting this
preference to HISTORY, the query returns the last
History value that was logged for the process object.
The numeric element is configured the same way,
whether the query is for real-time data, or Historical
data.
AID-RIGHTS-OBJECTWRITE False (0) This is used to enable or disable write access to
process and/or OPC objects.
False(0) = Disabled - no write access
True (1) = Enabled - write access allowed
AID-RIGHTS-LOGWRITE False (0) This is used to enable or disable write access to
numeric history logs (modify or add entries).
False(0) = Disabled - no write access
True (1) = Enabled - write access allowed
AID-RIGHTS- True (1) This is used to enable or disable the System function
SYSTEMACCESS in a Display script.
False(0) = Disabled
True (1) = Enabled
584 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration Customizing Language Translations
Customizing Language Translations

The language for the user interface is determined by the language file selected when
logging in to a client application. An ENGLISH language file is provided as
standard. Create additional language files by copying, renaming, and then editing
this standard file.
As shown in Figure 422, the language files reside in: C:\ProgramFiles\ABB
Industrial IT\Inform IT\Display Services\Client\Lang
Figure 422. Navigating to Language Files
The first time you log in using a custom language, a prompt to define any unknown
text strings is made, Figure 423. Either define the strings at this time, skip some
strings on an individual basis, or skip all definitions at this time.
3BUF001092-510 585
Customizing Language Translations Section 17 System Administration
Figure 423. Prompt to Define Unknown Text
To customize the language, choose User > Language from the menu bar and then
use the Edit Language dialog, Figure 424.
The Texts list displays the English version of all text used in the user interface.
Selecting a text line from the list displays the translation for that text according to
the language chosen for this session. English text is the default. Edit the translation
in the Translation field, and then click Apply.
Some texts have special characters. DO NOT remove these special characters.
• & is used in menu texts to indicate that the next character is a mnemonic key.
• % is used by the system to fill in additional text such as the name of a display.
Figure 424. Edit Language Dialog
586 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration Checking Display Server Status
Checking Display Server Status

To check server status, from the Windows task bar choose Start>Programs>ABB
Industrial IT 800xA>Information Mgmt>Display Services>Server Status. This
displays a dialog for specifying the server hostname, Figure 425.
Figure 425. Specifying Server Hostname
Enter the hostname, then click OK. As an option, specify the maximum time to wait
for the server to respond. This displays the server status window, Figure 426.
Leaving the hostname blank defaults to localhost.
This window provides the following information related to the Server:
License Text This field indicates the license text.

License Will This indicates when the current license is scheduled to expire.
Expire After entering the permanent license, this should indicate the
permanent license will never expire.
Started This field indicates when the server was started.
Facilities This is not applicable at this time.
Data Providers This shows the number of data providers connected. Display
Connected Services must have one data provider connected.
Clients This shows how many clients are connected to this server. The
Connected information provided includes the node name, type (MDI or SDI
as described in Licenses), and date and time when the client
connected.
3BUF001092-510 587
Checking Display Server Status Section 17 System Administration
Licenses These fields show the total number of purchased licenses, and
the available licenses not currently being used:
• Build - Build access allows use of Display Services both in
the Build mode and the Run mode.
• MDI - Multiple Document (Display) Interface. MDI Run
access allows multiple displays to be run at the same time.
• SDI - Single Document (Display) Interface. SDI Run access
allows one display to be run at a time.
• ADD - DataDirect.
• DP - Number of data providers (refer to Data Providers
Connected). Information regarding data providers is in
Section 15, Configuring Data Providers.
Number of Client Licenses

Number of Data Providers
List of Connected Data Providers
Number & List of Connected Clients
Figure 426. Display Server:COMM Window
588 3BUF001092-510
Section 17 System Administration Software Version Information
Software Version Information

To check software version information for Information Management products and
components, from the Windows task bar choose: Start>Programs>ABB
Industrial IT 800xA>Information Mgmt>Version Info. This displays the Version
Information window, Figure 427. To save the version information to a text file,
choose File>Save As and specify the text file path.
Figure 427. Software Version Information Tool
Disk Maintenance - Defragmenting

Information Management configuration procedures that involve the creating,
deleting, and then recreating of a large quantity of objects may cause the associated
disks to become fragmented. This, in turn, may impair the response time and
general performance of the system. Procedures which cause fragmented files
include the configuration of the History database using the Bulk Import tool and
deleting and then recreating an Aspect System. Check the system for fragmented
files after any such procedure and defragment disks as required.
History configuration impacts not only the Information Management disk(s), but
also the disk(s) on any Connectivity Servers where the operator trend function
runs. Therefore, check the disks on those Connectivity Servers also.
3BUF001092-510 589
Disk Maintenance - Defragmenting Section 17 System Administration
590 3BUF001092-510
Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP
Requirements
Certain Information Management functions require the OMF domain to be extended
to the TCP/IP network and all other ABB nodes that exist on the TCP/IP network.
Some of these functions are:
• Consolidating history data from different Information Management servers.
• Using one Information Management server to schedule event-triggered data
collection for logs that reside on a different node.
• Using a Display client to view History trend data for any Information
Management node within the OMF domain.
Example Applications
The OMF TCP/IP domain can be defined by Multicast communication, point-to-
point communication, or a combination of Multicast and point-to-point
communication. Example applications are described in:
• OMF TCP/IP Domain with Multicast Communication.
• OMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point and Multicast.
• OMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point Exclusively.
OMF TCP/IP Domain with Multicast Communication

There may be many Information Management nodes on a large company’s intranet.
To keep separate logical areas of the system from conflicting with each other, OMF
uses Ethernet’s Multicasting capabilities to establish Domains on the TCP/IP
network. This is done by configuring OMF on Information Management nodes that
are to be in the same domain with the same Multicast address. This prevents OMF
3BUF001092-510 591
OMF TCP/IP Domain with Multicast CommunicationAppendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP
from communicating with any other OMF on the TCP/IP network having a different
Multicast address.
Multicast addresses look very similar to IP addresses. In fact, Multicast addresses
occupy a reserved section of the IP address range: 224.0.0.2 to 239.225.225.225.
The default Multicast address used when multicasting is first enabled is 226.1.2.3.
The default address is okay for systems that have their own TCP/IP network (for
small plants with no company intranet). For large companies with complex
intranets connecting multiple sites, the default address is NOT recommended.
OMF TCP/IP Domain Defined By PLC Interface

Multicast Address 226.1.3.4. Display Services
Trend Displays
EH - 1 IM
226.1.3.4 DI AI 226.1.3.4 PLCs

Primary History Logs->
TCP/IP Network Distributed History Logs
EH - 2
(HP- UX) EH - 3
(2000)
226.1.3.4
226.1.3.4
ABB Control System ABB Control System
Figure 428. Example System Configuration Using Multicast Only to Establish

Domain
Any valid address may be selected and assigned to each of the Information
Management nodes that are required to be in the same Domain. Some companies
have the network administrator maintain control over usage of Multicast addresses.
592 3BUF001092-510
Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP OMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point and
This helps prevent crossing of Multicast defined Domains, and the problems that
may result.
Once the OMF TCP/IP Domain where the Information Management node will
reside is defined, use the Communication Settings dialog to enable the OMF TCP/IP
socket, and assign the Multicast address. Use the following three fields in the lower
left corner of this dialog: TCP/IP Multicast enabled, Multicast address,
MulticastTTL. This procedure is described in Configuring OMF for TCP/IP on page
599.
TCP/IP protocol must be configured before configuring the Multicast address,
and enable the OMF TCP/IP socket. This is described in Configuring TCP/IP
Protocol on page 599.
OMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point and Multicast

Point-to-point may be used in combination with Multicast to restrict access between
certain nodes in the Multicast OMF TCP/IP domain. This is illustrated in
Figure 429. EH1 must have OMF access to both EH2 and EH3, but at the same time
OMF access must be prohibited between EH2 and EH3.
Again, use the Communication Settings dialog to configure TCP/IP Multicast
enabled, Multicast address, MulticastTTL. This procedure is described in
Configuring OMF for TCP/IP on page 599.
For point-to-point communication, modify the Socket Configuration List to match
the table shown in Figure 429. This is described in Configuring OMF Socket
Communication Parameters on page 602.
3BUF001092-510 593
OMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point and Multicast Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to
Domain 1 Domain 2
EH1 EH1 - EH3
EH1 - EH2
Multicast Address = 226.1.3.4
IP Address = 172.28.66.190
TCP/IP Network
EH2 EH3
Multicast Address = 226.1.3.4 Multicast Address = 226.1.3.4

IP Address = 172.28.66.191 IP Address = 172.28.66.192
Socket Configuration Lists for EH1, EH2 & EH3
NODE IP CONFIG SEND/RECEIVE

EH1 172.28.66.191 RECEIVE
172.28.66.192 RECEIVE
multicast SEND
EH2 172.28.66.190 SEND

multicast RECEIVE
EH3 172.28.66.190 SEND

multicast RECEIVE
Figure 429. Example 1 - Point-to-Point Communication w/Multicast
Another application where point-to-point is used in combination with Multicast is

where one node is located in an area where the network hardware does not allow
Multicast. This is illustrated in Figure 430. EH1, EH2 and EH3 reside in an
OMF/TCP/IP domain defined by multicast communication. EH4 is isolated from
594 3BUF001092-510
Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP OMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point and
this domain by network hardware that does not support multicast. Therefore a
second domain is established for EH1 and EH4 for point-to-point communication.
In this case use the Communication Settings dialog to configure TCP/IP Multicast
enabled, Multicast address, and MulticastTTL for EH1, EH2, and EH3. This
procedure is described in Configuring OMF for TCP/IP on page 599.
The Socket Configuration Lists on EH1 and EH4 must be configured for point-to-
point communication. For EH4, because all OMF communication to this node
should be via point-to-point, Multicast should be disabled to prevent unwanted
OMF communication on the default Multicast address. Do this by deleting Multicast
from the Socket Configuration List. This is described in Configuring OMF Socket
Communication Parameters on page 602. For EH2 and EH3, leave the Socket
Configurations at the default values.
3BUF001092-510 595
OMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point and Multicast Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to
Domain 1 Domain 2
EH1 EH1 - EH4
EH1 - EH2 - EH3
IP Address = 172.28.66.190 Bridge Gateway w/
Multicast Disabled
TCP/IP Network
EH2 EH3 EH4

IP Address = 172.28.66.192
ABB Control System


NOTE: By specifying one TCP/IP address
as RECEIVE, all other addresses must NODE IP CONFIG SEND/RECEIVE
also be specified as receive. This includes
EH1 multicast SEND/RECEIVE
all multicast senders.
172.28.66.193 RECEIVE
For example, the socket configuration list for 172.28.66.193 SEND
EH1 has a multicast SEND/RECEIVE 172.28.66.191 RECEIVE
specification, but must also include a 172.28.66.192 RECEIVE
RECEIVE specification for EH4 since EH4
cannot use multicast. Therefore EH1 must EH2 multicast SEND/RECEIVE
also have RECEIVE specifications for
all other nodes it is receiving from EH3 multicast SEND/RECEIVE
(EH2 and EH3).
EH4 172.28.66.190 RECEIVE
Figure 430. Example 2 - Point-to-Point Communication w/Multicast
596 3BUF001092-510
Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IPOMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point Exclusively
OMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point Exclusively

This is required when the network hardware does not support, or is configured to not
allow Multicast communication. Exclusive point-to-point communication is
EH1, EH2 and EH3 reside in an OMF/TCP/IP domain defined by point-to-point
communication. In this case, use the Communication Settings dialog to configure
the Socket Configuration Lists in EH1, EH2, and EH3 for point-to-point
communication. This is described in Configuring OMF Socket Communication
All OMF communication to these nodes should be via point-to-point. Therefore,
Multicast should be disabled to prevent unwanted OMF communication on the
default Multicast addresses. Do this by deleting Multicast from the Socket
Configuration Lists on each node. This is described in Configuring OMF Socket
Communication Parameters on page 602.
3BUF001092-510 597
OMF TCP/IP Domain with Point-to-Point ExclusivelyAppendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP
Domain 1 EH1
EH1 - EH2 - EH3
IP Address = 172.28.66.190
TCP/IP Network
EH2 EH3

EH1 172.28.66.191 RECEIVE
172.28.66.191 SEND
172.28.66.192 RECEIVE
172.28.66.192 SEND
EH2 172.28.66.190 RECEIVE
172.28.66.190 SEND
172.28.66.192 RECEIVE
172.28.66.192 SEND
EH3 172.28.66.191 RECEIVE
172.28.66.191 SEND
172.28.66.190 RECEIVE
172.28.66.190 SEND
Figure 431. Example - Exclusive Point-to-point Communication
598 3BUF001092-510
Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP Configuring TCP/IP Protocol
Configuring TCP/IP Protocol

TCP/IP protocol must be configured before configuring the Multicast address, and
enable the OMF TCP/IP socket. Typically, TCP/IP protocol is configured by a
network administrator. Consult the network administrator to obtain the proper
setting for the TCP/IP protocol, then check the TCPIP configuration for IP Address,
Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.
The TCPIP configuration properties are accessible via the Network Connections
Tool in the Windows Control Panel.
Do not enable the TCP/IP socket unless this functionality is being used. If the
TCP/IP socket is enabled and the TCP/IP connection is not operational, or a
default gateway is not configured for routing, OMF will not start.
From the Windows Control Panel:

1. Select Network Connections.
2. In the network and Dialup Connections list, select Local Area Connection.
3. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog, click Properties.
4. In the LAN properties dialog, select Internet Protocol (TCPIP), then click
Properties. This displays the TCPIP properties dialog.
Configuring OMF for TCP/IP

The OMF parameters related to extending the OMF domain to TCP/IP are the
Multicast address and TTL. In addition, OMF on TCP/IP must be enabled. This is
done via the Communication Settings dialog, Figure 432. To launch this tool, from
the Windows task bar, choose:
Start>Settings>Control Panel>Administrative Tools>PAS>Settings.
3BUF001092-510 599
Configuring OMF for TCP/IP Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP
Figure 432. Communication Settings Dialog
Use the TCP/IP Configuration section to configure the required parameters and
enable OMF on TCP/IP. Refer to Table 66 for details.
All processes under PAS supervision must be stopped and then restarted for any
changes to take affect. Refer to Starting and Stopping History on page 424.
600 3BUF001092-510
Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP Configuring OMF for TCP/IP
Table 66. Communication Settings Dialog
Field Description
TCP/IP Multicast Enable or disable OMF for TCP/IP network via this check box (check
enabled indicates enabled). Do not enable this parameter, unless this
functionality is going to be used.
If distributed History logs are being used, then check TCP/IP Multicast
enabled, and increase the OMF shared memory:
• for History nodes that send History data to a consolidation node, add
5 meg to the OMF shared memory requirement.
• for a consolidation node that collects from one or more History nodes,
add 5 meg to the OMF shared memory requirement for each node
from which it collects History data. For example, if a consolidation
node is receiving from eight History nodes, the consolidation node will
require 8*5 = 40 meg additional OMF shared memory.
Multicast address This is the Multicast address used by OMF (omfNetworkExt and
omfNameProc). To extend the OMF domain to TCP/IP, the Multicast
Address must be the same in all nodes on a network, otherwise the nodes
will not be able to see each other.
A valid multicast group address that enables routing of multicast
messages must be in the range: 224.0.0.2 to 239.225.225.225. The
default multicast address is 226.1.2.3. This is a valid multicast address
and can be used by OMF; however, it is recommended that this default
address NOT be used. Not using the default minimizes the possibility of
conflicts with other unknown nodes on the TCP/IP network. Contact the
network administrator to obtain an appropriate multicast address to ensure
secure communication between intended nodes.
3BUF001092-510 601
Configuring OMF Socket Communication Parameters Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to
Table 66. Communication Settings Dialog (Continued)
Field Description
MulticastTTL This is the time-to-live value which indicates the number of router hops to
do before a message is discarded (not sent any more). This prevents
endless message loops that may occur as a result of unexpected or
unusual network partitioning.
0 = multicast messages are not sent at all
1 = multicast messages are sent only on the local subnet
>1 = multicast messages are forwarded to one or more hops
To extend the OMF domain to TCP/IP, this must be set >= 1; otherwise,
nodes will not hear each other.
Socket The socket configuration specifies this node’s scope of OMF access to
Configuration List other nodes in the domain.
The default is Multicast Send Receive. This means this node can see
and be seen by all other nodes in its multicast domain.
Restrict OMF access between certain nodes in a multicast domain by
configuring their respective socket configurations. For details on how to do
this, refer to Configuring OMF Socket Communication Parameters on page
602.
Configuring OMF Socket Communication Parameters

Within an OMF domain, nodes establish OMF access with each other by
periodically sending and receiving network maintenance messages that inform the
respective nodes of each other’s existence on the TCP/IP network. Each node must
be capable of both sending messages to, and receiving messages from any node with
which it wants to have OMF access. When the OMF communication socket is
enabled, these OMF network maintenance messages are sent/received by either
Multicast protocol (one message to many nodes), or point-to-point protocol (one
message from one node to another).
By default, all nodes in a Multicast domain have access to each other. Change OMF
access between nodes, or change the communication protocol for OMF
maintenance messages in an OMF TCP/IP domain by configuring their respective
socket configurations. To do this, click the Modify List button below the
MulticastTTL field. This displays the Socket Configuration dialog, Figure 433.
602 3BUF001092-510
Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP Configuring OMF Socket Communication
Figure 433. Socket Configuration Dialog
The default setting is multicast Send Receive. This means this node can see
(receive the signal from) and be seen by (send the signal to) all other nodes in its
domain.
To change access within the domain, edit the socket configuration list for all nodes
in the domain. A summary of the possible entries is provided in Table 67.
Table 67. Socket Configuration Options
multicast SEND This node can be seen by other nodes in the domain
that are configured to RECEIVE network maintenance
messages from this node. To do this, enter multicast
in the IPconfig field, click the Send check box, then
click Add.
multicast RECEIVE This node can see other nodes in the domain that are
configured to SEND network maintenance messages
to this node. To do this, enter multicast in the IPconfig
field, click the Receive check box, then click Add.
3BUF001092-510 603
Example Changing the Socket Configuration Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP
Table 67. Socket Configuration Options (Continued)
multicast SEND This node can be seen by other nodes in the domain
that are configured to RECEIVE network maintenance
messages from this node. To do this, enter multicast
in the IPconfig field, click the Send check box, then
click Add.
point-to-point SEND This node can only be seen by (send network
maintenance messages to) the node whose IP
address is specified. To do this, enter the node’s IP
address, click the Send check box, then click Add.
point-to-point RECEIVE This node can only see (receive network maintenance
messages from) the node whose IP address is
specified. To do this, enter the node’s IP address, click
the Receive check box, then click Add.
Example Changing the Socket Configuration

In Figure 434, EH1 must have OMF access to both EH2 and EH3, but at the same
time OMF access must be prohibited between EH2 and EH3. To implement OMF
access in this way, each node’s Socket Configuration List must be configured as
described in the table in Figure 434. How to do this is described in the procedure
following Figure 434.
604 3BUF001092-510
Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP Example Changing the Socket Configuration
Domain 1 Domain 2
EH1 EH1 - EH3
EH1 - EH2
IP Address = 172.28.66.190
TCP/IP Network
EH2 EH3


EH1 172.28.66.191 RECEIVE
172.28.66.192 RECEIVE
multicast SEND
EH2 172.28.66.190 SEND

multicast RECEIVE
EH3 172.28.66.190 SEND

multicast RECEIVE
Figure 434. Example - Changing the Socket Configuration
To edit the Socket Configuration List for EH1:

1. Modify the default entry. To do this:
3BUF001092-510 605
Example Changing the Socket Configuration Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP
a. Select the entry in the list. This puts the value for each of the configuration
parameters (IP config, Send, and Receive) in their respective fields.
b. Remove the check from the Receive box, Figure 435, then click Add.
Figure 435. Modifying the Default Entry
This changes the entry to multicast Send. EH1 can now be seen by other nodes in
the domain configured to receive from EH1; however, EH1 can only see nodes from
which it is specifically configured to Receive.
2. Add an entry for EH2 to specify it as a node from which EH1 can receive:
a. Enter the IP address for EH2, 172.28.66.191, in the IP config field.
b. Enter a check in the Receive check box, and make sure the Send box is
unchecked. This configuration is shown in Figure 436.
Figure 436. Adding an Entry for EH2
c. Click Add. This adds a new entry: 172.28.66.191 Receive.

3. Repeat step 2 for EH3, substituting the correct IP address (172.28.66.192) in
the IP config field. The finished configuration for EH1 is shown in Figure 437.
606 3BUF001092-510
Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP OMF Shared Memory Size
Figure 437. Socket Configuration for EH1
Repeat the above procedure to modify the socket configurations for EH2 and EH3.
Refer to Figure 434 for the respective socket configurations.
To remove an entry from the Socket Configuration List, select the entry then click
Remove.
OMF Shared Memory Size

The OMF shared memory size defines the size of shared memory for processes that
use the OMF software. If the shared memory is too small, processes may be aborted
without any error messages (PAS will discover that the process has been aborted).
The default size for OMF shared memory is 8,192 Kbytes (8 MBytes). Use the
Communications Settings dialog to adjust the size. To launch this tool, from the
Windows task bar, choose:
Start>Settings>Control Panel>Administrative Tools>PASS>Settings.
The OMF Shared Memory section on this tool displays the current size of the OMF
shared memory in Megabytes. Enter a new value (in Mbytes) if necessary. (For
details regarding this dialog, refer to Configuring OMF for TCP/IP on page 599.)
If distributed History logs are being implemented (this requires the TCP/IP Enabled
option to be checked in the Communication Settings dialog), then increase the OMF
shared memory:
3BUF001092-510 607
Shutdown Delay Appendix A Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP
• for History nodes that send History data to a consolidation node, add 5 meg to
the OMF shared memory requirement.
• for a consolidation node that collects from History nodes, add 5 meg to the
OMF shared memory requirement for each node from which it collects data.
For example, if a consolidation node receives from eight History nodes, the
consolidation node will require 8*5 = 40 meg additional OMF shared memory.
To change the OMF Shared Memory size and then set it back to the default, click
Set Default. When finished, click OK.
Processes under PAS must be stopped and restarted for changes to take affect.
Refer to Starting and Stopping History on page 424.
Shutdown Delay
This delays the Windows shutdown to let PAS shut down processes for History
Services. The default is 20 seconds. The delay may need to be increased depending
on the size of the History database. Use the Communication Settings dialog. To
launch this tool, from the Windows task bar, choose:
Start>Settings>Control Panel>Administrative Tools>PAS>Settings.
608 3BUF001092-510
Appendix B General Log Property Limits
Introduction
Table 68 lists limits on general log properties. Refer to the section related to the
specific log type for more detailed information.
Table 68. General Log Property Limits
Type Property Limitation

LogSet Set Name Length: 32 characters (if length
limitation exceeded it will be truncated to
size).
Character
Description Length: 40 characters
Character: none
Message Log Access Name Length: 64 characters (if length
size).
Character: no spaces
Character: none
Capacity Numeric: numbers < 9999999
Character: numeric only
3BUF001092-510 609
Appendix B General Log Property Limits
Table 68. General Log Property Limits (Continued)
Type Property Limitation

Report Log Access Name Length: 64 characters (if length
size).
Character: no spaces
Character: none
Capacity Numeric: Numbers < 9999
Character: numeric only
Numeric Log Log Name Length: 1,000 characters
Character: no spaces. All characters
except \ / : ? " < > | * ,
610 3BUF001092-510
Appendix C Open Source Code Information
Introduction
This appendix contains information on the following open source code:
• cygwin.
• mkisofs.
cygwin
System 800xA Information Manager includes the software cygwin.exe which is
licensed to ABB Inc. pursuant to the GNU General Public License. You can obtain a
copy of that license at:
http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
The source code for the cygwin.exe software is installed with System 800xA
Information Manager in the following folder:
\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\History\cygwin
This folder is placed in C:\Program Files by default.
mkisofs
System 800xA Information Manager includes mkisofs.exe. The source code for the
mkisofs.exe software is installed with System 800xA Information Manager in the
following folder:
\ABB Industrial IT\Inform IT\History\cdrtools
This folder is placed in C:\Program Files by default.
3BUF001092-510 611
mkisofs Appendix C Open Source Code Information
The source code is made available to you under the terms of the Common
Development and Distribution License (CDDL) which you can find at:
http://www.opensource.org/licenses/cddl1.php
Any warranty or support offered by ABB for the mkisofs.exe software is offered
only by ABB and not by the entity that first makes the software available under the
CDDL and any terms in any ABB license for the software that differ from those in
the CDDL are offered only by ABB.
612 3BUF001092-510
INDEX
Symbols Archive Mode 352

/ character use in OPCHDA 518, 545 Archive Path, Archive Device 326
Archive Service Aspect 322, 349
A Archive Volume Aspect 350
A/E Linked Server Configuration 158 Aspect
ABB_ROOT, Environment Variable 479 A/E Linked Server Configuration 158
AccuRay Object Server 289 Alarm Event Configuration 50
Active Volume, Archive Device 327 Archive Device 324
add-ins, Microsoft Excel 286 Archive Group 333
Administrator privileges, PAS 562 Archive Service 322
ADO data provider for Oracle database 517, 548 Archive Volume 350
ADSS Config 524 Calculation 77
AID-PASSWORD 582 Calculation Status Viewer 108
AIPHDA, Data Provider 520 Generic Control Network Configuration 59
AIPOPC, Data Provider 520 Inform IT Authentication Category 555
Alarm Acknowledge options 56 Inform IT History Control 440
alarm configuration 53 Inform IT History Log List 429
Alarm Event Configuration 50 Inform IT History Profile Log 293
alarm handling for a signal 56 Inform IT PDL Auto Archive 351
Alignment time (Message Log) 157, 233 Inform IT View Report Logs 173
allocating disk space 186 ODA Database Definition 504
API, Collection Type 218 Process Object Configuration 42
Archive Signal Configuration 45
backup configuration 329 Aspect Category 556
Configuration 31 Assign Objects 359
Functions 313 Authentication 49, 553
Guidelines 316 AUTOLOGOFF 583
Media 313, 321 auto-publish, volume 327
Volumes 315
Archive Action 344 B
Archive Device Backup and Restore utility 396
Attributes 325 Backup Archive Path, Archive Device 329
Configuration 321 Backup directory 401
Archive Group 156, 331 Backup Disk Utilization Warning 330
Archive Group Entry Options 336 Backup Type, Archive Device 330
3BUF001092-510 613
Index
Bad Data Quality Limit 234 Clean History Database 469

blocking rate 227 clear trace 98
Browser_Separator 518 Collecting from TTD Logs 382
Build mode 588 Collecting Historical Data 373
bulk configuration 262 collection mode 217
collection type, primary history logs 218
C COM, Data Provider 521
Calculation Aspect 77 communication settings dialog 599
Calculation Status Viewer 108, 119 Compaction Ratio 238
calculations 30, 75 Compaction Ratio attribute 451
adding a new calculation 81 Composite Log
algorithm 211, 229, 232 Cascade Attributes 458
aspect 80 Log Name 173
aspect, view 81 Consolidate Action 392
bulk changes 107 Consolidating Message Logs or PDLs 389
cloning 108 Consolidation Node 355
configuring 80, 82 Controllable
cycle base rate 79 binary 48
cycle offset percentage 79 real and integer 49
editor 82 Copy Files, Backup Type 330
enable/disable 121 Create Auto-Published Volume 327
manual execution 102 CreateBackup 426
on object types 105 cyclic schedule 100
opc access 106 cygwin 611
OPC base rate 79
performance tracking 123 D
phasing 79 Data Collection
redundant 123 event-driven 179, 204
scheduler 100 Start/Stop 426
script 87 storing examples 239
service provider definition aspect 78 Data Presentation, Trends 178
Settings.UpdateStatus 88 Data Provider 520
set-up 77 Adding 529
status information 120 Adding Arguments 550
status viewer 119 Adding New 533
trace window 98 Adding Remote Service 531
user interface 77 Argument parameter 537
variable mapping 83 Configuration Files 536
VBScript editor 87 Deleting 549
Cascade Attributes 458 Starting/Stopping 549
614 3BUF001092-510
Index
Unique ID 522 F
data quality 95 file storage, History 247
Data Retrieval 584 file-based storage, property logs 454
Data Service Supervision (ADSS) 524 Filter Log List 431
data source, log configuration 216 Flat File
Database hsBAR Exclude Option 420, 424
Clean History 469 Instance Maintenance Wizard 137
create, drop 468 Free Space Report 446
Database Usage 440
Database1 518 G
DCSLOG, Data Provider 520 Generic Control Network Configuration 59
DCSOBJ, Data Provider 520 grade change 301
DDR, Data Provider 521
Deadband 235
H
deadband compaction 234
Hard Drives status 440
Deadband Storage Interval 238
Harmony Connectivity 518, 545
Defragmenting 589
hierarchical log 176, 193, 259
Device Behavior, Archive Device 326
history
Device Type, Archive Device 325
data type 200
direct log 258
service provider 36
direct log type 176, 191
History Access Importer 357
disable signal 64
History Control 440
Disappears with Acknowledge option 56
history log 31, 175 to 176, 193
Disk Usage Summary
History Log List 429
Instance Maintenance Wizard 137
History Log Template 176
domain 591
History Logs status 440
Dual Log 218
History Managers 441
dual log 177, 203
history source aspect 181
History Status 441
E HS_CONFIG, Environment Variable 479
effective log period 237 HS_DATA, Environment Variable 479
Entry Tables Report 449 HS_HOME, Environment Variable 479
environment variables 478 hsBackupApp.exe 426
EST_LOG_TIME_PER attribute 237, 451 hsBAR Options 419
Estimated Period 238 hsDBMaint 442
Event Collector 396 Hysteresis, alarm filter 52
event configuration 53 to 54
Event Filter 166
I
Event Text 61
IMHDA, Data Provider 520
event-driven data collection 179, 204
Inform IT Authentication Category 555
3BUF001092-510 615
Index
Inform IT History Log List 429 configuration 32, 139

Inform IT History Profile Log 293 Log Template, New 213
Inform IT PDL Auto Archive 351 Logs in Set 143
Inform IT View Report Logs 173
Is an alarm 55 M
Is an event 54 Magnetic/Optical (MO) disk 313
ISO Image, Backup Type 330 MDI mode 588
memory resources 471
L Message Log
Lab Data Logs 176, 203, 218 Access Name 155
language extensions 94 Archive Group 156
Language File 585 Capacity 155
Last Archive Time, Archive Action 346 consolidation 148
Limiters, signal 50 Data access 147
Local Disk Utilization Warning 330 Description 155
log Log Set 157
activation 260, 426 Name 155
activation/deactivation 426 Start-up State 156
capacity 228, 297 State 157
data type 200 Microsoft Excel add-ins 286
direct 176, 191 mkisofs 611
directories 454 multicast 592
hierarchical 176, 193 multicast address 601
history 31, 175 to 176, 193 multicast TTL 602
lab data 203
Period 297 N
period 297 name counter, volume 327
property 31, 175 name format, volume 327
report 169 No Acknowledge option 56
trend 31, 175 to 176, 191 no data 288
log attributes NO_DATA, status 225
data collection 223 Normal Acknowledge option 56
Log Configuration aspect 176
Log Entry O
Time Stamp 248 Object Root 507
Value 249 object type, softpoint
log period, effective 237 adding a new object type 41
log set 139, 216 ODA Database Definition 504
assignment 259 off-line execution, calculations 102
attributes 142 Offset Minutes, Archive Action 347
616 3BUF001092-510
Index
OMF log set 291

communication settings 599 Property Log 31, 175
domain 591 Archive Group 217
for TCP/IP 599 Attributes 212
shared memory size 562, 607 Capacity 225
OMF Network Status 441 data types supported 200
on-line execution, calculations 102 Name 215
OPC HDA, Collection Type 218 Period 225
OPC Mapping Start-up State 217
direction 85 purge command, hsDBMaint 470
event 86
Log 86 Q
offline value 86 Quota, Volume 327
on line value 86
state 86 R
variable 85 Read-Only Volume 349
OPC, Data Provider 520 Redundant Calculations 123
Open source code Redundant Services 33
cygwin 611 Redundant Softpoints 39
mkisofs 611 reel report configuration tool 301
Overwrite Timeout, Archive Device 326 reel turn-up 301
Report Log 32, 169
P Access Name 172
PAS window 562 Archive Group 173
Password, change 578 Capacity 173
PDL Archive aspect 350 Description 172
PDL Archive Configuration Window 351 Name 173
PDL Auto Archive 351 Reset Object Status 457
Plant Explorer workplace 34 Resource Usage guidelines 475
Platform Object Dialog, Archive Group Entry 338 Restoring History Database 405
point-to-point communication 593 result, calculation 90, 107
process administration services 562 runtime history status 429
Process Object Configuration 42
Profile Historian Client 290 S
Profile Historian Server 289 sample blocking rate 227
profile logs 289 Sample Interval 225
activating 312 schedule
archiving 311 cyclic 100
configuration 291 time-based 101
data source 294 scheduling server service 37
3BUF001092-510 617
Index
SDI mode 588 softpoint object

Server Status 550, 587 instantiate 57
service group 36 softpoint object type
Service Provider 30, 33, 36, 520 configuration aspect 42
Set Name 143 SoftPoint Services 39
shadow copy, backup method 330 stagger collection 459
Show Log List 218 start state 217
signal type Start-up 562
adding a new signal 43 Storage Interval 226
socket configuration 602 Storage type 228, 247
softpoint ORACLE 247
adding a softpoint object type 41 TYPE1 247
adding signals 43 TYPE2 247
adjust properties 65 STORE AS IS calculation 179, 196, 229 to 230
adjusting alarm and event properties 61 Synchronizing History Database 412
Alarm Event Configuration aspect 50 synchronous data collection 176
Alarm Event Settings aspect 65
alarm text groups 65 T
authentication 49 Tablespace
bring on line 68 index 136
character map 47 Inform_HS_Runtime 136
configuration 40 TCP/IP
configuring object types 42 OMF parameters 599
configuring signal properties 45 protocol 599
deleting a signal 45 TCP/IP Multicast enabled 601
deleting an object type 45 time drift 225
deploy 68 time-based schedule 101
disable signal 64 TimeStamp 92
engineering unit 47 Timestamp 75, 86, 96, 437, 502
event text 62 tool bar 99
faceplates 72 Translation 586
limiters 50 trend log 31, 175 to 176, 191
log operator actions 49 troubleshooting logs 288
making a signal controllable 48
name rules 71 U
object dialog 71 Universal Time (UTC) 248
Process Object Configuration aspect 42 update deadband ratio 450
runtime 72 user access 569
Signal Configuration aspect 45 user password 578
signal range 46 user preferences 579
618 3BUF001092-510
Index
User Tag Management 440

USER_SUPPLIED, Collection Type 218
Users, Creating New 576
Users, Display Services 575
Utilization Warning, Archive Device 330
V
Version Info 589
View Report Logs 173
Volume Name Counter, Archive Device 327
Volume Name Format, Archive Device 327
Volume Quota, Archive Device 327
Volume, Read-Only 349
Volumes, Archive Device 327
3BUF001092-510 619
Index
620 3BUF001092-510
Contact us
3BUF001092-510
ABB AB Copyright © 2003-2010 by ABB.
Control Systems All Rights Reserved
Västerås, Sweden
Phone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Fax: +46 (0) 21 13 78 45
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.abb.com/controlsystems
ABB Inc.
Control Systems
Wickliffe, Ohio, USA
Phone: +1 440 585 8500
Fax: +1 440 585 8756
ABB Industry Pte Ltd

Control Systems
Singapore
Phone: +65 6776 5711
Fax: +65 6778 0222
ABB Automation GmbH

Control Systems
Mannheim, Germany
Phone: +49 1805 26 67 76
Fax: +49 1805 77 63 29
www.abb.de/controlsystems
Power and productivity

TM
for a better world

3BSE034679-510 C en System 800xa 5.1 Automated Installation

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

3BSE034679-510 C en System 800xa 5.1 Automated Installation

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3BSE034679-510 C en System 800xa 5.1 Automated Installation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

System 800xA Information Management

Power and productivity

System Version 5.1

Copyright © 2003-2010 by ABB.

Release: June 2010

About This Book

Section 1 - Configuration Overview

Section 2 - Verifying Services

Section 3 - Configuring Softpoints

Deleting a Softpoint Object Type ........................................................................ 45

Section 4 - Configuring Calculations

User Interface .......................................................................................................77

Offline Execution.............................................................................. 102

Section 5 - Configuring History Database

Section 6 - Configuring Log Sets

Section 7 - Alarm/Event Message Logging

Message Log Consolidation............................................................................... 148

Section 8 - Historizing Reports

Section 9 - Historical Process Data Collection

Seamless Retrieval .............................................................................................180

Create a Job .................................................................................... 205

Other Calculation Algorithms ...........................................................232

Status Light ........................................................................................................ 257

Section 10 - Profile Data Collection

Profile Log Attributes.........................................................................................293

Section 11 - Configuring the Archive Function

Media Full Indication......................................................................................... 318

Section 12 - Consolidating Historical Data

Section 13 - History Database Maintenance

Backup and Restore Utility................................................................................ 397

Showing/Hiding Columns .................................................................432

Add a Directory ................................................................................ 456

Section 14 - Open Data Access

Section 15 - Configuring Data Providers

Adding a Data Provider ..................................................................................... 529

Section 17 - System Administration

Oracle Users .......................................................................................................572

Appendix A - Extending OMF Domain to TCP/IP

Appendix B - General Log Property Limits

Appendix C - Open Source Code Information

Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons

Caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept

Information icon alerts the reader to pertinent facts and conditions.

– Consolidation of Production Data and Message logs.

configuring archiving refer to Section 11, Configuring the Archive

Information Management Service Providers

Open Plant Explorer

Checking Service Group/Service Provider Objects

Figure 1. Example, Service Group/Service Provider Objects

Creating Service Group/Service Provider Objects

Figure 2. Configuring a Calculation Service Provider

Figure 3. Basic and Information Management History Service Category

A Service Group/Service Provider set is automatically created in the Service

Information Manager Node

Location in Node Administration

Figure 4. Adding a Message Log in the Node Administration Structure

Softpoint Set-up Requirements

Some softpoint properties are configured on an individual basis for instantiated